Dr. D manipulates the three entities most needed from a disk utility: disk volumes, data files, and libraries. It also provides a number of miscellaneous functions.

Volumes: Dr.D saves, restores, or copies the entire or just specified portions of a disk. It can also create IPL records on the save tape so the tape may later be IPLed and restored in a standalone fashion or under VM.

The restored or copied portion does not have to be restored or copied to the same location, be the same size, or even reside on the same type or model of disk as the saved extent.

Overview Page 1

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Data Files: Dr.D saves, restores, or copies entire logical disk files. These files may be VSAM, direct access (DA), sequential or indexed sequential.

They may be comprised of multiple full- or split-cylinder extents residing on one or more disk volumes, and they may optionally contain user labels. For maximum flexibility, the saved or copied file does not need to be restored to the same disk location; it need not be the same size; it need not contain the same number of extents; and it need not reside on the same type of disk as the saved file. Moreover, a DA file may be restored or copied as a SD and vice-versa. VSAM or

ISAM files are automatically reorganized upon being restored or copied.

Libraries: Dr.D saves, restores, or copies all VSE libraries. The restored or copied library does not have to 1) be restored or copied to the same location, 2) be the same size, or 3) even reside on the same type or model of disk as the saved extent. A system library may be restored or copied as a private library and vice-versa. In addition, a library may be restored in a manner to add its contents to an already existing library, again without regard to it being a system or private library. All libraries are automatically condensed upon being restored or copied.

Miscellaneous: Dr.D offers several features for handling a variety of tasks, including:

• Relocate and/or resize the VTOC

• Create a VM minidisk

• Clear Disk – entire volume or just a portion

• Create a VTOC (Format-1) label entry

• Altering the creation, expiration, and/or last access date of a

VTOC (Format-1) label entry

• Delete a VTOC (Format-1) label entry

• Create VTOC listing with optional customization

• Punch DLBL and EXTENT statements based on existing

VTOC (Format-1) label entries

• Create LISTCAT listing with optional customization

• Punch IDCAMS DELETE and DEFINE control statements based on existing VSAM catalog entries

• Test tapes to identify error-prone tape volumes

• Tape copy feature, either logical or physical

Examples

A wide range of examples are provided to cover most processing situations.

These examples and their JCL statements are for illustrative purposes only.

Page 2 Introduction

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

When referring to these examples, modify them based on your specific requirements and environment.

Compatibility

Dr. D is compatible with any IBM system MPxxxx, ES90xx, 30xx, 43xx, or plug compatible CPU operating under the VSE-ESA, VSE-SP, VSE, or MVT-VSE operating systems, and any disk or tape device supported by those operating systems.

Overview Page 3

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Installation and Configuration

Dr. D is distributed on a magnetic tape or cartridge and is installed using the

VSE Maintain System History Program (MSHP) for VSE/ESA systems. It is installed using MAINT and LNKEDT for MVT systems. The files on the tape volume are as follows:

• File 1: Installation program and dialog

• File 2: Null file (tapemark)

• File 3: Header File

• File 4: History File

• File 5: Dr. D Production Sublibrary

• File 6: Null file (tapemark)

• File 7: EOB (end of BACKUP information)

• File 8: Null file (tapemark)

• File 9: Null file (tapemark)

• File 10: Pre-VSE/SP input to LNKEDT

• File 11: Pre-VSE/SP input to MAINT

Page 4 Installation and Configuration

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Installing Under VSE Releases

The Dr. D Installation dialog asks you for site-specific information, installation options and desired optional components. Prior completion of the following entries can make the installation process much easier.

Dr. D Installation Library: All users must provide the library and sublibrary to contain Dr. D. If the specified sublibrary does not exist, it is defined automatically during the installation process.

• Dr. D resides in: lib_________________ sublib_____________________

Dr. D Message Help: VSE/ESA 2 users can install Dr. D message explanations directly into the VSE/ESA Message Explanation File. If label information for

IESMSGS and its corresponding VSAM catalog is stored in standard labels, that label information can be used. Otherwise, specify the following:

• IESMSGS file-ID ___________________________ (that is,

VSE.MESSAGES.ONLINE)

• VSAM Catalog filename _________________ (that is, IJSYSCT)

Users prior to VSE/ESA 2 can install Dr. D message explanations directly into the FAQS/ASO message file. Label information for FAQSMSG must be stored in standard labels. Specify the following:

• FAQS/ASO resides in: lib __________________ sublib _________________

CICS CSD Information: When installing Dr. D CICS programs for use under

CICS/TS, you must use the CICS SYSTEM DEFINITION (CSD) file. If you are installing for use under CICS/VSE but you are not using a CICS SYSTEM

DEFINITION (CSD) file, you must update your PPT and PCT tables manually.

You will find copybook DRD$PPT.A which can be included in your existing PPT source and copybook DRD$PCT.A which can be included in your existing PCT source.

You may request that the Dr. D CICS programs are added to your CSD file automatically if label information for the CSD file is available. If label information for DFHCSD and its corresponding VSAM catalog is stored in standard labels, that label information can be used. Otherwise, specify the following:

• CSD file-ID _______________________________________(that is,

VSESP.CSD.FILE)

• VSAM Catalog filename ________________ (that is, VSESPUC)

MSHP History File: Dr. D only supports MSHP installation. We recommend the use of a private history file. A new private history file can be defined and formatted during the installation process.

Installing Under VSE Releases Page 5

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

• File-ID of the private history file

___________________________________________

• Serial number of the disk volume on which it resides:

VOLSER _________________

• Starting track/block and file length: start _______________length

______________

Installation Output: All users must provide the userid where to route the

SYSLST output.

• The userid where to route SYSLST output to: userid

_______________________

(If your installation does not utilize the DEST parameter on the

VSE/POWER LST JECL statement, respond with ‘NONE’.)

Procedure

Follow these steps to perform a VSE/ESA Dr. D installation.

Step Action

1 As with any new software installation, back up your target libraries first.

2 Mount the Dr. D distribution tape. From the VSE console, type:

PSTART RDR,cuu where cuu is the address of the tape drive on which the distribution tape has been mounted.

A job named DRDINST is loaded into the VSE/POWER reader queue with

CLASS=0. If DRDINST does not execute automatically, alter the VSE/POWER job class to allow DRDINST to execute in a partition where the Linkage Editor can be run.

If you do not have VSE/POWER on your system, contact Dr. D Technical

Support for special installation instructions.

3 Follow the instructions on the operator console. Use your prepared entries to assist you.

4 After the installation job is complete, dismount the distribution tape and save it.

Page 6 Installation and Configuration

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Installing Under MVT Systems

Procedure

Follow these steps to perform an MVT Dr. D installation.

Step Action

1 As with any new software installation, back up your target libraries first.

2 Execute similar JCL to deblock the first SYSIN file into the internal reader as Job

DRD66A. Lower case values and ellipses require substitution with user values:

// JOB DITTO

// RPT SYSLST,...

// RPT SYSPCH,DEST=R

// UPSI 1

// ASSGN SYS004,cuu

// MTC REW,SYS004

// MTC FSF,SYS004,9

// EXEC MVTDITTO,R=512K

$$DITTO TC INPUT=SYS004

$$DITTO EOJ

// MTC REW,SYS004

The following shows typical SYSLOG activity from Job DRD66A. It is assumed that DLBLs and EXTENTs for both IJSYS01 and IJSYSLN are stored in the standard label area and appropriate permanent assignments for each of these files (SYS001 and SYSLNK) already exist. Lower case values and ellipses require substitution with user values:

R2 --JOB-- nnnn –DRD66A -- mm/dd/yyyy hh.mm.ss

R2 * ENTER // RPT SYSLST,... IF APPROPRIATE

R2 // PAUSE

R2* // RPT SYSLST,...

R2* (eob)

R2 * ENTER // GOTO $EOJ TO BYPASS PHASE LNKEDT'S ELSE EOB)

R2 // PAUSE

R2* (eob)

R2 * ENTER DLBL, EXTENT AND LIBDEF CL,TO=... FOR SYSCLB

R2 // PAUSE

R2* // DLBL myclb,'...'

R2* // EXTENT ,volser

R2* // LIBDEF CL,TO=myclb

R2* (eob)

. (LNKEDT's occur here)

R2 mm/dd/yyyy hh.mm.ss EOJ nnnn,DRD66A ,DURATION hh.mm.ss

MAXRC=0000

3 Execute similar JCL to deblock the second SYSIN file into the internal reader as

Installing Under MVT Systems Page 7

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Step Action

Job DRD66B. Lower case values and ellipses require substitution with user values:

// JOB DITTO

// RPT SYSLST,...

// RPT SYSPCH,DEST=R

// UPSI 1

// ASSGN SYS004,cuu

// MTC REW,SYS004

// MTC FSF,SYS004,10

// EXEC MVTDITTO,R=512K

$$DITTO TC INPUT=SYS004

$$DITTO EOJ

// MTC REW,SYS004

The following shows typical SYSLOG activity from Job DRD66B. Lower case values and ellipses require substitution with user values:

R2 --JOB-- nnnn –DRD66B -- mm/dd/yyyy hh.mm.ss

R2 * ENTER // RPT SYSLST,... IF APPROPRIATE

R2 // PAUSE

R2* // RPT SYSLST,...

R2* (eob)

R2 * ENTER // GOTO SKIPOBJ TO BYPASS CATALR'S ELSE (EOB)

R2 // PAUSE

R2* (eob)

R2 * ENTER DLBL, EXTENT AND LIBDEF RL,TO=... FOR SYSRLB

R2 // PAUSE

R2* // DLBL myrlb,'...'

R2* // EXTENT ,volser

R2* // LIBDEF RL,TO=myrlb

R2* (eob)

. (CATALR's occur here)

R2 * ENTER // GOTO SKIPSRC TO BYPASS CATALS'S ELSE (EOB)

R2 // PAUSE

R2* (eob)

R2 * ENTER DLBL, EXTENT AND LIBDEF SL,TO=... FOR SYSSLB

R2 // PAUSE

R2* // DLBL myslb,'...'

R2* // EXTENT ,volser

R2* // LIBDEF SL,TO=myslb

R2* (eob)

. (CATALS's occur here)

R2 mm/dd/yyyy hh.mm.ss EOJ nnnn,DRD66B ,DURATION hh.mm.ss

MAXRC=0000

Adding Dr. D On-Line to CICS

CICS updates are made automatically when installing on a VSE system. When installing on an MVT system or if the CICS system updates must be made again, use the following procedures.

Page 8 Installation and Configuration

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

When installing Dr. D CICS programs for use under CICS/TS, you must use the

CICS SYSTEM DEFINITION (CSD) file. If you are installing for use under

CICS/VSE but you are not using a CICS SYSTEM DEFINITION (CSD) file, you

must update your PPT and PCT tables manually. You will find copybook

DRD$PPT.A which can be included in your existing PPT source and copybook

DRD$PCT.A which can be included in your existing PCT source.

If you are using a CSD file, you will find procedure P.DRDCSD that can be modified to prepare CICS for Dr. D On-Line.

For both VSE and MVT systems, the CICS interface requires the SPOOL=YES option in the CICS initialization (SIT).

Adding Dr. D On-Line to the VSE Interactive Interface

The Dr. D On-Line interface supports the VSE Interactive Interface (ICCF). To add Dr. D On-Line, you must first add Dr. D components to the Application

Profile and then add Dr. D to the Selection Panel. The Selection Panel is the component that displays when a user signs on to the IUI. If different users have different Selection Panels, you must add Dr. D On-Line to each panel.

An overview follows of the steps for modifying the IUI support to accommodate

Dr. D On-Line. To implement these steps, you must be familiar with ICCF and

IUI terminology.

For detailed information, refer to the appropriate VSE Administration Manual.

For z/VSE 3.1, the order number is SC33-8224-00. For VSE/ESA 2.7, the number is SC33-6705-05.

Adding Dr. D On-Line to the VSE Interactive Interface Page 9

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Defining the Application Profile.

Perform the following steps to define the

Application Profile for Dr. D. You must complete this procedure before adding the Dr. D environment to any Selection Panels.

Procedure

Step Action

1 Sign on to the Interactive Interface with a User ID that has Administrator privileges.

2 Select the Resource Definition dialog.

3 Select the User Interface Tailoring dialog.

4 Select Maintain Application Profiles dialog.

5 Without typing anything into the Application field, press Enter to display a list of application profiles.

6 Type 1 next to any Application Profile name and press Enter.

7 Type the following and press Enter to define the Dr. D Application Profile:

Name=DRDCICS

Code=1

Activate=DRD

Case=1

Data=IESDRD$

Show=2

Adding the Selection Panel.

To add Dr. D On-Line to the Selection Panel, perform the following steps for each panel. Remember that if users use different Selection panels, you must perform these steps for each Selection Panel.

Procedure

Step Action

1 Sign on to the ICCF with a user ID that has Administrator privileges.

2 Select the Resource Definition dialog.

3 Select the User Interface Tailoring dialog.

4 Select Maintain Selection Panels dialog.

5 Without typing anything into the Application field, press Enter to display a list of Selection Panel names. Locate the name of a Selection Panel to which to add

Dr. D On-Line

Page 10 Installation and Configuration

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Step Action

6 If the Panel Name does not begin with “IES,” type 2 for change and press Enter.

The panel definition displays.

Now go to Step 8.

7 If the Panel Name begins with “IES,” it is a system panel that you cannot change. Instead, type 1 for Add and press Enter to display a new panel definition. The new panel has the same entries that were on the IES panel.

Type DRDCICS into the Selection Panel Name.

Warning:

Do not press Enter.

8 Locate the first SEQ entry with a blank NAME entry. Type the following information and press Enter.

Name=DRDCICS

Type=1

Text=’Dr. D/On-Line Interface’

9 If you added a new Selection Panel in Step 7, for each User ID that uses the

Dr. D environment, use the IUI Maintain User Profiles dialog to change the

Initial Name field to DRDCICS.

Adding Dr. D On-Line to the VSE Interactive Interface Page 11

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DRZAP Configuration Utility

Configure System Options

To customize Dr. D system options, use the DRZAP phase modifier utility. These options are stored in the phase DRD and in the past were customized by DRZAP or other utilities such as the IBM MSHP program. DRZAP can now do this customization in a more interactive, user friendly manner, either under CICS or in batch mode. If a corresponding Dr. D operand exists for any option, the value entered is the same as the default value for that operand. As each existing option displays, enter the desired change or nothing to proceed to the next option; or enter an asterisk (*) to backup to the preceding option. At any time you may type

‘END’ to stop the session and save the changes made. Or type QUIT to stop the session without saving the changes.

You should make a copy of phase DRD in a test sublibrary before changing any options, in case any errors are made that could cause problems with jobs that might execute while the options are being changed.

Once DRZAP begins execution, enter the library, sublibrary, and ‘DRD’ in response to the ‘ENTER FUNCTION…’ message (for example,

USRLIB.DRDSLIB.DRD) followed by ‘OPT’ in response to the ‘ENTER

LOCATION OR COMMAND’ message. DRZAP responds as follows:

..........DRZAP DISPLAY............... ....ALLOWABLE ENTRY....

NO LIST BOTH OLD PRINT OPTION: NO , ENTER NEW

Changes the default value for PRINT operand.

OLD UPSI SETTINGS: 00000000 ,ENTER NEW

Changes the default value for UPSI operand.

00000000-11111111

OLD UPSI MASK: 11111111 ,ENTER NEW 00000000-11111111

Determines which UPSI switches will be used from the JCL // UPSI statement. For example, if 11111111 is set, all JCL UPSI switches are honored, but if 00000000 is set, no JCL UPSI switches are honored.

OLD TAPE BLOCKSIZE: 065496 ,ENTER NEW

Changes the default value for BLOCKSIZE operand.

016000-065496

OLD REWIND OPTION: NOREWIND ,ENTER NEW REWIND NOREWIND RUN

Changes the default for rewind option of the TAPE operand.

OLD TAPEIN SYS NUMBER: SYS008 ,ENTER NEW SYS000-SYSnnn

Changes the default value for TI operand. (SYSnnn is the user system limit.)

OLD TAPEIN DDNAME: TAPEIN ,ENTER NEW 1-7 CHARACTER STRING

Changes the default for TDDNAME operand’s input filename specification.

Page 12 Installation and Configuration

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

..........DRZAP DISPLAY............... ....ALLOWABLE ENTRY....

OLD TAPEOUT SYS NUMBER: SYS007 ,ENTER NEW SYS000-SYSnnn

Changes the default value for TO operand. (SYSnnn is the user system limit.)

OLD TAPEOUT DDNAME: TAPEOUT ,ENTER NEW 1-7 CHARACTER STRING

Changes the default for TDDNAME operand’s primary output filename specification.

OLD TAPETWO SYS NUMBER: SYS006 ,ENTER NEW SYS000-SYSnnn

Changes the default value for TT operand. (SYSnnn is the user system limit.)

OLD TAPETWO DDNAME: TAPETWO ,ENTER NEW 1-7 CHARACTER STRING

Changes the default for TDDNAME operand’s secondary output filename specification.

OLD TAPE003 SYS NUMBER: SYS005 ,ENTER NEW SYS000-SYSnnn

Changes the default value for T3 operand. (SYSnnn is the user system limit.)

OLD TAPE003 DDNAME: TAPE003 ,ENTER NEW 1-7 CHARACTER STRING

Changes the default for TDDNAME operand’s third output filename specification.

YES NO OLD FAST OPTION: YES ,ENTER NEW

Changes the default value for FAST operand.

OLD COMPRESS OPTION: NO ,ENTER NEW

Changes the default value for CP operand.

YES NO

OLD VSAM FILE DELETE FUNCTION: RESET ,ENTER

NEW

RESET DELETE CONSOLIDATE

Changes the default value for FD operand.

OLD AUTO ASSIGNMENT OPTION: YES ,ENTER NEW NO YES

This option should be 'NO' if a disk manager system is used.

OLD VARIABLE OPTION: NO ,ENTER NEW

Changes the default value for VARIABLE operand.

NO YES

OLD SYS001 SYS NUMBER: SYS001 ,ENTER NEW SYS000-SYSnnn

Changes the default value for SSYSNO operand. (SYSnnn is the user system limit.)

OLD SYS002 SYS NUMBER: SYS002 ,ENTER NEW SYS000-SYSnnn

Changes the default value for RSYSNO operand. (SYSnnn is the user system limit.)

OLD VUSE OPTION: CANCEL ,ENTER NEW CANCEL OPERATOR IGNORE

SAVE NULL

Changes the default value for VUSE operand.

DRZAP Configuration Utility Page 13

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

..........DRZAP DISPLAY............... ....ALLOWABLE ENTRY....

OLD CONTROL TABLE SIZE: 004088 ,ENTER NEW 4088-65496

Changes the size of the table used to store restore control statements when UPSI xxxxxx1 is set. Allows more statements to be entered. To determine the maximum number of statements that may be held in the Control Table, use the sum of the truncated statement(s) length plus one. The execute size must increased by the difference between the old table size and the new table size.

OLD REPORT SYS NUMBER: SYSLST ,ENTER NEW SYS000-SYSnnn or SYSLST

Changes the default SYSnnn value for print output. (SYSnnn is the user system limit.)

OLD DOCTOR 126 PRINT OPTION: YES ,ENTER NEW YES NO

Determines whether the DOCTOR126 message prints.

OLD DOCTOR 149 PRINT OPTION: YES ,ENTER NEW YES NO

Determines whether the DOCTOR149 message prints.

OLD DRD POOL OPTION: NO ,ENTER NEW YES NO

Determines whether the Dr. D Disk Pool feature is to be invoked for non-VSAM file functions.

OLD ASSOCIATIONS OPTION: NO ,ENTER NEW YES NO

Changes the default value for ASSOCIATIONS operand.

000-999 OLD GETVIS RESERVE SIZE (K): 00000 , ENTER

NEW

Changes the default value for GR operand.

OLD RETURN CODE OPTION: ,ENTER NEW

Changes the default value for RP operand.

YES NO

OLD CTL LST SYS NUMBER: NONE ,ENTER NEW SYS000-SYSnnn

Changes the default value for LST operand. (SYSnnn is the user system limit.)

At this point you may restart the process by typing ‘R’; or press Enter to end the session.

Page 14 Installation and Configuration

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Displaying System Options

To display Dr. D system options, use the SUM function of the DRZAP phase.

You can execute DRZAP from a PAUSE in a partition or via batch.

When executing DRZAP from a PAUSE, use the operator console for all input.

Once DRZAP begins execution, enter the library, sublibrary, and ‘DRD’ in response to the ‘ENTER FUNCTION…’ message (for example,

USRLIB.DRDSLIB.DRD) followed by ‘SUM’ in response to the ‘ENTER

LOCATION OR COMMAND’ message. DRZAP then lists all the system options and their current settings followed by an indication of which, if any, PTFs have been applied to Dr. D both on SYSLOG and SYSLST.

Example: Display System Options via Batch

This job stream displays the Dr. D system options on SYSLST without operator intervention.

// UPSI 11111111

// EXEC DRDZAP,SIZE=200K

USRLIB.DRDSLIB.DRD

SUM

DRZAP Configuration Utility Page 15

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D Disk Pooling Feature

To create a set of one or more disk volumes as a disk pool, use the Dr. D Disk

Pooling feature. When you perform certain non-VSAM functions on a disk pool

(for example: Logical Volume SAVE and RESTORE functions), the function executes on each volume within the disk pool as if all the volumes in the Disk

Pool had been specified via an appropriate SVOLID or RVOLID operand.

A single disk pool can contain a maximum of 600 disk volumes. You can define as many disk pools as you like.

The Dr. D commands and functions that can use Disk Pools are as follows:

• SAVE Logical (Volume)

• RESTORE Logical (Volume)

• FUNCTION=DELETE (non-VSAM)

• FUNCTION=DFIX

• FUNCTION=LVTOC

• FUNCTION=PUNCH

DRDPOOL Macro

You create pool-IDs and their associated disk volsers by coding DRDPOOL macro statements, assembling them, and cataloging the resulting phase into the

Dr. D sublibrary. The phase name is DRDPOOL.

During DRD execution, DRDPOOL is usually CDLOADed into the partition. If you have a large number of volsers in all the pools combined, CDLOADing can place a strain on available partition GETVIS. If this happens, you can load

DRDPOOL phase into the SVA at IPL.

The DRDPOOL macro is in the Dr. D sublibrary as DRDPOOL.A. Its format is:

Pool_ID DRDPOOL volser1[,volser2,volser3,…volsern]

Where:

Pool_ID

volsern is the name used to reference a collection of one or more disk volumes by the SVOLID or RVOLID operands in the appropriate control statements. The pool-ID must be

6 characters and cannot be the same as a real volid. If the name is the same as a real volid, only the volume is processed, not the disk pool. refers to the real disk volsers to be associated with the pool-ID. Each volser must be 6 characters with a comma

Page 16 Installation and Configuration

USER GUIDE

Dr. D separating each volser. You can supply up to 600 volumes.

After you create DRDPOOL phase, you must set the system configuration option

Dr. D POOL OPTION to YES. Refer to Configure System Options of this manual.

Example: Creating Dr. D Disk Pools

This example demonstrates how to create 2 disk pools: POOL01 and POOL02.

POOL01 consists of 2 disks and POOL02 consists of 5 disks. As in any Assembler

Language macro, continuation statements require a comma after the last operand on the line; column 72 must be non-blank and the next statement of the continuation must begin in column 16.

POOL01 DRDPOOL DISK01,DISK02

POOL02 DRDPOOL DISK01,DISK02,DISK03, X

DISK04,DISK05

END

Interfacing with a Disk Manager’s Disk Pools

Unless a situation calls for known-only-to-Dr. D disk pools, Dr. D can interface directly with a BIM-EPIC or CA-EPIC disk pool without having to define a Dr. D disk pool or setting the Dr. D POOL Option to "Yes." When using both Dr. D disk pools and EPIC disk pools, the system evaluates Dr. D disk pools first.

To use disk pools with any other disk management product, you must define

Dr. D disk pools.

Dr. D Disk Pooling Feature Page 17

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Using Dr. D

Operating Environment

Dr. D is compatible with any IBM plug-compatible CPU operating under the

VSE/ESA or MVT-VSE operating systems, and any disk or tape device supported by those operating systems. Dr. D interfaces with most disk and tape management systems.

You can execute Dr. D in any partition; control statements can be entered via

SYSIPT or SYSLOG.

Page 18 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Job Control Language (JCL) Requirements

Dr. D Job Stream Examples

Refer to member DRDEXAMP.Z in the Dr. D installation sublibrary for a number of example job streams. These members should be loaded into your mainframe editor for reference and use. On MVT systems, member Z.DRDEXAMP is found in the installation source library.

Save Function

The following outlines the JCL requirements, as established by the installed default options, when requesting a Dr. D SAVE function:

When saving to a disk file:

// DLBL TAPEOUT

// EXTENT SYSnnn,…

When saving to a single tape file:

// ASSGN SYS007,cuu

// TLBL TAPEOUT

When saving to two tape files:

// ASSGN SYS007,cuu

// TLBL TAPEOUT

// ASSGN SYS006,cuu

// TLBL TAPETWO

When saving to three tape files:

// ASSGN SYS007,cuu

// TLBL TAPEOUT

// ASSGN SYS006,cuu

// TLBL TAPETWO

// ASSGN SYS005,cuu

// TLBL TAPE003

NOTE : When saving to a disk file, the filename must be TAPEOUT and the

SYSnnn used is extracted from the EXTENT statement. When saving to a tape, the filename may be changed by use of the TDDNAME operand. The tape

SYSnnn used may also be changed by use of the TO, TT and T3 operands.

Job Control Language (JCL) Requirements Page 19

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Restore Function

The following outlines the restore file JCL (requirements, as established by the installed default options, when requesting a Dr. D restore function.

When restoring from a disk file:

// DLBL TAPEIN

// EXTENT SYSnnn,…

When restoring from a tape file:

// ASSGN SYS008,cuu

// TLBL TAPEIN

NOTE: When restoring from a disk file, the filename must be TAPEIN and the

SYSnnn used is extracted from the EXTENT statement. When restoring from a tape, the filename may be changed by use of the TDDNAME operand. The tape

SYSnnn used may also be changed by use of the TI operand.

Invoking Dr. D

The following shows the JCL requirements to invoke Dr. D.

// EXEC DRD, SIZE=nnnK

Dr. D Control Statements

Specify the SIZE=nnnK on the Job Control EXEC statement, where:

nnnK blocksize up to 200K when using the maximum 65,496 blocksize.

These specifications ensure both adequate partition size for tables, buffers, etc., while leaving enough memory for functions requiring GETVIS space (VSAM,

FBA access, and VSE librarian).

WARNING: Never execute Dr. D with SIZE=AUTO.

You request all Dr. D processing functions using control statements. Control statements are normally supplied via SYSIPT; however, you can submit the first, or only, control statement using the PARM= operand on the EXEC statement.

Terminating Control Statements

An additional statement is required to terminate Dr. D control statements. Place either a /@ or /* terminator statement after the last control statement submitted, beginning in column 1. Because additional terminator statements are used along with some other Dr. D operands (that is, selector statements), use the /* for terminating Dr. D control statements. By using the /* as the final DRD control statement terminator and the /@ for the terminator for other operand statements, your job streams are easier to read.

Page 20 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Control Statement Format

Dr. D performs one operation per logical request. A logical request is comprised of a SAVE, RESTORE, COPY or FUNCTION command and all its necessary operands (along with selector, rename, area, member, and userexit statements, if appropriate). Each logical request may span several Dr. D control statements as long as the command SAVE, RESTORE, COPY, or FUNCTION is coded on the first control statement of a logical request. All additional operands necessary to fully qualify the request follow and may be specified in any order (unless otherwise documented). Any number of logical requests may be submitted to a single execution of Dr. D. If multiple save functions are submitted to a single execution of Dr. D, only one Logical File Save is physically written, regardless of the number of volumes necessary to contain the save file.

Dr. D reads 80-position control statements from either SYSIPT or SYSLOG. If

Dr. D is invoked from SYSRDR, control statements are initially read from

SYSIPT. If Dr. D is invoked from SYSLOG, control statements are initially read from SYSLOG. To switch reading from SYSIPT to SYSLOG (or vice-versa), insert a control statement with '$$$$$$' in the first six positions of the control statement.

A '/*' from either SYSIPT or SYSLOG terminates execution.

All control statements (other than the ‘$$$$$$’ control statement) take on the following format:

Col--> 1........10........20........30........40........50........60......

Data-> OPERAND1=value1,OPERAND2=value2,OPERAND3=value3,...,OPERANDX=valuen

Each operand is separated from its value by an equal sign (=). A comma must precede the second and subsequent operand on each control statement. A blank must follow the last operand value.

Control Statement Continuation

To continue control statements, specify an asterisk (*) as the last operand (that is, immediately after the last comma) on a control statement. You may repeat this continuation technique as many times as necessary. For example, the following control statements comprise a single logical request:

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=LOGICAL,SCAT=UCAT1,ASSOCIATIONS=YES,*

EXPIRED=NO,*

TSTAMP=>-30,*

VNULL=NO

Abbreviations

Most Dr. D operands and their values may be abbreviated to the first two positions. For example, the following two statements are equivalent:

Control Statement Format Page 21

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

SAVE=CURRENT,SSYSNO=SYS005,EXPIRED=YES,OPERATOR=HELLO and

SA=CU,SS=SYS005,EX=YES,OP=HELLO

Logical selection/rejection/rename operands are an exception since most of these selector operands cannot be abbreviated.

Global Operands

Many Dr. D operands shown in this manual are global in that the specified value remains in effect for the duration of the Dr. D execution or until you specify a different value for the operand. If an operand table entry indicates the operand is global (that is, YES appears next to the operand in the Global? column), that operand can also be specified on a SAVE|RESTORE|COPY=NOPERATION control statement. Otherwise, the operand is specified directly on the control statement being described.

Page 22 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT Operand

The PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT operand is common to many Dr. D commands.

This operand allows files to be selected or rejected using various types of criteria, including full and generic file-IDs and file characteristics. When applied to

VSAM files, the selection process is applied to the file associations as well as to each cluster. When restoring, PARTIAL=SELECT also allows files to be renamed using any of several techniques. If this operand is specified on a Dr. D request that is continued across multiple control statements, it must be on the last of the continued control statements.

One or more selector and/or rename statements must follow to identify which files are to be selected (PARTIAL=SELECT) or rejected (PARTIAL=REJECT). On selector statements involving the file-ID, if the characters ‘@REVERSE@’ are placed following at least one blank after the file-ID, the process for that statement only is reversed.

For example, if PARTIAL=SELECT is in effect, a selector statement with

‘@REVERSE@’ causes a match on that selector statement to reject. Similarly, if

PARTIAL=REJECT is in effect, a selector statement with ‘@REVERSE@’ causes a match on that selector statement to be selected.

NOTE : Once a file has been qualified by a selector statement, the appropriate action is taken and no further evaluation for that file is made.

Terminating Selector and Rename Statements

An additional statement is required to terminate selector and rename statements.

As with terminating control statements (see page 20), either a /@ or /* statement may be used. For clarity in reading the jobstreams you create, use the /@ as the terminating statement for selector and rename statements and use the /* as the terminating statement for Dr. D control statements. If the selector or rename statements are at the end of a control statement, you must specify two terminators, one for the selector and one for the control statement.

Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process Page 23

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Selector Statements for SAVE and FUNCTION Commands

Selector Function

0-43 character file-ID ending with ‘*’

Select/reject occurs when the fully qualified file-ID up to but not including the ‘*’ matches. Remaining positions beginning with the ‘*’ are always considered a match.

Names beginning with % or %% are expanded in accordance with VSAM partition-/CPU-dependent rules.

Names beginning with == or === are expanded in accordance with BIM-EPIC partition-/CPUdependent rules when BIM-EPIC is active.

If only a single ‘*’ is specified, all file-IDs match.

Any position containing a ‘/’ is always considered a match.

1-44 character file-ID Select/reject occurs when the fully qualified file-ID matches.

Names beginning with % or %% are expanded in accordance with VSAM partition-/CPU-dependent rules) matches.

=S=searchstring

CCCHH-CCCHH

ALLOCS=nn

Names beginning with == or === are expanded in accordance with BIM-EPIC partition-/CPUdependent rules when BIM-EPIC is active.

Any position containing a ‘/’ is always considered a match.

This selector applies to all commands that support the

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT operand.

Select/reject occurs if searchstring is found in any file-

ID position.

This selector applies to all commands that support the

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT operand.

Use only with PARTIAL=REJECT. Valid with CKD and ECKD devices only, it specifies start and end track addresses for selection. When used, it rejects any file outside the start and end address range. Specify the track addresses in cylinder (CCC) and 2-digit head

(HH) format.

This selector only applies to the SAVE=CURRENT command.

Use only with VSAM and PARTIAL=REJECT. The file

Page 24 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Selector Function is selected (not rejected) only if it has a number of allocations equal to or greater than nn. ALLOCS=0 causes files having no allocations to be selected. This operand cannot be abbreviated. If more than one occurrence of this selector is submitted, only the last applies.

This selector only applies to the following commands:

• SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM)

• FUNCTION=LCAT

• FUNCTION=DELETE

• FUNCTION=VERIFY

CASPLIT=nn Use only with VSAM and PARTIAL=REJECT. The file is selected (not rejected) only if it has a number of control area splits equal to or greater than nn. This operand cannot be abbreviated. If more than one occurrence of this selector is submitted, only the last applies.

This selector only applies to the following commands:

• SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM)

• FUNCTION=LCAT

• FUNCTION=DELETE

• FUNCTION=VERIFY

CISIZE<nn

CISIZE=nn

CISIZE>nn

CISPLIT=nn

Use only with VSAM and PARTIAL=REJECT. The file is selected (not rejected) only if its data control interval size is less than (<), equal to (=), or greater than (>) nn. This operand cannot be abbreviated. If more than one occurrence of this selector is submitted, only the last applies.

This selector only applies to the following commands:

• SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM)

• FUNCTION=LCAT

• FUNCTION=DELETE

• FUNCTION=VERIFY

Use only with VSAM and PARTIAL=REJECT. The file is selected (not rejected) only if it has a number of control interval splits equal to or greater than nn. This operand cannot be abbreviated. If more than one occurrence of this selector is submitted, only the last applies.

Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process Page 25

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Page 26

Selector Function

This selector only applies to the following commands:

• SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM)

• FUNCTION=LCAT

• FUNCTION=DELETE

• FUNCTION=VERIFY

DD=filename Select/reject occurs if the file-ID matches the file-ID found in the filename label.

This selector applies to all commands that support the

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT operand.

FILESIZE<nn

FILESIZE=nn

FILESIZE>nn

Use only with non-VSAM and PARTIAL=REJECT.

File is selected (not rejected) only if the total number of CKD tracks/FBA blocks in all extents from the

VTOCs of all the disks being accessed is less than (<), equal to (=), or greater than (>) nn.

This selector only applies to the SAVE=LOGICAL

(Volume) command.

FILETYPE=E|K|R|S Use only with VSAM and PARTIAL=REJECT. File is selected (not rejected) only if the file is entrysequenced (E), key-sequenced (K), relative record (R), or SAM-managed (S). This operand cannot be abbreviated. If more than one occurrence of this selector is submitted, only the last applies.

This selector only applies to the following commands:

• SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM)

• FUNCTION=LCAT

• FUNCTION=DELETE

• FUNCTION=VERIFY

FREESPACE>nn Use only with VSAM and PARTIAL=REJECT. The file is selected (not rejected) only if its freespace is equal to or greater than nn. This operand cannot be abbreviated. If more than one occurrence of this selector is submitted, only the last applies. Freespace is defined as the percentage of unused allocated relative byte addresses.

This selector only applies to the following commands:

• SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM)

• FUNCTION=LCAT

• FUNCTION=DELETE

Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Selector Function

• FUNCTION=VERIFY

Dr. D

Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process Page 27

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Selector Statements for RESTORE Commands

Selector Function

0-43 character file-ID ending with ‘*’

Select/reject occurs when the fully qualified file-ID up to but not including the ‘*’ matches. Remaining positions beginning with the ‘*’ are always considered a match.

Names beginning with % or %% are expanded in accordance with VSAM partition-/CPU-dependent rules.

Names beginning with == or === are expanded in accordance with BIM-EPIC partition/CPU-dependent rules when BIM-EPIC is active.

If only a single ‘*’ is specified, all file-IDs match.

Any position containing a ‘/’ is always considered a match.

This selector applies to all commands that support the

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT operand.

1-44 character file-ID Select/reject occurs when the fully qualified file-ID matches.

Names beginning with % or %% are expanded in accordance with VSAM partition-/CPU-dependent rules.

=S=searchstring

Names beginning with == or === are expanded in accordance with BIM-EPIC partition-/CPUdependent rules when BIM-EPIC is active.

Any position containing a ‘/’ is always considered a match.

This selector applies to all commands that support the

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT operand.

Select/reject occurs if searchstring is found in any fileid position.

This selector applies to all commands that support the

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT operand.

DD=filename Select/reject occurs if the file-ID matches the file-ID found in the filename label.

This selector applies to all commands that support the

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT operand.

Page 28 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Rename Statements for RESTORE Commands

Rename statements can also be supplied to alter the file-ID(s) of the files being restored. When utilized, a rename statement must follow the selector statement to which it applies. If necessary, more than one rename statement can follow a selector statement and they are processed in the order submitted. When renaming a VSAM file during a RESTORE=LOGICAL command, the operand

NAME=GEN is forced.

Rename Function

0-43 character file-ID ending with ‘*’ followed by one or more spaces followed by the 8-character literal ‘@RENAME@’

Immediately follows “selector” statement to which it applies and causes the file-ID characters to be replaced by the specified characters up to but not including the ‘*’. Remaining positions beginning with the ‘*’ are always left unchanged. Any position containing a ‘/’ are not changed.

Names beginning with % or %% are expanded in accordance with VSAM partition-/CPU-dependent rules.

Names beginning with == or === are expanded in accordance with BIM-EPIC partition/CPU-dependent rules when BIM-EPIC is active.

This selector applies to the RESTORE=LOGICAL commands for either VSAM or VOLUME processing.

1-44 character file-ID followed by one or more spaces followed by the 8-character literal ‘@RENAME@’

Immediately follows “selector” statement to which it applies and causes the file-ID characters to be replaced by the specified characters. Any position containing a ‘/’ is not changed.

Names beginning with % or %% are expanded in accordance with VSAM partition-/CPU-dependent rules.

Names beginning with == or === are expanded in accordance with BIM-EPIC partition-/CPUdependent rules when BIM-EPIC is active.

This selector applies to the RESTORE=LOGICAL commands for either VSAM or VOLUME processing.

Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process Page 29

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Rename Function

=P=prefixstring Immediately follows “selector” statement to which it applies and causes prefixstring to be added to the front of (prefixed to) the file-ID.

This selector applies to the RESTORE=LOGICAL commands for either VSAM or VOLUME processing.

=T=searchstring=repla cestring

Immediately follows “selector” statement to which it applies and causes searchstring found in the file-ID to be replaced by replacestring (if replacestring is not specified, searchstring is removed). Only the first occurrence of searchstring is replaced – use multiple

=T= rename statements to transform multiple occurrences.

This selector applies to the RESTORE=LOGICAL commands for either VSAM or VOLUME processing.

Examples

Example: Selective SAVE or RESTORE

Select only file-IDs that begin with ‘PAYROLL’ and ‘ACCOUNTS’. Specifically exclude file-IDs that begin with ‘ACCOUNTS.RECEIVE’. Also, include the file-

ID that is found on the DLBL Job Control statement SELECTD. This example applies to both a SAVE and a RESTORE.

// DLBL SELECTD,’GL.TRAN.FILE’

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

...=LOGICAL,. . .,PARTIAL=SELECT

PAYROLL*

ACCOUNTS.RECEIVE* @REVERSE@

ACCOUNTS*

DD=SELECTD

Example: Selective SAVE or RESTORE

Select file-ID ‘TEST.CONTROL.FILE’ and all other file-IDs except those that begin with ‘TEST.’. This example applies to both a SAVE and a RESTORE.

Page 30 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

...=LOGICAL,. . .,PARTIAL=REJECT

TEST.CONTROL.FILE @REVERSE@

TEST.*

Example: Selective SAVE for VSAM only

Select only file-IDs with more than one CA split, more than five CI splits, or more than four allocations. Do not include ‘VERY.BIG.FILE’ since, due to its size, it always spans more than four allocations. This example applies to VSAM Logical

SAVE only.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SA=LO,SC=. . .,PARTIAL=REJECT

VERY.BIG.FILE

CASPLIT=1

CISPLIT=5

ALLOCS=4

Example: Selective SAVE or RESTORE

To select only file-IDs with the character string ‘PROD’ occurring in any position.

This example applies to both a SAVE and a RESTORE.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

...=LO,...,PARTIAL=SELECT

=S=PROD

Example: Restore with Rename

Restore all files prefixing each file-ID with the characters ‘TEST.’. This example applies to a RESTORE only.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,...,PA=SE

=P=TEST.

Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process Page 31

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Restore with Rename

Restore certain files renaming them in the process. All file-IDs beginning with

CUR.STAT.FILE are to be prefixed with the character ‘TEST.’. The file-ID

‘ONE.SPECIAL.FILE’ is to be changed to ‘ONE.COMMON.FILE’. All file-IDs containing the character string ‘.PRMASTER’ in any position are to have those characters removed and the remaining file-ID is to be prefixed with the characters ‘PAYROLL.MASTER,’ resulting in the following file-ID standardization:

Original Name

EMPLOYEE.PRMASTER

===

YTD.PRMASTER

===

QTD.PRMASTER

===

New Name After Restore

PAYROLL.MASTER.EMPLOYEE

PAYROLL.MASTER.YTD

PAYROLL.MASTER.QTD

This example applies to a RESTORE only.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,...,PARTIAL=SELECT

CUR.STAT.FILE*

=P=TEST.

ONE.SPECIAL.FILE

ONE.COMMON.FILE @RENAME@

=S=PRMASTER

=T=.PRMASTER=

=P=PAYROLL.MASTER.

Example: Selective List of VSAM Catalog

Select only entries that have 15 or more cisplits.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LCAT,SC=BIMUCAT,PARTIAL=REJECT

CISPLIT=15

Page 32 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Posting a Message to the Operator

Use the OPERATOR operand to cause Dr. D to log out an operator message on

SYSLOG. This operand may appear on any SAVE, RESTORE, or COPY command statement or on a statement all by itself. If the message to be issued contains embedded blanks it must be enclosed in quotes.

Wrong:

Right:

OP=MOUNT pack 222222 on 131

OP='MOUNT pack 222222 on 131'

To cancel Dr. D at this point, type 'C'. To continue, press Enter.

Example: Post a Message

This example posts an informational message telling the operator to save SYSRES only after all links have been done. Two alternate job streams for achieving this goal follow:

// JOB ONE WAY

// ASSGN SYS007,280

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'SYSRES SAVE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SA=NO,OPERATOR='SAVE SYSRES IF LINKS ARE DONE'

SAVE=IPL

SAVE=CURRENT,SSYSNO=SYSRES

// JOB ANOTHER WAY

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'SYSRES SAVE'

// ASSGN SYS007,280

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

OPERATOR='SAVE SYSRES IF LINKS ARE DONE'

SAVE=IPL

SAVE=CURRENT,SSYSNO=SYSRES

Posting a Message to the Operator Page 33

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Setting UPSI Bits

Dr. D tests nine UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These

UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the

Dr. D UPSI operand on an appropriate control statement. When using the Dr. D

UPSI operand, the bit settings are specified in the same manner as on the Job

Control UPSI statement: 0 = off, 1 = on, X = unchanged. Unspecified rightmost positions are assumed to be X.

UPSI=000000000 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator may change it. If both the UPSI operand and a Job Control UPSI statement are present, the UPSI operand prevails. Your installation administrator can also cause Dr. D to ignore any or all Job Control UPSI bit settings and honor only those specified using this operand.

UPSI bit 6 should always be set using the Job Control UPSI statement. UPSI bit 8 can only be set using the Dr. D UPSI operand since the Job Control UPSI statement does not support such a setting. When used, the UPSI operand is a global operand; its value remains in effect until it is subsequently specified with a different value.

UPSI Bit Settings

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Off (0) Wait for operator reply to DOCTOR016 and DOCTOR066 messages

On (1) Do not wait for operator reply to DOCTOR016 and DOCTOR066 messages

Off (0) Do not log control statements

On (1) Log all control statements

Off (0) Do not log Save and Restore statistics

On (1) Log Save and Restore statistics

Off (0) No second output tape

On (1) Create second output tape

Off (0) Do not log read data checks

On (1) Log read data checks to SYSLOG and wait for RETRY, CANCEL, or IGNORE operator response

Off (0) Do not ignore read data checks

On (1) Automatically ignore read data checks

Off (0) Do not table control statements. Insure UPSI bit 6 is set to 0 if you are also submitting any save, copy, function, selector or automatic definition override statements with the restore commands

On (1) Table restore control statements to enable ordered matching of RFILENAME and FIND operands (should always be set by Job Control UPSI). Only individual file restores (RESTORE=DATA, RESTORE=SDISK and

RESTORE=VSAM) are allowed and are limited in number to those that fit in the Control Table (see Configure System Options on page 12).

Off (0) Do not override PRINT=LIST Bit 7

On (1) Log control statements to SYSLOG even with PRINT=LIST

Bit 8 Off (0) No third output tape

Page 34 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

UPSI Bit Settings

On (1) Create third output tape (also forces UPSI Bit 3 On)

Creating Multiple Save Tapes Simultaneously

Up to three save files on tape can be created simultaneously:

• Two save tapes can be requested by turning UPSI bit 3 on in either the Job

Control UPSI statement (// UPSI xxx1) or with the Dr. D UPSI operand

(UPSI=XXX1).

• Two save tapes can also be requested by specifying an entry at the

TDDNAME operand for either the second or third save tape.

• Three save tapes can be requested by setting UPSI bit 8 on at the Dr. D UPSI operand only (UPSI=XXXXXXXX1) since the Job Control UPSI statement only supports UPSI bits 0-7. The setting of UPSI bit 8 on unconditionally sets

UPSI bit 3 on.

• Three save tapes can also be requested by specifying an entry at the

TDDNAME operand for the third save tape. Any specification for the third save tape unconditionally sets UPSI bits 3 and 8 on.

Example: Creating 3 Save Tapes Simultaneously

// JOB SAVE TO THREE TAPES

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'FIRST TAPE OUT'

// TLBL TAPETWO,'SECOND TAPE OUT'

// TLBL TAPE003,'THIRD TAPEOUT'

// ASSGN SYS007,180 TAPEOUT

// ASSGN SYS006,181 TAPETWO

// ASSGN SYS005,182 TAPE003

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,UP=111100001,...

SAVE=...

Creating Multiple Save Tapes Simultaneously Page 35

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Specifying Disk Volume Serial Numbers

Use the SVOLID, RVOLID, and CVOLID operands to specify the disk volume serial number(s) for operations where processing occurs on full or partial disk volumes. When any of these operands is entered, Dr. D checks to see if there is a usable assignment for the disk(s) and attempts to make an assignment if necessary. This eliminates the need for JCL assign statements. If a proper assignment cannot be made, or the disk volser specified cannot be located, an error message is produced.

Example: Specify disk volume serial number.

This example uses the SVOLID operand to specify the volser to be processed.

Dr. D makes its own assignment to the requested volume.

// ASSGN SYS007,280

// TLBL TAPEOUT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=ALL,SVOLID=PACK01

Example: Copy entire cylinder

This example copies the entire second cylinder on a 3380 device from volume

PACK01 to PACK02.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=PH,CBEGIN=100,CHALT=114,RM=I,SVOLID=PACK01,RVOLID=PACK02

Tape and Processing Blocksize

The installed default tape blocksize is 65K (double buffered), but your installation administrator may change it (see Configure System Options on page

12). The default tape blocksize may be overridden at execution time by specification of the BLOCKSIZE operand on a SAVE, RESTORE, or COPY command. This operand may be used to set the blocksize to a 5-digit number less than 65,496 and equal to or greater than the largest physical disk block +16.

Once specified, the blocksize is in effect for the remainder of the program's execution or until another BLOCKSIZE operand is submitted. The blocksize may be increased in order to get more data on a tape. For RESTORE operations, the

BLOCKSIZE operand is required only if the physical blocksize is greater than the default tape blocksize.

When used with a User Data File SAVE operation, BLOCKSIZE specifies the blocksize of the tape record. It must be less than 65496 and at least as large as the logical record length plus 10. Only full logical records can be written to tape.

Page 36 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

When used during COPY operations, memory requirements may be reduced or increased with a resulting change in performance. For VSE machines with limited memory, performance may actually be improved by a reduction in blocksize through elimination of excessive paging. With adequate real memory, a larger block size should prove beneficial. Do not use this operand on the same control card as the FIND or SKIP operands. Instead use a preceding

SAVE|RESTORE|COPY=NOPERATION control card to set the desired blocksize.

Tape Compression

When saving to tape, the CP=YES operand causes tape output to be compressed, thereby reducing tape usage and channel access, with improvement in backup speed (provided CPU time is adequate). Once invoked, it remains in effect until

CP=NO is specified, or until execution ends. CP=NO is the default shipped with

Dr. D. Your installation administrator can change this default.

WARNING When saving to a tape device that has hardware compression invoked (such as 3590, 3490E and 3480/3490 IDRC devices), CP=NO should be specified to avoid double compression and potential loss of throughput.

Example: Specify Tape Compression

This example describes a specific tape compression.

// ASSGN SYS007,280

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'SAVE.FILE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,BLOCKSIZE=65496,CP=YES

SAVE=. . .

Tape Compression Page 37

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Page 38 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Tape Positioning

SKIP and FIND Operands

Dr. D allows you to restore selective files from the save tape using the SKIP or

FIND operand. These operands allow you to specify the file within a Dr. D save file with which to begin a RESTORE operation.

The SKIP=nnn operand starts with the first file saved and reads until the skip

nnn is satisfied. SKIP may be used to reposition a save tape created by any

SAVE= command.

The FIND operand searches the Dr. D file until either the end of file is reached, or until the find search argument matches a file on the tape. The search argument may be the DLBL name used during the save, the file ID, or the volume serial number of the saved disk/disk segment.

If FIND=filename is specified, the tape is positioned to the file matching the DLBL name in the search argument. This format may be used when using a save tape created by SAVE=DATA, SAVE=LOGICAL, SAVE=SDISK or SAVE=VSAM. To determine the correct filename to specify, use the name under the “DD NAME” column on a SAVE report or the name identified by SFILENAM= on a LTAPE report.

If FIND='file-id’ is specified, the tape is positioned to the 44 character file ID field in the search argument. This format may be used when using a save tape created by SAVE=DATA, SAVE=LOGICAL, SAVE=SDISK or SAVE=VSAM. To determine which file-IDs are on a tape, look at the “FILE IDENTIFICATION” column on a SAVE report or the file-ID identified by ID= on a LTAPE report.

If FIND=(volser) is specified, the tape is positioned to the volume serial of the saved disk/disk segment in the search argument. This format may be used when using a save tape created by SAVE=ALL, SAVE=CURRENT, or

SAVE=PHYSICAL. To determine which volsers are on a tape created by

SAVE=CURRENT, look for the “VTOC OF SAVED DISK. . .” entries under the

“FILE IDENTIFICATION” column on the SAVE report or VOLID= on a LTAPE report. With save tapes created by SAVE=ALL and SAVE=PHYSICAL, the volsers are easily identified under the “FILE IDENTIFICATION” column on the SAVE report or VOLID= on a LTAPE report.

For multivolume tape files, SKIP requires the tape volumes to be mounted in order, whereas FIND allows searching to begin with any volume. If FIND is used beginning with other than the first volume, you must keep track of which files are on which volume. See 'DOCTOR616' in the message section for additional tape positioning.

Tape Positioning Page 39

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: RESTORE using the FIND operand

In this example, FIND restores the first and third files only. The first RESTORE command uses FIND to match against the DLBL name and the second RESTORE command specifies a specific file-ID via the FIND operand.

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SOME SAVES'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

RESTORE=. . .,FIND=FILEX

RESTORE=. . .,FIND='FILE ID OF 3RD FILE'

Example: RESTORE using the SKIP operand

In this example, SKIP bypasses the first 15 files on the save tape, thereby positioning the tape to the 16 th file before restoring.

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SOME SAVES'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

RESTORE=. . .,SKIP=015

Page 40 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Multiple Volume Save Files

While many different types of saves may be performed during Dr. D execution, they are all embedded within one VSE tape file. The FIND and SKIP operands may then be used to position the tape.

Example: Multiple volumes saved to single file

This example creates a single file tape with 3 save files.

// ASSGN SYS007,280

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'MULTI.PACK.SAVE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=CURRENT,SV=PACK01

SAVE=CURRENT,SV=PACK02

SAVE=CURRENT,SV=PACK03

Example: RESTORE from multiple save file tape

This example positions the save tape created in the prior example to the PACK02 save data and then restores only PACK02.

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// TLBL TAPEIN,'MULTI.PACK.SAVE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=CURRENT,FIND=(PACK02),RV=PACK02

Stacking Multiple Files on a Tape

As an alternative to creating a single file from multiple SAVE operations, multiple files may be created by using multiple DRD executions. Dr. D normally opens and closes both input and output with 'NO REWIND'. This allows you to stack multiple Dr. D save files onto the same tape with multiple executions. This may be desirable for save file identification or when interfacing with tape management systems. Once positioned by the file sequence number on the TLBL, the FIND and SKIP operands may also be used to further position the tape.

NOTE : The TAPE= operand may be used to change the default operation of

Dr. D to rewind and/or unload tapes.

Tape Positioning Page 41

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Stack multiple files to tape

This example creates a multi-file tape with 3 files.

// ASSGN SYS007,280

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'PACK01.SAVE',,,,1

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=CURRENT,SV=PACK01

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'PACK02.SAVE',,,,2

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=CURRENT,SV=PACK02

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'PACK03.SAVE',,,,3

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=CURRENT,SV=PACK03

Example: Restore from multiple file tape

This example restores only the first and third files from the tape created in the prior example.

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// TLBL TAPEIN,'PACK01.SAVE',,,,1

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=CURRENT,RV=PACK01

// TLBL TAPEIN,'PACK03.SAVE',,,,3

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=CURRENT,RV=PACK03

Page 42 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

TAPE Operands

Use the TAPE operand to further facilitate tape handling. Dr. D does not open the TAPEOUT file until it hits a SAVE command. Likewise, Dr. D does not open the TAPEIN file until it hits a RESTORE command. When Dr. D reads a '/*' denoting the end of control cards, it closes any open tape files before terminating.

You may override the normal sequence of events by specifying:

TAPE=REW

TAPE=RUN

TAPE=NOR

You may use the TAPE operand on any SAVE or RESTORE command. When specified on a SAVE|RESTORE=NOPERATION command, tape repositioning occurs immediately. This is the recommended specification for best control of tape positioning. If specified on any other SAVE or RESTORE command, the tape is closed with the appropriate REWIND, REWIND and UNLOAD, or NO

REWIND, and reopened before saving or restoring.

Example: Reposition tape with TAPE operand

This job stream performs two SAVE operations using two different tapes, both created on cuu=280. Before the first save begins, the SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW command ensures the tape on 280 is positioned at load point. Between the first and second save operation, the operator is also informed that a new tape is needed. Following the second save operation, the tape is unloaded.

// ASSGN SYS007,280

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'SAVE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

SAVE=ALL,SVOLID=PACK01

SAVE=NO,TAPE=RUN,OPERATOR='MOUNT NEXT TAPE'

SAVE=ALL,SVOLID=PACK02

SAVE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Tape Positioning Page 43

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: COPY using intermediary scratch tape

This example combines SAVE and RESTORE operations in a single execution in order to copy a disk on 131 to one on 132 and a disk on 133 to one on 134. It makes extensive use of the TAPE operand to reposition an intermediary scratch tape. Although a COPY=ALL command would be more efficient, this example was chosen to use an intermediary scratch tape instead.

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'SCRATCH'

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SCRATCH'

// ASSGN SYS010,131

// ASSGN SYS011,132

// ASSGN SYS012,133

// ASSGN SYS013,134

// ASSGN SYS007,280

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=ALL,SSYSNO=SYS010

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

RESTORE=ALL,RSYSNO=SYS011

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

SAVE=ALL,SSYSNO=SYS012

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

RESTORE=ALL,RSYSNO=SYS013

Page 44 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Unattended Backup

The backup created by a SAVE= function can occur after hours with no mounting or dismounting of tapes required, avoiding the necessity to stop online processing for backups. Additionally, VSAM reorganization can be accomplished without operator intervention. Later you can copy the disk file to tape for archival storage while online processing continues.

DOCTOR58 Save File Disk to Tape Utility

Dr. D provides the DOCTOR58 utility to copy a file saved on disk to tape. The input disk file must be specified using a DLBL/EXTENT with the filename

TAPEIN. The output tape file is specified using a TLBL with the filename

TAPEOUT. If a tape management system is not used, the TAPEOUT file is created using SYS007.

A detailed log about each file/object copied to tape is written to SYSLOG if UPSI bit 1 is on (x1x). If UPSI bit 1 is off (x0x), only summary total is written to

SYSLOG.

Example: Create backup tape from disk save file and generate detailed log

// ASSGN SYS007,180

// DLBL TAPEIN,'EMULATED.SAVE.FILE'

// EXTENT ,FBA250

// TLBL TAPEOUT,’ARCHIVED.SAVE.FILE’

// UPSI X1X

// EXEC DOCTOR58

Unattended Backup Page 45

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

User Data File Feature

The User Data File feature (DTAPE=YES operand) allows users to SAVE or

RESTORE data files in user format with standard labels. User Data Files may be created by SAVE=DATA, SAVE=SDISK, SAVE=VSAM and FUNCTION=SORT operations. Data files created using this feature may be used by non-Dr. D applications or as input to RESTORE=DATA, RESTORE=SDISK and

RESTORE=VSAM operations. When used as input to RESTORE=VSAM operations, the cluster must be pre-defined before the restore is started (that is, the VSAM Automatic Definition feature is not available when using Data Files as input). You can specify DTAPE=YES on a RESTORE operation only when the save file was created with DTAPE=YES. To create a User Data File from a Dr. D save file that was not originally created with DTAPE=YES, use

FUNCTION=SORT.

When saving to or restoring from disk, only one save/restore request per execution of Dr. D is allowed. When saving to or restoring from tape, multiple save/restore requests per execution of Dr. D are allowed since the tape is closed at the completion of each save/restore then re-opened at the start of the next file.

For the first tape file only, you may specify a unique filename using the

TDDNAME operand or allow Dr. D to use the default TAPEIN/TAPEOUT filename. Thereafter the filenames are generated in the format of 'TDInnnn'

(input tape) or 'TDOnnnn' (output tape) allowing Dr. D to stack multiple files on the tape. In either case, 'nnnn' represents a sequential number starting at 0001.

You may apply this technique to any file type that is in fixed (blocked or unblocked) or variable (blocked or unblocked) format, VSAM, SAM, or any other file organization processed by Dr. D on a logical block or logical record basis.

Once saved, the data may be restored to any desired file type, allowing, for example, conversion of SAM files to VSAM files. When restoring, you must specify both the LRECSIZE and NRECDS operands for fixed-length records and the LBLOCKSIZE and VARIABLE=YES operands for variable length records.

When restoring to SAM files, you can reblock by adjusting the value specified for the NRECDS operand (for fixed-length records) or the LBLOCKSIZE operand

(for variable length records).

Although intended for use by Dr. D only, user written programs can read the

SAVE file created with the User Data File feature. The actual blocksize found in the SAVE file approaches the value specified (or defaulted) for the BLOCKSIZE operand, but never actually reaches that value. Dr. D always builds internal buffers with all potential control information, which varies with the file organization and file format as well as the device type on which the file resides.

All that control information, however, is removed before the buffer is actually written to the save file. If you choose to read the SAVE file for fixed-length records, choose a blocksize value equal to the largest multiple of the logical record size that does not exceed the value specified (or defaulted) for the

BLOCKSIZE operand. If you choose to read the SAVE file for variable-length records, choose a blocksize value equal to the value specified (or defaulted) for

Page 46 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D the BLOCKSIZE operand. Using these techniques always satisfies Logical IOCS requirements.

Example: Save four VSAM files to tape with User Data File Feature

This example saves four VSAM files using the Data File Feature. It assumes the files are all defined with fixed-length records.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// DLBL FIL1,'AR.CUST.NA',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUJ

// DLBL FIL2,'ASSISAM',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUJ

// DLBL FIL3,'CAMAST.FOUR.SIX',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUJ

// DLBL FIL4,'LABS.SAMPLES.FILE',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUJ

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'AR.CUST.NA'

// TLBL TDOM0001,'ASSISAM'

// TLBL TDO0002,'CAMAST.FOUR.SIX'

// TLBL TDO0003,'LABS.SAMPLES.FILE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

SAVE=VSAM,SF=FIL1,DTAPE=YES,FAST=YES

SAVE=VSAM,SF=FIL2,DTAPE=YES,FAST=YES

SAVE=VSAM,SF=FIL3,DTAPE=YES,FAST=YES

SAVE=VSAM,SF=FIL4,DTAPE=YES,FAST=YES

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: RESTORE four VSAM files with User Data File feature

This example restores four VSAM files saved in the previous. It assumes all the

VSAM files are either null or have been defined as reusable.

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEIN,'AR.CUST.NA'

// TLBL TDI0001,'ASSISAM'

// TLBL TDI0002,'CAMAST.FOUR.SIX'

// TLBL TDI0003,'LABS.SAMPLES.FILE'

// DLBL FIL1,'AR.CUST.NA',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUJ

// DLBL FIL2,'ASSISAM',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUJ

// DLBL FIL3,'CAMAST.FOUR.SIX',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUJ

// DLBL FIL4,'LABS.SAMPLES.FILE',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUJ

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

RESTORE=VSAM,RF=FIL1,DTAPE=YES

RESTORE=VSAM,RF=FIL2,DTAPE=YES

RESTORE=VSAM,RF=FIL3,DTAPE=YES

RESTORE=VSAM,RF=FIL4,DTAPE=YES

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=RUN

User Data File Feature Page 47

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: SAVE two SD Files with User Data File Feature

This example saves two SD files using the User Data File Feature.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// DLBL FIL1,'FIXED.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE',,SD

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,15,300

// DLBL FIL2,'VARIABLE.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE',,SD

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,4500,6000

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'FB.SAM.FILE'

// TLBL TDO0001,'VB.SAM.FILE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

SAVE=DATA,SF=FIL1,DTAPE=YES

SAVE=DATA,SF=FIL2,DTAPE=YES

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: RESTORE SD files saved with the User Data File Feature

This example restores the two SD files saved in example 3 reblocking each file.

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL FIL1,'FIXED.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE',,SD

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,15,300

// DLBL FIL2,'VARIABLE.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE',,SD

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,4500,6000

// TLBL TAPEIN,'FB.SAM.FILE'

// TLBL TDI0001,'VB.SAM.FILE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

RESTORE=DATA,RFILE=FIL1,DTAPE=YES,LRECSIZE=100,NRECDS=100

RESTORE=DATA,RFILE=FIL2,DTAPE=YES,VARIABLE=YES,LBLOCK=16000

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

Page 48 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Verifying Accurate Control Card Submission

Verify Number of Commands

To prevent accidental loss or insertion of control cards into the JCL, a card count feature is provided. All cards that have SAVE=, RESTORE=, or COPY= on them are countable cards. Not included in the count are their logical continuation cards if they have any '$$$$$$' cards or the end-of-data statements (‘/@’ and

'/*'). The card count is communicated to Dr. D by the CARDCOUNT operand. It may appear anywhere in the sequence of control cards, but it may only appear once. The count starts with the card on which CARDCOUNT appears and ends with the last one. The following are some correct examples of saving five data files.

// EXEC DRD

A B

// EXEC DRD

SA=DA,SF=FIL01,CA=05 SA=DA,SF=FIL01

SA=DA,SF=FIL02 SA=DA,SF=FIL02

SA=DA,SF=FIL03 SA=DA,SF=FIL03

SA=DA,SF=FIL04 SA=DA,SF=FIL04,CA=02

SA=DA,SF=FIL05 SA=DA,SF=FIL05

/* /*

In example A, the operator would be informed if any card was missing or added.

In example B, the same holds true with the last two cards. Insertions or deletions before card number four would go undetected.

Verifying Accurate Control Card Submission Page 49

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Verify Command Sequence

It is very important to keep the save and restore control cards in the same sequence. To prevent accidental permutation of the control cards, use the

SEQNO operand. On the save side, the sequence number (if specified) is checked against the one internally generated for the Dr. D HDR record. A no match indicates an error.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=DATA,SF=FILEX,SEQNO=01,CARDCOUNT=03

SAVE=DATA,SF=FILEZ,SEQNO=03 <---ERROR INDICATED

SAVE=DATA,SF=FILEY,SEQNO=02

Likewise, on the restore side, the sequence number (if specified) is checked against the one in the Dr. D HDR record.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=DATA,RF=FILEX,SEQNO=01,CARDCOUNT=03

RESTORE=DATA,RF=FILEZ,SEQNO=03 <---ERROR INDICATED

RESTORE=DATA,RF=FILEY,SEQNO=02

Page 50 Using Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Working with VSAM Catalogs and Files

Dr. D provides a comprehensive set of functions for saving, restoring, copying, managing, and tuning VSAM catalogs and files.

Saving VSAM Catalogs

The SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM) command (see page 417) saves a VSAM catalog.

Only the VSAM catalog need be identified to Dr. D which is used to select the files (both suballocated and unique) to be saved. You can save all files or just those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria. No additional

Job Control statements are required identifying the files to be saved. The output may be either tape or disk. When requested, in addition to automatically saving the VSAM definition, all associated objects and their definitions (PATH’s and

AIX’s) can be automatically saved. Save files created using SAVE=LOGICAL may be used as input to RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM) and RESTORE=VSAM operations.

Restoring VSAM Catalogs

The RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM) command (see page 302) restores a VSAM catalog. Input to a RESTORE=LOGICAL must be created by a VSAM

SAVE=LOGICAL command. All files saved or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria can be restored as well as all associated files. Files may be automatically defined, renamed and/or be restored with a wide array of attributes modified.

Saving Individual VSAM Files

Individual VSAM files (either suballocated or unique) can be saved using either the VSAM Logical File Save or the VSAM Data File Save feature.

VSAM Logical File Save Feature

The VSAM Logical File Save feature is invoked by using the SAVE=LOGICAL

(VSAM) command (see page 417). Due to its flexibility and ease of use, this is the preferred method. The VSAM Logical File Save Feature matches the information in the VSAM catalog to the selection criteria when determining the file(s) to be saved. As with saving a VSAM catalog, no additional Job Control statements are required identifying the file(s) to be saved and the output may be either tape or disk. Only the VSAM catalog and the appropriate selection criteria need be identified to Dr. D. The VSAM definition is also automatically saved and all associated objects and their definitions (PATH’s and AIX’s) can be automatically saved. Save files created using SAVE=LOGICAL may be used as input to

RESTORE=LOGICAL – VSAM and RESTORE=VSAM operations.

Saving VSAM Catalogs Page 51

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

VSAM Data File Save Feature

The VSAM Data File Save feature creates either a Dr. D save file (format suitable for Dr. D utilities only) or User Data File (data only without Dr. D control information). It is invoked by using the SAVE=VSAM command (see page 445).

When using this feature, each object being saved requires a unique Job Control

DLBL and its own SAVE=VSAM control statement. Unlike the VSAM Logical

File Save Feature which is driven by information in the VSAM catalog, the

VSAM Data File Save Feature is driven by Job Control and control statement information.

When saving to a Dr. D save file, the VSAM Catalog cluster definition is automatically saved. Associated objects (PATH’s and AIX’s) are not automatically saved when using this feature.

When saving to a User Data File (rather than a Dr. D save file), only the data in the specified object is saved and Dr. D is prevented from saving the VSAM

Catalog cluster definition.

Save files created using SAVE=VSAM may be used as input only to a

RESTORE=VSAM operation.

Restoring Individual VSAM Files

Individual VSAM files (either suballocated or unique) can be restored using the either the VSAM Logical File Restore or the VSAM Data File Restore feature.

VSAM Logical File Restore Feature

The VSAM Logical File Restore feature is invoked using the

RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM) command (see page 302). Input to a

RESTORE=LOGICAL must be created by a VSAM SAVE=LOGICAL command.

All files saved or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria can be restored as well as all associated files. Files may be automatically defined, if necessary, be renamed, and/or be restored with a wide array of attributes modified.

VSAM Data File Restore Feature

The VSAM Data File Restore feature is invoked using the RESTORE=VSAM command (see page 346). Use the VSAM Data File Restore feature to restore individual VSAM files with data saved using any of the following techniques:

• The VSAM Logical Save feature (SAVE=LOGICAL command)

• The VSAM Data File Save feature (SAVE=VSAM command)

• User Data File

• Other backup software tape (see Conversion from Other Backup

Software Products on page 458 for additional information)

Page 52 Working with VSAM Catalogs and Files

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

You can invoke the VSAM Data File Restore feature using the RESTORE=VSAM command (see page 346).

You can restore the entire file or just a portion of it. It may be automatically defined, renamed and/or restored with a wide array of attributes modified.

Copying VSAM Files

The COPY=VSAM command (see page 130) copies a single VSAM data file

(either suballocated or unique) to another VSAM file (either suballocated or unique). Either the entire file or only a portion of the file may be copied. Only one file per Dr. D control statement is copied. Job Control DLBL statements are required to identify the input and output files. If necessary, the output file may be automatically defined using the attributes associated with the input file. These attributes may also be modified during the copy.

Building Alternate Indexes

The FUNCTION=BUILDAIX command (see page 147) is a high speed, automatic alternative to the IDCAMS BLDINDEX function. Alternate indexes can be built while a VSAM cluster is being saved, restored, or copied. The Dr. D VSAM build alternate index feature:

• Builds up to 99 separate alternate indexes via a single pass of the base cluster

• Builds alternate indexes up to 10 times faster than the IDCAMS

BLDINDEX facility

• Builds alternate indexes for KSDS and ESDS files

• Allows cluster records for build to be selected using record selector statements

• Allows non-unique AIX keys to be made unique by the addition of a binary suffix to each key.

Converting VSAM-TO-SAM or SAM-TO-VSAM

If the 'TAPEIN' or 'TAPEOUT' file is disk and the 'DTAPE' (data tape) option is in effect, the file is created or read as a user format file (Fixed block or Variable block format). This allows files to be copied from one format to another. If the

DTAPE operand is not specified, the file is created in Dr. D 'segmented' format and cannot be processed by user programs.

For a CKD disk, use the DLBL BLOCKSIZE parameter to specify an appropriate disk blocksize (use track length if possible). The disk blocksize is independent of the default or specified Dr. D 'BLOCKSIZE=' operand (continue to use

BLOCKSIZE as though tape was in use); tape compression (CP=YES) reduces the size of the disk file required to contain the backup. Standard IBM LIOCS is used, allowing disk manager control of the TAPEIN/TAPEOUT disk file.

Copying VSAM Files Page 53

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Creating IDCAMS Delete/Define Statements

The FUNCTION=PUNCH command (see page 216) creates IDCAMS control statements for deleting and defining VSAM files. Only the VSAM catalog need be identified to Dr. D which is used to select the files for which the IDCAMS control statements are to be created. All files may be punched or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria can be punched.

Deleting/Resetting a VSAM Data File

The FUNCTION=DELETE command (see page 178) allows VSAM files to be deleted or reset to empty status. Only the VSAM catalog need be identified to

Dr. D which is used to select the files to be deleted or reset. All files may be deleted or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria can be deleted. An operand on the FUNCTION=DELETE command controls whether the selected file(s) is reported only (not deleted), if they should actually be deleted or if the file should simply be reset and all secondary allocations recovered.

Listing the Contents of a VSAM Catalog

Use the FUNCTION=LCAT command (see page 191) provides a compact yet comprehensive report of the objects (files, paths, alternate indices, etc.) in a specified VSAM user or master catalog. Only the VSAM catalog need be identified to Dr. D which is used to select the files for reporting. All files may be reported or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria can be reported. A space map and gap map report follows the listing of files showing how much space is allocated and available on each disk assigned to the specified catalog.

Migrating Files and Catalogs to Different Device Types

The VSAM Automatic Definition Feature fully supports device independence between the DASD device type used when the file was saved and the DASD device type used when the file is restored.

If the DASD device type is different when the restore begins, the space allocations for the file are adjusted in proportion to the relative track capacities

(or FBA blocksize) of the two DASD device types. Full independence between

CKD, ECKD and FBA architecture is supported.

Page 54 Working with VSAM Catalogs and Files

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Tuning VSAM Files

Dr. D provides several features that allow VSAM files to be reorganized and/or have their definitions altered to improve efficiency and/or disk utilization. This is achieved by selecting files for saving (via SAVE=LOGICAL command) based on their condition (for example, CI/CA splits, allocations, etc.) and/or definition characteristics (for example, CISIZE, freespace, etc.). Refer to Logical

Selection/Rejection/Rename Process Section for a detailed description of the available selection/rejection criteria.

Once the files have been saved, they may be tuned using the Automatic

Definition Feature during a RESTORE=LOGICAL, RESTORE=VSAM or

COPY=VSAM operation. Although a standard restore operation eliminates

CI/CA splits in a file, the Automatic Definition Feature provides an easy method of recalculating space to eliminate secondary allocations and for altering the actual definitions.

Verifying a VSAM Data File

The FUNCTION=VERIFY command (see page 230) allows VSAM files to be verified using the IDCAMS VERIFY function. Due to constraints imposed by

VSAM Access Methods Services, only files identified in the VSAM catalog identified as IJSYSUC can be selected for verification. All files may be verified or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria can be verified.

Tuning VSAM Files Page 55

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Working with Disk Volumes, Disk Pools and Non-VSAM Files

Dr. D provides a comprehensive set of functions to aid in the saving, restoring, copying, managing and tuning of disk volumes. In addition to support for VSE initialized volumes, some commands also support non-VSE initialized (for example, VM minidisk) volumes.

Saving Disk Volumes

Dr. D provides several methods for saving a disk volume. These are Device,

Logical, and Physical. The method chosen depends upon the requirements.

Device Volume Saves

The SAVE=ALL command (see page 366) saves a disk volume image to tape or disk. This method saves every track/block (both used and unused) on a disk.

SAVE=ALL supports both VSE initialized disk volumes and non-VSE initialized disk volumes (for example, VM minidisk). Only one disk at a time may be saved and the volser or the SYSnnn assigned to the disk pack must be specified in the control statements. The entire volume may be saved or only a selected portion.

Save files created by SAVE=ALL can only be used as input to RESTORE=ALL operations but may be used as input to standalone RESTORE operations.

The SAVE=CURRENT command (see page 375) saves only active areas to tape or disk. This method uses the VTOC to select data files to be saved in addition to saving the IPL track/block and the VTOC extent. SAVE=CURRENT supports

VSE initialized disk volumes only. Only one disk at a time may be saved and the volser or the SYSnnn assigned to the disk pack must be specified in the control statements. The selection of data files may be restricted to specific area(s) on the volume and/or based upon expiration date. Once selected, you can save the entire extent of the data file or just up to the current end-of-file (EOF). Save files created by SAVE=CURRENT can only be used as input to RESTORE=CURRENT operations but may be used as input to standalone RESTORE operations.

Because unused extents are not saved with this method, it is faster than

SAVE=ALL and is better suited for normal processing.

Logical Volume Saves

Use the SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume) command (see page 406) to save disk volumes based solely upon the datasets on the volume. This method uses the

VTOC to select data files to be saved to tape or disk. The IPL track/block and

VTOC extent are not saved with SAVE=LOGICAL.

You can save up to 600 disks in a single operation. You can save all files or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria. No additional

Job Control statements are required to identify the files to be saved. Save files created by SAVE=LOGICAL can be used as input to RESTORE=fVolume),

RESTORE=DATA, and RESTORE=SDISK operations and may be used for migration to different device types. This method is the most flexible for normal

Page 56 Working with Disk Volumes, Disk Pools and Non-VSAM Files

USER GUIDE

Dr. D processing because it only saves data files and has the most options available for determining what is saved.

Physical Volume Saves

The SAVE=PHYSICAL command (see page 429) saves disk volumes based solely upon physical track/block location, independent of VTOC information. The output save file may be put on either tape or disk. SAVE=PHYSICAL supports both VSE initialized disk volumes and non-VSE initialized disk volumes (for example, VM minidisk). Only one disk at a time may be saved and the volser or the SYSnnn assigned to the disk pack and the track/block address range must be specified in the control statements. This allows the entire volume or only a selected portion to be saved. Save files created by SAVE=PHYSICAL can only be used as input to RESTORE=PHYSICAL operations but may also be used for migration to different device types. They may also be used in standalone restore processing. This method is extremely useful for saving corrupted disk volumes and for saving non-VSE volumes (that is, VM minidisk).

Restoring Disk Volumes

Dr. D provides several methods for restoring a disk volume. These are Device,

Logical and Physical. The method chosen depends on the requirements.

Device Volume Restores

The RESTORE=ALL command (see page 237) restores a save file created by a

SAVE=ALL command. This method restores every track/block (both used and unused) on a disk volume to its saved status. It also restores the IPL track/block and the VTOC extent. The volser of the disk volume changes to the same volser of the save file data or it may be changed to a different volser. Only the current volser of the target disk pack or the SYSnnn assigned to the target disk pack must be specified in the control statements. The entire volume may be restored or only a selected portion. Because this method is restoring an image of the saved volume, the target volume for the restore must be the same device type as the save volume. RESTORE=ALL also supports non-VSE initialized disk volumes

(for example, VM minidisk).

The RESTORE=CURRENT command (see page 246) restores a save file created by a SAVE=CURRENT command. This method restores all the active areas including IPL track/block and VTOC extent on a disk volume to its saved status.

The volser of the disk volume being restored is set to the same volser of the saved volume, or it may be changed to a different volser. Only the current volser of the target disk pack or the SYSnnn assigned to the target disk pack must be specified in the control statements. The entire volume may be restored or only a selected portion. Because this method is restoring an image of the saved volume, the target volume for the restore must be the same device type as the save volume.

Restoring Disk Volumes Page 57

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Logical Volume Restores

The RESTORE=LOGICAL (Volume) command (see page 287) restores a save file created by a Volume SAVE=LOGICAL command. This method restores only data files (the IPL track/block and VTOC extent are not restored and the volume serial number is not changed) to their saved status. All files may be restored or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria can be restored. Files may be restored to a specific disk or pool of disks. No additional

Job Control statements are required identifying the files to be restored. Files may be restored to their original disk volume or to any other disk volume of any device type. The VTOC of the restore volume(s) is updated to reflect any file(s) being restored to it. This method also has additional control statement operands to allow interfacing with Disk Management systems.

Physical Volume Restores

The RESTORE=PHYSICAL command (see page 321) restores a save file created by a SAVE=PHYSICAL command. This method can restore a single disk volume on a physical track/block basis. The volser or the SYSnnn assigned to the disk pack and the track/block address range must be specified in the control statements. This allows the entire volume or only a selected portion to be restored. RESTORE=PHYSICAL operations may also be used for migration to different device types and for restoring non-VSE volumes (for example, VM minidisk).

Copying Disk Volumes

Dr. D provides two methods for copying a disk volume. These are Device and

Physical. The method chosen is dependent upon the requirements.

Device Volume Copies

The COPY=ALL command (see page 82) creates an image copy of a disk volume onto another disk. This method copies every track/block (both used and unused) on a disk volume. The volser of the target disk volume changes to the same volser as the source disk or it may be changed to a different volser. Either the entire volume or only a selected portion may be copied. Because this method is creating an image copy of the saved volume, the target volume for the restore must be the same device type as the source volume. COPY=ALL also supports non-VSE initialized disk volumes (for example, VM minidisk).

The COPY=CURRENT command (see page 89) copies the IPL track/block,

VTOC extent, and data files identified in the VTOC onto another disk. The volser of the target disk volume is changed to the same volser as the source disk or it may be changed to a different volser. The selection of data files may be restricted based upon expiration date. Once selected, the entire extent of the data file may be copied or only up to the current end-of-file (EOF). Because this method also copies the IPL track/block and the VTOC from the source disk, the target volume for the restore must be the same device type as the source volume.

Page 58 Working with Disk Volumes, Disk Pools and Non-VSAM Files

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Physical Volume Copies

The COPY=PHYSICAL command (see page 111) copies disk volumes based solely upon physical track/block location, independent of VTOC information.

The volser or the SYSnnn assigned to the disk pack and the track/block address range must be specified in the control statements. This allows the entire volume or only a selected portion to be copied. COPY=PHYSICAL can be used to copy disk volumes between device types and for copying non-VSE volumes (for example, VM minidisk).

Saving and Restoring Disk Pools

The SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume) and RESTORE=LOGICAL (Volume) commands use either disk volsers or disk pool names. Specify up to 600 disk volsers for a single save or restore operation. Dr. D also provides its own disk pooling feature

(refer to page 16 for additional information) to enable access to up to 30 disk volsers via 1 pseudo-volser. You can use Dr. D pools in both the SAVE and

RESTORE operations. SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume) and RESTORE=LOGICAL

(Volume) can also interface with disk management systems. You can automatically use BIM-EPIC and CA-EPIC disk pools in both SAVE and

RESTORE operations. However, you can only use CA-DYNAM and CA-SYSTEM

MANAGER pools only in RESTORE operations.

Saving Individual Non-VSAM Files

Use either the Non-VSAM Logical File Save or Non-VSAM Data File Save feature to save individual files.

Non-VSAM Logical File Save Feature

Use the SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume) command (see page 406) to save non-VSAM files via the Logical File Save feature. This method uses the VTOC to select data files to be saved to tape or disk. Files on up to 600 disks may be saved in a single operation. You can save all files or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria. No additional Job Control statements are required to identify the files to be saved. Save files created by SAVE=LOGICAL can be used as input to RESTORE=LOGICAL (Volume), RESTORE=DATA and

RESTORE=SDISK operations and may be used for migration to different device types.

Non-VSAM Data File Save Feature

The Non-VSAM Data File Save feature creates either a Dr. D save file (format suitable for Dr. D utilities only) or User Data File (data only without Dr. D control information). You invoke it using the SAVE=DATA command (see page

385) or SAVE=SDISK command (see page 437). Unlike the Logical File Save

Feature which is driven by information in the VTOC, the Non-VSAM Data File

Save Feature is driven by Job Control and control statement information.

Saving and Restoring Disk Pools Page 59

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Use SAVE=DATA to save direct access (DA) files, sequential disk (SD) files, or

ISAM files. It uses PIOCS to access the disk file. Each file being saved requires a unique Job Control DLBL to identify the input file and its own SAVE=DATA control statement. Both Dr. D save files and User Data Files may be created by

SAVE=DATA. You may use output files created by this operation as input to

RESTORE=DATA operations. In addition, you may also use sequential disk files on a SAVE=DATA save file as input to a RESTORE=SDISK operation.

Use SAVE=SDISK to save sequential disk (SD) files only. It uses LIOCS with a

DTFSD to access the disk file. Each file being saved requires a unique Job Control

DLBL to identify the input file and its own SAVE=SDISK control statement.

Using SAVE=SDISK, you can create both Dr. D save files and User Data Files.

You may use output files created by this operation as input to RESTORE=DATA and RESTORE=SDISK operations.

Restoring Individual Non-VSAM Files

To restore individual files, use either the Non-VSAM Logical File Restore or the

Non-VSAM Data File Restore feature.

Non-VSAM Logical File Restore Feature

To invoke the Logical File Restore Feature, use the RESTORE=LOGICAL

(Volume) command (see page 287). Input RESTORE=LOGICAL must be created by a Volume SAVE=LOGICAL command. All files saved or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria can be restored. You may restore files either to the same location as when saved or to different disk locations. You may also rename files during the restore.

Non-VSAM Data File Restore Feature

To invoke the Non-VSAM Data File Restore feature, use the

RESTORE=CURRENT command (see page 246), the RESTORE=DATA command

(see page 259), or the RESTORE=SDISK command (see page 334).

The RESTORE=CURRENT command restores individual files from a save file created by a SAVE=CURRENT operation. A unique Job Control DLBL to identify the output file is required. When restoring to ECKD or CKD devices, multiple files may be restored via a single control statement. When restoring to an FBA device, each file being restored requires it own RESTORE=CURRENT control statement

The RESTORE=DATA and RESTORE=SDISK commands restore individual non-

VSAM files with data saved using any of the following techniques:

• The Volume Logical Save feature (SAVE=LOGICAL command)

• The Non-VSAM Data File Save feature (SAVE=DATA or SAVE=SDISK command)

• User Data File

Page 60 Working with Disk Volumes, Disk Pools and Non-VSAM Files

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

• Other backup software tape (see Conversion from Other Backup Software

Products on page 458 for additional information)

Both commands are similar in usage with the exception that RESTORE=DATA uses PIOCS to write the data files and supports all file types (DA, SD, ISAM) whereas RESTORE=SDISK uses LIOCS with a DTFSD to write the data files and supports only sequential disk (SD) files. Because RESTORE=SDISK uses a

DTFSD to write the data files, it provides a better interface to disk managers.

When using either command, each file being restored requires a unique Job

Control DLBL to identify the output file and its own RESTORE=DATA|SDISK control statement. Unlike the Logical File Restore Feature which generates its own DLBL/EXTENT information, the Non-VSAM Data File Restore Feature is driven by Job Control and control statement information.

Copying Non-VSAM Files

Non-VSAM files may be copied disk to disk using the COPY=DATA command

(see page 95) or the COPY=SDISK command (see page 122).

Both commands are similar in usage with the exception that COPY=DATA uses

PIOCS to access and write the data files and supports all file types (DA, SD,

ISAM) whereas COPY=SDISK uses LIOCS with a DTFSD to access and write the data files and supports only sequential disk (SD) files. Because COPY=SDISK uses a DTFSD to write the data files, it provides a better interface to disk managers.

When using either command, each file being copied requires a unique Job

Control DLBL to identify both the input and output files and its own

COPY=DATA|SDISK control statement.

Changing VTOC Expiration Dates

Once a disk file’s expiration date is equal to the current date, it may be overwritten without any warning. Normally the expiration date in the VTOC only updates when the file is created. Use the FUNCTION=DFIX command (see page 187) to protect disk files from accidentally being overwritten as a result of the expiration date being equal to or less than the current date. The

FUNCTION=DFIX command sets the expiration date to 2099/366 for all selected files. This modification is performed without any data movement.

Compacting/Reorganizing Disks

To compact/reorganize a disk volume on an ECKD or CKD disk with a minimal impact on processing, use the RESTORE=CURRENT, AREA=COMPACT command (see page 246). You may also use this command with the Disk

Management systems BIM-EPIC, CA-EPIC, CA-DYNAM, and CA-SYSTEM

MANAGER.

The SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume) (see page 406) and RESTORE=LOGICAL

(Volume) (see page 287) commands may also be used when

Copying Non-VSAM Files Page 61

Dr. D

USER GUIDE compacting/reorganizing a disk or disk pool on any device type. Options are available to provide for full reorganization, full in-place reorganization, and partial in-place reorganization. This method may also be used with the Disk

Management systems BIM-EPIC, CA-EPIC, CA-DYNAM, and CA-SYSTEM

MANAGER.

Creating DLBL/EXTENT Labels

The FUNCTION=PUNCH command (see page 216) creates Job Control DLBL and EXTENT statements from information contained in a volume’s VTOC. You can punch all files or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria. You may execute this command against 1 to 600 volumes or against a Dr. D, BIM-EPIC, or CA-EPIC disk pool.

Deleting Files from a Disk Pack

The FUNCTION=DELETE command (see page 178) allows non-VSAM files and

VSAM data spaces to be deleted from the VTOC. You can delete all files or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria. You can execute the command against 1 to 600 volumes or against a Dr. D, BIM-EPIC, or CA-EPIC disk pool. An operand controls whether to report on the files only and not delete them or to just delete them.

Erasing Portions of a Disk

The RESTORE=ERASE command (see page 272) clears portions of a disk for security reasons. Standard CKD R0 records are written and the tracks are erased;

FBA blocks are cleared.

Listing the Contents of a Volume Table of Contents (VTOC)

The FUNCTION=LVTOC command (see page 206) provides a compact yet comprehensive report of the files in the VTOC of one or more disks volumes.

You can list up to 600 disks in a single operation or all the disks referenced by a disk pool. And, you can list all files or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria. The standard report is produced in file-ID sequence with all selected files sorted together, allowing a complete alphabetic list of all files on a single disk or within a pool of disks.

At the end of file listing, a space map is printed showing the location and size of each available space on each disk in the pool of disks specified.

Page 62 Working with Disk Volumes, Disk Pools and Non-VSAM Files

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Migrating to Different Device Types

You may copy entire or partial disk volumes to different device types by using:

• SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume) to save the data files on a disk followed by a

RESTORE=LOGICAL (Volume) to load the data files to the new disk.

The disk allocations are automatically recalculated during the RESTORE operation. This is the preferred technique; it moves the most amount of data.

• SAVE=PHYSICAL to save the disk followed by a RESTORE=PHYSICAL to load the new disk. This technique can only be used for sequential disk files.

• COPY=PHYSICAL to directly copy from one disk to another. This technique can only be used for sequential disk files.

WARNING : Do not use Dr. D or any other backup software products to migrate

DOSRES or SYSWK1 to different device types because of IBM PTF service and procedure dependencies.

For VSE libraries, use the SAVE=LIBRARY followed by a RESTORE=LIBRARY using the LIBRARY=LIBR operand.

RECOMMENDATION: When attempting to move databases and database control files, use the appropriate database utility. Most databases have an internal format that may not be compatible with the new device type unless restructured by the database utility.

When migrating VSAM catalogs and clusters, refer to the section Migrating Files

and Catalogs to Different Device Types in the chapter Working with VSAM Catalogs

and Files.

Moving/Resizing a Volume Table of Contents (VTOC)

The usual method of VTOC relocation or resizing is to save the individual files, reinitialize the disk, and then restore the files. The FUNCTION=VTOCMOVE command (see page 234) allows the VTOC of a disk to be quickly and easily moved to a new location and/or resized.

WARNING: Do not use this function on DOSRES or SYSWK1 because of IBM

PTF service and procedure dependencies.

Rebuilding a Format-1 VTOC Label

Sometimes you know you have valid data on a pack but you cannot access it because the Format-1 Label is not there. It could have been accidentally deleted or the File-ID incorrectly specified; or it may have never existed. The

Migrating to Different Device Types Page 63

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RESTORE=PUTLABEL command (see page 331) recreates the Format-1 label in a

VTOC.

Page 64 Working with Disk Volumes, Disk Pools and Non-VSAM Files

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Stand-alone Processing

Preparing for Standalone Restore

The standalone restore function allows volume type backups

(SAVE=CURRENT|ALL|PHYSICAL) to be restored under VM or in Native

Mode. Multiple disks may be restored from one or more save tape sets, using one or two tape drives. The SAVE=IPL command (see page 393) is required to place the standalone program on at least one of the save tapes. Multiple disks may be restored and other backup types may be present, intermixed with the volume backups.

You may use save tapes created with the standalone program in non-standalone

RESTORE operations by either forward spacing 3 tape marks (2 if LABEL=NO is used when creating the save tape) or by using a TLBL, specifying file=2 for the save tape.

Standalone RESTORE- Native or VM

Procedure

The procedure for performing a standalone RESTORE, Native or VM, is as follows.

Step Action

1 Load the save tape on any tape drive, use any disk drive. (If running under VM, do not put disk and tape on same virtual channel.)

2 The standalone supervisor must operate in 3270 console mode if in native mode, either 3215 or 3270 mode under VM, or 3215 if running under VM/CMS.

Use the VM 'TERM CON' command to change console mode under non-CMS

VM.

3 Set the IPL load address in the load screen (or load dial/ switches if appropriate). Skip this step if restoring under VM.

4 Press the Enter key/Load key four times. (For some tape drives, pressing the

Enter key three times works better). Since the tape has standard labels this spaces the tape over the VOL, HDR(s), and TAPE MARK preceding the Dr. D standalone supervisor. For 4300 type systems, an error message appears until the supervisor loads. If you use the 'LABEL=NO' operand, only one load is needed since the VOL and HDR records are not present. If under VM, type 'I

CUU' as many times as needed to space over the tape labels (until the

DOCTOR035 message appears).

Preparing for Standalone Restore Page 65

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Step Action

5 After waiting for load to complete, press the PA1/Enter key if using a 3270 type console, or press the Request key. If running under VM, this step is not needed.

Message 35 appears: <-DOCTOR035 ENTER RESTORE DISK TYPE

Reply with:

2311 for

FBA for any FBA disk type

Message 997 appears:

<-DOCTOR997 ENTER ALTERNATE TAPE CUU.

Respond based on what you want to do next:

• If you do not want to use an alternate tape drive and plan to restore from the drive you IPLed, press Enter to continue.

• If you want to use the IPL drive as the primary and another drive as the alternate, enter just the CUU of the alternate drive and restore will begin from the IPLed drive.

• If you want to begin restoring from a drive other than the IPL drive, type either 'CUU,CUU' for the primary and alternate drives, or type

'CUU,' to indicate that restoring is to be done using the one drive.

This can allow the IPLed drive to be released for other use once restoring begins.

For either of the last two options, you may also add ‘,NOREW’ after the last

CUU specified. This operand prevents the rewinding of tapes and supports backups created as standard VSE multi-volume tapes. When using this operand, be sure the tape volume is positioned at the appropriate file.

Page 66 Stand-alone Processing

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Step Action

Message 36 appears:

<-DOCTOR036 ENTER RESTORE DISK CUU.

Enter the CUU of the disk to be restored to and overwritten by the saved disk. If the VOLSER of the restored disk is to be changed from that saved, enter

CUU,VOLSER.

Message 996 appears:

<-DOCTOR996 ENTER VOLSER OF DISK TO RESTORE.

If the disk to be restored is not the next thing on the tape, you must enter the

VOLSER of the saved disk as a search argument. (If you’re uncertain, enter it anyway.)

Message 16 appears:

DOCTOR016 RESTORING TO PACK VOL SER NO....

Press Enter to RESTORE, or type 'C' to terminate.

Message 66 appears:

DOCTOR066 SAVE TAPE CREATED ON........

Press Enter to RESTORE, type 'C' to terminate.

The RESTORE continues until an EOJ MSG appears:

<-DOCTOR040 VOLUME RESTORE COMPLETED-TYPE END OR HIT

ENTER....

Respond based on what you want to do next.

• If another disk is to be restored, press Enter, or type 'END' to terminate processing.

• If you want to restore from another tape, mount it on the drive currently in use.

• If you want Dr. D to unload the tape just completed before restoring from another tape you mount on the same drive, you may also type 'U' (for unload).

WARNING: Remember that only SAVE=ALL|CURRENT|PHYSICAL backups may be restored standalone.

NOTE : When possible, run the RESTORE run under VM or VSE to ensure the greatest possible recovery from non-permanent disk errors.

Standalone RESTORE- Native or VM Page 67

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Standalone Restore under VM/CMS

The following job stream creates a "SAVE=IPL" tape containing the Dr. D standalone supervisor and restore programs. The tape is punched into TEXT cards into the VM reader of the user (JIM in the example). The reader file can then be "received" into CMS, and then renamed to be DRDVMIPL TEXT A1.

Once this is done, you can execute the Dr. D standalone store using a CMS

LOAD and START. The terminal from which the LOAD and START are issued must be set to 3215 mode (that is, CP TERMINAL CONMODE 3215).

* $$ JOB JNM=DRDVMIPL,DISP=D,CLASS=0

* $$ LST CLASS=X,DISP=K,JSEP=0

* $$ PUN CLASS=V,DEST=(*,JIM),JSEP=0

// JOB DRDVMIPL PUNCH SA=IP TAPE INTO TEXT CARDS

* STEP 1 – CREATE STANDALONE PROGRAM

// TLBL TAPEOUT,...

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// MTC REW,SYS007

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=IPL

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

* STEP 2 - PUNCH TEXT CARDS TO VM USER

// ASSGN SYS008,SYS007

// EXEC DRDPUNVM,SIZE=600K

* $$ EOJ

Page 68 Stand-alone Processing

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Standalone RESTORE under VM Using a CMS Saved Segment

Create a CMS Saved Segment for the Dr. D Standalone Restore program.

After this has been done, the saved segment can be IPLed from a CMS Guest and the standalone restore done without the need of having the standalone program at the beginning of the backup tape.

Creating the CMS Saved Segment

1. Under VSE, create a Dr. D standalone IPL tape using this JCL as a model.

// TLBL TAPEOUT,...

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// MTC REW,SYS007

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=IPL

2. Insert the data on the IPL tape into a CMS Saved Segment

ATT 580 * 181

TAPE REW

TAPE FSR,4

Attach a tape drive to a CMS Guest

Mount a scratch tape on that drive

Skip over the VOL/HDR label set

If message DMSP2C110S Error reading TAP1(181) is displayed after the FSR is issued, ignore it

If the save tape was created on an older VSE used and the label set is VOL

HDR1 rather than VOL HDR1 HDR2, use TAPE FSR,3 instead

Or just keep repeating the “IPL 181” command described below until all

VOL/HDR records have been bypassed and the IPL begins. Be sure to enter the “PER INS RANGE 1000” instruction prior to any “IPL 181” commands.

PER INS RANGE 1000

IPL 181

The IPL will stop at the first instruction in the standalone program. Then do the following

DEFSYS DRDVMIPL 1-A7 EW MINSIZE=700K

SAVESYS DRDVMIPL

Return to a CMS environment #CP IPL CMS

The CMS Saved Segment is now ready for use.

Restoring a Dr. D Backup Tape Using the CMS Saved Segment

Attach a tape drive to the CMS Guest that will be used.

Standalone RESTORE under VM Using a CMS Saved Segment Page 69

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Note:

Insure that you have WRITE access to the DASD volume that is being restored. The Standalone Restore program does not provide an error message if this is not the case. It will appear to work, but no data will be restored.

If the DASD is LINKED to the CMS Guest from which the restore will be done:

Q V cuu cuu is the address of the volume that is being restored.

You should see a display similar to

DASD 0163 3380 CKDP13 R/W

If the “R/W” is not present, you do not have Write access to the DASD. Correct this before proceeding.

If the DASD is ATTACHED to the CMS Guest from which the restore will be done:

Q cuu

You should see a display similar to

restored)

DASD 063 name-of-CMS-guest CKDP13 (CKDP13 is volser being

If the “name-of-CMS-guest” is not the one from which the Saved Segment IPL will be done, you do not have Write access to the DASD. Correct this before proceeding.

SPOOL CONSOLE * START Provides an audit trail of activity

ATT 580 * 181 Attach a tape drive to a CMS Guest

Mount the input tape

TAPE REW

IPL DRDVMIPL PARM SSIPL

Restore will fail unless the PARM SSIPL is present

A series of questions will be asked. When answered, the restore process will begin.

When the restore has completed

#CP SPOOL CONSOLE CLOSE

#CP IPL CMS Return to a CMS environment

An example of a restore using a CMS Saved Segment

Page 70 Stand-alone Processing

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

SPOOL CONSOLE * START

Q V 163

DASD 0163 3380 CKDP13 R/W

Í==== Write access is present

ATT 583 * 181

TAPE REW

IPL DRDVMIPL PARM SSIPL

DOCTOR035 ENTER RESTORE DISK TYPE

3380

DOCTOR991 ENTER INPUT TAPE DRIVE CCUU, OR CCUU,CCUU IF USING ALTERNATE

181

DOCTOR036 ENTER RESTORE DISK CCUU

163

DOCTOR996 ENTER VOLSER OF DISK TO RESTORE

CKDP13

DOCTOR016 RESTORING TO PACK VOL SER NO CKDP13 SYS002= 0163

Press ENTER if this is the correct volser and cuu

DOCTOR066 SAVE TAPE CREATED ON 02/03/00 AT 11:32:23

Press ENTER if this is the correct tape

DOCTOR100 RESTORE DATA=SD BLKS:WRITTEN =1

DOCTOR100 ID=CKDP13.QDAS.REL4.SHARE.FILE

DOCTOR100 RESTORE DATA=SD BLKS:WRITTEN =10

………

…… a series if DOCTOR100 messages until the restore is complete.

DOCTOR040 VOLUME RESTORE COMPLETED-TYPE "END" IF THROUGH RESTORING OR,

<-PRESS ENTER OR TYPE "U" (UNLOAD TAPE) TO RESTORE MORE VOLUMES.

END

DOCTOR993 STANDALONE RESTORE PROCESSING COMPLETED

HCPGIR450W CP entered; disabled wait PSW 000A0000 000BDEAD

#CP SPOOL CONSOLE CLOSE

#CP IPL CMS Return to a CMS environment

Standalone RESTORE under VM Using a CMS Saved Segment Page 71

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Working with VSE Libraries

Saving VSE Libraries

The SAVE=LIBRARY command (see page 398) saves a VSE library. All sublibraries and members may be saved or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria can be saved. The output may be either tape or disk. Save files created using SAVE=LIBRARY may only be used as input to RESTORE=LIBRARY operations.

Restoring VSE Libraries

The RESTORE=LIBRARY command (see page 276) restores a VSE library. Input to a RESTORE=LIBRARY must be created by a SAVE=LIBRARY command. All sublibraries and members saved or only those identified through uniquely flexible user selection criteria can be restored. Sublibraries and their members may be restored to the same sublib or a different sublib.

Copying VSE Libraries

The COPY=LIBRARY command (see page 103) copies VSE libraries. Either the entire library or only a portion of the file may be copied.

Listing the VSE Library

The FUNCTION=LDIR command (see page 198) provides a compact (two-up format) directory listing of a VSE library. Members can be selected for listing by their library, sublibrary, type, specific or generic member name, and by the time stamp. A library recap is produced giving statistics by library, sublibrary, and member type.

Page 72 Working with VSE Libraries

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Miscellaneous Functions

Creating VM Minidisks from VSE

The usual method of VM minidisk creation requires that the DSF utility be used to initialize the minidisk, a function not currently in VSE. The FUNCTION=MC command (see page 212) eliminates that limitation by allowing the creation of the minidisk directly under VSE. VM minidisks created by this function are capable of being attached and used immediately under VSE without the need for an IPL.

Extract Data Files From Save File

The FUNCTION=SORT command (see page 223) allows the data portion of a

Dr. D save file on tape or disk to be extracted and passed as input to the user’s

SORT program. Multiple sort functions may be requested within a single Dr. D execution but only one data file is extracted per request.

List Contents of a Save File

The FUNCTION=LTAPE command (see page 204) creates a report displaying the contents of a Dr. D save file. All of the following is noted on the printer and/or

SYSLOG:

• The presence of standalone IPL records on the front of the tape

• The time and date the tape was created

• A description of each save that was done to create the tape.

Tape Copy Feature

The FUNCTION=CTAPE command (see page 171) can copy tapes in two different modes. The first copies at the logical tape file level, with an open and close for each input and output tape. The second copies in 'image' mode, does not open or close tapes, and expects each input tape to fit within the limits of its corresponding output tape. In either mode, tape blocks can be modified by supplying pairs of scan and replace control cards.

Tape Test Feature

The FUNCTION=TAPETEST command (see page 227) tests tapes by writing a block of data continuously over the length of the reel or cartridge. A report is produced showing the number of 'erase gaps' and 'unrecoverable errors' encountered for each cartridge or reel.

Creating VM Minidisks from VSE Page 73

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Command Reference

Overview of Commands

SAVE Commands

Command Usage

SAVE=ALL Save all tracks/blocks (including vol1, IPL bootstrap and VTOC) on a disk. Save files may be used only by RESTORE=ALL and standalone operations.

SAVE=CURRENT

SAVE=DATA

SAVE=IPL

SAVE=LIBRARY

SAVE=LOGICAL

(Volume)

Save only used tracks/blocks (including vol1,

IPL bootstrap and VTOC) on a disk. Save files may be used only by RESTORE=CURRENT and standalone operations.

Save individual non-VSAM file using PIOCS.

Save files may be used by RESTORE=DATA and RESTORE=SDISK operations. May also be used to create User Data Files.

Save only IPL bootstrap. This file is used to initiate standalone operations.

Save VSE libraries, sublibraries and/or individual members. Save files may be used only by RESTORE=LIBRARY operations.

Save one or more data files on one or more disks. Save files may be used by

RESTORE=LOGICAL – Volume,

RESTORE=DATA and RESTORE=SDISK operations.

SAVE=LOGICAL

(VSAM)

SAVE=NOPERATION

SAVE=PHYSICAL

SAVE=SDISK

SAVE=VSAM

Save one or more VSAM clusters in a VSAM catalog. Save files may be used by

RESTORE=LOGICAL – VSAM and

RESTORE=VSAM operations.

Used to perform “immediate” operations and to establish globals.

Save tracks/blocks on a disk by specification of absolute track/block addresses. Save files may be used only by RESTORE=PHYSICAL and standalone operations.

Save individual non-VSAM file using LIOCS.

Save files may be used by RESTORE=DATA and RESTORE=SDISK operations. May also be used to create User Data Files.

Save individual VSAM clusters. Save files may be used by RESTORE=VSAM. May also be used to create User Data Files.

Page 74 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Overview of Commands Page 75

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RESTORE Commands

Command Usage

RESTORE=ALL Restore all tracks/blocks (including vol1, IPL bootstrap and VTOC) on a disk. May also be executed standalone. Uses as input only save files created by SAVE=ALL operations.

RESTORE=CURRENT Restore only used tracks/blocks (including vol1, IPL bootstrap and VTOC) on a disk. May also be executed standalone. Uses as input only save files created by SAVE=CURRENT operations.

RESTORE=DATA

RESTORE=ERASE

RESTORE=EXPIRATION

RESTORE=LIBRARY

RESTORE=LOGICAL

(Volume)

RESTORE=LOGICAL

(VSAM)

Restore individual non-VSAM file using

PIOCS. Uses as input save files created by:

• SAVE=LOGICAL – Volume

• SAVE=DATA

• SAVE=SDISK

• User Data File

• Other Backup Product Tape

Physically erase a portion of a disk.

Change expiration date for files in VTOC, modify VSAM data space VTOC entries from

DA back to VSAM specification and delete files in VTOC.

Restore, create or extend a VSE library. Restores entire VSE library or selected sublibraries and/or members. Uses as input only save files created by SAVE=LIBRARY operations.

Restore one or more data files on one or more disks. Uses as input only save files created by

SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume) operations.

Restore one or more VSAM clusters in a VSAM catalog. Uses as Input only save files created by

SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM) operations.

RESTORE=NOPERATION Used to perform “immediate “operations and to establish globals.

RESTORE=PHYSICAL

RESTORE=PUT

RESTORE=SDISK

Restore tracks/blocks on a disk by specification of absolute track/block addresses. May also be executed standalone. Uses as input only save files created by SAVE=PHYSICAL operations.

Updates VTOC with new Format-1 label without opening a file.

Restore individual non-VSAM file using

LIOCS. Uses as input save files created by:

• SAVE=LOGICAL – Volume

• SAVE=DATA (SD files only)

• SAVE=SDISK

• User Data File

Page 76 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

RESTORE=VSAM

• Other Backup Product Tape

Restore individual VSAM clusters. Uses as input save files created by:

• SAVE=LOGICAL – VSAM

• SAVE=VSAM

• User Data File

• Other Backup Product Tape

COPY Commands

Command Usage

COPY=ALL Copy all tracks/blocks (including vol1, IPL bootstrap and VTOC) on a disk to another disk.

COPY=DATA

COPY=LIBRARY

COPY=NOPERATION

IPL bootstrap and VTOC) on a disk to another disk.

Copy individual non-VSAM file using PIOCS to another disk.

Copy VSE libraries, sublibraries and/or individual members to another VSE library.

Used to perform “immediate“ operations and to establish globals.

COPY=SDISK of absolute track/block addresses to another disk or different area on the same disk.

Copy individual non-VSAM file using LIOCS to another disk. individual

VSAM catalog.

Overview of Commands Page 77

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FUNCTION commands

Command Usage

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX High speed operation for building VSAM alternate indices

FUNCTION=CTAPE

FUNCTION=DELETE

FUNCTION=DFIX

Tape to tape copy

Delete one or more VSAM clusters, VSAM data spaces and non-VSAM files

Makes files permanent by changing expiration date in VTOC to 2099/366

FUNCTION=LDIR

FUNCTION=LTAPE

FUNCTION=LVTOC

FUNCTION=MC

List contents of a VSE library.

List contents of a Dr. D save file.

List contents of a VTOC.

Create VM minidisks under VSE.

FUNCTION=PUNCH

FUNCTION=SORT

Punch IDCAMS DELETE/DEFINE statements for one or more VSAM clusters and punch Job

Control DLBL/EXTENT statements for entries in a VTOC.

Extract data portion from a saved tape and optionally sort it.

Test tape and produce a tape error map. FUNCTION=TAPETEST

FUNCTION=VERIFY Invoke IDCAMS VERIFY function for one or more VSAM clusters in a VSAM catalog.

FUNCTION=VTOCMOVE Move or resize an existing VTOC.

Page 78 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

COPY|RESTORE|SAVE=NOPERATION

The COPY|RESTORE|SAVE=NOPERATION command communicates with

Dr. D without performing a real copy, save, or restore process. It may be used before and/or after the actual process command. On it, global operands and other operands requiring immediate processing may be specified. Values set by global operands remain in effect for the duration of the Dr. D execution or until changed by a subsequent specification of the same operand with a different value. Refer to the Global? Column associated with each individual command to determine the available global options that may be specified. As many COPY|

RESTORE|SAVE=NOPERATION statements may be used as needed. The operands listed here are the non-global operands that are processed immediately upon submission.

COPY|RESTORE|SAVE=NOPERATION Operand Summary

COPY|RESTORE|SAVE=NOPERATION

CARDCOUNT=nn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

Yes No

No No

CO py|REstore|SAve=NOperation

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. It must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: CO|RE|SA=NO

CA rdcount=nn

Use this operand to specify a 2-digit decimal number (leading zero) representing a count of SAVE, COPY, and RESTORE commands. Although it does not have to appear on the first control card, it cannot appear more than once. It represents a count of control cards including the one it appears on until the last one that should be in the job stream. This count excludes continuation cards, '$$$$$$' cards, the ‘/@’ card and the '/*' card. If the specified count is either exceeded or not fulfilled, the operator is informed.

Abbreviation: CA=nn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80- character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

This operand may be specified along with a Save, Copy, or Restore function, in which case it logs out immediately before any processing is done, or it can be on a card all by itself. If the message contains imbedded blanks/commas/equal signs, it must be enclosed in single quotes.

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Use this operand on a NOPERATION command to force immediate tape positioning.

NOr Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

REw

RUn

Immediately rewind the tape.

Immediately unload the tape.

This operand may be specified twice on a statement during RESTORE operations; once for tape positioning and once to specify the Product Identifier when using a backup tape created by anther product.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TA pe=F1|F2|F3|F4|F5|F6

Use this operand to indicate the use of another software product’s backup tape as input to a RESTORE=DATA, RESTORE=SDISK or RESTORE=VSAM command.

The values for each tape are:

Disk Utility System

Westinghouse Disk Utility System Product (DUSP)

Product Identifier

Westinghouse Disk Utility (DUS)

Computer Associates DYNUTIL

Disk Utility System Product (DUSP 2.0.1) /MAXBACK

Computer Associates Faver VSAM Utility

Computer Associates Faver2 Disk Utility

Abbreviation: TA=F1|F2|F3|F4|F5|F6

Page 80 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Position Tape and Issue Operator Message

This example demonstrates positioning a tape and issuing an operator message.

You rewind the tape before the RESTORE and then unload it after the RESTORE.

When the tape is unloaded, tell operator where to put the tape.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RE=NO,TA=REW

RESTORE=LOGICAL,RC=UCAT1,AUTO=YES,FD=D

RE=NO,TA=RUN,OP=’PLEASE TAKE TAPE TO LIBRARY’

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

COPY=ALL

The COPY=ALL command copies every track/block on a disk to another disk. A disk may be copied to a disk whose size and location of VTOC differs from the input disk. However, at the conclusion of the COPY, the output disk's volume label, size and location of the VTOC are identical to the input disk. Use the

VOLOUT operand to set the volume serial number of the output disk to a value different from the volume serial number of the input disk.

The input disk is determined by the volume assignment associated with the

SSYSNO operand or the volume associated with the volser as defined by the

SVOLID operand. If neither SVOLID nor SSYSNO is specified, then the disk having the default SSYSNO assigned to it is used as input to the copy. The default SSYSNO as supplied is SYS001 but may be changed by the installation administrator (refer to Configure System Options on page 12 for additional information). Use of SVOLID is recommended allowing Dr. D to automatically make the assignment

The output disk is determined by the volume assignment associated with the

RSYSNO operand or the volume associated with the volser as defined by the

RVOLID operand. If neither RVOLID nor RSYSNO is specified, then the disk having the default RSYSNO assigned to it is used as output of the copy. The default RSYSNO as supplied is SYS002 but may be changed by the installation administrator (refer to Configure System Options on page 12 for additional information). Use of RVOLID is recommended allowing Dr. D to automatically make the assignment.

For additional protection, set UPSI bit 0 to 0. This allows you to insure the correct disk volume is being copied. If UPSI bit 0 is set to 1, the copy operation occurs without operator intervention. Additionally, the HV operand may be used to insure no other applications update the VTOC until after the copy is complete.

The SHALT operand can be used to set the upper/ending disk address to be copied. AREA=SELECT may be used to define the track/blocks on the input disk that are to be copied. AREA=REJECT may be used to copy the volume with the exception of specific track/block addresses. The AREA operand should only be used when copying non-VSE initialized disk (for example, VM minidisk).

NOTE: Without SHALT or AREA, the entire volume will be copied.

Be careful when not copying an entire disk because the VTOC extent from the input disk is also copied. If there are additional files that resided outside the area restricted for copy, those files are still reflected in the VTOC. The Dr. D

FUNCTION=DELETE command (refer to page 178) may be use to remove any unwanted VTOC entries.

Page 82 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Control Statement Operands

COPY=ALL Operand Summary

COPY=ALL

AREA=SELECT|REJECT

CK=YES|NO

GR=nnn

HV=NO|YES|HOLD

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

RSYSNO=SYSnnn

RVOLID=xxxxxx

SEQNO=nn

SHALT=ccchh|block

SSYSNO=SYSnnn

SVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

UPSI=012345678

VM=NO|YES

VOLOUT=xxxxxx

Yes No

No No

Yes

NOTE 1

Yes

NOTE 2

Yes

NOTE 1: Either RSYSNO (or defaulted to) or RVOLID is required. Use the

RVOLID operand at all times in place of RSYSNO.

NOTE 2: Either SSYSNO (or defaulted to) or SVOLID is required. Use the

SVOLID operand at all times in place of SSYSNO.

CO py=ALL

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. It must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: CO=AL

AR ea=SElect|REject

Use this operand to indicate that one or more area selector statements immediately follow this statement. It allows volume COPY operations to be selective down to the cylinder/head or FBA block level. If this operand is specified on a Dr. D request that is continued across multiple control statements, it must be on the last of the continued control statements.

COPY=ALL Page 83

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

One or more selector statements must follow to identify the tracks/blocks to be selected (AREA=SELECT) or rejected (AREA=REJECT).

Each area selector consists of a start and end address pair. The start address is separated from the end address by a hyphen (-). For ECKD and CKD addresses, specify the addresses in cylinder and head (ccchh) format. For FBA devices, specify the block number. If an R follows the start and end address pair, it indicates the process is reversed for that statement only.

As an example on a 3390, the following area selector statements select from cylinder 1, head 0 up to cylinder 12, head 0 and reject cylinder 4, head 0 when used with AREA=SELECT. When used with AREA=REJECT, it rejects all data from cylinder 1, head 0 up to cylinder 12, head 0 but selects cylinder 4, head 0.

100-1200

400-400R

You may also specify ‘TO=ccchh’ on an AREA selector statement. This allows the selected area to be copied to a new cylinder and head location. If the 'cccchh' is preceded by the letter 'K', the cylinder number of the input (source) area is retained. This optional operand must be separated from the start and end address pair by at least 1 space.

An additional statement is required to terminate area selector statements. As with terminating control statements (see page 20), either a /@ or /* statement may be used. For clarity in reading the jobstreams you create, use the /@ as the terminating statement for selector statements; use the /* as the terminating statement for Dr. D control statements.

Abbreviation: AR=SE|RE

CK =YEs|NO

This operand checks for CKD and ECKD disk count area errors during copy of volumes (such as VM minidisk) where the count area may not reflect the true location of the physical blocks. CK=YES, the default, checks for errors and, if any are found, issues the DOCTOR076 error message. Using CK=NO prevents the issuance of the error message.

Abbreviation: CK=YE|NO

GR =nnn

This operand reserves GETVIS memory so that GETVIS failures do not occur when non-Dr. D software needs partition GETVIS to perform functions such as tape end of volume or closing of files. The size of the area is specified in thousands of bytes (K) (for example, GR=100 reserves 104,000 bytes of storage).

This memory is released before any Dr. D initiated OPEN, CLOSE, Tape EOV, or end of job. This operand should be specified on an initial NOPERATION control statement. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you specify a different value for it.

Page 84 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

HV =NO|YEs|HOld

Use this operand during volume copy to lock the VTOC of the disk, thereby preventing the addition/deletion of files on the disk. HV=NO is default.

HV=YES should be used on the first disk copy within an execution of Dr. D and then HV=HOLD should be used to continue to hold the lock on following functions within that Dr. D execution.

Abbreviation: HV=NO|YE|HO

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Use this operand to specify a programmer logical unit number (SYS number) for printer output. It should be specified on an initial NOPERATION control statement. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you specify a different value for it.

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

It may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or FUNCTION command, in which case it logs out immediately before any processing is done, or it can be on a card all by itself. If the message contains imbedded blanks/commas/equal signs, it must be enclosed in single quotes.

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

BOTH forces UPSI=X11XXXXX to be set which causes control statements and processing statistics to be displayed on SYSLOG. PRINT=NO is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RP =YEs|NO

Specify YES to cause Dr. D to terminate with a return code even when abnormal termination occurs. This technique allows conditional JCL to handle exceptional conditions raised by Dr. D. Non-zero return codes are listed in the Messages section of this manual. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

COPY=ALL Page 85

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RS ysno=SYSnnn

Use this operand to define the logical unit number for the output (target) disk during a copy operation. RSYSNO=SYS002 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. For greater control over the copy operation, use the RVOLID operand in place of RSYSNO.

Either RSYSNO or RVOLID is required on the copy control statement.

Abbreviation: RS=SYSnnn

RV olid=xxxxxx

Use this operand to specify the current volser of the output (target) volume during a copy operation.

Either RSYSNO or RVOLID is required on the copy control statement.

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx

SE qno=nn

Specify a 2-digit value from 01 through 99 representing the sequence number of this copy among all (non-NOPERATION) saves, copies, or restores in this job step. If specified, Dr. D checks to see that nn equals an internal counter which is incremented by one for each non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore attempted. The first non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore is always one.

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SH alt=ccchh|block

Use this operand to specify the stopping track/block on the source device during a copy operation. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0- to 6-digit cylinder

(ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). For FBA devices, specify a 1- to 8-digit block number.

Abbreviation: SH=ccchh|block

SS ysno=SYSnnn

Use this operand to define the logical unit number for the input (source) disk during a copy operation. SSYSNO=SYS001 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. For greater control over the copy operation, use the SVOLID operand in place of SSYSNO.

Either SSYSNO or SVOLID is required on the copy control statement.

Abbreviation: SS=SYSnnn

SV olid=xxxxxx

Use this operand to specify the volser of the input (source) volume during a copy operation.

Page 86 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Either SSYSNO or SVOLID is required on the copy control statement.

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

VM =NO|YEs

Use this operand to copy non-VSE volumes (that is, VM minidisk) on CKD and

ECKD devices. Specifying YES bypasses disk count area errors caused by the count area not reflecting the true location of the physical blocks.

Abbreviation: VM=NO|YES

VO lout=xxxxxx

Use this operand to set the volume serial number of the output (target) disk being restored. The default, if this operand is omitted, is to change the output volume serial number to be the same as the volume serial number as the input disk volser.

Abbreviation: VO=xxxxxx

COPY=ALL Page 87

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Examples

Example: COPY all tracks/blocks on disk

This job stream copies all tracks/blocks on the volume CKDP12 to CKDP17.

Following the restore, the disk volser is CKDP17.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=NO,UPSI=011,PRINT=LIST

COPY=ALL,SV=CKDP12,RV=CKDP17,VO=CKDP17

Example: Selective COPY of all tracks/blocks

This example copies only the first 100 cylinders on a 3380 to another pack. The output pack is setup to retain its original volser.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=NO,UPSI=011,PRINT=LIST

COPY=ALL,SV=CKDP12,RV=CKDP17,VO=CKDP17,SHALT=9914

Page 88 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

COPY=CURRENT

The COPY=CURRENT command copies the IPL track/block, VTOC extent and data files identified in the VTOC onto another disk. A disk may be copied to another disk whose size and location of VTOC differs from the input disk.

However, at the conclusion of the COPY the output disk's volume label, size and location of the VTOC are identical to the input disk. Use the VOLOUT operand to set the volume serial number of the output disk to a value different from the volume serial number of the input disk.

The input disk is determined by the volume assignment associated with the

SSYSNO operand or the volume associated with the volser as defined by the

SVOLID operand. If neither SVOLSID nor SSYSNO is specified, then the disk having the default SSYSNO assigned to it is used as input to the copy. The default SSYSNO as supplied is SYS001 but may be changed by the installation administrator (refer to Configure System Options on page 12 for additional information). Use of SVOLID is recommended. When using SVOLID, Dr. D automatically makes the assignment

The output disk is determined by the volume assignment associated with the

RSYSNO operand or the volume associated with the volser as defined by the

RVOLID operand. If neither RVOLSID nor RSYSNO is specified, then the disk having the default RSYSNO assigned to it is used as output of the copy. The default RSYSNO as supplied is SYS002 but may be changed by the installation administrator (refer to Configure System Options on page 12 for additional information). Use of RVOLID is recommended. When using RVOLID, Dr. D automatically makes the assignment.

Files may be selected based upon the expiration date using the EXPIRED operand. Without EXPIRED, the entire volume is copied. When not copying an entire disk, caution must be exercised because the VTOC extent from the input disk is also copied. If there are additional files that reside outside the area restricted for copy, those files are still reflected in the VTOC. The Dr. D

FUNCTION=DELETE command (refer to page 178) may be used to remove any unwanted VTOC entries.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

COPY=CURRENT

CK=YES|NO

EOF=YES

COPY=CURRENT Operand Summary

Operand Required? Global?

Yes

EXPIRED=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

GR=nnn

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

RSYSNO=SYSnnn

RVOLID=xxxxxx

SEQNO=nn

NOTE 1

Yes

SSYSNO=SYSnnn

SVOLID=xxxxxx

UPSI=012345678

VOLOUT=xxxxxx

NOTE 2

Yes

NOTE 1: Either RSYSNO (or defaulted to) or RVOLID is required. Use the

RVOLID operand at all times in place of RSYSNO.

NOTE 2:

Either SSYSNO (or defaulted to) or SVOLID is required. Use the

SVOLID operand at all times in place of SSYSNO.

CO py=CUrrent

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. It must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: CO=CU

CK =YEs|NO

Page 90 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: CK=YE|NO

EO f=YEs

When used on CKD and ECKD devices, this operand causes Dr. D to continue copying only until an EOF is detected. If this operand is omitted, the entire extent of each file, as denoted in the VTOC, is copied.

Abbreviation: EO=YE

EX pired=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyyyddd

This operand causes Dr. D to select files according to their expiration dates. A file is considered unexpired when its expiration date is greater than the current system date.

Value Action

Y Select all files regardless of expiration date

N Select only unexpired files (default)

O+n

Select only expired files

Select only expired files after adjusting the current system date by

n days (n days may be 1-3 digits)

O-n

yyddd Select only unexpired files using 19yyddd as the current system date

yyyyddd Select only unexpired files using yyyyddd instead of the current system date

Abbreviation: EX=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

FUNCTION command, in which case it logs out immediately before any processing is done, or it can be on a card all by itself. If the message contains imbedded blanks/commas/equal signs, it must be enclosed in single quotes.

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

RS ysno=SYSnnn

Abbreviation: RS=SYSnnn

RV olid=xxxxxx

Use this operand to specify the current volser of the output (target) volume during a copy operation.

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx

SE qno=nn

Page 92 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D attempted. The first non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore is always one.

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SS ysno=SYSnnn

Abbreviation: SS=SYSnnn

SV olid=xxxxxx

Use this operand to specify the volser of the input (source) volume during a copy operation.

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

VO lout=xxxxxx

VOLOUT is used to set the volume serial number of the output (target) disk being restored. The default, if this operand is omitted, is to change the output volume serial number to be the same as the volume serial number as the input disk volser.

Abbreviation: VO=xxxxxx

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Examples

Example: Copy active tracks/blocks on disk

This job stream copies only active tracks/blocks on the volume CKDP12 to

CKDP17. Following the restore, the disk volser is CKDP17.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=NO,UPSI=011,PRINT=LIST

COPY=CURRENT,SV=CKDP12,RV=CKDP17,VO=CKDP17

Page 94 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

COPY=DATA

The COPY=DATA command performs a disk-to-disk copy of a single non-VSAM file. It supports direct access (DA) files, sequential disk (SD) files and ISAM files.

It uses PIOCS to read and write the data. A Job Control DLBL statement is required to identify both the input and output files. The SFILENAME operand identifies the input DLBL filename and RFILENAME identifies the output DLBL filename. Both operands are required and cannot reference the same filename.

Only one file may be copied per control statement.

Dr. D interrogates the RFILENAME DLBL to ascertain whether the output file is

SD, DA or ISAM. For ECKD and CKD disk, an SD file may be copied as a DA and vice-versa. The output file’s extents are completely independent of those of the input file; they may differ in size, placement and device type.

Usually all sequential files and some direct access files have an EOF record after the last data record of the last prime data extent. If this is so, specifying EOF=YES causes Dr. D to stop copying after reading an EOF record. When copying sequential disk files between device types, EOF=YES is needed because the format of the end-of-file marker may be different. Specification of EOF=YES insures proper placement and format of the EOF.

For SD files, a logical record count may be obtained through use of the LR=

(Logical Record Length) operand and specification of UPSI bit 2 (UPSI XX1) specified via Job Control, UPSI operand or default UPSI value. For variable blocked files, only the UPSI is required.

Using the RMODE Operand

The RMODE (Restore Mode) is an internal switch in Dr. D that is set and used when writing the output file. Set RMODE to either an 'I' for image or 'S' for squeeze.

When set to 'I', Dr. D writes the output file as a mirror image of the input file.

Partially used tracks, unused tracks, records out of sequence on a track, all appear copied in the same format.

When RMODE is set to 'S', the full track capacity of the output disk is employed.

If there are any partial or unused tracks in the input extent, that unused area is dropped and ignored. As many data records as can be accommodated are written on each track. Also, any records that are out of sequence on an input track are written in the physical order they appear on the input track. However, all records written on a track are sequentially numbered.

When copying a DA data file, RMODE is set to 'I' to accommodate the majority of applications using DA files. Thus, if relative track addressing is used, the DA file may be relocated and still accessed.

When copying an SD file, RMODE is set to 'S' if it is copied to a new disk type.

COPY=DATA Page 95

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Specifying RMODE=I or RMODE=S overrides the default as described above.

The only reason for specifying this override is in conversion of direct access from one disk type to another.

Using the SYNC Operand

Dr. D processes multi-extent data files as normally expected under VSE. The size and number of extents of the input file and output file are independent of each other. Upon copying, Dr. D fills each extent in order, switching to the next extent as the current one becomes full (the input and output extents are treated asynchronously).

However, sometimes you might want to switch output extents before each fills up. Using the SYNC=YES operand causes the input and output files' extents to become 'SYNCHRONIZED'.

As an example, if there were 100 and 200 records respectively in the first and second extents of a input file, then there are exactly 100 and 200 records, respectively, in the first and second extents of the output file (even though they might be able to hold more). When SYNC=YES is specified, the output file must have as many extents as the input file and each output extent must be able to accommodate at least as many records as its corresponding input extent. Putting

SYNC=YES for an ISAM file is ignored.

Control Statement Operands

COPY=DATA Operand Summary

Operand

COPY=DATA

BLOCKSIZE=n

CK=YES|NO

EOF=YES

GR=nnn

LRECSIZE=n

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RFILENAME=filename

RMODE=I|S

RP=YES|NO

R0=YES|NO

SEQNO=nn

SFILENAME=filename

SYNC=YES

UPSI=012345678

Yes

Required? Global?

Yes

Page 96 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

CO py=DAta

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. It must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: CO=DA

BL ocksize=n

Specify a 5-digit value from 16000 through 65496 to indicate the size of a copy work area. The value specified may be other than the installation default value but must never be less than the largest data block saved plus 16. Once a blocksize has been set, it remains in effect for the remainder of the Dr. D execution or until set again using this same operand. The default shipped with Dr. D is 65496; your installation administrator may change it.

Abbreviation: BL=n

CK =YEs|NO

This operand checks for CKD and ECKD disk count area errors during backup of files or volumes (such as VM minidisk) where the count area may not reflect the true location of the physical blocks. CK=YES, the default, checks for errors and, if any are found, issues the DOCTOR076 error message. Using CK=NO prevents the issuance of the error message.

Abbreviation: CK=YE|NO

EO f=YEs

Use this operand on CKD and ECKD devices to cause Dr. D to continue copying only until an EOF is detected. Because the format of the end-of-file marker may be different between device types, the EOF=YES operand is needed to insure proper placement and format of the EOF when copying SD files between device types.

Abbreviation: EO=YE

GR =nnn

Use this operand to reserve GETVIS memory so that GETVIS failures do not occur when non-Dr. D software needs partition GETVIS to perform functions such as tape end of volume or closing of files. The size of the area is specified in thousands of bytes (K) (for example, GR=100 reserves 104,000 bytes of storage).

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LR ecsize=n

Use this operand to enable display of both the number of records copied in addition to the number of blocks copied. It identifies the length of each logical

COPY=DATA Page 97

Dr. D

USER GUIDE record found in an input file containing fixed-length records. For example, if the input user data file contains 80-byte logical records blocked up to 10 to form a maximum 800-byte physical record, this operand would be specified as LR=80.

Abbreviation: LR=n

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RF ilename=filename

Specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement for the output file. The Job Control DLBL label statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas.

Abbreviation: RF=filename

Page 98 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

RM ode=I|S

Use this operand to indicate how Dr. D is to arrange the data being written on the tracks of the output disk during the copy.

Value Action

Copy file in Image mode. The tracks/blocks being restored are a mirror image of the saved tracks/blocks.

Copy file in Squeeze mode. In this mode, as many input blocks as possible are written to each output track. Unused tracks or portions of track on the saved extent are skipped over, and all data records are squeezed on the restoring device, using the full capacity of the track. This option is valid only with CKD and ECKD devices.

Suppose your input file resides on a 3375 and it is to be copied it to a 3380. If the

3375 extent had five disk blocks per track, by putting RMODE=I, the 3380 extent also has five records per track even though it can contain more.

Likewise, if the 3375 had a completely blank track, so does the 3380. In other words, RMODE=I copies on a track by track basis exactly mirroring the input extent. On the other hand, specifying RMODE=S informs Dr. D to use the full track capacity of the output device.

RMODE defaults to 'IMAGE' (RMODE=I) unless the file type is SD and the disk type changes, it may be necessary to override that assumption due to a peculiarity in the nature of the file. For SD files, RMODE defaults to ‘SQUEEZE’

(RMODE=S).

Abbreviation: RM=I|S

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

R0 =YEs|NO

'R0=YES' specifies that the data portion of R0 is to be saved or restored. If the R0 records are in standard format, then it is usually not necessary to restore them, and restore time can be reduced substantially. Certain file types (COBOL direct access and DBOMP) do use the data portion of R0, so care should be used in using this operand, even though those file types are rarely used, having been replaced by VSAM in most cases.

Abbreviation: R0=YE|NO

COPY=DATA Page 99

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

SE qno=nn

Use this operand to specify a 2-digit value from 01 through 99 representing the sequence number of this copy among all (non-NOPERATION) saves, copies, or restores in this job step. If specified, Dr. D checks to see that nn equals an internal counter which is incremented by one for each non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore attempted. The first non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore is always one. This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SF ilename=filename

Use this operand to specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement of the file to be copied. The Job Control DLBL label statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas.

Abbreviation: SF=filename

SY nc=YEs

Normally Dr. D treats a multi-extent output disk area as one contiguous prime data area. Specifying SYNC=YES causes the same number of records to be written in each extent as were read from the saved extent (the save and restore extents are synchronized). Thus, when SYNC=YES operand is used the number of extents in the saved and restored files must be the same and each restore extent must be large enough to contain the number of records to contain its corresponding save extent.

Abbreviation: SY=YE

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

Page 100 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Copy SD file

This example copies a sequential disk (SD) file from PACK01 to PACK02. If both devices are the same device type, the output file are a mirror image of the input file (RMODE=I is default when device types are the same). If the device types are different, Dr. D “squeezes” the output file thereby maximizing the capacities of the output device type (RMODE=S is default when device types are different).

The copy stops when the end-of-file (EOF) is read on the input file. Because the format of the end-of-file marker may be different between device types, the

EOF=YES operand is needed to insure proper placement and format of the EOF.

// ASSGN SYS001,132

// ASSGN SYS002,2C2

// DLBL INPUT,'INPUT.FILE'

// EXTENT SYS001,PACK01,1,0,20,380

// DLBL OUTPUT,'OUTPUT.FILE',2099/365

// EXTENT SYS002,PACK02,1,0,19,380

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=DATA,SFILENAME=INPUT,RFILENAME=OUTPUT,EOF=YES

Example: Copy DA file

This example assumes a DA file organized in the following manner: While the records are randomly scattered throughout the disk, the entire extent has been, in fact, originally pre-formatted with 'X' number of 'EMPTY' blocks per track. As a result, there are only 'EMPTY' blocks containing no data. Each record is accessed by randomizing its key to a relative track and record address. One file resides on a 3350. The example transfers it to a 3380.

NOTE : If 'RM=S' is not on the control card, it produces the same number of blocks per track on both devices. This program is modified to use the full capacity of the 3380 track. As a result, the example squeezes as many blocks per track as possible onto the 3380.

// ASSGN SYS001,132

// ASSGN SYS002,1C2

// DLBL F3350,'F3350',,DA

// EXTENT SYS001,111111,1,0,20,380

// DLBL F3380,'F3380',2099/365,DA

// EXTENT SYS002,111111,1,0,19,380

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=DATA,SFILENAME=F3350,RFILENAME=F3380,RMODE=SQUEEZE

Example: Copy multiple extents to a single extent

This example creates a job stream to copy a three extent file to a single extent file.

COPY=DATA Page 101

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

// ASSGN SYS001,111

// DLBL MULTI,’MULTI.EXTENT’

// EXTENT SYS001,111111,1,0,20,20

// EXTENT SYS001,111111,1,1,40,20

// EXTENT SYS001,111111,1,2,60,20

// DLBL SINGLE,’SINGLE.EXTENT’,2099/365

// EXTENT SYS001,111111,1,0,1000,60

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=DATA,SFILENAME=MULTI,RFILENAME=SINGLE

Example: Split one extent into three

This example splits a single extent file into three.

// ASSGN SYS001,111

// DLBL SINGLE,’SINGLE.EXTENT’

// EXTENT SYS001,111111,1,0,1000,60

// DLBL MULTI,’MULTI.EXTENT’,2099/365

// EXTENT SYS001,111111,1,0,20,20

// EXTENT SYS001,111111,1,1,40,20

// EXTENT SYS001,111111,1,2,60,20

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

CO=DA,SF=SINGLE,RF=MULTI

Example: Copy multi-extent file with SYNC=YES

This example takes a 3-extent random file on a 3350 and transfers it over to three larger extents on a 3380. At the same time, it keeps all the records in their corresponding extents.

// ASSGN SYS001,111

// DLBL INPUT,'F3350',,DA

// EXTENT SYS001,654321,1,0,20,100

// EXTENT SYS001,654321,1,1,120,100

// EXTENT SYS001,654321,1,2,220,100

// ASSGN SYS001,112

// DLBL OUTPUT,'F3380',2099/365,DA

// EXTENT SYS002,987654,1,0,19,114

// EXTENT SYS002,987654,1,1,133,114

// EXTENT SYS003,987654,1,2,247,114

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=DATA,SFILENAME=INPUT,RFILENAME=OUTPUT,SYNC=YES

Page 102 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

COPY=LIBRARY

The COPY=LIBRARY command may be used to copy libraries, sublibraries and/or library members from one library to another (pre-sp2 format libraries are not supported). All sublibraries and members may be copied or only those identified through selection criteria may be copied. Sublibraries and their members may be copied to the same sublib or a different sublib.

Job Control DLBL statements are required to identify the input and output libraries. The filename of the input library is identified on the Dr. D control statement through the SFILENAME operand. The filename of the output library is identified on the Dr. D control statement through the RFILENAME operand.

Both the SFILENAME and RFILENAME operands are required.

The MEMBER=SELECT|REJECT and TSTAMP operands may be used to selectively copy sublibraries and/or members. The MEMBER operand uses library selector statements to select or reject by sublib, member type and/or member name. Library selector statements also allow a sublib and its members to be copied to a different sublib in the output library. The TSTAMP operand bases its selection upon the “last update” date and time.

Dr. D uses two different methods for copying library members. The LIBRARY operand controls the method to use. The default method uses Dr. D's own member and directory input/output routines. The second method invokes LIBR for member and directory input/output. This is accomplished by specifying

LIBRARY=LIBR. The two methods differ in several aspects: 1) The LIBR method requires more GETVIS memory and more free space in the library, but may be more suitable for libraries in active use. 2) The LIBR method changes the dates of the each member copied to the current date while Dr. D’s input/output routines retains the dates of the input member during the copy.

When using Dr. D’s own member and directory input/output routines, you may specify the ADD or NEW values with the LIBRARY operand. The ADD value is the default; it merges the input sublib(s) and member(s) into an existing library.

The NEW value informs Dr. D that the output library is to be created prior to the copying of sublibraries and members.

Listing of sublibrary and member names can be controlled by use of the

FORMAT and PRINT operands.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

COPY=LIBRARY

BLOCKSIZE=n

GR=nnn

COPY=LIBRARY Operand Summary

Operand Required? Global?

FORMAT=A|B|C|D|E

LIBRARY=ADD|NEW|LIBR

Yes

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

MEMBER=SELECT|REJECT

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH|YES

RFILENAME=filename

RP=YES|NO

SEQNO=nn

SFILENAME=filename

TSTAMP=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

UPSI=012345678

Yes

CO py=LIbrary

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. It must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: CO=LI

BL ocksize=n

Specify a 5-digit value from 16000 through 65496 to indicate the largest physical block length for a work area. The value specified may be other than the installation default value but must never be less than the largest data block saved plus 16. Once a blocksize has been set, it remains in effect for the remainder of the Dr. D execution or until set again using this same operand. The default shipped with Dr. D is 65496; your installation administrator may change it.

Abbreviation: BL=n

Page 104 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

FO rmat=A|B|C|D|E

Use this operand to control the listing of sublibrary and members names as they are being processed and where the information is issued (SYSLOG or SYSLST).

Value Action

Enable display of member names and sublib names on both

SYSLOG and SYSLST.

Enable display of member names on SYSLST only. Sublib names are displayed on both SYSLOG and SYSLST.

Enable display of member names and sublib names on SYSLST only.

Enable display of member names and sublib names on SYSLOG only.

Do not display member names or sublib names on either SYSLOG or SYSLST. This is the default.

This operand works along with the PRINT operand. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: FO=A|B|C|D|E

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LI brary=Add|New|Libr

Use this operand to define how data is copied to the output library.

Value Action

ADD Merges sublibraries and members selected from the input library into an existing library. Any existing members being copied|restored are replaced. Any sublib or member not currently in the library is added. All existing sublibraries and members not being copied|restored will not be modified. This is the default.

NEW Deletes all existing sublibraries and members in the output library prior to the copy.

LIBR Uses the LIBR i/o routines in place of the Dr. D physical i/o routines.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: LI=A|N|L

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

ME mber=SElect|REject

Use this operand to indicate that one or more library selector statements immediately follow this statement. The library selector statements may be used to specify the sublibrary(s), member type(s) and/or member name(s) to be selected (MEMBER=SELECT) or rejected (MEMBER=REJECT).

There are several types of library selector statements. Sublibrary selectors are prefixed by a ‘+’ sign. Member type selectors are prefixed by a ‘!’ sign. For COPY and RESTORE operations, a “to-sublib” name may be specified by prefixing the

“to-sublib” name with a ‘&’ sign. All other selector statements, without an above mentioned prefix, are considered member name selectors.

All selector statements, with the exception of the “to-sublib” specification, may be either the full or generic name. When specifying a generic name, any position containing a ‘/’ is always considered a match. An asterisk (*) may be used at the end of the name to cause the matching selection to be based upon only those characters preceding the ‘*’. A single ‘*’, without any preceding characters, results in selecting all.

An additional statement is required to terminate library selector statements. As with terminating control statements (see page 20), either a /@ or /* statement may be used. For clarity in reading the jobstreams you create, use the /@ as the terminating statement for selector statements and use the /* as the terminating statement for Dr. D control statements.

Abbreviation: ME=SE|RE

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Page 106 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|Both|YEs

LIST enables the report selected by the FORMAT operand to be printed on

SYSLST only. YES enables the report selected by the FORMAT operand to be displayed on SYSLOG. BOTH cause the report selected by the FORMAT operand to be printed on SYSLST and the same report to be displayed on SYSLOG. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RF ilename=filename

Use this operand to specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement of the library to be restored, defined or extended. The Job Control

DLBL label statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas.

Abbreviation: RF=filename

RP =YEs|NO

This operand determines whether Dr. D terminates with a return code even when abnormal termination occurs. Specify YES to cause Dr. D to terminate with a return code even when abnormal termination occurs. This technique allows conditional JCL to handle exceptional conditions raised by Dr. D. Non-zero return codes are listed in the Messages section of this manual. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

SE qno=nn

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SF ilename=filename

Use this operand to specify the filename identifying the VSE library’s Job Control

DLBL statement. The Job Control DLBL label statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas. If omitted, filename defaults to

SYSLIB.

Abbreviation: SF=filename

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

TS tamp=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

This operand causes selection of files based on their time stamp. The entire time stamp value may be prefixed by either a ‘<’ (indicating selecting entries with time stamps prior to the specified value) or ‘>’ (indicating selecting entries with time stamps equal to or after the specified value). Omission of either a ‘<’ or ‘>’ indicates that the time stamp date must exactly match the file’s time stamp date and any time of day value is ignored.

The time stamp value entered is compared to the actual Greenwich Mean Time values stored and is not adjusted for any difference from local time. For example, local time for the western United States typically is Greenwich Mean Time less 7 hours. A user in that area could define a file at 8:00pm on day 2000/105 and the stored time stamp value would be 2000/106 at 3:00 a.m.

The time stamp date is required and may be entered either as yyddd (yy is windowed: 00-74 = 20yy 75-99 = 19yy) or as a number of days value to be subtracted from the current system date.

The time stamp time is optional and, if entered, is separated from the time stamp date by a single period (.). The time stamp time is comprised of a 2-digit hour (00 through 23) and a 2-digit minute (00 through 59). If the time stamp time is not entered, time is not considered and only date comparisons occur. The following are examples of the TStamp operand:

TS=-0

TS=>-1.1200

TS=>-6 select if stamped today select if stamped after yesterday at 12 noon select if stamped in the last seven days

TS=01100 select if stamped on the 100th day of 2001

TS=>01100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 2001/100

TS=<01100 select if stamped before 2001/100

TS=99100 select if stamped on the 100th day of 1999

TS=>99100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 1999/100

TS=<99100 select if stamped before 1999/100

Abbreviation: TS=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

Page 108 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Copy entire library to an existing library

This example copies the entire PROD library to the TEST library. The TEST library must already exist. Because the LIBRARY operand is omitted, it defaults to ADD. No report is generated.

// DLBL PROD,'VSE-ESA.PROD.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA250

// DLBL TEST,'VSE-ESA.TEST.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA251

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=LIBRARY,SFILENAME=PROD,RFILENAME=TEST

Example: Create a new library using copy

This example copies the entire PROD library to the TEST library. If the TEST library does not exist, it is created immediately prior to the copy. No report is generated.

// DLBL PROD,'VSE-ESA.PROD.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA250

// DLBL TEST,'VSE-ESA.TEST.LIBRARY',2099/365

// EXTENT SYS002,FBA251,1,0,1500,100000

// ASSGN SYS002,251

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=LIBRARY,SFILENAME=PROD,RFILENAME=TEST,LIBRARY=NEW

Example: Copy a library with report generation

This example copies the entire PROD library to the TEST library. The copied sublibraries display on the console and both the sublib copied names and member names are reported on SYSLST.

// DLBL PROD,'VSE-ESA.PROD.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA250

// DLBL TEST,'VSE-ESA.TEST.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA251

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=LIBRARY,SF=PROD,RF=TEST,FORMAT=B,PRINT=YES,UP=111

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Copy selected sublib to different sublib

This example copies all members of the PROD.PR$260 sublibrary to

TEST.PR$261 sublibrary. Both the sublibrary and member names that are saved are reported only on SYSLST.

// DLBL PROD,'VSE-ESA.PROD.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA250

// DLBL TEST,'VSE-ESA.TEST.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA251

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=LIBRARY,SF=PROD,RF=TEST,FORMAT=C,PRINT=LIST,MEMBER=SELECT

+PR$260 SUBLIBRARY PR$260

&PR$261 COPY-TO PR$261

/@ TERMINATES SELECTION

Example: Copy selected members to different sublib

This example copies all phases starting with IJZ which reside in the

PROD.PR$260 sublibrary to TEST.PR$261 sublibrary. Both the sublibrary and member names that are saved are reported only on SYSLST.

// DLBL PROD,'VSE-ESA.PROD.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA250

// DLBL TEST,'VSE-ESA.TEST.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA251

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=LIBRARY,SF=PROD,RF=TEST,FORMAT=C,PRINT=LIST,MEMBER=SELECT

+PR$260 SUBLIBRARY PR$260

&PR$261 COPY-TO PR$261

!PHASE SELECT TYPE 'PHASE'

IJZ///// SELECT MEMBERS PREFIXED BY 'IJZ'

/@ TERMINATES SELECTION

Page 110 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

COPY=PHYSICAL

Dr. D enables users to copy portions of a disk on a physical track/block basis, independent of Volumes, Data Files, or Libraries.

This function is valuable for its ability to manipulate data at the physical level.

This poses some risk in terms of security and possible inadvertent damage to critical data. For that reason, it may be wise to limit its use to qualified authorized personnel. This can be achieved by limiting access to one Dr. D module, DOCTOR02. If a security package is available, the use of DOCTOR02 can be easily controlled; otherwise DOCTOR02 can be placed in a restricted library, or kept on tape and only restored by authorized persons.

This function offers some useful benefits. For example, consider a disk where the third track in the VTOC has been corrupted. All of the VTOC labels are in the first two tracks, but even though the files are accessible, no new files can be added. If we could restore track 4 to track 3, then the VTOC would be fixed and usable. Using Dr. D on a physical track basis, the VTOC can be repaired quickly without unloading/reloading the disk's files.

The disk to be restored is determined by the volume assignment associated with the RSYSNO operand or the volume associated with the volser as defined by the

RVOLID operand. If neither RVOLSID nor RSYSNO is specified, then the disk having the default RSYSNO assigned to it is used as input to the save. The default RSYSNO as supplied is SYS002 but may be changed by the installation administrator (refer to Configure System Options on page 12 for additional information). Use of RVOLID is recommended. When using RVOLID, Dr. D automatically makes the assignment.

Dr. D uses the RBEGIN operand to determine the track/block address where the restore begins. The RHALT operand is used to dictate the track/block address where the restore stops. The disk addresses entered are one to eight numeric digits in length.

If the target disk is an ECKD or CKD type, the two digits at the extreme right are assumed to be the head number, with the rest of the number as the cylinder number. If the target disk is an FBA type, the whole number is the FBA block number. In any case, leading zeros are not required. If an ending address is not entered, it is made equal to the start address and a single track/FBA block operation is performed.

When you are restoring in the physical mode, you must specify the Restore

Mode operand, RMODE. There are four options available for RMODE.

The default is Image mode (RMODE=I). Under this mode, the restore is performed on a track by track basis so that the output mirrors the input. Because of the architecture on FBA devices, Image mode is the only mode needed.

Squeeze mode (RMODE=S), applicable to ECKD and CKD restores only, causes

Dr. D to restore the extent putting the maximum number of records it can fit on each track. Consider the following:

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Three tracks on a 3380 are saved that look like:

TRACK 1 15000-BYTE REC, 15000-BYTE REC

TRACK 2 NO RECORDS - ERASED TRACK

TRACK 3 15000-BYTE REC, 5000-BYTE REC

Restoring those three tracks with RMODE=I would yield the exact same layout:

TRACK 1 15000-BYTE REC, 15000-BYTE REC

TRACK 2 NO RECORDS - ERASED TRACK

TRACK 3 15000-BYTE REC, 5000-BYTE REC

However, if the same operation is done with RMODE=S, the restored tracks would look like:

TRACK 1 15000-BYTE REC, 15000-BYTE REC, 15000-BYTE REC

TRACK 2 5000-BYTE REC

TRACK 3 UNTOUCHED

Add-on mode (RMODE=A) causes Dr. D to restore the input blocks adding them at the CCHHR address specified by RBEGIN.

If Update mode (RMODE=U) is specified, the contents of each input block is

'UPDATED' into the existing blocks of the output extent, allowing individual blocks on a track to be updated without erasing other blocks on that track.

Because Add-on and Update modes (RMODE=A|U) can operate at the record level, a suffix must be appended to the RBEGIN and RHALT operands. Use the suffix Rnnn if record (block) level processing is required. Both Add-on and

Update modes are applicable to ECKD and CKD restores only.

For additional protection, set UPSI bit 0 to 0. This allows you to insure the correct disk volume is being restored and the correct input tape is being used. If UPSI bit

0 is set to 1, the restore operation occurs without operator intervention.

When restoring non-VSE initialized disk (for example, VM minidisk), the AREA operand is required. AREA=SELECT may be used to define the track/blocks on the save tape that are to be restored to the RBEGIN/RHALT addresses.

AREA=REJECT may be used to restore the all tracks/blocks between the

RBEGIN/RHALT addresses with the exception of specific track/block addresses.

The RBEGIN operand is always required.

WARNING: You should never copy the first track of the VTOC of one disk to the same track of a VTOC on another disk unless neither disk has alternate tracks assigned. If either disk has alternate tracks, it could result in two or more defective tracks assigned to the same alternate.

Page 112 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Control Statement Operands

COPY=PHYSICAL Operand Summary

COPY=PHYSICAL

CBEGIN=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

CHALT=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

CK=YES|NO

CSYSNO=SYSnnn

CVOLID=volser

GR=nnn

HV=NO|YES|HOLD

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RBEGIN=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

RHALT=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

RMODE=I|S|U|A

RP=YES|NO

RSYSNO=SYSnnn

RVOLID=xxxxxx

SBEGIN=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

SEQNO=nn

SHALT=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

SSYSNO=SYSnnn

SVOLID=xxxxxx

UPSI=012345678

VM=NO|YES

NOTE 2

Yes

NOTE 3

NOTE 1

NOTE 2

NOTE 3

Yes

NOTE 1

NOTE 2

NOTE 3

NOTE 1

NOTE 1 : RBEGIN and SBEGIN are required. If both reflect the same track/block addresses, they may be replaced by the CBEGIN operand.

NOTE 2: RHALT and SHALT are required if copying multiple tracks/blocks. If only copying a single track/block, they are optional. When used, if both reflect the same track/block addresses, they may be replaced by the CHALT operand.

NOTE 3: Either SSYSNO (or defaulted to) or SVOLID is required for the source disk and either RSYSNO (or defaulted to) or RVOLID is required for the target disk. If both the source and target disk are the same, you may use either

CSYSNO or CVOLID. Use the xVOLID at all times in place of xSYSNO.

Yes

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

CO py=PHysical

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. It must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: CO=PH

CB egin=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

Use this operand when the starting track/block of a copy operation is the same on both the source and target packs. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0 to

6-digit cylinder (ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). Optionally, for CKD and ECKD, the start track may be further qualified to the record number by appending Rnnn (where nnn is a 1 to 3-digit record) when used along with

RMODE=U|A. For FBA devices, specify a 1- to 8-digit block number.

Abbreviation: CB=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

CH alt=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

Use this operand when the stopping track/block of a copy operation is the same on both the source and target packs. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0- to

RMODE=U|A. For FBA devices, specify a 1 to 8-digit block number.

Abbreviation: CH=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

CK =YEs |NO

Use this operand to check for CKD and ECKD disk count area errors during backup of files or volumes (such as VM minidisk) where the count area may not reflect the true location of the physical blocks. CK=YES, the default, checks for errors and, if any are found, issues the DOCTOR076 error message. Using

CK=NO prevents the issuance of the error message.

Abbreviation: CK=YE|NO

CS ysno=SYSnnn

Use this operand when copying from one portion of a disk to another on the same disk. The value specified may be any valid system number.

Abbreviation: CS=SYSnnn

CV olid=volser

Use this operand to specify the 6-character volume serial number when copying from one portion of a disk to another on the same disk.

Page 114 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: CV=volser

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

HV =NO|YEs|HOld

Use this operand during volume backup/restore to lock the VTOC of the disk thereby preventing the addition/deletion of files on the disk. This is especially important during compacting of disk manager pool space. HV=NO is default.

HV=YES should be used on the first disk save/restore within an execution of

Dr. D and then HV=HOLD should be used to continue to hold the lock on following functions within that Dr. D execution.

Abbreviation: HV=NO|YE|HO

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO |LIst|BOth

Use this operand to specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST. BOTH forces UPSI=X11XXXXX to be set which causes control statements and processing statistics to be displayed on SYSLOG. PRINT=NO is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this

Dr. D

USER GUIDE default. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RB egin=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

Use this operand to specify the starting track/block where a copy is to begin on the target device. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0- to 6-digit cylinder

(ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). Optionally, for CKD and

ECKD, the start track may be further qualified to the record number by appending Rnnn (where nnn is a 1 to 3-digit record) when used along with

RMODE=U|A. For FBA devices, specify a 1- to 8-digit block number.

This operand is required unless the RBEGIN value is the same as the SBEGIN value. In this case CBEGIN may be used.

Abbreviation: RB=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

RH alt=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

Use this operand to specify the stopping track/block where a copy is to stop on the target device. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0- to 6-digit cylinder

(ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). Optionally, for CKD and

ECKD, the start track may be further qualified to the record number by appending Rnnn (where nnn is a 1 to 3-digit record) when used along with

RMODE=U|A. For FBA devices, specify a 1 to 8-digit block number.

This operand is required unless the RHALT value is the same as the SHALT value. In this case CHALT may be used.

If SHALT is not specified because only a single track/block is being copied, do not specify either RHALT or SHALT.

Abbreviation: RH=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

RM ode=I |S|U|A

Use this operand to indicate how Dr. D is to arrange the data being written on the tracks of the output disk during the copy.

Value Action

I Copy data in Image mode. The output tracks/blocks are a mirror image of the input tracks/blocks. This is the default option.

Copy data in Squeeze mode. In this mode, as many input blocks as possible are written to each output track. Unused tracks or portions of track on the input extent are skipped over, and all data records are squeezed on the restoring device, using the full capacity of the track.

This option is only valid with CKD and ECKD devices.

Copy data in Update mode. The contents of each input block is

'UPDATED' into the existing blocks of the output extent, allowing individual blocks on a track to be updated without erasing other blocks on that track. This option is only valid with CKD and ECKD

Page 116 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Value Action

devices.

A Copy data in Add-on mode. In this mode, input blocks are added to existing data by adding them at the CCHHR address specified by

RBEGIN. This option is only valid with CKD and ECKD devices.

Suppose the input disk is a 3375 and it is being copied to a 3380. If the 3375 extent had five disk blocks per track, by putting RMODE=I, the 3380 extent also has five records per track even though it can contain more.

Abbreviation: RM=I|S|U|A

RP =YEs|NO

Use this operand to specify YES to cause Dr. D to terminate with a return code even when abnormal termination occurs. This technique allows conditional JCL to handle exceptional conditions raised by Dr. D. Non-zero return codes are listed in the Messages section of this manual. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

RS ysno=SYSnnn

Use this operand to define the logical unit number for the output (target) disk during a restore operation. RSYSNO=SYS002 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. For greater control over the restore or copy operation, use the RVOLID operand in place of RSYSNO.

If this operand is used, it is required unless copying from one location on a disk to another location on the same disk. In this case CSYSNO may be used.

Abbreviation: RS=SYSnnn

RV olid=xxxxxx

Use this operand to specify the volser of the output (target) volume during a restore operation.

If this operand is used, it is required unless copying from one location on a disk to another location on the same disk. In this case CVOLID may be used.

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx

SB egin=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

Use this operand to specify the starting track/block where the copy is to begin on the source device. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0- to 6-digit cylinder

(ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). Optionally, for CKD and

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

ECKD, the start track may be further qualified to the record number by appending Rnnn (where nnn is a 1- to 3-digit record) when used along with

RMODE=U|A. For FBA devices, specify a 1- to 8-digit block number.

This operand is required unless the SBEGIN value is the same as the RBEGIN value. In this case CBEGIN may be used.

Abbreviation: SB=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

SE qno=nn

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SH alt=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

Use this operand to specify the stopping track/block on the source device during a save or copy operation. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0- to 6-digit cylinder (ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). Optionally, for CKD and ECKD, the start track may be further qualified to the record number by appending Rnnn (where nnn is a 1- to 3-digit record) when used along with

RMODE=U|A. For FBA devices, specify a 1- to 8-digit block number.

If copying only a single track/block, omit the SHALT specification. In all other instances, SHALT is required. If the SHALT value is the same as the RHALT value, CHALT may be used.

Abbreviation: SH=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

SS ysno=SYSnnn

If this operand is used, it is required unless copying from one location on a disk to another location on the same disk. In this case CSYSNO may be used.

Abbreviation: SS=SYSnnn

SV olid=xxxxxx

Use this operand to specify the input (source) volser during a copy operation.

If this operand is used, it is required unless copying from one location on a disk to another location on the same disk. In this case CVOLID may be used.

Page 118 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

VM =NO |YEs

Use this operand to when restoring non-VSE volumes (that is, VM minidisk) on

CKD and ECKD devices. Specifying YES bypasses disk count area errors caused by the count area not reflecting the true location of the physical blocks.

Abbreviation: VM=NO|YES

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Examples

Example: Physically copy tracks to same location on different pack

This example copies tracks 100 through 119 from a 3380 (volser=PCK1C1) to the same location on a different 3380 (volser=PCK1C2). The tracks are copied in

“image” mode.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=PHYSICAL,SVOLID=PCK1C1,RVOLID=PCK1C2,CBEGIN=610,CHALT=714,RMODE=I

Example: Physically copy tracks to different location on different pack

This example copies tracks 100 through 119 from a 3380 (volser=PCK1C1) to tracks 200 through 219 on a 3390 (volser=PCK1C2). Because the copy is being done between different device types, “squeeze” mode is being used.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

CO=PH,SV=PCK1C1,RV=PCK1C2,SB=610,SH=714,RB=1305,RH=1409,RM=S

Example: Physically copy tracks to different location on same pack

This example copies 1 track from track 100 on a 3380 (volser=PCK1C1) to track

101 on the same pack. The track is copied in “image” mode.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

CO=PH,CV=PCK1C1,SB=610,RB=611,RM=I

Example: Physically copy in add-on mode (RM=A)

This example copies a single block from cylinder 6 head 1 record 5, adding it to cylinder 9 head 2 at record 7. The rest of the receiving track is erased. Using this method, it is possible to gather blocks from various disk locations and put them together at a desired location. If SHALT and RHALT are used, multiple blocks can be copied by one command.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

CO=NO,UP=111,PR=BOTH

CO=PH,CV=CKD476,SB=601R5,RB=902R7,RM=A

Page 120 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Physically copy in update mode (RM=U)

This example copies the data in a single block at cylinder 6 head 1 record 5 into the single block at cylinder 9 head 2 record 7. No other blocks on the receiving track are affected. If SHALT and RHALT are used, multiple blocks can be updated by one command. If the copied block is larger than the updated block, only the data that will fit is copied. If it is smaller, then the remainder of the receiving block is left as found.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

CO=NO,UP=111,PR=BOTH

CO=PH,CV=CKD476,SB=601R5,RB=902R7,RM=U

Example: Physically copy entire cylinders

This example copies the entire second cylinder from a 3380 (volser=PCK131) to a different 3380 (volser=PCK132).

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

CO=NO,UP=111,PR=LIST

CO=PH,SVOLID=PCK131,RVOLID=PCK132,CBEGIN=100,CHALT=114

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

COPY=SDISK

COPY=SDISK performs a disk to disk copy of a single non-VSAM file. It only supports sequential disk (SD) files and uses LIOCS to read and write the data. A

Job Control DLBL statement is required to identify both the input and output files. The SFILENAME operand identifies the input DLBL filename and

RFILENAME identifies the output DLBL filename. Both operands are required and cannot reference the same filename. Only one file may be copied per control statement.

The output file’s extents are completely independent of the input file’s extents; they may differ in size, placement and device type.

Usually all sequential files have an EOF record after the last data record of the last prime data extent. If this is so, specifying EOF=YES causes Dr. D to stop copying after reading an EOF record. When copying sequential disk files between device types, EOF=YES is needed because the format of the end-of-file marker may be different. Specifying of EOF=YES insures proper placement and format of the EOF.

A logical record count may be obtained through use of the LRECSIZE= (Logical

Record Length) operand and specification of UPSI bit 2 (UPSI XX1) specified via

Job Control, UPSI operand or default UPSI value. For variable blocked files, only the UPSI is required.

Using the RMODE Operand

The RMODE (Restore Mode) is an internal switch in Dr. D that is set and used when writing the output file. Set RMODE to either an 'I' for image or 'S' for squeeze.

When set to 'I', Dr. D writes the output file as a mirror image of the input file.

Partially used tracks, unused tracks, records out of sequence on a track, all appear copied in the same format.

When RMODE is set to 'S', the full track capacity of the output disk is employed.

When copying an SD file, RMODE is set to 'S' if it is copied to a new disk type.

Specifying RMODE=I or RMODE=S overrides the default as described above.

The only reason for specifying this override is in conversion of direct access from one disk type to another.

Page 122 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Using the SYNC Operand

However, sometimes you might want to switch output extents before each fills up. Using the SYNC=YES operand causes the input and output files' extents to become 'SYNCHRONIZED'.

As an example, if there were 100 and 200 records respectively in the first and second extents of a input file, then there is exactly 100 and 200 records, respectively, in the first and second extents of the output file (even though they might be able to hold more). When SYNC=YES is specified, the output file must have as many extents as the input file and each output extent must be able to accommodate at least as many records as its corresponding input extent.

Control Statement Operands

COPY=SDISK Operand Summary

COPY=SDISK

BLOCKSIZE=n

CK=YES|NO

EOF=YES

GR=nnn

LRECSIZE=n

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RFILENAME=filename

RMODE=I|S

RP=YES|NO

R0=YES|NO

SEQNO=nn

SFILENAME=filename

SYNC=YES

UPSI=012345678

Yes

COPY=SDISK Page 123

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

COpy=SDisk

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: CO=SD

BL ocksize=n

Use this operand to specify a 5-digit value from 16000 through 65496 to indicate the size of a copy work area. The value specified may be other than the installation default value but must never be less than the largest data block saved plus 16. Once a blocksize has been set, it remains in effect for the remainder of the Dr. D execution or until set again using this same operand. The default shipped with Dr. D is 65496; your installation administrator may change it.

Abbreviation: BL=n

CK =YEs|NO

CK=NO prevents the issuance of the error message.

Abbreviation: CK=YE|NO

EO f=YEs

Use this operand to specify YES to cause Dr. D to continue copying an extent on

CKD and ECKD devices continues until an EOF is detected. Because the format of the end-of-file marker may be different between device types, the EOF=YES operand is needed to insure proper placement and format of the EOF when copying SD files between device types.

Abbreviation: EO=YE

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

Page 124 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

LR ecsize=n

This operand enables display of both the number of records copied in addition to the number of blocks copied. It identifies the length of each logical record found in an input file containing fixed-length records. For example, if the input user data file contains 80-byte logical records blocked up to 10 to form a maximum

800-byte physical record, this operand would be specified as LR=80.

Abbreviation: LR=n

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Use this operand to specify a programmer logical unit number (SYS number) for printer output. This operand should be specified on an initial NOPERATION control statement. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RF ilename=filename

Use this operand to specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement for the output file. The Job Control DLBL label statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas.

Abbreviation: RF=filename

COPY=SDISK Page 125

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RM ode=I|S

Use this operand to indicate how Dr. D is to arrange the data being written on the tracks of the output disk during the copy.

Value Action

Copy file in Image mode. The tracks/blocks being restored are a mirror image of the saved tracks/blocks.

Suppose your input file resides on a 3375 and it is to be copied it to a 3380. If the

3375 extent had five disk blocks per track, by putting RMODE=I, the 3380 extent also has five records per track even though it can contain more.

Likewise, if the 3375 had a completely blank track, so will the 3380. In other words, RMODE=I copies on a track by track basis exactly mirroring the input extent. On the other hand, specifying RMODE=S informs Dr. D to use the full track capacity of the output device.

(RMODE=S).

Abbreviation: RM=I|S

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

R0 =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: R0=YE|NO

Page 126 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

SE qno=nn

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SF ilename=filename

Abbreviation: SF=filename

SY nc=YEs

Normally Dr. D will treat a multi-extent output disk area as one contiguous prime data area. Specifying SYNC=YES will cause the same number of records to be written in each extent as were read from the saved extent (the save and restore extents are synchronized). Thus, when SYNC=YES operand is used the number of extents in the saved and restored files must be the same and each restore extent must be large enough to contain the number of records to contain its corresponding save extent.

Abbreviation: SY=YE

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

COPY=SDISK Page 127

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Examples

Example: Copy SD file

This example copies a sequential disk (SD) file from PACK01 to PACK02. If both devices are the same device type, the output file is a mirror image of the input file (RMODE=I is default when device types are the same). If the device types are different, Dr. D squeezes the output file, thereby maximizing the capacities of the output device type (RMODE=S is default when device types are different). The copy stops when the end-of-file (EOF) is read on the input file. Because the format of the end-of-file marker may be different between device types, the

EOF=YES operand is needed to insure proper placement and format of the EOF.

// ASSGN SYS001,132

// ASSGN SYS002,2C2

// DLBL INPUT,'INPUT.FILE'

// EXTENT SYS001,PACK01,1,0,20,380

// DLBL OUTPUT,'OUTPUT.FILE',2099/365

// EXTENT SYS002,PACK02,1,0,19,380

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=SDISK,SFILENAME=INPUT,RFILENAME=OUTPUT,EOF=YES

Example: Copy multiple extents to a single extent

This example creates a job stream to copy a three extent file to a single extent file.

// ASSGN SYS001,132

// ASSGN SYS002,2C2

// DLBL MULTI,’MULTI.EXTENT’

// EXTENT SYS001,PACK01,1,0,20,20

// EXTENT SYS001,PACK01,1,1,40,20

// EXTENT SYS001,PACK01,1,2,60,20

// DLBL SINGLE,’SINGLE.EXTENT’,2099/365

// EXTENT SYS002,PACK02,1,0,1000,60

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=SDISK,SFILENAME=MULTI,RFILENAME=SINGLE

Page 128 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Split one extent into three

This example splits a single extent file into three.

// ASSGN SYS001,2C2

// ASSGN SYS002,132

// DLBL SINGLE,’SINGLE.EXTENT’,2099/365

// EXTENT SYS001,PACK01,1,0,1000,60

// DLBL MULTI,’MULTI.EXTENT’

// EXTENT SYS002,PACK02,1,0,20,20

// EXTENT SYS002,PACK02,1,1,40,20

// EXTENT SYS002,PACK02,1,2,60,20

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

CO=SD,SF=SINGLE,RF=MULTI

Example: Copy multi-extent file with SYNC=YES

This example takes a 3-extent SD file on a 3350 and transfers it over to three larger extents on a 3380. At the same time, it keeps all the records in their corresponding extents.

// ASSGN SYS001,150

// ASSGN SYS002,280

// DLBL INPUT,'F3350'

// EXTENT SYS001,PACK50,1,0,20,100

// EXTENT SYS001,PACK50,1,1,120,100

// EXTENT SYS001,PACK50,1,2,220,100

// DLBL OUTPUT,'F3380',2099/365

// EXTENT SYS002,PACK80,1,0,19,114

// EXTENT SYS002,PACK80,1,1,133,114

// EXTENT SYS002,PACK80,1,2,247,114

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=SDISK,SFILENAME=INPUT,RFILENAME=OUTPUT,SYNC=YES

COPY=SDISK Page 129

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

COPY=VSAM

COPY=VSAM copies a single VSAM data file (either suballocated or unique) to another VSAM file (either suballocated or unique). Only one file per Dr. D control statement is copied.

A Job Control DLBL statement is required to identify the input file and that filename is identified on the Dr. D control statement through the SFILENAME operand. A Job Control DLBL statement is also required to identify the output file and that filename is identified on the Dr. D control statement through the

RFILENAME operand. An alternative to the specification of a Job Control DLBL for a suballocated output file is to use the RCAT and RIDENT operands in place of the RFILENAME operand.

When copying to a VSAM unique file where Dr. D is required to invoke VSAM for file definition, two additional label sets are required for a unique KSDS file and one additional label set is required for a unique ESDS or RRDS file:

// DLBL UNIQUE,’UNIQUE.FILE’,,VSAM

Í DLBL for RFILENAME operand

// DLBL DNIQUE,,,VSAM

Í DLBL/EXTENT required for KSDS ESDS RRDS

// EXTENT ,volser,,,start,number

// DLBL XNIQUE,,,VSAM

Í DLBL/EXTENT required for KSDS only

// EXTENT ,volser,,,start,number

The filename to be used is the value specified through the RFILENAME operand where the first character is altered to the letter ‘D’ (to identify the data component) or to the letter ‘X’ (to identify the index component). Therefore, do not specify an RFILENAME value beginning with the letter ‘D’ or ‘X’. Any specified file-ID is ignored since VSAM always uses the name of the component as the file-ID. Extent information is required to identify where on the target volume each component is to reside. No additional label set is required for the

VSAM internally created index component of RRDS files containing variablelength records since that component requires suballocation data space.

VSAM Automatic Definition Feature

The Dr. D VSAM Automatic Definition Feature simplifies copying VSAM files by eliminating the need for a separate IDCAMS job step. The definition associated with the input may be used as the basis for defining the output file during the process. The use of this feature is optional and is controlled using the AUTO= operand. The default for this operand is AUTO=YES.

With the AUTO=YES operand in effect, Dr. D examines the target VSAM catalog

(after adjusting for any requested name changes) and selects one of the following actions:

• If the file does not exist in the target catalog, Dr. D defines a new file using the definition associated with the input.

Page 130 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

• If the file does exist in the target catalog but contains no records, Dr. D will copy into the empty file.

• If the file does exist in the target catalog but is not empty, Dr. D reuses the file if possible (even if the file is not defined as reusable). If the file cannot be reused, Dr. D deletes and defines a new file.

Use of the FD= operand allows this logic to be altered to allow files to be redefined unconditionally, optionally with the primary allocation recalculated. In addition, the listing generated when IDCAMS is invoked for a delete/define can also be obtained by specifying the IDCAMS=PRINT operand.

When the cluster names of the input and output are the same, the component

(data and index) names will be maintained by the Automatic Definition Feature.

If the cluster names are different, the component names of the file created by the

Automatic Definition Feature are VSAM-generated system names. These may be overridden by use of IDCAMS style overrides described under Automatic

Definition Override Feature.

VSAM Automatic Definition Override Feature

Users of the VSAM Automatic Definition Feature can override several attributes when the file is defined using the additional operands for modifying definitions.

The available operands are:

Operand Function

BUFFERSPACE=n|1|N

CDATA=dataprimaryusecls/

datasecondaryusecls|N

Override the BUFFERSPACE specification.

Override the data allocation classes.

CFACTOR=n|0

CNSIZE=datacisize/idxcisize|N

Change the space occupied.

Change the data and index CI sizes.

CX=idxprimaryusecls/

idxsecondaryusecls|0

Override the index allocation classes.

DATE=yyddd|+n|0

FD=C|D|M

FREESPACE=cifreespace/

cafreespace|N

RVOLID=xxxxxx|

(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Override VSAM TO/FOR specification.

Primary allocation recalculation.

Override the FREESPACE specification.

Override the VOLUME specification.

SOPTION=datashroptions/

idxshroptions|N

VCOMPRESS=YES|NO

XL=YES|NO

Override the SHAREOPTION specification.

Set the “COMPRESSED” attribute.

Set the “EXTRALARGEDATASET” attribute.

COPY=VSAM Page 131

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

In addition, nearly any definition attribute may be overridden by supplying

IDCAMS style parameters. This option of override is invoked by specifying the

AUTO=OVERRIDE (rather than AUTO=YES).

When using IDCAMS style overrides, each override statement must begin with

‘CLUSTER’, ‘DATA’, or ‘INDEX’ to denote which component the override applies to and the operands and their values must be wholly contained within positions 1 through 72 of the statement. More than one operand and its value can be contained on one statement but an operand and its value can not be split across statements.

Multivolume VSAM Catalogs

If all the volume serial numbers in the input definition are currently volumes owned by the target catalog, the same volume serial numbers are used in the definition. If any of the volume serial numbers in the input definition are not currently volumes owned by the target catalog, only the catalog owned volume serial numbers are used in the definition. This action can be influenced by the following:

• The RVOLID= operand, which directs the definition to one or more particular volume serial numbers

• The VSAM Automatic Definition Override Feature

• The AUTO=ROTATE operand, which spreads allocations across candidate volumes

VSAM Device Independence

The VSAM Automatic Definition Feature fully supports device independence between the DASD device type used for the input and the DASD device type used when the file is copied.

If the DASD device type is different when the copy begins, the space allocations for the file are adjusted in proportion to the relative track capacities (or FBA blocksize) of the two DASD device types. Full independence between CKD,

ECKD and FBA architecture is supported

Control Statement Operands

COPY=VSAM Operand Summary

COPY=VSAM

AUTO=YES|NO|ROTATE|OVERRIDE

BUFFERSPACE=n|1|N

CDATA=primaryclass/secondaryclass|N

CFACTOR=n|0

CNSIZE=datacisize/idxcisize|N

Yes

Page 132 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

COPY=VSAM

COPY=VSAM Operand Summary

CX=idxprimaryusecls/idxsecondaryusecls|N

DATE=yyddd|+n|0

DELETE=pppphh

EOF=S

FAST=YES|NO|CI

FD=C|D|M|N|R

FREESPACE=cifreespace/cafreespace|N

GR=nnn

HIKEY=highkey|’highkey’|X’highkeyinhex’

IDCAMS=PRINT

INSEQUENCE=NO

LOWKEY=lowkey|’lowkey’|X’lowkeyinhex’

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

MRECORDS=n

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RCAT=filename

RFILENAME=filename

RIDENT=’file-id’

RP=YES|NO

RVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

RWORD=filepassword

SEQNO=nn

SFILENAME=filename

SOPTION=datashroptions/idxshroptions|N

SWORD=filepassword

UPSI=012345678

VARIABLE=YES

VBUFF=n

VCOMPRESS=YES|NO

VSTYPE=E|K|R|N|S|P

VUSE=CA|IG|NU|SA|OP

XL=YES|NO

Yes

NOTE 1

Yes

NOTE2

NOTE 1: RFILENAME= is required or, if not used, both RCAT= and RIDENT= would be required.

Page 133

Dr. D

NOTE 2:

VARIABLE= is required when input file is variable length.

USER GUIDE

Page 134 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

CO py=VSam

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. It must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: CO=VS

AU to=YEs|NO|ROtate|OVerride

Use this operand to control the VSAM Automatic Definition Feature.

Value Action

YES Invoke automatic file definition as necessary (default).

ROTATE predefined and ready to accept data).

Invoke automatic file definition as necessary rotating the definition for each file component on the next candidate volume

(this technique allows the index component to reside on a different volume from the data component causing a more even spread over the candidate volumes).

OVERRIDE Modify the file definition using the IDCAMS style operands supplied on subsequent statements. Be sure to also specify the

FD=D operand to assure that the file is redefined using these modifications.

Each override statement must begin with ‘CLUSTER’, ‘DATA’, or ‘INDEX’ and the operands and their values must be wholly contained within positions 1 through 72 of the statement. More than one operand and its value can be contained on one statement but an operand and its value can not be split across statements. IDCAMS continuation characters are allowed but have no effect. If the ‘VOLUME’ operand cannot be contained within one statement, use multiple statements each beginning with ‘DATA(VOLUMES(‘ or ‘INDEX(VOLUMES(‘.

The override statements are terminated by an end-of-data (/* or

/@) statement before the next Dr. D control statement.

Operands are checked for correct spelling. Misspelled operands are ignored without notification. Also, operands are ignored without notification unless specified on the appropriate override statement. For example, specifying the FREESPACE operand on a CLUSTER override statement is ignored since the

FREESPACE operand applies individually to the DATA and

INDEX components.

Abbreviation: AU=YE|NO|RO|OV

COPY=VSAM Page 135

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

BU fferspace=n|1|N

Use this operand to override the bufferspace value for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

If a value greater than 256 is specified, that value is used as the bufferspace for each file.

If a value of 2-256 is specified, the existing bufferspace is multiplied by that value.

If a value of 1 is specified, no bufferspace is specified when a define is accomplished for this file.

This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued.

Abbreviation: BU=n|1|N

CD ata=primaryclass/secondaryclass|N

Use this operand to override the data allocation classes for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued.

Abbreviation: CD=primaryclass/secondaryclass|N

CF actor=n|0

Use this operand to change the data component space occupied for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. The value specified is a percentage change. A value of 110 would increase the allocation by 10%; a value of 90 would decrease the allocation by 10%. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of 0 is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued.

Abbreviation: CF=n|0

CN size=datacisize/idxcisize|N

Use this operand to override the CISIZE(s) for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued.

Abbreviation: CN=datacisize/idxcisize|N

Page 136 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

CX =idxprimaryusecls/idxsecondaryusecls|N

Use this operand to override the index allocation classes for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued.

Abbreviation: CX=idxprimaryusecls/idxsecondaryusecls|N

Da te=yyddd|+n|0

Use this operand to set the expiration date for each file being defined by the

Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. Use yyddd to specify an absolute Julian date

(yy is windowed: 00-74 = 20yy 75-99=19yy). Use +n to specify a date relative to the current IPL date. Specify 0 to cause no ‘TO’ date to be generated for the

VSAM file definition. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: DA=yyddd|+n|0

DE lete=pppphh

Use this operand to cause records containing a specific single character in a specific record position to be bypassed during the copy function. pppp is a 4-digit decimal number (relative to 1 with leading zeros specified and less than 4097) denoting the position in an input record where the single character is located (if used with variable-length records, this position must be in the leading fixed portion of the record). hh is the hexadecimal value of the single character code.

Abbreviation: DE=pppphh

EO f=S

Use this operand to specify S to cause Dr. D to continue copying only until a software EOF is found, without regard to the input file’s high used RBA (relative byte address).

Abbreviation: EO=S

FA st=YEs|NO|CI

For most copy functions, specify YES to cause Dr. D to invoke physical IOCS rather than the slower logical IOCS when copying the VSAM files. If the VSAM cluster is compressed, encrypted, or otherwise modified during normal processing, use FAST=NO. Files copied with earlier FAST=YES or FAST=NO are reorganized during the COPY function. To prevent reorganization during the copy, specify FAST=CI. Use FAST=CI for any cluster that is not a true VSAM

ESDS, KSDS, RRDS, VRDS, or VSAM/SAM. FAST=YES is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator may change it.

Abbreviation: FA=YE|NO|CI

COPY=VSAM Page 137

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FD =C|D|M|N|R

Use this operand along with AUTO=YES/ROTATE/OVERRIDE to identify the condition under which file definition should be accomplished. FD=R is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Value Action

The output file is deleted and redefined with the primary allocation increased so the output file is contained within the primary extent retaining the original secondary size allocation.

The output file is deleted and redefined.

The output file is deleted and redefined with the primary allocation recomputed based on the high-used RBA of the input file so the output file is contained within the primary extent retaining the original secondary size allocation.

The file is deleted and redefined unless it is empty or defined as reusable.

The existing definition is to be reset if the file exists (even if not defined as reusable). Otherwise, the file is defined.

Abbreviation: FD=C|D|M|N|R

FR eespace=cifreespace/cafreespace|N

Use this operand to override the freespace specification for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued.

Abbreviation: FR=cifreespace/cafreespace|N

GR =nnn

This memory is released before any Dr. D initiated OPEN, CLOSE, Tape EOV, or end of job. This is a global operand should be specified on an initial

NOPERATION control statement. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

HI ghkey=highkey|’highkey’|X’highkeyinhex’

Use this operand to select records by the data contained in the key. It specifies the highest key to be selected. If the key contains spaces, enclose it in single quotes ('). If you want to enter the key in hexadecimal, enter it as HI=X'......'. The key must be entered as a contiguous string and be totally contained on one Dr. D

Page 138 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D control statement. Only the significant portion of the key, starting in key position

1, need be coded. This operand also works along with the LOWKEY= operand to select all records matching the specified keys and all records in between or only a specific key when LO= and HI= reflect the same key. If HI= is used by itself, it selects all records from the beginning of the file up to and including the specified key.

Abbreviation: HI=highkey|’highkey’|X’highkeyinhex’

ID cams=PRint

Use this operand along with the PRINT operand to cause printing of Dr. D

Automatic Definition Feature IDCAMS DELETE and DEFINE commands and their corresponding results.

Abbreviation: ID=PR

IN sequence=NO

Use this operand to specify NO to cause a KSDS file to be copied without using the file’s sequence set. Specification of this operand is only effective when FAST=YES

is also specified or defaulted. This technique is useful for recovering a file whose sequence set has been corrupted. Be aware that this operand may cause the file to be saved out of sequence and, if so, it is the user’s responsibility to rebuild the file purging duplicate records and placing the records back into ascending sequence. This task can be accomplished by either:

• Copying the file to an ESDS, sorting it and then copying it back to the

KSDS

• Saving the file to a data tape (DTAPE=YES), sorting it, and then restoring it back to the KSDS.

Abbreviation: IN=NO

LO wkey=lowkey|’lowkey’|X’lowkeyinhex’

Use this operand to select records by the data contained in the key. It specifies the lowest or only key to be selected. If the key contains spaces, enclose it in single quotes ('). If you want to enter the key in hexadecimal, enter it as

LO=X'......'. The key must be entered as a contiguous string and be totally contained on one Dr. D control statement. Only the significant portion of the key, starting in key position 1, need be coded. This operand also works along with the

HIGHKEY= operand to select all records matching the specified keys and all records in between or only a specific key when LO= and HI= reflect the same key. If LO= is used by itself, it selects records starting with the specified key and continue to end of file.

Abbreviation: LO=lowkey|’lowkey’|X’lowkeyinhex’

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Use this operand to specify a programmer logical unit number (SYS number) for printer output. This operand should be specified on an initial NOPERATION

COPY=VSAM Page 139

Dr. D

USER GUIDE control statement. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

MR ecords=n

Use this operand to specify a value in the range of 0-99999999 to limit the number of logical records to be copied. Specify MRECORDS=0 to cause the output file to be defined or modified only (with no records copied), depending upon the setting of the FD operand. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: MR=n

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console before any processing is performed. You can then press Enter and continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job. If the message contains imbedded blanks/commas/equal signs, it must be enclosed in single quotes.

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RC at=filename

This operand identifies the filename of the VSAM catalog to receive the file to be copied. If this operand is specified on a Dr. D request that is continued across multiple control statements, it must be on the initial control statement.

This operand is required when also specifying RIDENT in place of specifying a

DLBL statement and RFILENAME for the output file.

Abbreviation: RC=filename

RF ilename=filename

Use this operand to specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement of the VSAM file to be restored. The Job Control DLBL label statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas.

This operand is required when specifying a DLBL statement for the output file. If using RCAT and RIDENT, do not specify this operand.

Page 140 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: RF=filename

RI dent=’file-id’

Use this operand to specify the full file-ID enclosed in single quotes to indicate the name of the new file being restored.

This operand is required when also specifying RCAT in place of specifying a

DLBL statement and RFILENAME for the output file.

Abbreviation: RI=’file-id’

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

RV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)|NO

Use this operand to override the VOLUME specification for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. Specify up to 600 volsers (of those assigned to the RCAT catalog) enclosed in parentheses. By specifying NO, the file definitions exclude any data or index volume specification.

Abbreviation: xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)|NO

RW ord=filepassword

Use this operand to specify the 1- to 8-character password of the VSAM file being restored to.

Abbreviation: RW=filepassword

SE qno=nn

Abbreviation: SE=nn

COPY=VSAM Page 141

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

SF ilename=filename

Abbreviation: SF=filename

SO ption=datashroptions/idxshroptions|N

Use this operand to override the share option specification for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. The share options are entered as 2 single-digit pairs, where the first digit specifies how the component is shared within a single VSE system and the second digit specifies how the component is shared across multiple VSE systems. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued.

Abbreviation: SO=datashroptions/idxshroptions|N

SW ord=filepassword

Use this operand to specify the 1- to 8-character file read password of the file being copied only if it has a read password defined.

Abbreviation: SW=filepassword

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

VA riable=YEs|NO

Dr. D considers a file to contain variable length records if the VSAM catalog definition for RECORDSIZE shows the average record length differing from the maximum record length, regardless of the length of the record(s) actually stored in the file.

Specification of VARIABLE=YES is required if the input file contains variable length records. Specification of VARIABLE=YES for files containing fixed-length records causes no harm. VARIABLE=NO is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Abbreviation: VA=YE|NO

VB uff=n

For potential enhanced performance, use this operand to increase the amount of internal buffer space used by Dr. D when restoring a VSAM file. The value specified indicates the number of thousands of bytes desired. For example,

Page 142 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

VB=100 sets the buffer space used by Dr. D to 100,000. This operand defaults to 3 times the default or specified tape blocksize value (see BLOCKSIZE operand).

NOTE : This operand defines the space to allocated for use as Dr. D internal buffers and not the buffer space to be used in defining clusters to be restored (to override the buffer space to be used in defining clusters to restored, see the

BUFFERSPACE operand).

Abbreviation: VB=n

VC ompress=Yes|NO

This operand lets you have the compressed attribute specified for the output qualifying VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature.

Dr. D accomplishes qualification for the output using the rules as delineated by

VSAM. Specification of YES allows files to be copied into compressed format with no need to pre-qualify those files. Specification of NO resets the compressed flag when the cluster is redefined. The FD= operand should be used to assure that file redefinition is performed.

Abbreviation: VC=YE

VS type=K|E|R|N|S|P

Under some systems, an open error message with error X’A0’ (160) may occur when copying a VSAM file. Although this error can be ignored without penalty, specify this operand to identify the type of target VSAM file to avoid the error message.

Value Action

Indicates KSDS file.

Indicates ESDS file.

Indicates RRDS file.

Indicates non-CI format file.

Indicates VSAM SAM managed file.

Indicates PATH.

Abbreviation: VR=K|E|R|N|S|P

VU se=CAncel|IGnore|NUll|OPerator|SAve

Use this operand to specify the action to be taken when a VSAM file about to be copied is currently in use (that is, open for update) by another task.

VUSE=CANCEL is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Value Action

CANCEL Cancel the job.

IGNORE Do not copy the file.

NULL Copy the file as a null file.

COPY=VSAM Page 143

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

OPERATOR Issue message DOCTOR175 and wait for operator response

(allowed only with FAST=YES).

SAVE Copy the file anyway knowing that the results are unpredictable and may cause subsequent access to fail

(allowed only with FAST=YES - with FAST=NO, this value functions the same as VUSE=NULL).

Abbreviation: VU=CA|IG|NU|OP|SA

XL =YEs|NO

Use this operand to specify whether KSDS files are to be defined with the

'EXTRALARGEDATASET' attribute. If 'NO' is specified, then the attribute is suppressed even if it was present in the saved file. This operand is effective only if an IDCAMS define is initiated- use the FD operand to force delete/define in case the file exists in the receiving catalog.

Abbreviation: XL=YE|NO

Examples

Example: Copy a VSAM file using DLBLs for input and output

// DLBL OURCAT,’OUR.VSAM.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// DLBL INPFILE,’INP.VSAM.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=OURCAT

// DLBL OUTFILE,’OUT.VSAM.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=OURCAT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=VSAM,SFILENAME=INPFILE,RFILENAME=OUTFILE

Example: Copy a VSAM file using only input DLBL

// DLBL OURCAT,’OUR.VSAM.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// DLBL INPFILE,’INP.VSAM.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=OURCAT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=VSAM,SFILENAME=INPFILE,RCAT=OURCAT,RIDENT=’OUT.VSAM.FILE’

Page 144 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Copy a VSAM file with AUTO=OVERRIDE

// DLBL OURCAT,’OUR.VSAM.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// DLBL INPFILE,’INP.VSAM.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=OURCAT

// DLBL OUTFILE,’OUT.VSAM.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=OURCAT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=VSAM,SFILENAME=INPFILE,RFILENAME=OUTFILE,AUTO=OVERRIDE,FD=D

INDEX(NAME(OUT.VSAM.FILE.INDEX))

INDEX (CISZ(512))

DATA(NAME(OUT.VSAM.FILE.DATA))

DATA(CISZ(4096) RECORDS(250 0))

DATA(VOLUMES(FBA240 FBA241 FBA242 FBA243 FBA244 FBA245))

DATA(VOLUMES(FBA251 FBA252 FBA253 FBA254 FBA255))

COPY=VSAM Page 145

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Copy a unique KSDS without Automatic File Definition

Copy a unique VSAM KSDS file. The output file currently exists and, therefore, need not be defined by the Dr. D automatic file definition facility.

// DLBL OUNIQUE,’UNIQUE.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=UCAT1

// DLBL IUNIQUE,’ANOTHER.UNIQUE.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=UCAT1

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=VSAM,SFILENAME=IUNIQUE,RFILENAME=OUNIQUE

Example: Copy a unique KSDS with Automatic File Definition

Copy a unique VSAM KSDS file. The output file does not currently exist as desired and, therefore, needs to be defined by the Dr. D automatic file definition facility.

// DLBL IUNIQUE,’UNIQUE.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=UCAT1

// DLBL OUNIQUE,’ANOTHER.UNIQUE.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=UCAT1

// DLBL DUNIQUE,,,VSAM,CAT=UCAT1

// EXTENT ,volser,,,start,number

// DLBL XUNIQUE,,,VSAM,CAT=UCAT1

// EXTENT ,volser,,,start,number

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

COPY=VSAM,SFILENAME=IUNIQUE,RFILENAME=OUNIQUE,AUTO=YES,FD=D

Page 146 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX

The VSAM Build Alternate Index Feature allows the user to build alternate indexes automatically with Dr. D. Alternate indexes can be built while a VSAM cluster is being saved, restored, or copied. The Dr. D VSAM build alternate index feature:

• Builds up to 99 separate alternate indexes via a single pass of the base cluster

• Builds alternate indexes up to 10 times faster than the IDCAMS BLDINDEX facility.

• Builds alternate indexes for KSDS and ESDS files

• Allows cluster records for build to be selected using record selector statements.

• Allows non-unique AIX keys to be made unique by the addition of a binary suffix to each key.

Building Alternate Indexes

The alternate indexes to be built by Dr. D must first be defined by IDCAMS. The

Dr. D FUNCTION=BUILDAIX is then used to build the alternate indexes. If the

AIX is defined but not empty, Dr. D resets it to empty status, even if it is not defined as reusable. While the build function is being performed, the base cluster may also be saved, restored, or copied. Whether save, restore, or copy is performed is determined by the keywords used on the FUNCTION=BUILDAIX command statement:

• If SFILENAME only is present, a save is assumed.

• If RFILENAME only is present, a restore is assumed. RESTORE operations accept the same input as is valid for a RESTORE=VSAM command.

• If both SFILENAME and RFILENAME are present, a copy is assumed and the AIX is built from the output cluster. This allows a file to be reorganized at the same time AIX(s) are being created.

The BUILDAIX function is dependent on information generated by the VSAM

Automatic Definition Feature, so 'AUTO=YES' must be in effect. Refer to the corresponding details on the VSAM Automatic Definition Feature associated with the COPY=VSAM and RESTORE=VSAM commands.

Partition and execute size vary depending on which sort program is used and whether SVA eligible phases are in the SVA. If a RESTORE or COPY method is used, more GETVIS space is needed for VSAM buffers. For best performance, use the largest partition possible and the VBUFF and ABUFF operands.

Along with the SFILENAME and RFILENAME operands, the AFILE operand must be used to specify the Job Control DLBL name(s) for the AIX (s) to be built.

If a one or two-digit number is entered, then it specifies the number of alternate

Dr. D

USER GUIDE indexes to be built and causes Dr. D to generate DLBL names in the following format:

AIXaabb where: aa is the number of the FUNCTION=BUILDAIX command. This is a sequential number that is reset at each EXEC DRD statement and incremented by 1 at each FUNCTION=BUILDAIX command. bb is the AIX file number. This is a sequential number that is reset at each FUNCTION=BUILDAIX command and incremented by

1 for each AIX built by that command.

If the AFILE operand is not a one or two-digit numeric, then it is assumed to be the actual Job Control DLBL name to be used.

Build AIX Record Selection

The cluster records used to build the AIX may be selected by adding

PARTIAL=SELECT to the control card and including a record selector card for each AIX to be built selectively. If multiple AIX's are built, then each selector must be prefixed by the relative AIX number (the first AIX is 1, the second is 2, etc.).

Selection of base cluster records for the build AIX function allows selection based on fields not included in the AIX data fields. Selection takes place before the AIX records are passed to the sort, greatly improving the efficiency of the sort process both in processing time and sort work area requirements.

Record selection is specified by use of the Dr. D SELECT statement rather than the sort INCLUDE/OMIT statements. One SELECT statement is allowed for each

AIX to be built and has the following format:

Bytes 0-1

Bytes 2-7

Bytes n-80

A two-digit number indicating the AIX being selected. IF blank,

01 is assumed.

SELECT (or just SEL)

The record selection formula.

The record selection formula consists of one or more field selectors, each made up of three sub-fields: the field locator, a logical operator, and a constant for comparison. The field locator consists of a one byte type field allowing character

(C), hexadecimal (X), or packed decimal (P). Following the type field is a number specifying the starting position in the record (relative to one). Some examples are:

P12 - specifies a packed decimal field starting at position 12

C5 - specifies a character field starting at position 5

X37 - specifies a hexadecimal field starting at position 37

Page 148 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Select Logical Operators

The logical operator specifies the type of comparison to be made between the record field and a specified constant. It may be the '=' sign for comparing equal, the '<' for less than, the '>' for greater than, and 'NE' for not equal.

Following the logical operator is the constant data to be compared to the record field. This constant must be of an appropriate format to match the type field specified by the field locator. If packed decimal is specified, the length of the record field is determined by scanning for the sign in the rightmost position. If a character field includes blanks, enclose the constant in single quotes (').

Hexadecimal fields must have an even number of proper hexadecimal digits (0-

F).

The following are examples of the SELECT statement:

1. Select records containing 'FLORIDA' starting in position 45:

SELECT C45 = FLORIDA

2. Select records having a value greater than 512 in the packed decimal field starting in position 12:

SELECT P12 > 512

3. Select records having a value less than x'0000B800' in the field starting in position 138:

SELECT X138 < 0000B800

4. Select records that do not have 'DEAD' in position 1000:

SELECT C1000 NE DEAD

Complex Record Selection

Complex record selection can be specified by using the logical connectors 'V' (or) and '&' (and), and if necessary, parentheses to insure correct evaluation of the expression. Some examples are:

1. Select records having 'FLORIDA' in position 45 and a value greater than 512 in position 12:

SELECT C45 = FLORIDA & P12 > 512

2. Select records having either 'FLORIDA' or 'GEORGIA' in position 45:

SELECT C45 = FLORIDA V C45 = GEORGIA

3. Select records having 'A' in positions 5 and 10, or where the packed decimal field in position 20 is in the range 100 through 499:

SELECT (C5 = A & C10 = A) V (P20 > 99 & P20 < 500)

NOTE: Spaces must separate field locators, logical operators, constants and logical connectors, but spaces are not required after the '(' or before the ')'.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Building Non-Contiguous Key AIX’s

Non-contiguous key AIX's may be built by specifying PARTIAL=SELECT on the

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX control card and then including one or more KEY definition statements for each AIX to be built. It has the following format:

Bytes 0-1

Bytes 2-7

A two-digit number indicating the AIX being selected. IF blank,

01 is default.

KEY=P1,L1,P2,L3,...Pn,Ln

The 'P' represents the relative position in the base cluster while the 'L' is the length of the key data at the 'P' position, relative to one (for example, KEY=1,3 means position 1 length 3). Since IDCAMS and VSAM do not support noncontiguous keys directly, the AIX must be defined as 'NOUPGRADE', and the key specified need only have a length great enough to contain the total length of key segments specified.

Duplicate Key Processing

AIX records may be made 'unique' by use of the UNIQUE=YES operand. This is achieved by appending a four byte key suffix to each AIX key. The suffix is a sequential binary number that thereby makes each key unique. The defined size of the AIX key must therefore be four bytes larger to accommodate the suffix, and it must be defined as NOUPGRADE. If UNIQUE=A is specified and the AIX is defined as unique, then duplicate keys are dropped. The default,

UNIQUE=NO, results in no tailoring of the keys.

Besides specification of the UNIQUE operand on the FUNCTION=BUILDAIX command statement, it may also be specified along with PARTIAL=SELECT operand. When specified on the FUNCTION=BUILDAIX control statement,

UNIQUE then applies to each of the AIX's created by that statement. When specified with PARTIAL=SELECT control data, then each AIX can have its own

'UNIQUE=' keyword, allowing for instance, the default to be 'UNIQUE=YES' with some being 'UNIQUE=NO' or 'UNIQUE=A'. When specified as part of

PARTIAL=SELECT data, it has the following format:

Bytes 0-1

Bytes 2-7

A two-digit number indicating the AIX being selected. If blank,

01 is default.

UNIQUE=YES|NO|A

Page 150 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Control Statement Operands

Operand

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX

ABUFF=nnn

AFILE=nn|filename

AUTO=YES|ROTATE

BLOCKSIZE=n

BUFFERSPACE=n|1|N

CDATA=primaryclass/secondaryclass|N

CFACTOR=n|0

CNSIZE=datacisize/idxcisize|N

CP=NO|YES

CX=idxprimaryusecls/idxsecondaryusecls|N

DATE=yyddd|+n|0

DELETE=pppphh

EOF=S

FAST=YES|NO

FD=C|D|M|N|R

FIND=filename|’file-id’

FREESPACE=cifreespace/cafreespace|N

GR=nnn

HIKEY=highkey|’highkey’|X’highkeyinhex’

IDCAMS=PRINT

LABEL=NO

LOWKEY=lowkey|’lowestkey’|X’lowkeyinhex’

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

MRECORDS=n

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PARTIAL=SELECT

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RFILENAME=filename

RP=YES|NO

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX Operand Summary

Required? Global?

RVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

RWORD=filepassword

SFILENAME=filename

NOTE 1

Yes

NOTE 2

Yes

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Operand

SKIP=nnn

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX Operand Summary

Required? Global?

SOPTION=datashroptions/idxshroptions|N

SWORD=filepassword

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1/filename2/filename3

TI=SYSnnn

TO=SYSnnn

TT=SYSnnn

T3=SYSnnn

UNIQUE=YES|NO|A

UPSI=012345678

VARIABLE=YES

VBUFF=n

VCOMPRESS=YES|NO

VRTYPE=E|K|R|N|S|P

VSTYPE=E|K|R|N|S|P

VUSE=CA|IG|NU|SA|OP

WAIT=n

WORK=n[/n]

WR=catalogwritepassword

WS=catalogreadpassword

XL=YES|NO

NOTE 3

Yes

NOTE 1:

FIND= is required if the input was created by the VSAM Logical Save feature, Logical Volume Save feature, Save Current command or if it is a backup tape created by another backup software product.

NOTE 2: SFILENAME= is required for save and copy processing. RFILENAME= is required for restore and copy processing.

NOTE 3: VARIABLE= is required when input file is variable length.

FU nction=BUildaix

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: FU=BU

Page 152 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

AB uf=nnn

Use this operand to specify the buffer size. The value coded is a 1 to 3-digit buffer size specified in thousands (K) (for example, abuf=20 = 20K).

Abbreviation: AB=nnn

AF ile=nn|filename

Use this operand to specify the either the filename identifying the Job Control

DLBL statement of the AIX or the number of AIX files to be created. If the value is a 1- to 2-digit numeric, it is assumed to be the number of AIX files to be created; otherwise, it is assumed to be a specific Job Control DLBL filename.

Abbreviation: AF=nnn|filename

AU to=YEs|ROtate

Use this operand to control the VSAM Automatic Definition Feature.

Value Action

YES

ROTATE

Invoke automatic file definition as necessary (default).

Invoke automatic file definition as necessary rotating the definition for each file component on the next candidate volume (this technique allows the index component to reside on a different volume from the data component causing a more even spread over the candidate volumes).

Abbreviation: AU=YE| RO

BL ocksize=n

Use this operand to specify a 5-digit value from 16000 through 65496 to indicate the largest physical block length on the tape dataset. The value specified may be other than the installation default value but must never be less than the largest data block saved plus 16. Once a blocksize has been set, it remains in effect for the remainder of the Dr. D execution or until set again using this same operand.

The default shipped with Dr. D is 65496; your installation administrator may change it. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with SAVE or RESTORE operations only.

Abbreviation: BL=n

BU fferspace=n|1|N

Use this operand to override the bufferspace value for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition feature. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

If a value greater than 256 is specified, that value is used as the bufferspace for each file.

If a value of 2-256 is specified, the existing bufferspace is multiplied by that value.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

If a value of 1 is specified, no bufferspace is specified when a define is accomplished for this file.

This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued.

Use this operand when building AIX’s along with RESTORE and COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: BU=n|1|N

CD ata=primaryclass/secondaryclass|N

Use this operand to override the data allocation classes for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition feature. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with RESTORE and COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: CD=primaryclass/secondaryclass|N

CF actor=n|0

Use this operand to change the data component space occupied for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition feature. The value specified is a percentage change. A value of 110 would increase the allocation by 10%; a value of 90 would decrease the allocation by 10%. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of zero is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with RESTORE and COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: CF=n

CN size=datacisize/idxcisize|N

Use this operand to override the CISIZE(s) for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition feature. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued. Use this operand when building

AIX’s along with RESTORE and COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: CN=datacisize/indexcisize|N

CP =NO|YEs

Use this operand to specify YES to cause Dr. D data compression to be in effect, which typically reduces tape usage and channel access time. Once a value has been set by this operand, it remains in effect for the remainder of the Dr. D execution or until set again using this same operand. CP=NO is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

When saving to a tape device that has hardware compression invoked (such as

3480/3490 IDRC devices), CP=NO should be specified to avoid double compression and potential loss of through-put.

Page 154 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: CP=NO|YE

CX =idxprimaryusecls/idxsecondaryusecls|N

Use this operand to override the index allocation classes for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition feature. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with RESTORE and COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: CX=idxprimaryusecls/idxsecondaryusecls|N

Da te=yyddd|+n|0

Use this operand to set the expiration date for each file being defined by the

Dr. D Automatic Definition feature. Use yyddd to specify an absolute Julian date

(yy is windowed: 00-74 = 20yy 75-99=19yy) Use +n to specify a date relative to the current IPL date. Specify 0 to cause no ‘TO’ date to be generated for the

VSAM file definition. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with

RESTORE and COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: DA=yyddd|+n|0

DE lete=pppphh

Use this operand to cause records containing a specific single character in a specific record position to be bypassed during the restore or copy function. pppp is a 4-digit decimal number (relative to 1 with leading zeros specified and less than 4097) denoting the position in a record where the single character is located

(if used with variable-length records, this position must be in the leading fixed portion of the record). hh is the hexadecimal value of the single character code.

Use this operand when building AIX’s along with RESTORE or COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: DE=pppphh

EO f=S

Specify S to cause Dr. D to continue copying only until a software EOF is found, without regard to the input file’s high used RBA (relative byte address). Use this operand when building AIX’s along with SAVE or COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: EO=S

FAst =YEs|NO

Specify YES to cause Dr. D to invoke physical IOCS rather than the slower logical

IOCS when saving, restoring or copying VSAM files. The output file is identical regardless of the setting of this operand. FAST=YES is the default shipped with

Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Abbreviation: FA=YE|NO

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FD =C|D|M|N|R

Use this operand along with AUTO=YES|ROTATE to identify the condition under which file definition should be accomplished. FD=R is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with RESTORE and COPY operations only.

Value Action

The file is deleted and redefined with the primary allocation increased so the restored file is contained within the primary extent retaining the original secondary size allocation.

The file is deleted and redefined.

The file is deleted and redefined with the primary allocation recomputed based on the high-used RBA of the so the restored file is contained within the primary extent retaining the original secondary size allocation.

The file is deleted and redefined unless it is empty or defined as reusable.

The existing definition is to be reset if the file exists (even if not defined as reusable). Otherwise, the file is defined.

This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: FD=C|D|M|N|R

FI nd=filename|’file-id’

Use this operand to cause the Dr. D save tape to be positioned to the correct input dataset. You may specify either the 1-7 character filename matching the

“DD NAME” field associated with the dataset on the save file or the full file-ID enclosed in single quotes. If this operand is not specified, Dr. D does not reposition the save file and the next saved fill is used as the input dataset. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with RESTORE operations only.

Abbreviation: FI=filename|’file-id’

FR eespace=cifreespace/cafreespace|N

Use this operand to override the freespace specification for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition feature. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with RESTORE and COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: FR=cifreespace/cafreespace

GR =nnn

Page 156 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D thousands of bytes (K) (for example, GR=100 reserves 104,000 bytes of storage).

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

HI ghkey=highkey|’highkey’|X’highkeyinhex’

Abbreviation: HI=highkey|’highkey’|X’highkeyinhex’

ID cams=PRint

Use this operand along with the PRINT operand to cause printing of Dr. D

Automatic Definition feature IDCAMS DELETE and DEFINE commands and their corresponding results. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with

RESTORE and COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: ID=PR

LA bel=NO

Use this operand to specify creation of an unlabeled output tape (when used along with SAVE operations) or the use of an unlabeled tape as input (when used along with RESTORE operations).

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LO wkey=lowkey|’lowkey’|X’lowkeyinhex’

RESTORE and COPY operations only.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: LO=lowkey|’lowkey’|X’lowkeyinhex’

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

MR ecords=n

Specify this operand with a value in the range of 0-99999999 to limit the number of logical records saved, restored, or copied. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: MR=n

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PA rtial=SElect

PARTIAL=SELECT indicates that one or more statements follow for AIX record selection (SELECT statements), building non-contiguous keys (KEY statement) and/or UNIQUE statements follow. For additional information, refer to “Build

AIX Record Selection” on page 148, “Building Non-Contiguous Key AIX’s” on page 148 and “Duplicate Key Processing “ on page 148.

An additional statement is required to selector statements. As with terminating control statements (see page 20), either a /@ or /* statement may be used. For clarity in reading the jobstreams you create, use the /@ as the terminating statement for selector statements and use the /* as the terminating statement for

Dr. D control statements.

Abbreviation: PA=SE

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Page 158 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RF ilename=filename

Specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement of the VSAM file to be restored or the output file from a copy. The Job Control DLBL label statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas.

This operand is required when building AIX’s along with RESTORE and COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: RF=filename

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

RV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)|NO

Use this operand to override the VOLUME specification for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. Specify up to 600 volsers (of those assigned to the VSAM catalog where the output file is created) enclosed in parentheses. When specifying NO, the file definitions exclude any data or index volume specification. Use this operand only when building AIX’s along with RESTORE and COPY operations.

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)|NO

RW ord=filepassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character password of the VSAM file being restored or copied to. Use this operand only when building AIX’s along with RESTORE and COPY operations.

Abbreviation: RW=filepassword

SF ilename=filename

Specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement of the file to be saved or copied. The Job Control DLBL label statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas.

This operand is required when building AIX’s along with SAVE and COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: SF=filename

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

SK ip=nnn

Use this operand to skip over nnn number of files before starting the actual

RESTORE function. This is a three-digit decimal number (leading zeros required). Do not use the SKIP operand along with the BLOCKSIZE operand.

Instead, set the blocksize on a preceding RESTORE=NOPERATION. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with RESTORE operations only.

Abbreviation: SK=nnn

SO ption=datashroptions/idxshroptions|N

Use this operand to override the share option specification for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition feature. The share options are entered as 2 single-digit pairs, where the first digit specifies how the component is shared within a single VSE system and the second digit specifies how the component is shared across multiple VSE systems. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with RESTORE and COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: SO=datashareoptions/indexshareoptions|N

SW ord=filepassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character file read password of the file being saved only if it has a read password defined. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with

SAVE and COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: SW=filepassword

Page 160 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Use this operand for tape positioning. It repositions the tape immediately. It is invalid when the data is saved to a disk dataset.

Value Action

NOr

REw

Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Immediately rewind the tape.

RUn Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1/filename2/filename3

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the input or output dataset(s). TAPEIN/TAPEOUT is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

This operand is only valid for tape devices. It is ignored for DASD devices. If

DASD is used as input or output, then TAPEIN or TAPEOUT must be specified.

Multiple filenames may be entered by separating them with the '/' character. The first filename specified applies to the primary file (default=TAPEIN/TAPEOUT).

The second filename applies to the second output file (default=TAPETWO) and the third filename applies to the third output file (default=TAPE003). All three names can be specified, for instance, TD=TAPEOUT/TAPETWO/TAPE003, or any combination as long as the '/' is present. TD=//TAPEXXX for instance would specify the name for the third tape while TD=/TAPEYYY would specify the name for the second tape. If the TD= operand is used to specify the name for either TAPETWO or TAPE003, then the UPSI setting is not needed to invoke the creation of the additional tape(s). Invoking the creation of the third tape always implies creation of the second tape, that is, specifying UPSI=XXXXXXXX1 is equivalent UPSI=XXX1XXXX1 and specifying TD=//TAPE003 is the same as

TD=/TAPETWO/TAPE003.

Abbreviation: TD=filename/filename2/filename3

TI =SYSnnn

Use this operand to specify an alternative programmer logical unit number for the TAPEIN tape dataset. TI=SYS008 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with RESTORE operations only.

Abbreviation: TI=SYSnnn

TO =SYSnnn

Use this operand to specify an alternative programmer logical unit number for the TAPEOUT tape dataset. TO=SYS007 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with SAVE operations only.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: TO=SYSnnn

TT =SYSnnn

Use this operand to specify an alternative programmer logical unit number for the TAPETWO tape dataset. TT=SYS006 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with SAVE operations only.

Abbreviation: TT=SYSnnn

T3 =SYSnnn

Use this operand to specify an alternative programmer logical unit number for the TAPE003 tape dataset. TI=SYS005 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with SAVE operations only.

Abbreviation: T3=SYSnnn

UN ique=YEs|NO|A

This operand allows tailoring of the AIX key during a BUILDAIX function. The default value, NO, does not modify the AIX key. When YES is specified, a four byte binary sequential number is to be appended to each AIX key generated to insure that each key is unique. When A is specified, duplicate keys are dropped if the AIX is defined as unique.

Abbreviation: UN=YE|NO|A

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

VA riable=YEs

Specification of VARIABLE=YES is required if the file contains variable length records. Specification of VARIABLE=YES for files containing fixed-length records causes no harm when creating Dr. D save tapes or when copying files.

VARIABLE=NO is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Abbreviation: VA=YE

Page 162 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

VB uff=n

VB=100 sets the buffer space used by Dr. D to 100,000. This operand defaults to 3 times the default or specified tape blocksize value (see BLOCKSIZE operand).

BUFFERSPACE operand).

Abbreviation: VB=n

VC ompress=YEs

This operand lets you have the compressed attribute specified for the output qualifying VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature.

Dr. D accomplishes qualification for the output using the rules as delineated by

AIX’s along with RESTORE and COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: VC=YE

VR type=K|E|R|N|S|P

Under some systems, an open error message with error X’A0’ (160) may occur when restoring to a VSAM file. Although this error can be ignored without penalty, specify this operand to identify the type of target VSAM file to avoid the error message.

Value Action

K Indicates KSDS file

Indicates ESDS file

Indicates RRDS file

Indicates non-CI format file

Indicates VSAM SAM managed file

Abbreviation: VR=K|E|R|N|S|P

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

VS type=K|E|R|N|S|P

Under some systems, an open error message with error X’A0’ (160) may occur when saving or copying a VSAM file. Although this error can be ignored without penalty, specify this operand to identify the type of target VSAM file to avoid the error message.

Value Action

Indicates KSDS file

Indicates ESDS file

Indicates RRDS file

Indicates non-CI format file

Indicates VSAM SAM managed file

Abbreviation: VR=K|E|R|N|S|P

VU se=CAncel|IGnore|NUll|OPerator|SAve

Use this operand to specify the action to be taken when a VSAM file about to be saved is currently in use (that is, open for update) by another task.

VUSE=CANCEL is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with SAVE operations only.

Value Action

CANCEL Cancel the job

IGNORE

NULL

Do not save the file

Save the file as a null file

OPERATOR Issue message DOCTOR175 and wait for operator response

(allowed only with FAST=YES)

SAVE Save the file anyway knowing that the results are unpredictable and may cause the save or subsequent restore to fail (allowed only with FAST=YES - with FAST=NO, this value functions the same as VUSE=NULL).

Abbreviation: VU=CA|IG|NU|OP|SA

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with SAVE and RESTORE operations only.

Abbreviation: WA=n

Page 164 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

WO rk=n[/n]

Use this operand to specify the number of sort work files and their starting

SYSNOs for the VSAM AIX build function. The first one or two digits specify the number of work files to be used. If the starting SYSNO is specified, a '/' is coded next, followed by a one to three-digit number in the range of 1-253. Example:

WORK=2/1 indicates that two sort work files are used with SYS001 and SYS002 assigned respectively.

Abbreviation: WO=n[/n]

WR =catalogwritepassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character VSAM catalog write or higher password.

Abbreviation: WR=catalogwritepassword

WS =catalogreadpassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character VSAM catalog read password.

Abbreviation: WS=catalogreadpassword

XL =YEs|NO

For VSAM restore, use this operand to specify whether KSDS files are to be defined with the 'EXTRALARGEDATASET' attribute. If 'NO' is specified, then the attribute is suppressed even if it was present in the saved file. This operand is effective only if an IDCAMS define is initiated- use the FD operand to force delete/define in case the file exists in the receiving catalog. Use this operand when building AIX’s along with RESTORE and COPY operations only.

Abbreviation: XL=YE|NO

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Examples

Example: Define alternate index and associated path

// DLBL IJSYSUC,'VSAM.USER.CATALOG',,VSAM

// EXEC IDCAMS, SIZE=AUTO

DEFINE AIX ( -

NAME(DATA.MASTER.AIX) -

RELATE(DATA.MASTER.BASE) -

BLOCKS(1000 1000) -

KEYS(14 7) -

RECORDSIZE(10 2048) -

NONUNIQUEKEY -

DATA (NAME(DATA.MASTER.AIX.D)))

DEFINE PATH ( -

NAME(DATA.MASTER.AIX.PATH))

Example: Build alternate index during save of base cluster

This example builds a single alternate index (AIX0101) during the save of the base cluster (BASE). A sort work file (SORTWK1) is required and may need to be assigned to SYS010 (Dr. D defaults SYS010 to the sort, but the number of sort work files and the SYSNOs used can be varied by use of the WORK operand as shown in this example).

// DLBL IJSYSUC,'VSAM.USER.CATALOG',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0101,'DATA.MASTER.AIX',,VSAM

// DLBL BASE,'DATA.MASTER.BASE',,VSAM

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'DATA.MASTER.BASE'

// ASSGN SYS007,280 (output tape)

// DLBL SORTWK1,,0

// EXTENT SYS001,WORK01......

// ASSGN SYS001,DISK,VOL=WORK01,SHR

// DLBL SORTWK2,,0

// EXTENT SYS002,WORK02......

// ASSGN SYS002,DISK,VOL=WORK02,SHR

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=1400K

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX,SF=BASE,AF=1,VA=YES,AB=200,WORK=2/1

Page 166 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Build alternate index during dummy save of base cluster

This example illustrates how to build an alternate index by just reading the base cluster. The output tape is assigned to ignore to indicate to Dr. D that this a dummy save.

// DLBL IJSYSUC,'VSAM.USER.CATALOG',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0101,'DATA.MASTER.AIX',,VSAM

// DLBL BASE,'DATA.MASTER.BASE',,VSAM

// ASSGN SYS007,IGN (output tape)

// DLBL SORTWK1,,0

// EXTENT SYS010,WORK01......

// ASSGN SYS010,DISK,VOL=WORK01,SHR

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=1400K

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX,SF=BASE,AF=1,VA=YES,AB=200

Example: Build alternate index during restore of base cluster

This example builds an alternate index (AIX0101) during the restore of the base cluster (BASE).

// DLBL IJSYSUC,'VSAM.USER.CATALOG',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0101,'DATA.MASTER.AIX',,VSAM

// DLBL BASE,'DATA.MASTER.BASE',,VSAM

// TLBL TAPEIN,'DATA.MASTER.BASE'

// ASSGN SYS008,280 (input tape)

// DLBL SORTWK1,,0

// EXTENT SYS010,WORK01.....

// ASSGN SYS010,DISK,VOL=WORK01,SHR

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=1400K

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX,RF=BASE,AF=1,VA=YES,AB=500

Example: Build alternate index during copy of base cluster

This example builds an alternate index (AIX0101) during the copy of the base cluster (BASEIN).

// DLBL IJSYSUC,'VSAM.USER.CATALOG',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0101,'DATA.MASTER.AIX',,VSAM

// DLBL BASEIN,'DATA.MASTER.BASE',,VSAM

// DLBL BASEOUT,'DATA.MASTER.BASE.SAVE',,VSAM

// DLBL SORTWK1,,0

// EXTENT SYS010,WORK01........

// ASSGN SYS010,DISK,VOL=WORK01,SHR

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=1400K

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX,SF=BASEIN,RF=BASEOUT,AF=1,VA=YES,AB=500

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Build multiple alternate indexes during restore

The number of alternate indexes to be built is specified via the AF operand

('AF=3').

// DLBL IJSYSUC,'VSAM.USER.CATALOG',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0101,'DATA.MASTER.AIX.ONE',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0102,'DATA.MASTER.AIX.TWO',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0103,'DATA.MASTER.AIX.THREE',,VSAM

// DLBL BASE,'DATA.MASTER.BASE',,VSAM

// TLBL TAPEIN,'DATA.MASTER.BASE'

// ASSGN SYS008,280 (input tape)

// DLBL SORTWK1,,0

// EXTENT SYS010,WORK01......

// ASSGN,DISK,VOL=WORK01,SHR

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=1400K

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX,RF=BASE,AF=3,VA=YES,AB=500

Example: Build multiple alternate indexes via multiple builds

In this example AIX0101 and AIX0102 are built from the save of VSAM base cluster BASE1. AIX0201 and AIX0202 are built from the save of VSAM base cluster BASE2.

// DLBL IJSYSUC,'VSAM.USER.CATALOG',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0101,'DATA.MASTER.AIX.ONE',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0102,'DATA.MASTER.AIX.TWO',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0201,'EMP.MASTER.AIX.ONE',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0202,'EMP.MASTER.AIX.TWO',,VSAM

// DLBL BASE1,'DATA.MASTER.BASE',,VSAM

// DLBL BASE2,'EMP.MASTER.BASE',,VSAM

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'MASTER.BACKUP'

// ASSGN SYS007,280 (output tape)

// DLBL SORTWK1,,0

// EXTENT SYS010,WORK01.....

// ASSGN SYS010,DISK,VOL=WORK01,SHR

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=1400K

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX,SF=BASE1,AF=2,VA=YES,AB=200

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX,SF=BASE2,AF=2,VA=YES,AB=200

Page 168 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Build multiple alternate indexes via multiple builds and using record selection

In this example AIX0101 and AIX0102 are built from the save of VSAM base cluster BASE1 using record selection. AIX0201 and AIX0202 are built from the save of VSAM base cluster BASE2 using record selection.

// DLBL IJSYSUC,'VSAM.USER.CATALOG',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0101,'DATA.MASTER.AIX.ONE',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0102,'DATA.MASTER.AIX.TWO',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0201,'EMP.MASTER.AIX.ONE',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0202,'EMP.MASTER.AIX.TWO',,VSAM

// DLBL BASE1,'DATA.MASTER.BASE',,VSAM

// DLBL BASE2,'EMP.MASTER.BASE',,VSAM

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'MASTER.BACKUP'

// ASSGN SYS007,280 (output tape)

// DLBL SORTWK1,,0

// EXTENT SYS010,WORK01.....

// ASSGN SYS010,DISK,VOL=WORK01,SHR

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=1400K

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX,SF=BASE1,AF=2,VA=YES,AB=200,PA=SE

01 SELECT C2 = ' '

02 SELECT C2 < 00400

/@ TERMINATES SELECTION

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX,SF=BASE2,AF=2,VA=YES,AB=200,UNIQUE=YES,PA=SE

02 SELECT C2 = A

/@ TERMINATES SELECTION

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Build multiple alternate indexes with non-contiguous key via multiple builds

In this example AIX0101 and AIX0102 are built from the save of VSAM base cluster BASE1 using record selection. When building AIX0101, there is no modification for duplicate keys but, when building AIX0102, Dr. D adds a 4-byte sequence number to each key to make them all unique (02 UNIQUE=YES statement).

AIX0201 and AIX0202 are built from the save of VSAM base cluster BASE2 using record selection. When building AIX0201, there is a 4-byte sequence number added to each key to make them all unique (UNIQUE=YES operand on the

FUNCTION= control statement). When building AIX0202, there is no modification for duplicate keys (02 UNIQUE=NO statement).

// DLBL IJSYSUC,'VSAM.USER.CATALOG',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0101,'DATA.MASTER.AIX.ONE',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0102,'DATA.MASTER.AIX.TWO',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0201,'EMP.MASTER.AIX.ONE',,VSAM

// DLBL AIX0202,'EMP.MASTER.AIX.TWO',,VSAM

// DLBL BASE1,'DATA.MASTER.BASE',,VSAM

// DLBL BASE2,'EMP.MASTER.BASE',,VSAM

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'MASTER.BACKUP'

// ASSGN SYS007,280 (output tape)

// DLBL SORTWK1,,0

// EXTENT SYS010,WORK01.....

// ASSGN SYS010,DISK,VOL=WORK01,SHR

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=1400K

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX,SF=BASE1,AF=2,VA=YES,AB=200,PA=SE

01 KEY=1,4,100,10,150,5

02 UNIQUE=YES

/@ TERMINATES SELECTION

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX,SF=BASE2,AF=2,VA=YES,AB=200,UNIQUE=YES,PA=SE

02 KEY=10,2,1,3,25,6

02 UNIQUE=NO

/@ TERMINATES SELECTION

Page 170 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

FUNCTION=CTAPE

Dr. D can copy tapes in two different modes. The first copies at the logical tape file level, with an open and close for each input and output tape. The second copies in image mode. In image mode, Dr. D does not open or close tapes, and it expects each input tape to fit within the limits of its corresponding output tape.

In either mode, tape blocks can be modified by supplying pairs of scan and replace control cards along with the MODIFY=YES operand.

Dr. D Logical Tape Copy Feature

The logical tape copy function allows single- or multi-volume tapes to be copied, and, if desired, reblocked in the process. Normal Dr. D tape commands are used to REWIND/UNLOAD tapes, and stacked (multi-file) tapes may be processed since tapes are normally opened and closed with NO REWIND.

Dr. D Image Mode Tape Copy Feature

The image mode tape copy makes an exact copy of input tapes including any

VOL, header or trailer labels. Since the tapes are not opened, the DOCTOR610 warning message is issued before the first copy. This warning message requires operator verification for input and output tape drives. The user should be aware that the VOL label is copied exactly resulting in more than one tape with the same volume serial number and be aware of possible problems if a tape management system is in use. This copy method copies data and tapemarks until: 1) the EOT reflector is sensed on input or output or 2) a tape error occurs on the input tape. If end of output occurs, the operator will be asked whether to treat as end of input or to continue on another tape. If end of input (or tape error) occurs, it is treated as end of copy. Image mode tape copy requires the

FORMAT=IMAGE operand.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

FUNCTION=CTAPE Operand Summary

FUNCTION=CTAPE

FORMAT=IMAGE

GR=nnn

LABEL=NO

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

LBLOCKSIZE=n

LRECSIZE=n

MODIFY=YES

NRECDS=n

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

UPSI=012345678

Yes No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

FU nction=CTape

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: FU=CT

FO rmat=IMage

Use this operand to perform the tape copy in Image Mode.

Abbreviation: FO=IM

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LA bel=NO

Used to read and write unlabeled tapes.

Page 172 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LB locksize=n

Use this operand to reblock variable length records during a Logical Tape Copy.

Abbreviation: LB=n

LR ecsize=n

Specify this operand along with the NRECDS=n operand to reblock fixed-length records during a Logical Tape Copy. This operand identifies the length of each logical record.

Abbreviation: LR=n

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

MO dify=YEs

MODIFY=YES is used to indicate that tape blocks are to be modified during the tape copy function. If specified, pairs of modifier control statements are entered after the FUNCTION=CTAPE.

The first statement of each pair specifies a search argument. If specified in character format, it must be preceded by a ‘C’ and the character string must be enclosed in single quotes. If specified in hex format, it must be preceded by an ‘X’ and the hex search string must be enclosed in single quotes.

The second statement of each pair specifies the replacement value. If specified in character format, it must be preceded by a ‘C’ and the replacement character string must be enclosed in single quotes. If specified in hex format, it must be preceded by an ‘X’ and the hex replacement string must be enclosed in single quotes.

Dr. D scans the data in each tape block for the search argument and replaces all occurrences of it with the replacement value. Multiple pairs of search/replacement statements may be used to modify multiple fields. An example of MODIFY=YES follows in the Examples section.

Abbreviation: MO=YE

NR ecds=n

Specify this operand along with the LRECSIZE=n operand to reblock fixedlength records during a Logical Tape Copy. This operand identifies the maximum number of logical records blocked into a physical record when

Dr. D

USER GUIDE creating the output tape(s). For example, if the input user data file contains 80byte logical records blocked up to 10 to form a maximum 800-byte physical record, this operand would be specified as NR=10.

Abbreviation: NR=n

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO |LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

Page 174 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Tape copy without reblock

This example copies the first file from the input tape to the output tape.

// ASSGN SYS007,181 OUTPUT TAPE DRIVE

// ASSGN SYS008,180 INPUT TAPE DRIVE

// TLBL TAPEIN,’INPUT.TAPE’

// TLBL TAPEOUT,’OUTPUT.TAPE’

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=CTAPE

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=RUN UNLOAD INPUT TAPE

SAVE=NO,TAPE=RUN UNLOAD OUTPUT TAPE

Example: Tape copy creating two output tapes

This example copies the first file from the input tape to two output tapes.

// ASSGN SYS006,182 SECOND OUTPUT TAPE DRIVE

// ASSGN SYS007,181 OUTPUT TAPE DRIVE

// ASSGN SYS008,180 INPUT TAPE DRIVE

// TLBL TAPEIN,’INPUT.TAPE’

// TLBL TAPEOUT,’OUTPUT.TAPE’

// TLBL TAPETWO,’OUTPUT.TAPE.TWO’

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=CTAPE,UPSI=0001

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=RUN UNLOAD INPUT TAPE

SAVE=NO,TAPE=RUN UNLOAD OUTPUT TAPES

Example: Tape copy - fix blocked files with reblock

This example copies the first file from a fixed-length record input tape to the output tape. When the output tape is created, it has a blocksize of 8000 (LR=80 blocked by NR=100).

// ASSGN SYS007,181 OUTPUT TAPE DRIVE

// ASSGN SYS008,180 INPUT TAPE DRIVE

// TLBL TAPEIN,’INPUT.TAPE’

// TLBL TAPEOUT,’OUTPUT.TAPE’

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=CTAPE,LR=80,NR=100

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=RUN UNLOAD INPUT TAPE

SAVE=NO,TAPE=RUN UNLOAD OUTPUT TAPE

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Tape copy - variable blocked files with reblock

This example copies the first file from a variable length record input tape to the output tape. When the output tape is created, it has a blocksize of 8000.

// ASSGN SYS007,181 OUTPUT TAPE DRIVE

// ASSGN SYS008,180 INPUT TAPE DRIVE

// TLBL TAPEIN,’INPUT.TAPE’

// TLBL TAPEOUT,’OUTPUT.TAPE’

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=CTAPE,LB=8000

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=RUN UNLOAD INPUT TAPE

SAVE=NO,TAPE=RUN UNLOAD OUTPUT TAPE

Example: Image tape copy

This example copies all files including VOL, header, trailer and tapemarks from the input tape to the output tape.

// ASSGN SYS007,181 OUTPUT TAPE DRIVE

// ASSGN SYS008,180 INPUT TAPE DRIVE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=CTAPE,FORMAT=IMAGE

Example: Image tape copy - dual output

This example copies all files including VOL, header, trailer and tapemarks from the input tape to two output tapes.

// ASSGN SYS006,182 SECOND OUTPUT TAPE DRIVE

// ASSGN SYS007,181 OUTPUT TAPE DRIVE

// ASSGN SYS008,180 INPUT TAPE DRIVE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=CTAPE,UPSI=0001,FORMAT=IMAGE

Page 176 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Tape copy with modification

This example copies the first file from the input tape to the output tape. During the copy operation, any data with the character string ‘OLD DATA’ is changed to the character string ‘NEW DATA’ and any data with the hexadecimal string

‘05060708’ is changed to the hexadecimal string ‘AABCDEFF’.

// ASSGN SYS007,181 OUTPUT TAPE DRIVE

// ASSGN SYS008,180 INPUT TAPE DRIVE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=CTAPE,MODIFY=YES search--> C'OLD DATA' replace-> C'NEW DATA' search--> X'05060708' replace-> X'AABCDEFF'

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FUNCTION=DELETE

The Dr. D Delete function may be used to delete or reset VSAM files, delete non-

VSAM files or delete VSAM data spaces.

WARNING: VSAM files cannot be processed via the same control statement as non-VSAM files and VSAM data spaces. Non-VSAM files and VSAM data spaces may be processed via the same control statement. If both RVOLID and SCAT operands are coded on the same control statement, the RVOLID operand is ignored.

Deleting VSAM Files

Only the VSAM catalog need be identified by the SCAT operand. The default is to select all files. This may be changed to select only specific files based upon date or times (EXPIRED and TSTAMP operands) , by residence volume

(SVOLID) or by PARTIAL= selection/rejection operands (see Logical

Selection/Rejection/Rename Process on page 23 for a description of all selection/rejection statements). To determine the file(s) being selected without performing a delete or reset, use the operand FD=T. To actually perform a delete operation, use the operand FD=D. To perform a reset operation, use FD=R.

Deleting non-VSAM Files

The RVOLID operand is used to determine which volume(s) or disk pool to be searched when deleting files. The default is to select all files. This may be changed to select only specific files based upon date (EXPIRED operands) or by

PARTIAL selection/rejection operands (see Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename

Process on page 23 for a description of all selection/rejection statements). To determine the file(s) being selected without performing a delete, use the operand

FD=T.

To prevent the accidental deletion of files, no file is deleted unless the PARTIAL operand is specified. If the PARTIAL operand is not specified, the only action taken is the listing of the files that would be deleted (FD=T is forced). To actually perform a delete operation, use the operand FD=D along with the PARTIAL operand.

Deleting VSAM Data Spaces

The deletion of VSAM data spaces may be performed in the same logical operation as the deletion of non-VSAM files. Its operation follows the same rules as apply to non-VSAM file deletion with the exception the operands

FSECURED=YES and VSAM=YES must be specified.

Page 178 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Control Statement Operands

FUNCTION=DELETE Operand Summary

FUNCTION=DELETE

EXPIRED=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

FD=D|R|T

FSECURED=YES

GR=nnn

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT

RP=YES|NO

RVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

SCAT=filename

SVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

TSTAMP=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

VSAM=YES

WR=catalogpassword

Yes No

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

NOTE 1 No

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

NOTE 1:

When deleting VSAM files, the SCAT operand is required. When deleting non-VSAM files or VSAM data space, the RVOLID operand is required.

If both RVOLID and SCAT operands are coded on the same control statement, the RVOLID operand is ignored.

FU nction=DElete

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: FU=DE

EX pired=Y |N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

This operand causes Dr. D to select files according to their expiration dates. A file is considered unexpired when its expiration date is greater than the current system date.

Value Action

Y Select all files regardless of expiration date.

O+n

Select only unexpired files.

Select only expired files.

Select only expired files after adjusting the current system date by

n days (n days may be 1-3 digits).

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Value Action

O-n

yyddd Select only unexpired files using 19yyddd as the current system date.

yyyyddd Select only unexpired files using yyyyddd instead of the current system date.

Abbreviation: EX=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

FD =D|R|T

Use this operand to indicate whether Dr. D should actually delete/reset the files that qualify or just list the files that qualify.

Value Action

D Delete all qualified files

Reset all qualified files. (Valid for VSAM files only)

Do not delete any qualified file; simply list them. This is the default when deleting VSAM files and when the PARTIAL operand is not used when deleting non-VSAM files and VSAM data spaces. If

PARTIAL is specified with non-VSAM files or VSAM data spaces,

FD=D is the default.

This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: FD=D|R|T

FS ecured=NO|YEs

This operand determines if data secured files should be deleted. If NO, the default, is specified, an operating system message may be issued as each secured file is selected, respond with 'YES' to proceed. If YES is specified, the data secured files are automatically deleted without operator intervention. When deleting VSAM data spaces, specify FSECURED=YES,VSAM=YES on the control statement.

This operand is valid for non-VSAM files and VSAM data spaces only.

Abbreviation: FS=NO|YE

GR =nnn

Page 180 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

Use this operand to immediately write a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. Press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PA rtial=SElect|REject

Use this operand to indicate that one or more selector statements immediately follow this statement. The selector statements used may be to specify the file(s) to be deleted. For additional information, see “Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename

Process” on page 23.

Abbreviation: PA=SE|RE

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

RV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Use this operand to specify the volser(s) of the volume(s) to be searched when looking for files to be deleted. Up to 600 volsers may be specified (use parentheses to enclose the volsers when specifying more than 1). This operand may also specify a Dr. D, BIM-EPIC or CA-EPIC disk pool ID.

NOTE: This operand is valid only for non-VSAM files and VSAM data spaces.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

SC at=filename

Use this operand to identify the filename of the VSAM catalog containing the file(s) to be deleted/reset. If this operand is specified on a Dr. D request that is continued across multiple control statements, it must be on the initial control statement.

NOTE: This operand is valid only for VSAM files.

Abbreviation: SC=filename

SV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Use this operand to limit selection only to those files that fully or partially reside on any of the listed volumes. You can enter up to 600 volsers, enclosed in parentheses.

NOTE: This operand is valid only for VSAM files.

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

TS tamp=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

Use this operand to cause selection of files based on their time stamp. The entire time stamp value may be prefixed by either a ‘<’ (indicating selecting entries with time stamps prior to the specified value) or ‘>’ (indicating selecting entries with time stamps equal to or after the specified value). Omission of either a ‘<’ or

‘>’ indicates that the time stamp date must exactly match the file’s time stamp date and any time of day value is ignored.

The time stamp value entered is compared to the actual Greenwich Mean Time values stored and is not adjusted for any difference from local time. For example, local time for the western United States typically is Greenwich Mean Time less 7 hours. A user in that area could define a file at 8:00 p.m. on day 2000/105 and the stored time stamp value would be 2000/106 at 3:00 a.m.

The time stamp date is required and may be entered either as yyddd (yy is windowed: 00-74 = 20yy 75-99 = 19yy) or as a number of days value to be subtracted from the current system date.

TS=-0

TS=>-1.1200

TS=>-6

TS=01100 select if stamped today select if stamped after yesterday at 12 noon select if stamped in the last seven days select if stamped on the 100th day of 2001

TS=>01100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 2001/100

TS=<01100 select if stamped before 2001/100

Page 182 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

TS=99100 select if stamped on the 100th day of 1999

TS=>99100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 1999/100

TS=<99100 select if stamped before 1999/100

NOTE: This operand is valid only for VSAM files.

Abbreviation: TS=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

VS am=YEs

Use this operand to select or reject VSAM VTOC entries for deletion. The default is to bypass VSAM entries. If VSAM=YES is specified, also specify

FSECURED=YES.

NOTE: This operand is valid only for VSAM files.

Abbreviation: VS=YE

WR =catalogwritepassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character catalog write or higher password.

NOTE: This operand is valid only for VSAM files.

Abbreviation: WR=catalogwritepassword

Dr. D

Examples

Example: List all VSAM files for delete/reset

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=DELETE,SCAT=UCAT1,FD=T

Example: List selected VSAM files for delete/reset

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=DELETE,SCAT=IJSYSCT,FD=T,PARTIAL=SELECT

PAYROLL*

Example: Reset VSAM files associated with a particular disk volume

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=DELETE,SCAT=IJSYSCT,SVOLID=CKD001,FD=R

Example: Delete all VSAM files in a usercatalog

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=DELETE,SCAT=UCAT1,FD=D

Example: Delete selected VSAM files in a usercatalog

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=DELETE,SCAT=IJSYSCT,FD=D,PARTIAL=SELECT

PAYROLL*

USER GUIDE

Page 184 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: List selected non-VSAM files for delete

The following example produces a list of files on DISK01 that are candidates for deletion if the dataset name begins with the characters 'PAYROLL'.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=DELETE,RVOLID=DISK01,FD=T,PARTIAL=SELECT

PAYROLL*

Example: Delete selected non-VSAM files

The following example deletes all on DISK01 if the dataset name begins with the characters 'PAYROLL'.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=DELETE,RVOLID=DISK01,FD=D,PARTIAL=SELECT

PAYROLL*

Example: Delete VSAM data space

The following example deletes any VSAM data space on DISK01.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=DELETE,RVOLID=DISK01,FD=D,FSECURED=YES,VSAM=YES,PARTIAL=SELECT

Z9999992.*

Example: Delete all non-VSAM files and VSAM data space

The following example deletes all non-VSAM files and VSAM data spaces on

DISK01. Any VSAM master catalogs or user catalogs on DISK01 are not deleted.

NOTE: When using the REVERSE feature along with the delete, all files are deleted, except for the ones that have @REVERSE@ beside it. Also please note that reversal cards must precede other selectors.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=DELETE,RVOLID=DISK01,FD=D,FSECURED=YES,VSAM=YES,PARTIAL=SELECT

Z9999994.* @REVERSE@

Z9999996.* @REVERSE@

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Delete only expired VSAM files

The following example deletes all expired VSAM clusters in the UCAT1 usercatalog.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=DELETE,SCAT=IJSYSCT,FD=D,EX=O

Example: Delete only expired non-VSAM files

The following example deletes all expired non-VSAM files on 3 volumes.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=DELETE,RVOLID=(PACK01,PACK02,PACK03),FD=D,EX=O,PARTIAL=SELECT

Page 186 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

FUNCTION=DFIX

This function sets the expiration date of selected files to be set to 2099/366 so that the operating system considers the files to be permanent. The RVOLID operand determines which volume(s) or disk pool to be searched when changing expiration dates of files. The default is to select all files. This may be changed to select only specific files based upon date (EXPIRED operand) or by PARTIAL selection/rejection operands (see Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process on page 23 for a description of all selection/rejection statements).

Control Statement Operands

FUNCTION=DFIX Operand Summary

FUNCTION=DFIX

EXPIRED=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

FSECURED=YES

GR=nnn

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT

RP=YES|NO

RVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

VSAM=YES

Yes No

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

Yes No

No No

FU nction=DFix

This operand indicates the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: FU=DF

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

EX pired=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

This operand causes Dr. D to select files according to their expiration dates. A file is considered unexpired when its expiration date is greater than the current system date.

Value Action

Y Select all files regardless of expiration date.

N Select only unexpired files.

O+n

Select only expired files.

Select only expired files after adjusting the current system date by

n days (n days may be 1-3 digits).

O-n

yyddd Select only unexpired files using 19yyddd as the current system date.

yyyyddd Select only unexpired files using yyyyddd instead of the current system date.

Abbreviation: EX=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

FS ecured=NO|YEs

This operand determines if data secured files should be updated. If NO, the default, is specified, an operating system message may be issued as each secured file is selected, respond with 'YES' to proceed. If YES is specified, the data secured files are updated without operator intervention.

Abbreviation: FS=NO|YE

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

Page 188 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PA rtial=SElect|REject

Use this operand to indicate that one or more selector statements immediately follow this statement. The selector statements used may be to specify the file(s) whose expiration dates are to be updated. For additional information, see

“Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process” on page 23.

Abbreviation: PA=SE|RE

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

RV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Use this operand to specify the volser(s) of the volume(s) to search for files to delete. Specify up to 600 volsers (use parentheses to enclose the volsers when specifying more than 1). This operand may also specify a Dr. D, BIM-EPIC or

CA-EPIC disk poolid.

NOTE: This operand is valid for non-VSAM files and VSAM data spaces only.

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

VS am=YEs

Use this operand to select or reject VSAM VTOC entries for updating. The default is to bypass VSAM entries. If VSAM=YES is specified, also specify

FSECURED=YES.

Abbreviation: VS=YE

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Examples

Example: Update the expiration date of all files in a pool of disks

The following example updates the expiration date of all files in the VTOCs of the disks in a disk manager pool defined by the POOL-ID POOL01. Any file having an expiration date greater than 99/364 has its expiration set to 2099/366

(permanent non-expiring).

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=DFIX,RV=POOL01,FSECURED=YES,VSAM=YES

Example: Update the expiration date of selected files

The following example updates the expiration date of all files in the VTOCs of the disks DISK01 and DISK02, having file ids starting with 'PAYROLL'.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=DFIX,RV=(DISK01,DISK02),PARTIAL=SELECT

PAYROLL*

Page 190 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

FUNCTION=LCAT

The LCAT (List Catalog) command provides a compact yet comprehensive report of the files (files, paths, alternate indices, etc.) in a specified VSAM user or master catalog. Only the VSAM catalog need be identified by the SCAT operand.

The default is to select all files. This may be changed to select only specific files based upon dates or times (EXPIRED and TSTAMP operands), by residence volume (SVOLID) or by PARTIAL= selection/rejection operands (refer to Logical

Selection/Rejection/Rename Process).

The contents of the report are tailored using the FORMAT operand.

A space map and gap map report follows the listing of files showing how much space is allocated and available on each disk assigned to the specified catalog.

Control Statement Operands

FUNCTION=LCAT Operand Summary

FUNCTION=LCAT

EXPIRED=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n]|yyddd|yyyyddd

FORMAT=A|M|N|n [F]

GR=nnn

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT

RP=YES|NO

SCAT=filename

SPACE=n

SVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

TSTAMP=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

WS=catalogreadpassword

Yes No

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

Yes No

No No

No Yes

FU nction=LCat

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: FU=LC

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

EX pired=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

This operand causes Dr. D to select files according to their expiration dates. A file is considered unexpired when its expiration date is greater than the current system date.

Value Action

Y Select all files regardless of expiration date.

N Select only unexpired files.

O+n

Select only expired files.

Select only expired files after adjusting the current system date by

n days (n days may be 1-3 digits).

O-n

yyddd Select only unexpired files using 19yyddd as the current system date.

yyyyddd Select only unexpired files using yyyyddd instead of the current system date.

Abbreviation: EX=Y|N||O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

FO rmat=A|M|N|n [F]

Use this operand to control the output for each individual file selected as follows:

Value Action

A Maximum file information and only the first allocation is listed.

M A single entry is listed which includes the file-ID, file organization and file time-stamp only (no allocation information provided).

Maximum file information is listed (default).

Maximum file information is listed up to n maximum number of print lines allowed for each file (0-9). If specified as 0, no individual files are listed and only the count of the number of files selected is listed. If specified as 1-9, no more than that number of lines is printed for any file selected.

F This optional value would be coded as the second value to the

FORMAT operand. It is used to bypass generation of the SPACE MAP following the standard report.

If an F is appended to one of the format values listed above, the space map at the end of the report will be bypassed. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: FO=A|M|N|n [F]

Page 192 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PA rtial=SElect|REject

Use this operand to indicate that one or more selector statements immediately follow this statement. The selector statements used may be to specify the file(s) to be listed on the report. For additional information, see “Logical

Selection/Rejection/Rename Process” on page 23.

Abbreviation: PA=SE|RE

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

SC at=filename

Use this operand to identify the filename of the VSAM catalog containing the file(s) to be listed. If this operand is specified on a Dr. D request that is continued across multiple control statements, it must be on the initial control statement.

Abbreviation: SC=filename

SP ace=n

Use this operand to control spacing on the report. Specify a 1-digit number from

2 to 9 to denote the number of blank lines to be printed between files. The report normally prints one blank line between files.

Abbreviation: SP=n

SV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Specify this operand to limit selection to only those files that fully or partially reside on any of the listed volumes. Specify up to 600 volsers enclosed in parentheses.

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

TS tamp=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

‘>’ indicates that the time stamp date must exactly match the file’s time stamp date and any time of day value is ignored.

The time stamp date is required and may be entered either as yyddd (yy is windowed: 00-74 = 20yy 75-99 = 19yy) or as a number of days value to be subtracted from the current system date.

TS=-0

TS=>-1.1200

TS=>-6 select if stamped today select if stamped after yesterday at 12 noon select if stamped in the last seven days

TS=01100 select if stamped on the 100th day of 2001

TS=>01100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 2001/100

Page 194 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

TS=<01100

TS=99100 select if stamped before 2001/100 select if stamped on the 100th day of 1999

TS=>99100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 1999/100

TS=<99100 select if stamped before 1999/100

Abbreviation: TS=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

WS =catalogreadpassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character VSAM catalog read password.

Abbreviation: WS=catalogreadpassword

Dr. D

Examples

Example: List all files in a catalog

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LCAT,SCAT=IJSYSCT

Example: List files associated with a particular disk volume

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LCAT,SCAT=IJSYSCT,SVOLSID=CKD001

Example: List only selected files

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LCAT,SCAT=IJSYSCT,PARTIAL=SELECT

PAYROLL*

Example: List only the number of files, space map, and gap map

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LCAT,SCAT=IJSYSCT,FORMAT=0

Example: List only the space map and gap map

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LCAT,SCAT=IJSYSCT,PARTIAL=REJECT

Example: List only files with 5 or more CI splits

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LCAT,SCAT=IJSYSCT,PARTIAL=REJECT

CISPLIT=5

USER GUIDE

Page 196 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

The Listcat Report

The Listcat report is for the most part self-explanatory, but some fields and codes may require further explanation:

Date and

Time Stamp

The date and time-of-day displayed are the actual Greenwich

Mean Time values stored in the VSAM catalog and are not adjusted for any difference from local time. For example, local time for the western United States typically is Greenwich

Mean Time less 7 hours. A user in that area could define a file at 8:00pm on day 2000/105 and the Dr. D Listcat report would show a date and time value of 2000/106 at 3:00 a.m.

CISIZE

Allocations Each allocation value is suffixed with a ‘T’ (for tracks) or a ‘B’

(for blocks) followed by the single-digit VSAM use class.

Free Space CI (control interval) and CA (control area) are shown as a whole number percentage. KBYTE is shown as thousands of bytes of free space available.

Extent

Information

The first occurrence of CISIZE is always of the data component while the second, indicated by the suffix ‘I’, is of the index component.

The data component extent(s) are listed first followed by the index component extent(s) and a relative extent number for each. Percentage used is shown once for the data component and once for the index component regardless of the number of extents occupied.

Space Map and Gap Map Report

The Space Map and Gap Map report following the Listcat report is a summary of the space owned by the catalog, showing extent location, size and available space by disk volume.

The disk volume gap map values, shown to the right of each disk volume entry, show how the available space is distributed on the disk volume and may be interpreted as a measure of space disorganization. Each entry is comprised of the number of free tracks/blocks followed by the letter ‘X’ followed by the number of occurrences that number of free tracks/blocks appear. For example, 2880X2 shows that two areas of 2880 tracks/blocks are available; 4800X1 shows that one area of 4800 tracks/blocks is available.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FUNCTION=LDIR

The list directory function provides a compact (two-up format) directory listing of a VSE library. Members can be selected for listing by their library, sublibrary, type, specific or generic member name, and by the time stamp. A library recap is produced giving statistics by library, sublibrary, and member type.

The report format is mostly self-explanatory. Report headings show the 'time stamp' used to select the members for listing, the library file ID, the size of the library in blocks, and the number of free blocks and %. For each member, its date and time created and last changed (military time), its blocks used and contiguous, and its size are shown. For PHASE member type, the size is the size in bytes while for other types the size is the number of logical records used by the member. Two library recaps are produced (unless suppressed), one by sublibrary and another by overall library. Both recaps show by member type the number of members, number of blocks and % library share. And, finally, a library efficiency rating is listed to give an estimate of library disorganization on a scale of 1-100 with 100 indicating the highest efficiency and least disorganization. The FORMAT operand restricts which report is generated.

Control Statement Operands

FUNCTION=LDIR Operand Summary

FUNCTION=LDIR

FORMAT=A|B

GR=nnn

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

MEMBER=SELECT|REJECT

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

RP=YES|NO

SFILENAME=filename

TSTAMP=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

Yes No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

Yes No

No Yes

FU nction=LDir

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: FU=LD

Page 198 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

FO rmat=A|B

Use this operand to control which report(s) are generated.

Value Action

Display member list report only.

Display library recap report only.

If this operand is omitted, both the member list and library recap reports are produced. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: FO=A|B

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

ME mber=SElect|REject

“to-sublib” name with a ‘&’ sign. All other selector statements, without the above mentioned prefixes, will be considered member name selectors.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE characters preceding the ‘*’. A single ‘*’, without any preceding characters, will result is selecting all.

Abbreviation: ME=SE|RE

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

SF ilename=filename

Specify the filename identifying the VSE library’s Job Control DLBL statement.

The Job Control DLBL label statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas. If omitted, filename defaults to SYSLIB.

Abbreviation: SF=filename

TS tamp=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

Use this operand to cause selection of files based on their “changed” time stamp.

The entire time stamp value may be prefixed by either a ‘<’ (indicating selecting entries with time stamps prior to the specified value) or ‘>’ (indicating selecting entries with time stamps equal to or after the specified value). Omission of either a ‘<’ or ‘>’ indicates that the time stamp date must exactly match the file’s time stamp date and any time of day value is ignored.

Page 200 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D hours. A user in that area could define a file at 8:00pm on day 2000/105 and the stored time stamp value would be 2000/106 at 3:00 a.m.

The time stamp date is required and may be entered either as yyddd (yy is windowed: 00-74 = 20yy 75-99 = 19yy) or as a number of days value to be subtracted from the current system date.

TS=-0

TS=>-1.1200

TS=>-6

TS=01100 select if stamped today select if stamped after yesterday at 12 noon select if stamped in the last seven days select if stamped on the 100th day of 2001

TS=>01100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 2001/100

TS=<01100 select if stamped before 2001/100

TS=99100 select if stamped on the 100th day of 1999

TS=>99100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 1999/100

TS=<99100 select if stamped before 1999/100

Abbreviation: TS=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

Examples

Example: List all members in the PRD2. Library

List all members of the PRD2 library.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LDIR,SFILENAME=PRD2

Example: List members changed or added to the library

List all members changed/added to the library in the last two days.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LDIR,SFILENAME=PRD2,TSTAMP=>-1

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: List all phases in the library regardless of sublibrary

List all members of type 'PHASE' regardless of their sublibrary.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LDIR,SFILENAME=PRD2,MEMBER=SELECT

+* SELECT ALL SUB-LIBRARIES

!PHASE SELECT PHASES

* SELECT ALL MEMBERS

/@ TERMINATE SELECTION

Example: List selected phases in the library regardless of sublibrary

List only members of type ‘PHASE’ which begin with the characters ‘PAY’ regardless of their sublibrary.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LDIR,SFILENAME=PRD2,MEMBER=SELECT

+* SELECT ALL SUB-LIBRARIES

!PHASE SELECT PHASES

PAY* SELECT ALL MEMBERS

/@ TERMINATE SELECTION

Example: List selected members in selected sublibrary

List all members in sublibrary 'TEST' whose names begin with 'DRD' regardless of their type. Suppress the library statistics recap.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LDIR,SFILENAME=PRD2,MEMBER=SELECT,FORMAT=A

+TEST SELECT SUBLIBRARY 'TEST'

!//////// SELECT ALL TYPES

DRD///// SELECT ALL 'DRD' MEMBERS

/@ TERMINATE SELECTION

Page 202 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: List all phases that have changed in specific sublibrary

List all PHASE type members changed since MAY 1,2000 AT 9 AM, but only those in sublibrary 'TEST'.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LDIR,SFILENAME=PRD2,MEM=SELECT,TSTAMP=>00121.0900

+TEST SELECT SUBLIBRARY 'TEST'

!PHASE SELECT PHASES

//////// SELECT ALL MEMBERS

/@ TERMINATE SELECTION

Example: Create library recap only without member listing

List library statistics only, with no member printout.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LDIR,SFILENAME=PRD2,FORMAT=B

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FUNCTION=LTAPE

The LTAPE (List Tape) command will create a report displaying the contents of a

Dr. D save file. The following are noted on the printer and/or SYSLOG:

• Presence of standalone IPL records on the front of the tape.

• The time and date the tape was created.

• A description of each save that was done to create the tape.

Control Statement Operands

FUNCTION=LTAPE Operand Summary

FUNCTION=LTAPE

BLOCKSIZE=n

GR=nnn

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

Yes No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

FU nction=LTape

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: FU=LT

BL ocksize=n

The default shipped with Dr. D is 65496; your installation administrator may change it.

Abbreviation: BL=n

GR =nnn

Page 204 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

Examples

Example: List contents of save file

This job stream reports on the contents of suspect tapes in terms of files, volumes, libraries, etc.

// ASSGN SYS008,281

// TLBL TAPEIN,’SAVE.TAPE’

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LTAPE

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FUNCTION=LVTOC

The LVTOC (List VTOC) command provides a compact (but complete) report of the files in the VTOC of one or more disks.

SVOLID is a required operand. You can enter up to 600 volsers to designate the pool of disks from which to list individual files. Or, you can use a Dr. D, BIM-

EPIC, or CA-EPIC disk pool name. Use the VOLSELECT operand to select the volume(s) from a pool which determines whether a file is to be listed.

Files may be selected for listing based upon their expiration date by using the

EXPIRED operand.

The PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT operand allows files to be selected on either an individual or generic (group) basis or by the size of their files. Refer to Logical

Selection/Rejection/Rename Process on page 23 for detailed information about the selector control statements.

The AREA operand allows you to limit the area of the disk(s) being listed. Only files whose first/only extent is within the specified disk limits are included in the file selection process

The default report is produced in FILE ID sequence, with all files selected sorted together, allowing a complete alphabetic list of all files on a single disk or within a pool of disks. At the end of file listing, a space map is printed showing the location and size of each available space on the listed disk or on each disk in the pool of disks specified.

The FORMAT operand can be used to affect the report in several ways. If

FORMAT=A is specified, no space map is printed. If FORMAT=B is specified, only the space map is printed - individual files are not listed. The default is

FORMAT=X.

When producing a space map report via FORMAT=X (default) or FORMAT=B, an extent listing showing all the used and unused space may also be produced by adding the character ‘E’ to the FORMAT operand (that is, FORMAT=BE or

FORMAT=XE).

Page 206 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Control Statement Operands

FUNCTION=LVTOC Operand Summary

FUNCTION=LVTOC

AREA=(s1-e1,s2-e2,…)

DM=E

ERROR=IGNORE

EXPIRED=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n]|yyddd|yyyyddd

FORMAT=A|B|BE|X|XE

GR=nnn

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT

RP=YES|NO

SPACE=n

SVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

VOLSELECT=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Yes No

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

No No

Yes No

No No

FU nction=LVtoc

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: FU=LV

AR ea=(s1-e1,s2-e2,…)

Use this operand to define the area(s) of disk from which files will be listed. Each set of AREA values is a starting and ending track or FBA block number separated by a dash '-'. If the specification is a repeat of the last entered, a single

'R' may be entered. The entries are assumed to be in one to one correspondence with the SVOLID.

NOTE : You must also use the PARTIAL= operand when using AREA=.

Abbreviation: AR= (s1-e1,s2-e2,…)

DM =E

Use this operand to indicate the SVOLID specifies a BIM-EPIC or CA-EPIC pool name.

Abbreviation: DM=E

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

ER ror=IGnore

Specify ERROR=IGNORE along with the PARTIAL operand to eliminate operator intervention after message DOCTOR171 (indicating the file is not in the

VTOC and to prevent cancellation after message DOCTOR316 (indicating no files are selected) is issued.

Abbreviation: ER=IG

EX pired=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

This operand causes Dr. D to select files according to their expiration dates. A file is considered unexpired when its expiration date is greater than the current system date.

Value Action

Select all files regardless of expiration date (default)

Select only unexpired files

Select only expired files

O+nO-n Select only expired files after adjusting the current system date by

n days (n days may be 1-3 digits).

yyddd Select only unexpired files using 19yyddd as the current system date.

yyyyddd Select only unexpired files using yyyyddd instead of the current system date.

Abbreviation: EX=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

FO rmat=A|B|BE|X|XE

Use this operand to specify the format of reports.

Value Action

File list only (no recap).

Recap report only (no file list).

Recap report and full extent list only (no file list).

File list and recap report (default).

File list, recap report and full extent list.

This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: FO=A|B|BE|X|XE

GR =nnn

Page 208 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PA rtial=SElect|REject

23 for additional details about selector statements.

Abbreviation: PA=SE|RE

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

SP ace=n

Use this operand to control spacing on the report. Specify a 1-digit number from

2 to 9 to denote the number of blank lines to be printed between files. The report normally prints one blank line between files.

Abbreviation: SP=n

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

SV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Use this operand to specify the input (source) volser(s) for listing. Specify up to

600 volsers to designate the pool of disks from which to list individual files. You can specify Dr. D, BIM-EPIC, and CA-EPIC disk pool IDs in place of actual disk volser(s). When using BIM-EPIC or CA-EPIC disk pool names, you must also specify the DM=E operand.

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

VO lselect=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Use this operand to select files that fully or partially reside on the specified disk(s) for listing. This operand is useful in further qualifying the volumes specified by SVOLID, especially when SVOLID references a disk pool.

Abbreviation: VO=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

Page 210 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Examples

Example: List all VTOC entries of a disk

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LVTOC,SVOLID=DISK01

Example: List selected files

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LVTOC,SVOLID=DISK01,PARTIAL=SELECT

PAYROLL.SYS*

Example: List space map only

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LVTOC,SVOLID=DISK01,FORMAT=B

Example: List only files with more than 900 tracks

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=LVTOC,SVOLID=DISK01,PARTIAL=REJECT

FILESIZE>900

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FUNCTION=MC

The usual method of VM minidisk creation requires that the DSF utility be used to initialized the minidisk, a function not currently in VSE, and then the disk is added to the VM directory. This function allows the creation of VM minidisks and their immediate use directly under VSE.

The real disk that is to contain the new minidisk(s) must still be preformatted using DSF under VM. It must be attached to VSE in read/write mode and be in a device-up state so that an assignment can be made to it by VSE. The minidisk is created with this function by defining the minidisk 'real' start and end addresses via the RBEGIN and RHALT operands. A VSE/MVS type VTOC is created at the end of the disk with a one cylinder size for ECKD and CKD or a one CI size for

FBA. The volume serial number of the created mini-disk is specified via the

VOLOUT operand. If the size or location of the created minidisk VTOC is inadequate, use the FUNCTION=VTOCMOVE to adjust it.

For this function to be most effective, the VSE system destined to use the created minidisk should have a number of 'dummy' PUBS (physical unit blocks) that can be used for attaching the newly created minidisk(s). The VM Directory can be updated without a re-IPL of VSE, but if no spare PUBS are available, a re-IPL after updating the VSE ADD statements would be required. If spare PUBS are available, the new minidisk(s) can be linked to VSE, readied by use of the VSE

DVCUP command, and then be used by VSE (adjust the VTOC at that time if desired).

Before each minidisk is created, the DOCTOR190 warning message is issued, and an operator response is required before the mini is created. Double check the

RVOLD, RBEGIN, and RHALT operands to avoid the accidental destruction of existing minidisks or user files.

Control Statement Operands

FUNCTION=MC Operand Summary

FUNCTION=MC

GR=nnn

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RBEGIN=ccchh|block

RHALT=ccchh|block

RP=YES|NO

RVOLID=xxxxxx

UPSI=012345678

VOLOUT=xxxxxx

Yes No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

Yes No

No Yes

Yes No

No Yes

Yes No

Page 212 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

FU nction=MC

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: FU=MC

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO |LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RB egin=ccchh|block

Use this operand to specify the starting track/block for the new minidisk. For

CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0- to 6-digit cylinder (ccc) and a 2-digit

(leading zero required) head (hh). For FBA devices, specify a 1 to 8-digit block number.

Abbreviation: RB=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

RH alt=ccchh|block

Use this operand to specify the ending track/block for the new minidisk. For

CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0- to 6-digit cylinder (ccc) and a 2-digit

(leading zero required) head (hh). For FBA devices, specify a 1 to 8-digit block number.

Abbreviation: RH=ccchh|block

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

RV olid=xxxxxx

Use this operand to specify the “real” volser of the volume where the new minidisk will be created.

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

VO lout=xxxxxx

VOLOUT is used to set a volume serial number for the new minidisk.

Abbreviation: VO=xxxxxx

Page 214 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Create VM minidisk on a ECKD/CKD device

This example creates four VM minidisks on a 3380 volume CKD111. Each minidisk is 100 cylinders.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNC=MC,RVOLID=CKD111,VOLOUT=MINI01,RBEGIN=00100,RHALT=10014

FUNC=MC,RVOLID=CKD111,VOLOUT=MINI02,RBEGIN=10100,RHALT=20014

FUNC=MC,RVOLID=CKD111,VOLOUT=MINI03,RBEGIN=20100,RHALT=30014

FUNC=MC,RVOLID=CKD111,VOLOUT=MINI04,RBEGIN=30100,RHALT=40014

Example: Create VM minidisk on a FBA device

This example creates four VM minidisks on a FBA volume FBA111. Each minidisk is 10,000 blocks.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNC=MC,RVOLID=FBA111,VOLOUT=MINI01,RBEGIN=00020,RHALT=10019

FUNC=MC,RVOLID=FBA111,VOLOUT=MINI02,RBEGIN=10020,RHALT=20019

FUNC=MC,RVOLID=FBA111,VOLOUT=MINI03,RBEGIN=20020,RHALT=30019

FUNC=MC,RVOLID=FBA111,VOLOUT=MINI04,RBEGIN=30020,RHALT=40019

Example: Move and resize a minidisk VTOC

This example moves the VTOC from the end of an FBA mini-disk to the beginning of the minidisk

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=VTOCMOVE,RVOLID=MINI02,RBEGIN=1,RHALT=6

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FUNCTION=PUNCH

The Dr. D Punch function may be used to create IDCAMS control statements for deleting and defining VSAM files or to create Job Control DLBL and EXTENT statements from information extracted from a VTOC.

Creating VSAM Delete/Define Statements

Only the VSAM catalog need be identified by the SCAT operand. The default is to select all files. This may be changed to select only specific files based upon dates or times (EXPIRED and TSTAMP operands), by residence volume

(SVOLID) or by PARTIAL= selection/rejection operands (see Logical

Selection/Rejection/Rename Process on page 23 for a description of all selection/rejection statements).

Creating Job Control DLBL/EXTENT Statements

The SVOLID operand is used to determine which volume(s) or disk pool to be searched when generating Job Control DLBL and EXTENT statements. The default is to select all files which have an entry in the VTOC. This may be changed to select only specific files based upon date (EXPIRED operands), ignore

VSAM files (VSAM operand) or by PARTIAL selection/rejection operands (see

Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process on page 23 for a description of all selection/rejection statements).

Control Statement Operands

FUNCTION=PUNCH Operand Summary

FUNCTION=PUNCH

ASSOCIATIONS=YES|NO

EXPIRED=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

GR=nnn

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT

RP=YES|NO

SCAT=filename

SVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

TSTAMP=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

VOLSELECT=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

VSAM=YES|NO

WS=catalogreadpassword

Yes No

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

NOTE 1 No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

Page 216 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

NOTE 1:

When creating VSAM Delete/Define statements, the SCAT operand is required and the SVOLID is optional. When creating Job Control DLBL/EXTENT statements, the SVOLID operand is required.

FU nction=PUnch

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: FU=PU

AS sociations=YEs|NO

Specify YES to cause Dr. D to also punch the IDCAMS DELETE/DEFINE statements for all associated files (PATH’s and AIX’s) even if that associated file would not have been otherwise selected. Specifying NO, the default, to prevent the punching of PATH’s even if the selection entered (using

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT) would otherwise include those objects.

This operand is only valid when creating VSAM Delete/Define statements.

Abbreviation: AS=YE|NO

EX pired=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

This operand causes Dr. D to select files according to their expiration dates. A file is considered unexpired when its expiration date is greater than the current system date.

Value Action

Y Select all files regardless of expiration date.

N Select only unexpired files.

O Select only expired files.

O+n Select only expired files after adjusting the current system date by

n days (n days may be 1-3 digits).

O-n

yyddd Select only unexpired files using 19yyddd as the current system date.

yyyyddd Select only unexpired files using yyddd instead of the current system date.

Abbreviation: EX=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

GR =nnn

This memory is released before any Dr. D initiated OPEN, CLOSE, Tape EOV, or end of job. This operand should be specified on an initial NOPERATION control

Dr. D

USER GUIDE statement. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PA rtial=SElect|REject

Use this operand to indicate that one or more selector statements immediately follow this statement. The selector statements used may be to specify the file(s) whose DLBL/EXTENT or IDCAMS DELETE/DEFINE statements are to be punched. For additional information, see “Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename

Process” on page 23.

Abbreviation: PA=SE|RE

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

SC at=filename

Use this operand to identify the filename of the VSAM catalog containing the file(s) to be interrogated. When used on a Dr. D request that is continued across multiple control statements, it must be on the initial control statement.

NOTE: This operand is valid and required only for creating VSAM

Delete/Define statements.

Page 218 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: SC=filename

SV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Use this operand to limit selection to only those files that fully or partially reside on any of the listed volumes. Specify up to 600 volsers enclosed in parentheses.

You must specify this operand when creating Job Control DLBL and EXTENT statements. You can specify Dr. D, BIM-EPIC, or CA-EPIC disk pool IDs in place of actual disk volser(s). When using CSI=EPIC or CA=EPIC disk pool names, you must also specify the DM=E operand.

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

TS tamp=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

‘>’ indicates that the time stamp date must exactly match the file’s time stamp date and any time of day value is ignored.

The time stamp date is required and may be entered either as yyddd (yy is windowed: 00-74 = 20yy 75-99 = 19yy) or as a number of days value to be subtracted from the current system date.

TS=-0

TS=>-1.1200

TS=>-6

TS=01100 select if stamped today select if stamped after yesterday at 12 noon select if stamped in the last seven days select if stamped on the 100th day of 2001

TS=>01100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 2001/100

TS=<01100

TS=99100 select if stamped before 2001/100 select if stamped on the 100th day of 1999

TS=>99100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 1999/100

TS=<99100 select if stamped before 1999/100

NOTE: This operand is valid only when creating VSAM Delete/Define statements.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: TS=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

VO lselect=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

This operand restricts selection to files that fully or partially reside on the specified disk(s).

NOTE: This operand is valid only when creating Job Control DLBL/EXTENT statements.

Abbreviation: VO=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

VS am=YEs |NO

This operand determines if Job Control DLBL and EXTENT statements are generated for VSAM files and data spaces listed in the VTOC. The default, YES, generates DLBL/EXTENT statements. If NO is specified, VSAM files will be ignored. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

NOTE: This operand is valid only when creating Job Control DLBL/EXTENT statements.

Abbreviation: VS=YE |NO

WS =catalogreadpassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character VSAM catalog read password.

NOTE: This operand is valid only when creating VSAM Delete/Define statements.

Abbreviation: WS=catalogreadpassword

Page 220 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Punch IDCAMS DELETE/DEFINE control statements for all files

This example punches IDCAMS Delete/Define statements for all clusters in the

UCAT1 user catalog.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=PUNCH,SCAT=UCAT1

Example: Punch IDCAMS DELETE/DEFINE control statements for selected files

This example punches IDCAMS Delete/Define statements for clusters in the

UCAT1 user catalog whose cluster name begins with ‘PAYROLL’. In addition to the cluster delete/define statements, delete/define statements will also be punched for all associated objects (path, AIX, etc.)

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=PUNCH,SCAT=UCAT1,ASSOCIATIONS=YES,PARTIAL=SELECT

PAYROLL*

Example: Punch IDCAMS DELETE/DEFINE control statements for selected files

This example punches IDCAMS Delete/Define statements for clusters in the

UCAT1 user catalog only if the cluster wholly or partially resides on the CKD001 volume.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=PUNCH,SCAT=UCAT1,SVOLID=CKD001

Example: Punch the DLBL/EXTENT statement for all files in the VTOC

This example punches Job Control DLBL and EXTENT statements for all entries in the VTOC on volume DISK01.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=PUNCH,SVOLID=DISK01

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Punch the DLBL/EXTENT statement for all non-VSAM files in the VTOC

This example punches Job Control DLBL and EXTENT statements for all non-

VSAM files in the VTOC on volume DISK01.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=PUNCH,SVOLID=DISK01,VSAM=NO

Example: Punch the DLBL/EXTENT statement for selected files in the VTOC

This example punches Job Control DLBL and EXTENT statements for files in the

VTOC on volume DISK01 whose file-ID begins with ‘PAYROLL.SYS’.

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=PUNCH,SVOLID=DISK01,PARTIAL=SELECT

PAYROLL.SYS*

Page 222 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

FUNCTION=SORT

The SORT function allows the data portion of a Dr. D saved file on tape or disk to be extracted and passed as input to the user’s SORT program. Multiple sort functions may be requested within a single Dr. D execution but only one data file is extracted per request.

The RFILENAME operand is used to designate the file to be specified as

SORTOUT to the user's SORT program. Use the FIND operand to position to the desired saved file. The files must be processed in the order that they were saved, and the use of UPSI XXXXXX1 is not allowed.

The SORT program control statements must immediately follow the

FUNCTION=SORT command statement. Each SORT control statement may occupy up to the leading 79 positions of each 80-byte length record with no control statement continuation.

An additional statement is required to terminate the SORT control statements. As with terminating Dr. D control statements (see page 20), either a /@ or /* statement may be used. For clarity in reading the jobstreams you create, use the

/@ as the terminating statement for selector statements and use the /* as the terminating statement for Dr. D control statements.

The output file record format reflected by the TYPE= parameter value on the

SORT’s RECORD control statement must match the format of the saved data or the results will be unpredictable. Only the following SORT program control statements are allowed (others are ignored):

• ALTSEQ

• ANALYZE

• INCLUDE

• INREC

• OMIT

• OPTION

• OUTFIL

• OUTREC

• RECORD

• SORT

⎯ A copy will result with FIELDS=COPY

⎯ A sort will result with FIELDS=(p,m,…)

• SUM

Partition and GETVIS requirements will vary depending on the user’s SORT program and whether SVA eligible phases have been loaded into the SVA.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

FUNCTION=SORT Operand Summary

FUNCTION=SORT

FIND=filename|’file-id’

GR=nnn

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

RFILENAME=filename

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

UPSI=012345678

Yes No

No Yes

No No

Yes No

No Yes

FU nction=SOrt

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: FU=SO

FI nd=filename|’file-id’

Use this operand to cause the Dr. D save tape to be positioned to the correct input dataset. You may specify either the 1-7 character filename matching the

“DD NAME” field associated with the dataset on the save file or the full file-ID enclosed in single quotes.

Abbreviation: FI=filename|’file-id’

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Page 224 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO |LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RF ilename=filename

Specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement of the output file. The Job Control DLBL statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas.

Abbreviation: RF=filename

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Create five User Data Files from backup tape

This example creates five user data files from a Dr. D backup tape.

// TLBL TAPEIN...............

// DLBL SORTWK1,'SORT.WORK.1'

// EXTENT ..............................

// DLBL SORTOUT,'SORT.OUTPUT.FILE.1'

// EXTENT ..............................

// DLBL SORT2,'SORT.OUTPUT.FILE.2'

// EXTENT ..............................

// DLBL SORT3,'SORT.OUTPUT.FILE.3'

// EXTENT ..............................

// DLBL SORT4,'SORT.OUTPUT.FILE.4'

// EXTENT ..............................

// DLBL SORT5,'SORT.OUTPUT.FILE.5'

// EXTENT ..............................

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=328K

FUNCTION=SORT,RFILENAME=SORTOUT,FIND=FIL0001

SORT FIELDS=(4,10,A),FORMAT=BI,WORK=1

RECORD TYPE=V,LENGTH=(200,,,100,170)

OUTFIL BLKSIZE=8192

OPTION PRINT=ALL

FUNCTION=SORT,RFILENAME=SORT2,FIND='PARTS.MASTER'

SORT FIELDS=(4,10,A),FORMAT=BI,WORK=1

RECORD TYPE=V,LENGTH=(200,,,100,170)

OUTFIL BLKSIZE=8192

OPTION PRINT=ALL

FUNCTION=SORT,RFILENAME=SORT3,FIND=FIL0006

SORT FIELDS=(4,10,A),FORMAT=BI,WORK=1

RECORD TYPE=F,LENGTH=40

OUTFIL BLKSIZE=8120

OPTION PRINT=ALL

FUNCTION=SORT,RFILENAME=SORT4,FIND=FIL0100

SORT FIELDS=COPY

RECORD TYPE=F,LENGTH=196

OUTFIL BLKSIZE=8232

OPTION PRINT=ALL

FUNCTION=SORT,RFILENAME=SORT5,FIND=FIL0101

SORT FIELDS=(4,10,A),FORMAT=BI,WORK=1

RECORD TYPE=V,LENGTH=(200,,,100,170)

OUTFIL BLKSIZE=8192

OPTION PRINT=ALL

USER GUIDE

Page 226 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

FUNCTION=TAPETEST

This feature allows tapes to be tested by writing a block of data continuously over the length of the reel or cartridge. A report is produced showing the number of 'erase gaps' and 'unrecoverable errors' encountered for each cartridge or reel. If a VOL1 is found on the tape, it is printed on the report and retained on the tape. If no VOL1 is found, one is created using the sequence number listed on the report as the VOLUME SERIAL number of the tape. If the starting VOLSER is entered using the VOLSER operand, each tape volume serial number is generated starting at the entered number, and is incremented by one for each tape processed.

For each tape tested, a map is printed showing how the errors are distributed over the tape. Each position of the map is a percentage point for showing the relative position and the number of errors occurring at that point. Thus if 5 errors occurred at the mid-point of the tape, a '5' would appear under the '50' heading.

If more than 9 errors occur at any point, then multiple lines are printed, for example:

9 indicates that 819 errors occurred at that point.

Either one or two tape drives can be used, so that tape rewind can be overlapped with tape testing. Since the tapes are not opened, a warning is issued stating the drives to be used, allowing the operator to cancel if a conflict exists.

The number of tapes to be tested is controlled by the TAPES operand. Tape testing operation may be interrupted by the operator via the AR MSG command.

In response to the DOCTOR616 message that is issued, the operator may force early end of tape by responding ‘EOV’ or terminate tape testing at the end of the current tape by responding ‘ENDTEST’.

Control Statement Operands

FUNCTION=TAPETEST Operand Summary

FUNCTION=TAPETEST

GR=nnn

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

RP=YES|NO

TAPES=n|10000

UPSI=012345678

VOLSER=nnnnnn

Yes No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

Yes No

No Yes

No No

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FU nction=TApetest

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: FU=TA

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

TA pes=n|10000

Determines the number of tapes to be tested. Default is 10,000

Page 228 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: TA=n|10000

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

VO lser=nnnnnn

Specifies the volser to be written on the first tape being tested effectively reinitializing the tape during the test. When testing multiple tapes, this volser will be incremented by 1 for each tape being tested and reinitialized.

NOTE: This operand only supports numeric volsers.

Abbreviation: VO=nnnnnn

Examples

Example: Test tape using only one tape drive

This example uses one tape drive, 180, to test one tape.

// ASSGN SYS007,180

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=TAPETEST,TAPES=1

Example: Test tapes using two tape drives

This example uses two tape drives, 180 and 181, for testing tapes. 180 will be tested first and then 181 will be tested as 180 is being rewound. A total of 10 tapes will be tested.

// ASSGN SYS007,180 ASSIGN 1ST DRIVE

// ASSGN SYS006,181 ASSIGN 2ND DRIVE

// UPSI 1111

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=TAPETEST,TAPES=10

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FUNCTION=VERIFY

The Dr. D File Verify function allows VSAM files to be verified using the

IDCAMS VERIFY function. Due to constraints imposed by VSAM Access

Methods Services, only files (both suballocated and unique) identified in the

VSAM catalog identified as IJSYSUC can be selected for verification.

Selection/Rejection/Rename Process).

Control Statement Operands

FUNCTION=VERIFY Operand Summary

FUNCTION=VERIFY

EXPIRED=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

GR=nnn

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT

RP=YES|NO

SCAT=IJSYSUC

SVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

TSTAMP=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

Yes No

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

Yes No

No No

No Yes

FU nction=VErify

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: FU=VE

EX pired=Y |N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

This operand causes Dr. D to select files according to their expiration dates. A file is considered unexpired when its expiration date is greater than the current system date.

Value Action

O+n

Select all files regardless of expiration date.

Select only unexpired files.

Select only expired files.

Select only expired files after adjusting the current system date by n

Page 230 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Value Action

O-n days (n days may be 1-3 digits).

yyddd Select only unexpired files using 19yyddd as the current system date

yyyyddd Select only unexpired files using yyyyddd instead of the current system date.

Abbreviation: EX=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PA rtial=SElect|REject

Use this operand to indicate that one or more selector statements immediately follow this statement. The selector statements used may be to specify the file(s) to be verified or reset. For additional information, see “Logical

Selection/Rejection/Rename Process” on page 23.

Abbreviation: PA=SE|RE

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

SC at=IJSYSUC

Due to constraints imposed by VSAM Access Methods Services, this operand must be specified as IJSYSUC to identify the filename of the VSAM catalog containing the file(s) to be verified. If this operand is specified on a Dr. D request that is continued across multiple control statements, it must be on the initial control statement.

Abbreviation: SC=IJSYSUC

SV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Use this operand to limit selection to only those files that fully or partially reside on any of the listed volumes. Specify up to 600 volsers enclosed in parentheses.

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

TS tamp=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

‘>’ indicates that the time stamp date must exactly match the file’s time stamp date and any time of day value is ignored.

The time stamp date is required and may be entered either as yyddd (yy is windowed: 00-74 = 20yy 75-99 = 19yy) or as a number of days value to be subtracted from the current system date.

TS=-0

TS=>-1.1200 select if stamped today select if stamped after yesterday at 12 noon

Page 232 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

TS=>-6

TS=01100 select if stamped in the last seven days select if stamped on the 100th day of 2001

TS=>01100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 2001/100

TS=<01100 select if stamped before 2001/100

TS=99100 select if stamped on the 100th day of 1999

TS=>99100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 1999/100

TS=<99100 select if stamped before 1999/100

Abbreviation: TS=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

Examples

Example: Verify files associated with a particular disk volume

// DLBL IJSYSUC,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=VERIFY,SCAT=IJSYSUC,SVOLID=CKD001

Example: Verify only selected files

// DLBL IJSYSUC,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=VERIFY,SCAT=IJSYSUC,PARTIAL=SELECT

PAYROLL*

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FUNCTION=VTOCMOVE

The usual method of VTOC relocation or resizing is to save the individual files, reinitialize the disk, and then restore the files. The Dr. D VTOCMOVE function allows the VTOC of a disk to be quickly and easily moved to a new location and/or resized. All that is required is that any files in the specified location be deleted or moved to a new location, before the VTOC move is attempted. If the size of the VTOC is being reduced, check to see that no labels exist in the part of the VTOC being dropped. Before moving the VTOC, Dr. D checks the new location against the VTOC to be sure that no files (expired or unexpired) exist in the new location, and that the new location is within the disk limits and will not overlap either the VOL1 record or the old VTOC. If the size of the VTOC is being reduced, the part of the VTOC being dropped is checked to insure no loss of labels. If any conflict is detected, the job is canceled, otherwise the operator is informed that the VTOC is about to be moved or resized, and given one last chance to abort the procedure.

WARNING: Do not use this function on DOSRES or SYSWK1 because of IBM PTF service and procedure dependencies.

Control Statement Operands

FUNCTION=VTOCMOVE Operand Summary

FUNCTION=VTOCMOVE

GR=nnn

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

RBEGIN=ccchh|block

RHALT=ccchh|block

RP=YES|NO

RVOLID=xxxxxx

Yes No

No Yes

No No

Yes No

No No

No Yes

Yes No

FU nction=VTocmove

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: FU=VT

GR =nnn

This memory is released before any Dr. D initiated OPEN, CLOSE, Tape EOV, or end of job. This operand should be specified on an initial NOPERATION control

Page 234 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D statement. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

RB egin=ccchh|block

Use this operand to specify the starting track/block for the new VTOC. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0 to 6-digit cylinder (ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). For FBA devices, specify a 1 to 8-digit block number.

Abbreviation: RB=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

RH alt=ccchh|block

Use this operand to specify the stopping track/block for the new VTOC. For

CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0 to 6-digit cylinder (ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). For FBA devices, specify a 1 to 8-digit block number. If this operand is omitted, the new VTOC will be the same size as the original

VTOC.

Abbreviation: RH=ccchh|block

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RV olid=xxxxxx

Use this operand to specify the volser of the volume whose VTOC will be moved or resized.

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx

Examples

Example: Move VTOC on a CKD device from one area of a disk to another

// JOB VTOC MOVE TO CYLINDER 500 HEAD 00

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=VTOCMOVE,RVOLID=CKD111,RBEGIN=50000

Example: Move VTOC on a FBA device to a new location

// JOB VTOC MOVE TO FBA BLOCK 250,000

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=VTOCMOVE,RVOLID=FBA111,RBEGIN=250000

Example: Move and resize a VTOC on a CKD device

// JOB VTOC MOVE TO CYLINDER 50, ADDING A CYLINDER

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=VTOCMOVE,RVOLID=CKD111,RBEGIN=5000,RHALT=5114

Example: Resize a VTOC on a CKD device

// JOB REDUCE VTOC FROM 15 TRACKS TO 5 TRACKS

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

FUNCTION=VTOCMOVE,RVOLID=CKD111,RBEGIN=88400,RHALT=88404

Page 236 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

RESTORE=ALL

The RESTORE=ALL command reloads every track/block on a SAVE=ALL save file back to disk. A disk may be restored to a disk whose size and location of

VTOC differs from the save disk. However, at the conclusion of the RESTORE the restored disk's volume label, size and location of the VTOC will be identical to the save disk. Use the VOLOUT operand to set the serial the volume being restored to a value different from the volume number of the saved disk.

The disk to be restored is determined by the volume assignment associated with the RSYSNO operand or the volume associated with the volser as defined by the

For additional protection, it is recommended that UPSI bit 0 be set to 0. This allows you to insure the correct disk volume is being restored and the correct input tape is being used. If UPSI bit 0 is set to 1, the restore operation will occur without operator intervention.

A volume restore will be performed unless the AREA= operand is used.

AREA=SELECT may be used to define the track/blocks on the save tape that are to be restored. AREA=REJECT may be used to restore the volume with the exception of specific track/block addresses. The AREA operand must be used when restoring non-VSE initialized disk (for example, VM minidisk).

If the save file was originally created with the SHALT operand or if using the

AREA operand during the restore of a VSE disk, caution must be exercised because the VTOC extent from the saved disk is also copied. If there are additional files which resided outside the area restricted for save, those files will still be reflected in the VTOC. The Dr. D FUNCTION=DELETE command (refer to page 178) may be use to remove any unwanted VTOC entries.

Volumes that were saved to be restored standalone (SAVE=IPL as first command) may also be restored non-standalone by either forward spacing the tape three tape marks (two if LABEL=NO was used during backup), and/or using a TLBL for the tape specifying file number two.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

RESTORE=ALL Operand Summary

RESTORE=ALL

AREA=SELECT|REJECT

BLOCKSIZE=n

FIND=(volser)

GR=nnn

HV=NO|YES|HOLD

LABEL=NO

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

RSYSNO=SYSnnn

RVOLID=xxxxxx

SEQNO=nn

SKIP=nnn

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1

TI=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

VM=NO|YES

VOLOUT=xxxxxx

WAIT=n

Yes No

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

NOTE 1 No

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

NOTE: Either RSYSNO (or defaulted to) or RVOLID is required. Use the

RVOLID operand at all times in place of RSYSNO.

RE store=ALL

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: RE=AL

AR ea=SElect|REject

Use this operand to indicate that one or more AREA= selector statements immediately follow this statement. This allows restore to be selective down to the track or FBA block level. It allows volume RESTORE operations to be selective down to the cylinder/head or FBA block level. If this operand is specified on a

Page 238 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Dr. D request that is continued across multiple control statements, it must be on the last of the continued control statements.

One or more selector statements must follow to identify the tracks/blocks to be selected (AREA=SELECT) or rejected (AREA=REJECT).

An additional statement is required to terminate area selector statements. As with terminating control statements (see page 20), either a /@ or /* statement may be used. For clarity in reading the jobstreams you create, use the /@ as the terminating statement for selector statements and use the /* as the terminating statement for Dr. D control statements.

As an example on a 3390, the following area selector statements will select from cylinder 1, head 0 up to cylinder 12, head 0 and reject cylinder 4, head 0 when used with AREA=SELECT. When used with AREA=REJECT, it will reject all data from cylinder 1, head 0 up to cylinder 12, head 0 but will select cylinder 4, head

100-1200

400-400R

You may also specify ‘TO=ccchh’ on an AREA selector statement. This allows the selected area to be restored to a new cylinder and head location. If the 'cccchh' is preceded by the letter 'K', the cylinder number of the SAVED area is retained.

This optional operand must be separated from the start and end address pair by at least 1 space.

Abbreviation: AR=SE|RE

BL ocksize=n

Specify a 5-digit value from 16000 through 65496 to indicate the largest physical block length on the tape dataset. The value specified may be other than the installation default value but must never be less than the largest data block saved plus 16. Once a blocksize has been set, it remains in effect for the remainder of the Dr. D execution or until set again using this same operand. The default shipped with Dr. D is 65496; your installation administrator may change it.

Abbreviation: BL=n

FI nd=(volser)

Use this operand to cause the Dr. D save tape to be positioned to the correct volume serial number. The volume serial number must be enclosed within parentheses. The save tape is scanned starting at its current position forward until either the search argument is found or the end of tape occurs. If the user knows which volume of multivolume files to mount, searching may begin with any volume. See message: 'DOCTOR 616' in the message section for additional

Dr. D

USER GUIDE information. Use of this operand is needed only when multiple volumes have been saved to the same save file.

Abbreviation: FI=(volser)

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

HV =NO|YEs|HOld

Use this operand during volume restore to lock the VTOC of the disk thereby preventing the addition/deletion of files on the disk. This is especially important during compacting of disk manager pool space. HV=NO is default. HV=YES should be used on the first disk restore within an execution of Dr. D and then

HV=HOLD should be used to continue to hold the lock on following functions within that Dr. D execution.

Abbreviation: HV=NO|YE|HO

LA bel=NO

Use when the input tape is unlabeled.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Page 240 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

RS ysno=SYSnnn

Abbreviation: RS=SYSnnn

RV olid=xxxxxx

Use this operand to specify the current volser of the output (target) volume during a restore operation.

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx

SE qno=nn

Specify a 2-digit value from 01 through 99 representing the sequence number of this restore among all (non-NOPERATION) saves, copies, or restores in this job step. If specified, Dr. D checks to see that nn equals an internal counter which is incremented by one for each non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore attempted. The first non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore is always one.

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SK ip=nnn

Use this operand to skip over nnn number of files before starting the actual

RESTORE function. This is a three-digit decimal number (leading zeros required). Do not use the SKIP operand along with the BLOCKSIZE operand.

Instead, set the blocksize on a preceding RESTORE=NOPERATION.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: SK=nnn

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

When used for tape positioning, it repositions the tape immediately. This operand is invalid when the data is saved to a disk dataset. TAPE=NOR is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Value Action

NOr Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

REw Immediately rewind the tape.

RUn Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the input dataset. TAPEIN is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

Abbreviation: TD=filename

TI =SYSnnn

Use this operand to specify an alternative programmer logical unit number for the first tape dataset. TI=SYS008 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Abbreviation: TI=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

VO lout=xxxxxx

VOLOUT is used to set the volume serial number of the output disk being restored. The default, if this operand is omitted, is to change the output volume serial number to be the same as the volume serial number as the saved disk.

Abbreviation: VO=xxxxxx

VM =NO |YEs

Use this operand when saving, restoring or copying non-VSE volumes (that is,

VM minidisk) on CKD and ECKD devices. Specifying YES bypasses disk count area errors caused by the count area not reflecting the true location of the

Page 242 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D physical blocks. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: VM=NO|YES

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Examples

Example: Restore all tracks/blocks of disk from tape

This job stream restores all tracks/blocks on the volume CKDP12. Following the restore, the disk volser will be CKDP12.

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEIN,'CKDP12.SAVE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=011,PRINT=LIST

RESTORE=ALL,RV=CKDP12

RE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Restore all tracks/blocks of disk from tape and set new volser

This job stream restores all tracks/blocks on the volume CKDP12. Following the restore, the disk volser will be NEWP12.

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEIN,'CKDP12.SAVE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=011,PRINT=LIST

RESTORE=ALL,RV=CKDP12,VOLOUT=NEWP12

RE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Selective restore of all tracks/blocks

This example uses a tape created by the SAVE=ALL method. Only cylinders 100 through 130 will be restored.

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEIN,’CKDP12.SAVE’

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

REST=NO,UPSI=011,PRINT=LIST

REST=ALL,RV=CKDP12,AREA=SELECT

10000-13014

RE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Page 244 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Restore minidisk

This example uses a tape created by the SAVE=ALL method. The tape contains a number of VM minidisks and will be used to selectively restore minidisk 1, 2, and 3. The third disk is to be relocated to a new physical location. Minidisk 1 originally resided on cylinder 100 through 130 and will be restored to its original location. Minidisk 2 originally resided on cylinder 200 through 249 and will be restored to its original location. Minidisk 3 originally resided on cylinder 300 through 400 but will be restored to cylinders 400 through 500. The disk being restored is assigned to 620 using the default RSYSNO SYS002.

// ASSGN SYS002,620

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// TLBL TAPEIN

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

REST=NO,UPSI=111,PRINT=LIST

REST=ALL,VM=YES,AREA=SELECT

10000-13014

20000-24914

30000-30014 TO=40000

RE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Restore from multiple volume save

This example demonstrates how to position the tape when you have multiple volume backups on the same tape.

// TLBL TAPEIN

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=ALL,RVOLID=222222,FIND=(222222)

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=RUN

NOTE : Once the tape is positioned, you may specify any appropriate RESTORE function.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RESTORE=CURRENT

The RESTORE=CURRENT command reloads active areas, which have been saved by a SAVE=CURRENT command. The restore may be a full pack restore where all active areas, including IPL track/block and VTOC extent, are reloaded back to disk. At the conclusion of a full pack restore, the restored disk's volume label, size and location of the VTOC is identical to the save disk. Use the

VOLOUT operand to set the volume serial number of the restored disk to a value different from the volume number of the saved disk.

You may also perform a restore of selective files only. On ECKD and CKD devices use the PARTIAL operand to selectively request files to be restored. On

FBA devices, use RFILENAME and SIDENT to selectively request files to be restored. Unlike a full pack restore, the volume serial number, IPL track/block and VTOC extent are not restored when performing a selective file restore.

The disk to be restored is determined by the volume assignment associated with the RSYSNO operand or the volume associated with the volser as defined by the

RVOLID operand. If neither RVOLID nor RSYSNO is specified, then the disk having the default RSYSNO assigned to it is used as input to the save. The default RSYSNO as supplied is SYS002 but may be changed by the installation administrator (refer to Configure System Options on page 12 for additional information). Use of RVOLID is recommended. When using RVOLID, Dr. D automatically makes the assignment.

For additional protection, set UPSI bit 0 to 0. This allows you to insure the correct disk volume is being restored and the correct input tape is being used. If UPSI bit

0 is set to 1, the restore operation occurs without operator intervention.

If the save file was originally created with the EXPIRED or PARTIAL operand or if using the AREA operand, caution must be exercised when performing a full pack restore using RESTORE=CURRENT because the VTOC extent from the saved disk is also copied. If there are additional files that resided outside the area restricted for save, those files are still reflected in the VTOC. The Dr. D

FUNCTION=DELETE command (refer to page 178) may be use to remove any unwanted VTOC entries.

WARNING: SAVE|RESTORE=CURRENT processes VSAM objects and VSE libraries listed in the VTOC correctly only when saving|restoring the entire volume. To process individual VSAM files, use

SAVE|RESTORE=LOGICAL|VSAM. To process individual VSE libraries, use

SAVE|RESTORE=LIBRARY.

Page 246 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Compacting/Reorganizing Disk or Pools

Reorganization/compacting of a disk or disk manager pool space on CKD disk moves data files to a contiguous area of the pack. When this is done, a larger, contiguous free space is created thereby eliminating fragmented free space on the pack. With Dr. D, disk reorganization/compacting can be achieved with a minimal impact on processing by using the AREA=COMPACT operand with

RESTORE=CURRENT. This can be used with the major disk management systems, BIM-EPIC, CA-EPIC, CA-DYNAM and CA-SYSTEM MANAGER. This method is preferable to the RESTORE=LOGICAL method for a number of reasons:

1. It is substantially faster.

2. Because the files are not opened, critical information in the VTOC such as generation numbers, creation dates, etc. are not changed.

3. One disk at a time can be compacted even though there may be files on the disk that have extents on other disks, allowing easier management of the compacting operation.

For this method to operate correctly, several aspects must be considered:

1. At this time, this method can only be used with ECKD and CKD disk type.

2. During SAVE or RESTORE of the disk being compacted, no files on that disk can be allocated or deleted, and none accessed during the RESTORE compacting operation. The HV= operand can be used to prevent problems in this area, or the disk can be detached from the disk manager while compacting.

3. If a VTOC index is used, it must be regenerated after compacting is completed.

4. The System Manager Verify function must be run against the compacted disk to update the System Manager extent information.

5. For BIM-EPIC, the BIM-EPIC catalog is updated to reflect the revised extent information.

6. For CA-EPIC, although the CA-EPIC catalog is not updated to reflect the revised extent information, the files are still accurately accessible.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

RESTORE=CURRENT Operand Summary

RESTORE=CURRENT

ALIGN=YES|NO|ALL

AREA=SELECT|REJECT|COMPACT

BLOCKSIZE=n

DM=E

FIND=(volser)

GR=nnn

HV=NO|YES|HOLD

LABEL=NO

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PARTIAL=SELECT

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RFILENAME=filename

RP=YES|NO

RSYSNO=SYSnnn

RVOLID=xxxxxx

R0=YES|NO

SEQNO=nn

SIDENT=’file-id’

SKIP=nnn

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1

TI=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

VOLOUT=xxxxxx

VSAM=NO|YES

WAIT=n

Yes No

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

No No

NOTE 2 No

No Yes

NOTE 2 No

No Yes

NOTE 1

No No

NOTE 2 No

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

NOTE 1: Either RSYSNO (or defaulted to) or RVOLID is required. Use the

RVOLID operand at all times in place of RSYSNO.

NOTE 2: For a file restore, both the RFILENAME and SIDENT operands are required when restoring to an FBA device. When restoring to an ECKD or CKD device, the PARTIAL=SELECT is required. If these operands are omitted, the restore defaults to a volume restore.

Page 248 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

RE store=CUrrent

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: RE=AL

AL ign=YEs |NO|ALl

Use this operand to specify how files are to be cylinder aligned.

Value Action

YES

ALL

Files that were cylinder aligned remain cylinder aligned.

No files within the reorg area are cylinder aligned.

All files within the reorg are cylinder aligned.

Abbreviation: AL=YE|NO|AL

AR ea=SElect|Reject|COmpact

Use this operand to indicate that one or more AREA= selector statements immediately follow this statement. This allows restore to be selective down to the track or FBA block level. If this operand is specified on a Dr. D request that is continued across multiple control statements, it must be on the last of the continued control statements.

One or more selector statements must follow to identify the tracks/blocks to be selected (AREA=SELECT|COMPACT) or rejected (AREA=REJECT).

As an example on a 3390, the following area selector statements select from cylinder 1, head 0 up to cylinder 12, head 0 and reject cylinder 4, head 0 when used with AREA=SELECT|COMPACT. When used with AREA=REJECT, it rejects all data from cylinder 1, head 0 up to cylinder 12, head 0 but selects cylinder 4, head 0.

100-1200

400-400R

On CKD and ECKD with AREA=SELECT, you may also specify ‘TO=ccchh’ on an AREA selector statement. This allows the selected area to be restored to a new cylinder and head location. If the 'cccchh' is preceded by the letter 'K', the

Dr. D

USER GUIDE cylinder number of the SAVED area is retained. This optional operand must be separated from the start and end address pair by at least 1 space.

Abbreviation: AR=SE|RE|CO

BL ocksize=n

Abbreviation: BL=n

DM =E

Use this operand when reorganizing/compacting EPIC disk pool space

(AREA=COMPACT). This operand results in the EPIC DSN catalog being updated to reflect any file changes resulting from the disk reorganization/compacting.

Abbreviation: DM=E

FI nd=(volser)

Abbreviation: FI=(volser)

GR =nnn

Page 250 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

HV =NO|YEs|HOld

HV=HOLD should be used to continue to hold the lock on following functions within that Dr. D execution.

Abbreviation: HV=NO|YE|HO

LA bel=NO

Use when the input tape is unlabeled.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PA rtial=SElect

Use this operand to indicate that one or more selector statements immediately follow this statement. Each selector specifies the fully qualified (no wildcards allowed) dataset name of the file to be selected and is followed by the characters

‘@filename@’ (separated from the dataset name by at least 1 space). The filename reflects the Job Control DLBL statement for the file to be restored.

As an example, to select the file ‘SAVED.FILE1’ and restore it to the file referenced by the DLBL ‘OUTPUT’, use the selector statement:

SAVED.FILE1 @OUTPUT@

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

An additional statement is required to terminate selector statements. As with terminating control statements (see page 20), either a /@ or /* statement may be used. For clarity in reading the jobstreams you create, use the /@ as the terminating statement for selector statements and use the /* as the terminating statement for Dr. D control statements.

This operand is required for restoring individual files on an ECKD or CKD devices only. Refer to the examples at the end of this section for additional details on using PARTIAL=SELECT with RESTORE=CURRENT.

Abbreviation: PA=SE

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RF ilename=filename

Use this operand to specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement of the file to be restored. The Job Control DLBL statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas.

Required with the SIDENT operand for restoring individual files on FBA devices only. Refer to the examples at the end of this section for additional details on selective restoring on FBA with RESTORE=CURRENT.

Abbreviation: RF=filename

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

RS ysno=SYSnnn

Use this operand to define the logical unit number for the output (target) disk during a restore operation. RSYSNO=SYS002 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. For greater control over the restore operation, use the RVOLID operand in place of RSYSNO.

Page 252 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: RS=SYSnnn

RV olid=xxxxxx

Use this operand to specify the current volser of the output (target) volume during a restore operation.

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx

R0 =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: R0=YE|NO

SE qno=nn

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

Si lent=’file-id’

Specify the full file-ID enclosed in single quotes to indicate the name of the new file being restored.

Required with the RFILENAME operand for restoring individual files on FBA devices only. Refer to the examples at the end of this section for additional details on selective restoring on FBA with RESTORE=CURRENT.

Abbreviation: SI=’file-id’

SK ip=nnn

Use this operand to skip over nnn number of files before starting the actual

RESTORE function. This is a three-digit decimal number (leading zeros required). Do not use the SKIP operand along with the BLOCKSIZE operand.

Instead, set the blocksize on a preceding RESTORE=NOPERATION.

Abbreviation: SK=nnn

TA pe=NOr |REw|RUn

When used for tape positioning, it repositions the tape immediately. This operand is invalid when the data is saved to a disk dataset. TAPE=NOR is the

Dr. D

USER GUIDE default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Value Action

NOr

REw

Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Immediately rewind the tape.

RUn Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the input dataset. TAPEIN is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

Abbreviation: TD=filename

TI =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TI=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

VO lout=xxxxxx

Abbreviation: VO=xxxxxx

VS am=YEs |NO

Specify VSAM=NO to bypass VSAM objects. With VSAM=YES, the default,

VSAM objects are saved as a DA files.

WARNING: SAVE|RESTORE=CURRENT will process VSAM objects listed in the VTOC correctly only when saving|restoring the entire volume. To process individual VSAM files, you should use SAVE|RESTORE=LOGICAL|VSAM.

Abbreviation: VS=YE |NO

Page 254 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Examples

Example: Restore entire pack using SAVE=CURRENT save file

This job stream restores the SYSWK1 disk volume from a save tape created by the SAVE=CURRENT method. Before the save operation begins, tape positioning is assured with the TAPE=REW operand and the tape is unloaded after the save operation is complete.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SYSWK1.SAVE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=011,PRINT=LIST,TAPE=REW

RESTORE=CURRENT,RV=SYSWK1

RE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Restore active areas from IPLable save file

This example restores a disk volume, cuu=137, from an IPLable backup tape.

VOLOUT is used to set the volser of the output disk to 'OLDRES'. The Job

Control statement, ‘// MTC FSF,SYS008,3’ is used to skip the IPL bootstrap on the tape.

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// MTC REW,SYS008

// MTC FSF,SYS008,3

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SYSRES SAVE',,,,2

// ASSGN SYS002,137

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=CURRENT,RSYSNO=SYS002,UPSI=011,VOLOUT=OLDRES

RE=NO,TA=RU

Page 256 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Restore individual file on FBA using a SAVE=CURRENT save file

This example performs an individual file restore from an FBA disk

SAVE=CURRENT save file. The dataset ‘SAVED.FILE.ID’ is restored to volume

PCK123 as ‘NEW VERSION OF FILE’.

// TLBL TAPEIN,. . .

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// MTC REW,SYS008

// DLBL SDFILE,'NEW VERSION OF FILE'

// EXTENT SYS002,PCK123,1,0,557000,500

// ASSGN SYS002,223

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=011

RE=CU,RVOLID=PCK123,RFILENAME=SDFILE,SIDENT=’SAVED.FILE.ID’

RESTORE=NOPERATION,TAPE=RUN

WARNING: If 'RF' and 'SI' are not entered on an FBA RESTORE, a Volume

RESTORE occurs.

Example: Restore individual file on CKD using a SAVE=CURRENT save file

Individual files may be restored from the backup produced by the volume

SAVE=CURRENT method by specifying the PARTIAL= operand and the ID(s) of the file(s) to be restored. This example restores ‘OLD.VERSION.OF.FILE1’ as

‘NEW.VERSION.OF.FILE1’ and ‘OLD.VERSION.OF.FILE2’ as

‘NEW.VERSION.OF.FILE2’.

// TLBL TAPEIN,. . .

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// MTC REW,SYS008

// DLBL SDFILE1,'NEW.VERSION.OF.FILE1'

// EXTENT SYS002,,1,0,15,500

// DLBL SDFILE2,'NEW.VERSION.OF.FILE2'

// EXTENT SYS003,,1,0,15,500

// ASSGN SYS002,223

// ASSGN SYS003,224

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=CURRENT,PARTIAL=SELECT

OLD.VERSION.OF.FILE1 @SDFILE1@

OLD.VERSION.OF.FILE2 @SDFILE2@

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=RUN

NOTE: The DLBL name is coded on the file selector within the "@" signs, and

SYS002 must be assigned to the first disk being restored to.

WARNING: If 'PARTIAL=SELECT' is not entered on an ECKD or CKD RESTORE, a

Volume RESTORE occurs.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Disk reorganization (ECKD and CKD disk only)

This example reorganizes cylinders 1-300 and 600-849 of a 3380 disk

(volser=MYVSER) previously saved by SAVE=CURRENT. No cylinder boundary alignment is needed.

// TLBL TAPEIN,. . .

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NOPERATION,UPSI=011

RESTORE=CURRENT,RV=MYVSER,AREA=COMPACT,ALIGN=NO

100-30014

60000-84914

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Compacting EPIC pool space (ECKD and CKD disk only)

EPIC pool space can be compacted by Dr. D, one disk at a time using the

SAVE=CURRENT volume backup and restore. Specify the area of the disk to be compacted in cylinder and head notation. If the BIM-EPIC or CA-EPIC catalog is on this disk, exclude it from the area.

Dr. D locks the disk while the backup and restore is taking place as indicated by use of the HV (hold VTOC) operand.

The BIM-EPIC catalog is updated to reflect the revised extent information. The

BIM-EPIC catalog update is accomplished using an interface provided only by

BIM-EPIC and no BIM-EPIC catalog label information or assignments are required.

For CA-EPIC, no interface is available for updating the CA-EPIC catalog. Files compacted using this technique, however, are still accurately accessible.

// TLBL TAPEOUT,. . .

// TLBL TAPEIN,. . .

// ASSGN SYS007,cuu

// ASSGN SYS008,SYS007

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SA=NO,UP=111,CP=YES,TAPE=REW

SA=CU,SV=DISK01,EX=YES,HV=YES,EOF=YES

SA=NO,TA=RE

RE=CU,RV=DISK01,DM=E,ALIGN=NO,HV=HOLD,AR=COMPACT

100-88314

RE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Page 258 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

RESTORE=DATA

The RESTORE=DATA command is used to restore individual non-VSAM files with data saved using any of the following techniques:

• The Volume Logical Save feature (SAVE=LOGICAL command)

• The Non-VSAM Data File Save feature (SAVE=DATA or SAVE=SDISK commands)

• User Data File

• Other backup software tape (see Conversion from Other Backup

Software Products on page 458 for additional information)

A Job Control DLBL statement is required to identify the file to be restored. Its filename is identified on the Dr. D control statement through the RFILENAME operand.

Dr. D interrogates the DLBL to ascertain whether it is SD, DA, or ISAM. For

ECKD and CKD disk, an SD file may be restored as a DA and vice-versa. The restore file's extents are completely independent of the save file's; they may differ in size, placement and types of disks.

When using a Dr. D save tape, use the FIND or SKIP operand to position the input to the appropriate file. If the file is not repositioned using FIND or SKIP, the RFILENAME operand must specify a filename matching the “DD NAME” field associated with the dataset on the save file.

When using a User Data File as input, positioning is required only if there are multiple files on the tape. To position a User Data File, use the SKIP operand.

Additionally, if the User Data File contains fixed-length records, the LRECSIZE and NRECDS operands are required. If the User Data File contains variable length records, the VARIABLE and LBLOCKSIZE operands must be used.

Using the RMODE Operand

The RMODE (Restore Mode) is an internal switch in Dr. D that is set and used when writing to the disk. Set RMODE to either an 'I' for image or 'S' for squeeze.

When set to 'I', Dr. D exactly mirrors the saved extent during the restore.

Partially used tracks, unused tracks, records out of sequence on a track, all appear restored in the same format.

When RMODE is set to 'S', the full track capacity of the restore disk is employed.

If there are any partial or unused tracks in the saved extent, that unused area is dropped and ignored. As many data records as can be accommodated are written on each track. Also, any records that are out of sequence on a saved track are written in the physical order they appear on the saved track. However, all records written on a track are sequentially numbered.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

When restoring a DA data file, RMODE is set to 'I' to accommodate the majority of applications using DA files. Thus, if relative track addressing is used, the DA file may be relocated and still accessed.

When restoring an SD file, RMODE is set to 'S' if it is restored to a new disk type.

Specifying RMODE=I or RMODE=S overrides the default as described above.

The only reason for specifying this override is in conversion of direct access from one disk type to another.

Using the SYNC Operand

Dr. D processes multi-extent data files as normally expected under VSE. The size and number of extents of the save file and restore file are independent of each other. Upon restoring, Dr. D fills each extent in order, switching to the next extent as the current one becomes full (the input and output extents are treated asynchronously).

However, sometimes you might want to switch output extents before each fills up. Using the SYNC=YES operand causes the restored files' extents to become

'SYNCHRONIZED' with the saved files’ extents.

As an example, if there were 100 and 200 records respectively in the first and second extents of a save file, then there is exactly 100 and 200 records, respectively, in the first and second extents of the restore file (even though they might be able to hold more). When SYNC=YES is specified, the restore file must have as many extents as the save file and each restore extent must be able to accommodate at least as many records as its corresponding save extent. Putting

SYNC=YES for an ISAM file is ignored.

Page 260 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Control Statement Operands

RESTORE=DATA Operand Summary

RESTORE=DATA

BLOCKSIZE=n

DELETE=YES|ppppxx

DTAPE=YES

FIND=filename|’file-id’

GR=nnn

LABEL=NO

LBLOCKSIZE=n

LRECSIZE=n

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

NRECDS=n

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RFILENAME=filename

RMODE=I|S

RP=YES|NO

R0=YES|NO

SEQNO=nn

SKIP=nnn

SYNC=YES

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1

TI=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

USEREXIT=NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

VARIABLE=YES

WAIT=n

Yes No

No Yes

No No

NOTE 3 No

No Yes

NOTE 1

NOTE 2

No Yes

NOTE 2 No

No No

No Yes

Yes No

No No

No Yes

No No

No Yes

No No

NOTE 1 No

No Yes

NOTE 1: For variable length User Data Files (DTAPE=YES), the LBLOCKSIZE= and VARIABLE=YES operands are required

NOTE 2: For fixed-length User Data Files (DTAPE=YES), the LRECSIZE= and

NRECDS= operands are required.

NOTE 3: FIND= is required if the input was created by the Volume Logical Save feature or if it is a backup tape created by another backup software product.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RE store=DAta

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: RE=DA

BL ocksize=n

Abbreviation: BL=n

DE lete=YEs|NO |pppphh

Use this operand to allow or bypass issuance of IBM equal file or overlap on unexpired file messages which require operator intervention. If specified as NO, the default, no specific action is taken to bypass overlap messages. If specified as

YES, Dr. D modifies the expiration date to ‘00000’ of any existing file with the same dataset name before attempting to restore it.

Use format DELETE=pppphh to cause records containing a specific single character in a specific record position to be bypassed during the restore function.

pppp is a 4-digit decimal number (relative to 1 with leading zeros specified and less than 4097) denoting the position in a record where the single character is located (if used with variable-length records, this position must be in the leading fixed portion of the record). hh is the hexadecimal value of the single character code. If omitted, all records are restored.

Abbreviation: DE=YE|pppphh

DT ape=YEs

Use this operand to indicate the input is a User Data File and not a Dr. D save file. When the input data file contains fixed-length records, you must also specify the LR= and NR= operands. When the input data file contains variable-length records, also specify the VARIABLE=YES and LB= operands.

NOTE: Only one DTAPE=YES restore can be specified per Dr. D execution. If multiple DTAPE=YES restores are required, accomplish each under a separate

Dr. D execution.

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: DT=YE

Page 262 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

FI nd=filename|’file-id’

Use this operand to cause the Dr. D save tape to be positioned to the correct input dataset. You may specify either the 1-7 character filename matching the

Abbreviation: FI=filename|’file-id’

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LA bel=NO

Use this operand to read unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LB locksize=n

Specify this operand along with the DTAPE=YES operand to identify the maximum blocksize found in the input User Data File. Use this operand also with variable block files to have their logical block size adjusted up or down during a RESTORE command.

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: LB=n

LR ecsize=n

Specify this operand along with the DTAPE=YES and NR=n operands to identify the length of each logical record found in the input User Data File containing fixed-length records. For example, if the input user data file contains 80-byte logical records blocked up to 10 to form a maximum 800-byte physical record, this operand would be specified as LR=80.

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: LR=n

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

NR ecds=n

Specify this operand along with the DTAPE=YES and LR=n operands to identify the maximum number of logical records blocked into a physical record found in the input User Data File containing fixed-length records. For example, if the input user data file contains 80-byte logical records blocked up to 10 to form a maximum 800-byte physical record, this operand would be specified as NR=10.

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: NR=n

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO |LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RF ilename=filename

Specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement of the file to be restored. The Job Control DLBL label statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas.

Abbreviation: RF=filename

Page 264 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

RM ode=I|S

Use this operand to indicate how Dr. D is to arrange the data being written on the tracks of the output disk during the restore.

Value Action

Restore file in Image mode. The tracks/blocks being restored are a mirror image of the saved tracks/blocks.

Restore file in Squeeze mode. In this mode, as many input blocks as possible are written to each output track. Unused tracks or portions of track on the saved extent are skipped over, and all data records are squeezed on the restoring device, using the full capacity of the track.

This option is only valid with CKD and ECKD devices.

Suppose you saved an area from a 3375 and restored it to a 3380. If the 3375 extent had five disk blocks per track, by putting RMODE=I, the 3380 extent also has five records per track even though it can contain more.

Likewise, if the 3375 had a completely blank track, so do the 3380. In other words, RMODE=I restores on a track by track basis exactly mirroring the saved extent. On the other hand, specifying RMODE=S informs Dr. D to use the full track capacity of the restoring device.

RMODE defaults to ‘IMAGE’ (RMODE=I) unless the file type is SD and the disk type changes, it may be necessary to override that assumption due to a peculiarity in the nature of the file. For SD files, RMODE defaults to ‘SQUEEZE’

(RMODE=S).

Abbreviation: RM=I|S

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

R0 =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: R0=YE|NO

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

SE qno=nn

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SK ip=nnn

Use this operand to skip over nnn number of files before starting the actual

RESTORE function. This is a three-digit decimal number (leading zeros required). Do not use the SKIP operand along with the BLOCKSIZE operand.

Instead, set the blocksize on a preceding RESTORE=NOPERATION.

Abbreviation: SK=nnn

SY nc=YEs

Abbreviation: SY=YE

TA pe=NOr |REw|RUn

Use this operand for tape positioning. It repositions the tape immediately. It is invalid when the data is saved to a disk dataset. TAPE=NOR is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Value Action

NOr Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

REw Immediately rewind the tape.

RUn Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the input dataset. TAPEIN is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

Page 266 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: TD=filename

TI =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TI=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

US erexit=NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

Restore processing supports Type 1 and Type 2 user exits. User Exit Type 1 may be used to Inspect, Modify, or Delete logical records. This method should be used in most situations. User Exit Type 2 may be used to Inspect or Generate logical records. See User Exits on page 468 for additional details.

For Type 1 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=NF/phasename' where:

NF constant

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

For Type 2 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=phasename/mm/tzzzzzz' where:

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

t processing mode flag. ‘IO’ to Send/Receive logical records; ‘EX’ to inspect logical records. is the type of core image phase. ‘L’ for relocatable and self-relocating programs; ‘A’ for absolute address programs.

zzzzzz is either the decimal length of the program for relocatable and self-relocating (‘L’) programs or the hexadecimal load address for absolute address (‘A’) programs.

For Type 2 user exits also require an EXIT parameter statement.

Abbreviation: US= NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

VA riable=YEs

Specify this operand along with the DTAPE=YES and LB=n operands to indicate the input User Data File contains variable-length records.

Abbreviation: VA=YE

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

Page 268 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Restore same file using a SAVE=DATA save file

This example restores the same file, ‘DISK.FILE.01’, which was saved by a prior

SAVE=DATA operation. The dataset selected for restore off the save file is retrieved from the DLBL associated with the RFILENAME operand, FILEONE.

// DLBL FILEONE,'DISK.FILE.01',2099/360,SD

// EXTENT ,737723,1,0,20,3980

// EXTENT ,737724,1,1,20,2000,8

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SAVE TAPE'

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111

RESTORE=DATA,RFILENAME=FILEONE

Example: Restore DA and SD files using a SAVE=DATA save file

This example restores the 2 files saved on the same tape by a prior SAVE=DATA function. The files being restored were originally saved in the order they are being restored in. If the files were not saved in the same order as being restored, it would be required to position the save tape to the proper file by using the

FIND, SKIP, and/or TAPE=REW operands.

// DLBL FILEONE,'DISK.FILE.01',2099/360,SD

// EXTENT ,737723,1,0,20,3980

// EXTENT ,737724,1,1,20,2000,8

// DLBL FILETWO,'DISK.FILE.02',2099/360,DA

// EXTENT ,434729,1,0,20,2320

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SAVE TAPE'

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111

RESTORE=DATA,RFILENAME=FILEONE

RESTORE=DATA,RFILENAME=FILETWO

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Restore individual file using a SAVE=LOGICAL save file

Individual files on a SAVE=LOGICAL save file may be restored using

RESTORE=DATA or RESTORE=SDISK. Because the input save file generally contains multiple files, the FIND operand is used to position the save file to the correct data.

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SAVE TAPE'

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL SDFILE2,'NEW.VERSION.OF.FILE2'

// EXTENT SYS003,,1,0,15,500

// ASSGN SYS003,224

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111

RESTORE=DA,RF=SDFILE2,FI='OLD.VERSION.OF.FILE2'

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Restore first and third files using the FIND operand

In this example, FIND is specified and is restoring the first and third files only.

Also note that SYS025 is being used for the input file in place of the default

SYS008. Because the files are being restored in relative sequence (file=1 first then file=3), no additional tape positioning is required. If the restore order were reversed (file=3 first then file=1), you would need to add a

‘RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW’ command between the RESTORE=DATA control statements.

// ASSGN SYS025,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SOME SAVES'

// DLBL FILEX,'VERSION.OF.FILE1'

// EXTENT SYS003,,1,0,15,500

// ASSGN SYS003,224

// DLBL FILEZ,'NEW.VERSION.OF.FILE3'

// EXTENT SYS010,,1,0,215,90

// ASSGN SYS010,225

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW,TI=SYS025

RESTORE=DATA,RFILENAME=FILEX,FIND=FILEX

RESTORE=DATA,RFILENAME=FILEZ,FIND='FILE ID OF 3RD FILE'

Page 270 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Using SKIP before restoring

In this example, 'SKIP=NNN' skips over NNN saved files on the tape before restoring. Because the files are being restored in relative sequence (file=1 first then file=3), the SKIP=001 simply bypasses the second file on the tape.

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SOME SAVES'

// DLBL FILEX,'VERSION.OF.FILE1'

// EXTENT SYS003,,1,0,15,500

// ASSGN SYS003,224

// DLBL FILEZ,'NEW.VERSION.OF.FILE3'

// EXTENT SYS010,,1,0,215,90

// ASSGN SYS010,225

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

RESTORE=DATA,RFILENAME=FILEX

RESTORE=DATA,RFILENAME=FILEZ,SKIP=001

Example: Restore files saved with the User Data File feature

This example restores the two SD files saved by a SAVE=DATA operation which created a User Data File. The first file being restored is a fixed-length record file with a record size of 100. The output file created by this restore results in a blocksize of 1000 (LR=100 time NR=10). The second file being restored is a variable length file. The output file created by this restore results in a maximum blocksize of 16000 (LB=16000).

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL FIL1,'FIXED.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE',,SD

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,15,300

// DLBL FIL2,'VARIABLE.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE',,SD

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,4500,6000

// TLBL TAPEIN,'FB.SAM.FILE'

// TLBL TDI0001,'VB.SAM.FILE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

RE=DATA,RFILENAME=FIL1,DTAPE=YES,LR=100,NRECDS=10

RE=DATA,RFILENAME=FIL2,DTAPE=YES,VARIABLE=YES,LB=16000

RE=NO,TAPE=REW

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RESTORE=ERASE

Sometimes it would be nice to be able to clear or erase a portion of a disk.

RESTORE=ERASE accomplishes this goal. Standard ECKD/CKD R0 records are written and the tracks are erased; FBA blocks are cleared.

The disk to be erased is determined by the volume assignment associated with the RSYSNO operand or the volume associated with the volser as defined by the

RVOLID operand. If neither RVOLSID nor RSYSNO is specified, then the disk having the default RSYSNO assigned to it is used. The default RSYSNO as supplied is SYS002 but may be changed by the installation administrator (refer to

Configure System Options on page 12 for additional information). Use of

RVOLID is recommended. When using RVOLID, Dr. D automatically makes the assignment.

The RBEGIN and RHALT operands define the area of the disk to be erased/cleared.

Control Statement Operands

RESTORE=ERASE

GR=nnn

RESTORE=ERASE Operand Summary

Operand Required? Global?

Yes

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RBEGIN=ccchh|block

RHALT=ccchh|block

Yes

NOTE 2

Yes

RSYSNO=SYSnnn

RP=YES|NO

RVOLID=xxxxxx

SEQNO=nn

UPSI=012345678

NOTE 1

Yes

NOTE 1: Either RSYSNO (or defaulted to) or RVOLID is required. Use the

RVOLID operand at all times in place of RSYSNO.

NOTE 2: If RHALT is omitted, it defaults to the RBEGIN value resulting in the restore of a single track/block.

RE store=ERase

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Page 272 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: RE=ER

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO |LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RB egin=ccchh|block

Use this operand to specify the starting track/block where the erase is to begin on the target device. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0- to 6-digit cylinder

(ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). For FBA devices, specify a 1 to 8-digit block number.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: RB=ccchh|block

RH alt=ccchh|block

Use this operand to specify the stopping track/block where the erase is to stop on the target device. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0 to 6-digit cylinder

(ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). For FBA devices, specify a 1 to 8-digit block number.

Abbreviation: RH=ccchh|block

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

RS ysno=SYSnnn

Use this operand to define the logical unit number for the output (target) disk during the erase operation. RSYSNO=SYS002 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. For greater control over the erase operation, use the RVOLID operand in place of RSYSNO.

Abbreviation: RS=SYSnnn

RV olid=xxxxxx

Use this operand to specify the volser of the output (target) volume during an erase operation.

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx

SE qno=nn

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

Page 274 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Erase disk

Assume two 3380's on 131 (volser=PCK131) and 132 (volser=PCK132). This example erases all of the pack on 131 and the last half of the pack on 132. It also erases cylinder 705 of a 3375 on 155 (volser=PCK155).

// ASSGN SYS002,131

// ASSGN SYS003,132

// ASSGN SYS004,155

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=ERASE,RVOLID=PCK131,RBEGIN=101,RHALT=84500

RESTORE=ERASE,RVOLID=PCK132,RBEGIN=40000,RHALT=84500

RESTORE=ERASE,RVOLID=PCK155,RBEGIN=70500,RHALT=70518

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RESTORE=LIBRARY

The RESTORE=LIBRARY command restores a VSE library (pre-SP2 format libraries are not supported). All sublibraries and members or only selective sublibraries and members may be restored. Sublibraries and their members may be restored to the same sublib or a different sublib.

A Job Control DLBL statement is required to identify the library to be restored and that filename is identified on the Dr. D control statement through the

RFILENAME operand. If RFILENAME is omitted for standard RESTORE operations, it looks for a DLBL statement with the filename of SYSLIB.

The MEMBER=SELECT|REJECT and TSTAMP operands may be used to selectively restore sublibraries and/or members. The MEMBER operand uses library selector statements to select or reject by sublib, member type and/or member name. Library selector statements also allow a sublib and its members to be restored to a different sublib in the output library. The TSTAMP operand bases its selection upon the “last update” date and time.

Dr. D uses two different methods for restoring library members. The LIBRARY operand controls the method to use. The default method uses Dr. D's own member and directory output routines. The LIBRARY operand may be used to invoke LIBR functions for member and directory output. This is accomplished by specifying LIBRARY=LIBR. The two methods differ in several aspects: 1) The

LIBR method requires more GETVIS memory and more free space in the library, but may be suitable for libraries in active use. 2) The LIBR method changes the date of the member while LIBRARY=PHYSICAL retains the date as saved.

When using Dr. D’s own member and directory output routines, you may specify the ADD, NEW, CREATE or EXTEND values with the LIBRARY operand. The ADD value is the default and reuses the space of restored members if they already exist in the library. The NEW value informs Dr. D that the library is to be created during the restore of sublibraries and members. The CREATE and EXTEND values are used to simply create or expand a library, no data is restored.

Listing of sublibrary and member names can be controlled by use of the

FORMAT and PRINT operands.

Library Create and Extend

Dr. D can add extents to libraries in either VSAM or BAM space, but VSE does not allow the SYSRES library to have more than one extent. These functions are independent of any other library function, therefore a subsequent restore or copy operation is required if members are to be added to the library.

If the library is in VSAM space and LIBRARY=CREATE is specified, a single open is issued to allocate the first extent. If LIBRARY=EXTEND is specified, the library is checked to determine the number of existing extents before opening as output to allocate a new extent.

Page 276 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

If the library is in BAM space, Dr. D issues an open for each JCL EXTENT card presented. This may result in the issuance of a corresponding VSE 'EQUAL FILE

ID IN VTOC' message, even if the library is being extended. The operator should respond with 'DELETE' after verifying that the correct file-ID is listed.

NOTE: The RFILENAME operand is required when specifying

LIBRARY=CREATE|EXTEND.

Library Space Considerations

In estimating library space requirements, a good rule of thumb is about 10% of the library is needed for directory and high level indexes. If the library fills up during restore, the members up to the one noted in message DOCTOR074 are restored and the library is intact. Use the LIBRARY=EXTEND feature if you want to enlarge the library or simply reallocate a new, larger library and restart the restore. When determining whether a member fits, an estimate is made of the number of additional directory blocks and higher level indexes needed. This estimate insures the successful completion of the restore but may allow one or two more blocks than are actually needed for the operation. If library space is limited, always issue a LIBR RELEASE command before attempting the restore.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

RESTORE=LIBRARY

BLOCKSIZE=n

RESTORE=LIBRARY Operand Summary

Operand Required? Global?

Yes

FIND=filename|’file-id’

FORMAT=A|B|C|D|E

Yes

GR=nnn

LABEL=NO

LIBRARY=ADD|NEW|CREATE|EXTEND|LIBR

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

MEMBER=SELECT|REJECT

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH|YES

RFILENAME=SYSLIB|filename

NOTE 1

Yes

RP=YES|NO

SEQNO=nn

SKIP=nnn

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1

TI=SYSnnn

TSTAMP=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

UPSI=012345678

WAIT=n

Yes

NOTE 1: RFILENAME defaults to SYSLIB when LIBRARY=ADD|NEW|LIBR is specified. RFILENAME is required when LIBRARY=CREATE|EXTEND is specified, there is no default.

RE store=LIbrary

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: RE=LI

BL ocksize=n

Page 278 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D the Dr. D execution or until set again using this same operand. The default shipped with Dr. D is 65496; your installation administrator may change it.

Abbreviation: BL=n

FI nd=filename|’file-id’

Use this operand to cause the Dr. D save tape to be positioned to the correct input dataset. You may specify either the 1-7 character filename matching the

Abbreviation: FI=filename|’file-id’

FO rmat=A|B|C|D|E

Use this operand to control the listing of sublibrary and members names as they are being processed and where the information is issued (SYSLOG or SYSLST).

Value Action

A Enable display of member names and sublib names on both SYSLOG and SYSLST.

B Enable display of member names on SYSLST only. Sublib names are displayed on both SYSLOG and SYSLST.

C Enable display of member names and sublib names on SYSLST only.

D Enable display of member names and sublib names on SYSLOG only.

E Do not display member names or sublib names on either SYSLOG or

SYSLST. This is the default.

This operand works along with the PRINT operand. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: FO=A|B|C|D|E

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LA bel=NO

Use this operand to read unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

LI brary=Add|New|Create|Extend|Libr

Use this operand to define the operation of a RESTORE|COPY=LIBRARY command.

Value Action

ADD Merges sublibraries and members from a save file into an existing library. Any existing members being restored are replaced. Any sublib or member not currently in the library is added. All existing sublibraries and members not being copied|restored are not modified. This is the default.

NEW Deletes all existing sublibraries and members prior to the restore.

CREATE Defines a library only; no data is copied|restored.

EXTEND Defines an additional extent to an existing library only; no data is restored.

LIBR Uses the LIBR i/o routines in place of the Dr. D physical i/o routines.

Abbreviation: LI=A|N|C|E|L

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

ME mber=SElect|REject

“to-sublib” name with a ‘&’ sign. All other selector statements, without an above mentioned prefix, are considered member name selectors.

Page 280 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D terminating statement for selector statements and use the /* as the terminating statement for Dr. D control statements.

Abbreviation: ME=SE|RE

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter and continues processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO |LIst|Both|YEs

LIST enables the report selected by the FORMAT operand to be printed on

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RF ilename=SYSLIB|filename

Specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement of the library to be restored, defined or extended. The Job Control DLBL statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas. RFILENAME defaults to SYSLIB when LIBRARY=ADD|NEW|LIBR is specified. RFILENAME is required when LIBRARY=CREATE|EXTEND is specified, there is no default.

Abbreviation: RF=SYSLIB|filename

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

SE qno=nn

Dr. D

USER GUIDE attempted. The first non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore is always one.

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SK ip=nnn

Use this operand to skip over nnn number of files before starting the actual

RESTORE function. This is a three-digit decimal number (leading zeros required). Do not use the SKIP operand along with the BLOCKSIZE operand.

Instead, set the blocksize on a preceding RESTORE=NOPERATION.

Abbreviation: SK=nnn

TA pe=NOr |REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr

REw

Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Immediately rewind the tape.

RUn Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the input dataset. TAPEIN is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

Abbreviation: TD=filename

TI =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TI=SYSnnn

TS tamp=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

‘>’ indicates that the time stamp date must exactly match the file’s time stamp date and any time of day value is ignored.

The time stamp value entered is compared to the actual Greenwich Mean Time values stored and is not adjusted for any difference from local time. For example,

Page 282 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D local time for the western United States typically is Greenwich Mean Time less 7 hours. A user in that area could define a file at 8:00pm on day 2000/105 and the stored time stamp value would be 2000/106 at 3:00 a.m.

The time stamp date is required and may be entered either as yyddd (yy is windowed: 00-74 = 20yy 75-99 = 19yy) or as a number of days value to be subtracted from the current system date.

TS=-0

TS=>-1.1200

TS=>-6

TS=01100 select if stamped today select if stamped after yesterday at 12 noon select if stamped in the last seven days select if stamped on the 100th day of 2001

TS=>01100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 2001/100

TS=<01100

TS=99100 select if stamped before 2001/100 select if stamped on the 100th day of 1999

TS=>99100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 1999/100

TS=<99100 select if stamped before 1999/100

Abbreviation: TS=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Examples

Example: Restore an existing library

This example restores the entire PROD library. The PROD library must already exist. Because the LIBRARY operand is omitted, it defaults to ADD. No report is generated.

// ASSGN SYS008,180

// TLBL TAPEIN,’PROD.LIBRARY.SAVE’

// DLBL PROD,'VSE-ESA.PROD.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA250

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

RESTORE=LIBRARY,RFILENAME=PROD

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: Restore a new library

This example restores the entire PROD library. If the PROD library does not exist, it is created immediately prior to restoring the data. No report is generated.

// ASSGN SYS008,180

// TLBL TAPEIN,’PROD.LIBRARY.SAVE’

// DLBL PROD,'VSE-ESA.PROD.LIBRARY',2099/365

// EXTENT sys002,FBA250,1,0,5474,91200

// ASSGN SYS002,250

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

RESTORE=LIBRARY,RFILENAME=PROD,FORMAT=NEW

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: Restore a library with report generation

This example restores the entire PROD library. The sublibraries that are restored display on the console and both the sublib names and member names restored are reported on SYSLST.

// ASSGN SYS008,180

// TLBL TAPEIN,’PROD.LIBRARY.SAVE’

// DLBL PROD,'VSE-ESA.PROD.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA250

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

RESTORE=LIBRARY,RFILENAME=PROD,FORMAT=B,PRINT=YES

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

Page 284 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Restore selected sublib to different sublib

This example restores all members of the PROD.PR$260 sublibrary to

PROD.PR$261 sublibrary. Both the sublibrary and member names that are saved are reported only on SYSLST.

// ASSGN SYS008,180

// TLBL TAPEIN,’PROD.LIBRARY.SAVE’

// DLBL PROD,'VSE-ESA.PROD.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA250

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LIBRARY,RF=PROD,FORMAT=C,PRINT=LIST,MEMBER=SELECT

+PR$260 SUBLIBRARY PR$260

&PR$261 RESTORE-TO PR$261

/@ TERMINATES SELECTION

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: Restore selected members to different sublib

This example restores all phases starting with IJZ which resided in the

PROD.PR$260 sublibrary on the save tape to PROD.PR$261 sublibrary. Both the sublibrary and member names that are saved are reported only on SYSLST.

// ASSGN SYS008,180

// TLBL TAPEIN,’PROD.LIBRARY.SAVE’

// DLBL PROD,'VSE-ESA.PROD.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA250

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LIBRARY,RF=PROD,FORMAT=C,PRINT=LIST,MEMBER=SELECT

+PR$260 SUBLIBRARY PR$260

&PR$261 RESTORE-TO PR$261

!PHASE SELECT TYPE 'PHASE'

IJZ///// SELECT MEMBERS PREFIXED BY 'IJZ'

/@ TERMINATES SELECTION

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: Create BAM library

This example creates a library in BAM space on PACK01.

// DLBL BAMLIB,'VSE.BAM.LIBRARY',2099/365

// EXTENT SYS002,PACK01,1,0,15,1500

// ASSGN SYS002,DISK,VOL=PACK01,SHR

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LIBRARY,UPSI=111,LIBRARY=CREATE,RFILENAME=BAMLIB

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Extend a BAM library

This job stream extends a library in BAM space.

// DLBL BAMLIB,'VSE.BAM.LIBRARY',2099/365

// EXTENT SYS002,PACK01,1,0,15,1500

// EXTENT SYS002,PACK01,1,1,6000,750 (extent to be added)

// ASSGN SYS002,DISK,VOL=PACK01,SHR

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LIBRARY,UPSI=111,LIBRARY=EXTEND,RFILE=BAMLIB

Example: Create a VSAM library

This example creates a VSAM library.

// DLBL VSLIB,'VSE.VSAM.LIBRARY',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUC,DISP=(OLD,KEEP)

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LIBRARY,UPSI=111,LIBRARY=CREATE,RFILE=VSLIB

Example: Extend a VSAM library

This example extends a VSAM library.

// DLBL VSLIB,'VSE.VSAM.LIBRARY',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUC,DISP=(OLD,KEEP)

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LIBRARY,UPSI=111,LIBRARY=EXTEND,RFILE=VSLIB

Page 286 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

RESTORE=LOGICAL (Volume)

Logical Volume Restore Feature

The Logical Volume Restore feature allows non-VSAM files to be restored on a logical file basis without having to specify either the disk or disk track/block address, allowing users to selectively restore files on one or more disks.

To define the original disk volume serial number of the file(s) being restored, you must specify the SVOLID operand. SVOLID is used for tape positioning. To define the target disk volume serial numbers to which the file(s) are restored, you must specify the RVOLID operand. You can specify up to 600 volsers.

During the restore operation, the beginning relative track number for the generated extent cards can be set through use of the EB (Extent Begin) operand.

One purpose of this is to set the 'trigger' for disk managers since each generated extent begins at the value entered, thus allowing the disk manager to allocate space for files being restored.

The PARTIAL= operand allows files to be selected during the restore operation.

The files may be selected/rejected on either an individual or generic (group) basis. See Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process on page 23 for additional details about using PARTIAL=.

File(s) may be restored to the same name as when they were saved or they may be renamed at restore time. See Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process on page 23 for additional details about renaming files.

The AREA= operand indicates that a reorganization restore is being performed by allowing you to limit the area of the disk(s) to contain the restored files.

If restoring under the control of a disk manager, use the DM= operand to allow the disk manager to allocate file space, and the PID= (Pool-ID) to specify the pseudo volser for disk manager use. Do not specify DM= unless the disk manager is to allocate the space.

RESTORE=LOGICAL (Volume) Page 287

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Disk Reorganization

The Logical Volume Restore feature allows the elimination of disk fragmentation and/or relocation of files by three methods:

1. Full Reorganization: Each file is restored contiguously starting with the first

(or only) disk, filling each disk (or disk area) as fully as possible. This method is invoked by specifying either 'EB=Rnnnnnn' for single volume restore or 'AREA=' for multiple volume restores. (This method may leave existing file extents in unused areas of a disk pool.)

2. Full In Place Reorganization: All disks in the pool are reorganized while keeping each file's extents in place on its original disk(s). This method is invoked by specifying 'EB=RS' and 'AREA='.

3. Partial In Place Reorganization: Selected disks are reorganized keeping each file's extents in place on its original disk(s). This method is invoked by specifying 'EB=RS', 'AREA=', and 'VOLSELECT='.

Page 288 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Control Statement Operands

RESTORE=LOGICAL (Volume) Operand Summary

Operand Required? Global?

RESTORE=LOGICAL

AREA=(s1-e1,s2-e2,…)

Yes

BLOCKSIZE=n

CFACTOR=n|0

Yes

DATE=yyddd|yyyyddd|+n|0

DELETE=YES

DM=E|D|S

EB=nnn|NO|Rnnn|RS

ERROR=IGNORE

GENERATION=L|F|nnn

GR=nnn

HV=NO|YES|HOLD

Yes

LABEL=NO

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT

PID=NONE|dmpoolid

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

RVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

SEQNO=nn

SKIP=nnn

Yes

SPLIT=NO

SVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1

TI=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

USEREXIT=NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

VOLSELECT=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

WAIT=n

XS=0|n

Yes

RESTORE=LOGICAL (Volume) Page 289

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RE store=LOgical

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: RE=LO

AR ea=(s1-e1,s2-e2,…)

This operand defines the area(s) of disk to be restored. Each set of AREA values is a starting and ending track or FBA block number separated by a dash '-'. If the specification is a repeat of the last entered, a single 'R' may be entered. The entries are assumed to be in one to one correspondence with the RVOLID entries.

Abbreviation: AR=(s1-e1,s2-e2,…)

BL ocksize=n

Abbreviation: BL=n

CF actor=n|0

Use this operand to change the allocation for each file being restored. The value specified is a percentage change. A value of 110 would increase the allocation by

10%; a value of 90 would decrease the allocation by 10%. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of 0 is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued.

Abbreviation: CF=n|0

DA te=yyddd|yyyyddd|+n|0

Use this operand to set the expiration date for each file being restored. Use yyddd or yyyyyddd to specify an absolute Julian date (yy defaults to 19yy when using the

yyddd format). Use +n to specify a date relative to the current IPL date. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If

DATE=0 is specified, the global value is reset and the expiration dates of files being restored are the same as when they were originally saved.

Abbreviation: DA= yyddd|yyyyddd|+n|0

DE lete=YEs|NO

YES, Dr. D modifies the expiration date to ‘00000’ of any existing file with the same dataset name before attempting to restore it.

Page 290 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: DE=YE

DM =E|D|S

Use this operand to indicate the file being restored is allocated by a Disk

Management product.

Value Action

E Indicates the Disk Manager is BIM-EPIC or CA-EPIC.

Indicates the Disk Manager is CA-Dynam/D.

Indicates the Disk Manager is CA-System Manager. This option generates a sysin file with System Manager JCL.

This operand is may also require the EB= and PID= operands.

Abbreviation: DM=E|D|S

EB =nnn|NO|Rnnn|RS

Use this operand to indicate the value to be placed in the start track field of the generated EXTENT statement.

Value Action nnn Generates VSE labels with EXTENT values where the relative starting track value is set to nnn for all files.

NO Generates VSE labels without extent cards. Useful when restoring files controlled in a Disk Manager’s catalog.

Rnnn Generates VSE labels with EXTENT values where the relative starting track value is set to nnn for 1 st file and each subsequent file is contiguous with the previous.

RS Specifies an “in place” reorganization where each file stays on the disk(s) it resided on during the backup. This option requires use of the

AREA= operand to define the area(s) of the disk(s) being reorganized.

Abbreviation: EB=nnn|NO|Rnnn|RS

ER ror=IGnore

Specify ERROR=IGNORE along with the PARTIAL operand to prevent cancellation after message DOCTOR316 (indicating no files are selected) is issued.

Abbreviation: ER=IG

RESTORE=LOGICAL (Volume) Page 291

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

GE neration=L|F|nnn

Use this operand to select disk manager files for restore by the generation number of each file. This operand requires DM= to also be specified.

Value Action

L Select most current generation.

F Select oldest generation.

Nnn Select specific generation number.

Abbreviation: GE=L|F|nnn

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

HV =NO|YEs|HOld

HV=YES should be used on the first disk save/restore within an execution of

Dr. D and then HV=HOLD should be used to continue to hold the lock on following functions within that Dr. D execution.

Abbreviation: HV=NO|YE|HO

LA bel=NO

Use this operand to read unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

Page 292 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PA rtial=SElect|REject

Use this operand to indicate that one or more selector statements immediately follow this statement. The selector statements used may be to specify the file(s) to be restored and/or to rename the file(s) being restored. See Logical

Selection/Rejection/Rename Process on page 23 for additional details.

Abbreviation: PA=SE|RE

PI d=NOne|dmpoolid

Use this operand to specify the disk manager pool identifier into which files are to be allocated. Use it along with the DM (disk manager) operand. In some cases,

PI=NONE should be used to allow the disk manager to properly process

'cataloged' files.

Abbreviation: PI=NO|dmpoolid

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

RESTORE=LOGICAL (Volume) Page 293

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)|NO

Use this operand to specify the volser(s) of the output (target) volume(s) during a restore operation. Specify up to 600 volsers to designate the pool of disks to which individual files are to be restored. The pool of disks is assumed to be in one-to-one correspondence with the SV= volsers.

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)|NO

SE qno=nn

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SK ip=nnn

Use this operand to skip over nnn number of files before starting the actual

RESTORE function. This is a three-digit decimal number (leading zeros required). Do not use the SKIP operand along with the 'BLOCKSIZE' operand.

Instead, set the blocksize on a preceding RESTORE=NOPERATION.

Abbreviation: SK=nnn

SP lit=NO

Use this operand to prevent SD files from being split into multiple extents when a reorganizing restore is being performed. DA files are never split.

Abbreviation: SP=NO

SV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Use this operand to specify the input (source) volser(s). It properly positions the input tape for the restore operation.

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

Page 294 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

REw

RUn

Immediately rewind the tape.

Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the input dataset. TAPEIN is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

Abbreviation: TD=filename

TI =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TI=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

US erexit=NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

For Type 1 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=NF/phasename' where:

NF constant

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

For Type 2 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=phasename/mm/tzzzzzz' where:

RESTORE=LOGICAL (Volume) Page 295

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

phasename

zzzzzz is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above. processing mode flag. ‘IO’ to Send/Receive logical records; ‘EX’ to inspect logical records. is the type of core image phase. ‘L’ for relocatable and self-relocating programs; ‘A’ for absolute address programs. is either the decimal length of the program for relocatable and self-relocating (‘L’) programs or the hexadecimal load address for absolute address (‘A’) programs.

For Type 2 user exits also require an EXIT parameter statement. Refer to the section User Exits for additional details.

Abbreviation: US= NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

VO lselect=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Select files for restore that fully or partially reside on the specified disk(s) during backup.

Abbreviation: VO=xxxxxx| (xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

XS =0|n

This operand allows the starting extent sequence number for each file to start at other than the default value zero.

Abbreviation: XS=0 |n

Page 296 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Restore all files

This example restores all files that were saved by a SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume) function. The DELETE=YES operand is being used to bypass operator intervention in case the files being restored still exist on the disk.

// TLBL TAPEIN

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,SVOLID=111111,RVOLID=111111,DELETE=YES

RE=NO,TA=RE

Example: Restore specific file

This example restores the file with file id “DATA.FILE1” and any files starting with “GL.SYS”, but does not restore “GL.SYS.GARBAGE”. It starts each extent at relative track 1 to allow a disk management system to allocate disk space. Refer to Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process on page 23 for additional details concerning file selection during RESTORE operations.

// TLBL TAPEIN

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,SVOLID=111111,RVOLID=111111,PARTIAL=SELECT,EB=1

DATA.FILE1

GL.SYS.GARBAGE @REVERSE@

GL.SYS*

RE=NO,TA=RE

RESTORE=LOGICAL (Volume) Page 297

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: File rename restore

Restore multiple files to be used for testing. All files which start with the characters ‘PAYROLL’ is restored with the character string ‘TEST.’ inserted into the front of each name. All files that have the characters ‘COST’ are restored with the character string ‘COST’ being replaced by the characters ‘CA’ and the character string ‘TEST1.’ inserted into the front of each name. All files are restored to the pack VOLSRT and is restored contiguously starting at track 15.

Refer to Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process on page 23 for additional details concerning file selection during RESTORE operations.

// ASSGN SYS008,181

// MTC REW,SYS008

// TLBL TAPEIN

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111

RESTORE=LO,SV=VOLSR1,RV=VOLSRT,EB=R15,PA=SE

PAYROLL*

=P=TEST.

=S=COST

=T=COST=CA

=P=TEST1.

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: Restore files from one volume to a contiguous area on another volume

This example restores the files saved from the disk on 132 (volser=222222) to another disk on 133 (volser=333333). It then restores the files to the contiguous area starting with track 12. Please note that the save file was originally created with the SVOLID=(111111,222222) operand.

// TLBL TAPEIN

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,SVOLID=111111,VOLSELECT=222222,RVOLID=333333,EB=R12

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

Page 298 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Restore after interruption

This example assumes the restore was interrupted after restoring 15 files. It now begins with the sixteenth restore.

// TLBL TAPEIN

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,SVOLID=111111,RVOLID=111111,SKIP=015

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: Restore and Reorganize

This example restores and reorganizes a pool of disk space on three 3380 disks having volume serial numbers VOLSR1, VOLSR2, and VOLSR3. The space on the first disk is in cylinder 1 through 100, the second and third, 100 through 600.

Each extent of each file is kept on its original disk. It changes the expiration date of each file being replaced on disk so that no 'overlap' messages occur and no operator intervention is needed.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT,. . .

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

SAVE=LO,SV=(VOLSR1,VOLSR2,VOLSR3),AREA=(15-1500,1500-9000,R)

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEIN,. . .

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

RESTORE=LO,SV=VOLSR1,RV=(VOLSR1,VOLSR2,VOLSR3),DELETE=YES,*

AREA=(15-1500,1500-9000,R),EB=RS

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

RESTORE=LOGICAL (Volume) Page 299

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: BIM-EPIC restore of DSN catalog controlled files

This example illustrates restoring using BIM-EPIC DSN catalog controlled files.

The EPIC interface is initially established by the DM=E operand. Because BIM-

EPIC maintains the information needed to generate EXTENT statements in its

DSN catalog, the EB=NO operand is used to inhibit the creation of EXTENT statements by Dr. D. The RVOLID operand is still required even though it is overridden to the appropriate disk pool by EPIC. RVOLID should be specified using the volser of the same device type as the EPIC pool.

// TLBL TAPEIN

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,SVOLID=POOL01,RVOLID=111111,DM=E,EB=NO

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: BIM-EPIC RESTORE of Start Track 1 files

This example illustrates restoring BIM-EPIC Start Track 1 controlled files. The

EPIC interface is initially established by the DM=E operand. To enable Dr. D to setup appropriate EXTENT information for the EPIC Start Track 1 feature, the EB operand is set to the same value as the EPIC STRTRK processing option value.

Additionally, the PID operand is used to specify the EPIC disk pool name. The

RVOLID operand is still required even though it is overridden to the appropriate disk pool by EPIC. RVOLID should be specified using the volser of the same device type as the EPIC pool.

// TLBL TAPEIN

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,SVOLID=POOL01,RVOLID=111111,DM=E,EB=1,PID=POOL02

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

Page 300 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: CA-System Manager restore

Let System Manager allocate the files during the restore. The files were saved from a 3340 disk and are being restored to space on 3380 disks, so the tracks to be allocated must be adjusted using the CFACTOR operand. We know that five

3340 track length records can fit on each 3380 track, so a ratio of one to five is needed to adjust the 3380 allocation, or 'CF=020'.

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEIN,. . .

// DLBL SYSIN,'IJSYSIN',NEW,TRACKS=15,SYS001

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

RESTORE=LOGICAL,SVOLID=VOLSR1,RVOLID=VOLSR1,DM=SM,CFACTOR=020,*

PID=VOLSR1

// ASSGN SYS000,SYSRDR

// MTC REW,SYS008

// TLBL TAPEIN

// DLBL IJSYSIN,'IJSYSIN',OLD,SYSIN

NOTE: The PID (POOL-ID) operand directs the files to a particular disk

(V=VOLSR1 is added to the DLBL(s)).

RESTORE=LOGICAL (Volume) Page 301

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM)

VSAM Logical Restore Feature

The VSAM Logical Restore feature restores all or some of the files previously saved by the VSAM Logical Save feature with a single Dr. D request. All files saved or only those identified through user selection criteria (refer to Logical

Selection/Rejection/Rename Process) can be restored as well as all associated files. Files restored using this feature may be renamed and a wide array of attributes may be modified.

To invoke this feature, specify RESTORE=LOGICAL as the first entry on the control statement. The label identifying the target VSAM catalog is required and is identified to Dr. D through the RCAT operand. Dr. D also uses the file-ID from the label for the RCAT filename to properly position the save tape. If the save catalog had a different file-ID than that of the RCAT filename, then a label for the saved catalog is required and identified to Dr. D through the SCAT operand.

NOTE: The saved catalog label is retrieved for its file-ID only and for no other purpose.

No labels are required for any suballocated file restored by the Dr. D VSAM

Logical Restore feature. In addition, no labels are required for any unique file restored by the Dr. D VSAM Logical Restore feature if Dr. D is not required to invoke VSAM for file definition.

When restoring a VSAM unique file using the Dr. D VSAM Logical Restore feature where Dr. D is required to invoke VSAM for file definition, two label sets are required for each unique KSDS file and one label set is required for each unique ESDS or RRDS file:

// DLBL DILnnnn,,,VSAM

Í DLBL/EXTENT required for KSDS ESDS RRDS

// EXTENT ,volser,,,start,number

// DLBL XILnnnn,,,VSAM

Í DLBL/EXTENT required for KSDS only

// EXTENT ,volser,,,start,number

The filename to be used is the generated name where the first character is altered to the letter ‘D’ (to identify the data component) or to the letter ‘X’ (to identify the index component). Any specified file-ID is ignored since VSAM always uses the name of the component as the file-ID. Extent information is required to identify where on the target volume each component is to reside.

Page 302 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

VSAM Automatic Definition Feature

The Dr. D VSAM Automatic Definition Feature simplifies restoring of VSAM files by eliminating the need for a separate IDCAMS job step.

When saving VSAM files (clusters, AIX’s, path’s, etc) to a Dr. D save file, the catalog definition for that file is also automatically saved. This definition is then used as the basis for defining the file during the restore process. The use of this feature is optional and is controlled using the AUTO= operand. The default for this operand is AUTO=YES.

With the AUTO=YES operand in effect during the restore process, Dr. D examines the target VSAM catalog (after adjusting for any requested name changes) and selects one of the following actions:

• If the file does not exist in the target catalog, Dr. D defines a new file using the saved definition.

• If the file does exist in the target catalog but contains no records, Dr. D restores into the empty file ignoring the saved definition.

When the cluster names of the input and output are the same, the component

(data and index) names are maintained by the Automatic Definition Feature.

When renaming the cluster during the restore, the NAME=GEN option is forced.

These techniques provide the maximum flexibility to enable file definitions to be changed while at the same time providing maximum automation for regular save and reorganization functions. It is also fully compatible with Dr. D job streams where IDCAMS is already invoked prior to the Dr. D restore function.

RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 303

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

VSAM Automatic Definition Override Feature

Users of the VSAM Automatic Definition Feature can override several attributes when the file is defined using additional operands for modifying definitions. The available operands are:

Operand Function

BUFFERSPACE=n|1|N Override the BUFFERSPACE specification.

Override the data allocation classes. CDATA=dataprimaryusecls/

datasecondaryusecls|N

CFACTOR=n|0 Change the space occupied.

CNSIZE=datacisize/idxcisize|N Change the data and index CI sizes.

CX=idxprimaryusecls/

idxsecondaryusecls|N

Override the index allocation classes.

DATE=yyddd|+n|0

FD=C|D|M

FREESPACE=cifreespace/

cafreespace|N

NAME=GEN|NOGEN

RVOLID=xxxxxx|

(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Override VSAM TO/FOR specification.

Primary allocation recalculation.

Override the FREESPACE specification.

Override the NAME specification for

Data and Index components.

Override the VOLUME specification.

SOPTION=datashroptions/

idxshroptions|N

VCOMPRESS=YES|NO

XL=YES|NO

Override the SHAREOPTION specification.

Set the “COMPRESSED” attribute.

Set the “EXTRALARGEDATASET” attribute.

Page 304 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Multivolume VSAM Catalogs

When a VSAM file is saved, the volume(s) on which it resides (both prime and candidate) are recorded in its saved definition. When the VSAM file is restored and the VSAM Automatic Definition Feature is active, the volume serial numbers recorded in the saved definition are compared to the volume serial numbers owned by the target catalog.

If all the volume serial numbers in the saved definition are currently volumes owned by the target catalog, the same volume serial numbers are used in the definition. If any of the volume serial numbers in the saved definition are not currently volumes owned by the target catalog, only the catalog owned volume serial numbers are used in the definition. This action can be influenced by the following:

• The RVOLID= operand, which directs the definition to one or more particular volume serial numbers

• The VSAM Automatic Definition Override Feature

• The AUTO=ROTATE operand, which spreads allocations across candidate volumes

VSAM Device Independence

The VSAM Automatic Definition Feature fully supports device independence between the DASD device type used when the file was saved and the DASD device type used when the file is restored.

If the DASD device type is different when the restore begins, the space allocations for the file are adjusted in proportion to the relative track capacities

(or FBA blocksize) of the two DASD device types. Full independence between

CKD, ECKD and FBA architecture is supported.

RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 305

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

RESTORE=LOGICAL Operand Summary

RESTORE=LOGICAL

ASSOCIATIONS=YES|NO

AUTO=YES|NO|ROTATE

BLOCKSIZE=n

BUFFERSPACE=n|1|N

CDATA=primaryclass/secondaryclass|N

CFACTOR=n|0

CNSIZE=datacisize/idxcisize|N

CX=idxprimaryusecls/idxsecondaryusecls|N

DATE=yyddd|+n|0

ERROR=IGNORE

FD=C|D|M|N|R

FREESPACE=cifreespace/cafreespace|N

GR=nnn

HIKEY=highkey|’highkey’|X’highkeyinhex’

IDCAMS=PRINT

LABEL=NO

LOWKEY=lowkey|’lowkey’|X’lowkeyinhex’

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

MRECORDS=n

NAME=GEN|NOGEN

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RCAT=filename

RP=YES|NO

RVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

RWORD=filepassword

SCAT=filename

SEQNO=nn

SKIP=nnn

SOPTION=datashroptions/idxshroptions|N

SVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Yes

Page 306 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

RESTORE=LOGICAL Operand Summary

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1

TI=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

USEREXIT=NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

VBUFF=n

VCOMPRESS=YES|NO

VRTYPE=E|K|R|N|S|P

WAIT=n

WR=catalogwritepassword

XL=YES|NO

RE store=LOgical

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. It must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: RE=LO

AS sociations=YEs|NO

Specify YES to cause all saved associated files (PATH’s and AIX’s) to be restored.

Specifying NO results in the associated files being bypassed.

ASSOCIATIONS=NO is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Abbreviation: AS=YE|NO

AU to=YEs|NO|ROtate

Use this operand to control the VSAM Automatic Definition Feature.

Value Action

YES Invoke automatic file definition as necessary (default).

Yes

ROTATE predefined and ready to accept data).

Abbreviation: AU=YE|NO|RO

RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 307

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

BL ocksize=n

Abbreviation: BL=n

BU fferspace=n|1|N

If a value greater than 256 is specified, that value is used as the bufferspace for each file.

If a value of 2-256 is specified, the existing bufferspace is multiplied by that value.

If a value of 1 is specified, no bufferspace is specified when a define is accomplished for this file.

This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued.

Abbreviation: BU=n|1|N

CD ata=primaryclass/secondaryclass|N

Abbreviation: CD=primaryclass/secondaryclass|N

CF actor=n|0

Abbreviation: CF=n|0

CN size=datacisize/idxcisize|N

Use this operand to override the CISIZE(s) for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. This is a global operand; its value

Page 308 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued.

Abbreviation: CN=datacisize/idxcisize|N

CX =idxprimaryusecls/idxsecondaryusecls|N

Abbreviation: CX=indexprimaryusecls/indexsecondaryusecls

DA te=yyddd|+n|0

Use this operand to set the expiration date for each file being defined by the

Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. Use yyddd to specify an absolute Julian date

(yy is windowed: 00-74 = 20yy 75-99=19yy). Use +n to specify a date relative to the current IPL date. Specify 0 to cause no ‘TO’ date to be generated for the

VSAM file definition. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: DA=yyddd|+n|0

ER ror=IGnore

Specify ERROR=IGNORE along with the PARTIAL operand to prevent cancellation after message DOCTOR316 (indicating no files are selected) is issued.

Abbreviation: ER=IG

FD =C|D|M|N|R

Value Action

The file is deleted and redefined with the primary allocation increased so the restored file is contained within the primary extent retaining the original secondary size allocation.

The file is deleted and redefined.

The file is deleted and redefined unless it is empty or defined as reusable.

The existing definition is to be reset if the file exists (even if not defined as reusable). Otherwise, the file is defined.

RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 309

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: FD=C|D|M|N|R

FR eespace=cifreespace/cafreespace|N

Abbreviation: FR=cifreespace/cafreespace

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

HI ghkey=highkey|’highkey’|X’highkeyinhex’

Abbreviation: HI=highkey|’highkey’|X’highkeyinhex’

ID cams=PRint

Use this operand along with the PRINT operand to cause printing of Dr. D

Automatic Definition Feature IDCAMS DELETE and DEFINE commands and their corresponding results.

Abbreviation: ID=PR

LA bel=NO

Use this operand to specify use of an unlabeled tape as input.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

Page 310 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

LO wkey=lowkey|’lowkey’|X’lowkeyinhex’

Abbreviation: LO=lowkey|’lowkey’|X’lowkeyinhex’

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

MR ecords=n

Specify this operand with a value in the range of 0-99999999 to limit the number of logical records to be restored to each file. Specify MRECORDS=0 to cause files to be defined or modified only (with no records restored), depending upon the setting of the FD operand. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: MR=n

NA me=GEn|NOgen

Use this operand to tell the VSAM file definition function to let IDCAMS generate the data and index names instead of using the data and index names as saved. NOGEN, the default, restores the file using the same name as was used during the SAVE function unless overridden by a rename statement (refer to

Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process). GEN forces the use of VSAM generated names.

Abbreviation: NA=GE|NO

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

FUNCTION command, in which case it logs out immediately before any

RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 311

Dr. D

USER GUIDE processing is done, or it can be on a card all by itself. If the message contains imbedded blanks/commas/equal signs, it must be enclosed in single quotes.

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PA rtial=SElect|REject

Abbreviation: PA=SE|RE

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RC at=filename

Use this operand to identify the filename of the VSAM catalog to receive the files to be restored. If this operand is specified on a Dr. D request that is continued across multiple control statements, it must be on the initial control statement.

Also, specify the SCAT operand only if the file-ID of the save catalog is different from the file-ID on the label for RCAT.

Abbreviation: RC=filename

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

RV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Use this operand to override the VOLUME specification for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. Specify up to 600 volsers (of those assigned to the RCAT catalog) enclosed in parentheses. If a value of NO is specified, the file definitions exclude any data or index volume specification.

Page 312 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

RW ord=filepassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character password of the VSAM file being restored to.

Abbreviation: RW=filepassword

SC at=filename

Use this operand to identify the label reflecting the file-ID of the save catalog if that file-ID is different than the file-ID on the label for RCAT. Dr. D uses the file-

ID of the save catalog to properly position the save tape.

NOTE: The SCAT label is retrieved for its file-ID only and for no other purpose.

Abbreviation: SC=filename

SE qno=nn

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SK ip=nnn

Use this operand to skip over nnn number of files before starting the actual

RESTORE function. This is a three-digit decimal number (leading zeros required). Do not use the SKIP operand along with the BLOCKSIZE operand.

Instead, set the blocksize on a preceding RESTORE=NOPERATION.

Abbreviation: SK=nnn

SO ption=datashroptions/idxshroptions|N

Use this operand to override the share option specification for each VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. Enter the share options as 2 single-digit pairs, where the first digit specifies how the component is shared within a single VSE system and the second digit specifies how the component is shared across multiple VSE systems. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. Specifying a value of N discontinues the effects of this operand.

Abbreviation: SO=datashroptions/idxshroptions|N

SV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Use this operand to restore only files that resided on the specified volser(s) when the save file was created. Specify up to 600 volsers to designate the pool of disks from which to select individual files. This operand also requires a

RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 313

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

PARTIAL=SELECT operand to define which file(s) to restore (a dataset name selector of an asterisk (*) selects all files).

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

REw

RUn

Immediately rewind the tape.

Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the input dataset. TAPEIN is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

Abbreviation: TD=filename

TI =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TI=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

US erexit=NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

For Type 1 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=NF/phasename' where:

NF constant

Page 314 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

For Type 2 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=phasename/mm/tzzzzzz' where:

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

zzzzzz is either the decimal length of the program for relocatable and self-relocating (‘L’) programs or the hexadecimal load address for absolute address (‘A’) programs.

For Type 2 user exits also require an EXIT parameter statement. Refer to the section User Exits for additional details.

Abbreviation: US= NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

VB uff=n

VB=100 sets the buffer space used by Dr. D to 100,000. This operand defaults to 3 times the default or specified tape blocksize value (see BLOCKSIZE operand).

BUFFERSPACE operand).

Abbreviation: VB=n

VC ompressYes NOO

This operand lets you have the compressed attribute specified for the output qualifying VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature.

Dr. D accomplishes qualification for the output using the rules as delineated by

NOTE: The files to be restored with the compressed attribute must have been saved with FAST=NO.

RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 315

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: VC=YE

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

WR =catalogwritepassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character VSAM catalog write or higher password.

Abbreviation: WR=catalogwritepassword

XL =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: XL=YE|NO

Page 316 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Restore one VSAM catalog

Restore all files previously saved from a VSAM catalog, including all associated

PATH’s and AIX’s.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,RC=UCAT1,ASSOCIATIONS=YES

Example: Restore to a different VSAM catalog

Restore all the files saved from a VSAM catalog, including all associated PATH’s and AIX’s, to a different VSAM catalog.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG.ONE’,,VSAM

// DLBL TEMP1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG.TEMP.ONE’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,RC=TEMP1,ASSOCIATIONS=YES,SC=UCAT1

Example: Restore multiple catalogs in single execution

Restore all files previously saved from a VSAM catalog, including all associated

PATH’s and AIX’s. The SAVE tape was created with at least 2 catalogs on it.

Following the restore, the input tape is unloaded.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG.ONE’,,VSAM

// DLBL TEMP1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG.TEMP.ONE’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,RC=UCAT1,ASSOCIATIONS=YES

RESTORE=LOGICAL,RC=UCAT2,ASSOCIATIONS=YES

RESTORE=NOPERATION,TAPE=RUN

RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 317

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Restore a suballocated VSAM file

Restore the file ‘A.VSAM.FILE’ and all files that start with the character string

‘PAY’. Following the restore, the input tape is rewound. For additional details on file selection and file renaming, see “Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename

Process” on page 23.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,RC=UCAT1,PA=SE

A.VSAM.FILE

PAY*

RE=NO,TA=REW

Example: Restore with rename

Restore certain files renaming them in the process. All file-IDs beginning with

CUR.STAT.FILE are to be prefixed with the character ‘TEST.’. The file-ID

Original Name

EMPLOYEE.PRMASTER

===

YTD.PRMASTER

===

QTD.PRMASTER

===

New Name After Restore

PAYROLL.MASTER.EMPLOYEE

PAYROLL.MASTER.YTD

PAYROLL.MASTER.QTD

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,RCAT=UCAT1,PARTIAL=SELECT

CUR.STAT.FILE*

=P=TEST.

ONE.SPECIAL.FILE

ONE.COMMON.FILE @RENAME@

=S=PRMASTER

=T=.PRMASTER=

=P=PAYROLL.MASTER.

Page 318 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Restore a suballocated VSAM file eliminating secondary allocations

Restore a suballocated VSAM KSDS file. When the file is restored, its file definition is changed to increase the primary allocation and eliminate all secondary allocations. The IDCAMS Delete/Define statements are printed on

SYSLST as a result of the IDCAMS=PRINT specification on the RESTORE=NO command. Being a global command, IDCAMS=PRINT can be specified on either statement. Following the restore, the input tape is unloaded.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,IDCAMS=PRINT

RESTORE=LOGICAL,RC=UCAT1,PA=SE,AUTO=YES,FD=C

A.VSAM.FILE

RE=NO,TA=RU

Example: Restore a VSAM file using Automatic Definition Overrides

Restore a suballocated VSAM KSDS file. When the file is restored, it is redefined to increase the CISIZE of the data component to 8092 and the CISIZE of the index component is set to 2048.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,RC=UCAT1,PA=SE,AUTO=YES,FD=D,CN=8092/2048

A.VSAM.FILE

Example: Restore a unique KSDS without Automatic File Definition

Restore a unique VSAM KSDS file. The file currently exists and, therefore, need not be defined by the Dr. D automatic file definition facility.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,RC=UCAT1,PA=SE,AUTO=NO

UNIQUE.FILE

RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 319

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Restore a unique KSDS with Automatic File Definition

Restore a unique VSAM KSDS file. The file does not currently exist as desired and, therefore, needs to be defined by the Dr. D automatic file definition facility.

The filename generated when this file was saved was FIL0000.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL DIL0000,,,VSAM,CAT=UCAT1

// EXTENT ,volser,,,start,number

// DLBL XIL0000,,,VSAM,CAT=UCAT1

// EXTENT ,volser,,,start,number

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=LOGICAL,RC=UCAT1,PA=SE,AUTO=YES,FD=D

UNIQUE.FILE

Example: Restore one disk of a full catalog

A full catalog backup may be restored so that only files that resided on a particular disk (fully or partially at save time) are restored.

// TLBL TAPEIN

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL UCAT2,'VSAM.USER.CATALOG.TWO',,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

REST=LOGICAL,RCAT=UCAT2,SVOL=VSAM01,ASSOCIATIONS=YES,PARTIAL=SELECT

/@ TERMINATES SELECTION

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Page 320 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

RESTORE=PHYSICAL

Dr. D enables users to RESTORE portions of a disk on a physical track/block basis, independent of Volumes, Data Files, or Libraries.

This function is valuable for its ability to manipulate data at the physical level.

This poses some risk in terms of security and possible inadvertent damage to critical data. For that reason, it may be wise to limit its use to qualified authorized personnel. This can be achieved by limiting access to one Dr. D module - DOCTOR02. If a security package is available, the use of DOCTOR02 can be easily controlled; otherwise DOCTOR02 can be placed in a restricted library, or kept on tape and only restored by authorized persons.

The disk to be restored is determined by the volume assignment associated with the RSYSNO operand or the volume associated with the volser as defined by the

When you are restoring in the physical mode, you must specify the Restore

Mode operand, RMODE. There are four options available for RMODE.

Squeeze mode (RMODE=S), applicable to ECKD and CKD restores only, causes

Dr. D to restore the extent putting the maximum number of records it can fit on each track. Consider the following:

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Three tracks on a 3380 are saved that look like:

TRACK 1 15000-BYTE REC, 15000-BYTE REC

TRACK 2 NO RECORDS - ERASED TRACK

TRACK 3 15000-BYTE REC, 5000-BYTE REC

Restoring those three tracks with RMODE=I would yield the exact same layout:

TRACK 1 15000-BYTE REC, 15000-BYTE REC

TRACK 2 NO RECORDS - ERASED TRACK

TRACK 3 15000-BYTE REC, 5000-BYTE REC

However, if the same operation is done with RMODE=S, the restored tracks would look like:

TRACK 1 15000-BYTE REC, 15000-BYTE REC, 15000-BYTE REC

TRACK 2 5000-BYTE REC

TRACK 3 UNTOUCHED

Add-on mode (RMODE=A) causes Dr. D to restore the input blocks adding them at the CCHHR address specified by RBEGIN.

If Update mode (RMODE=U) is specified, the contents of each input block is

'UPDATED' into the existing blocks of the output extent, allowing individual blocks on a track to be updated without erasing other blocks on that track.

Update modes are applicable to ECKD and CKD restores only.

For additional protection, set UPSI bit 0 to 0. This allows you to insure the correct disk volume is being restored and the correct input tape is being used. If UPSI bit

0 is set to 1, the restore operation occurs without operator intervention.

AREA=REJECT may be used to restore the all tracks/blocks between the

RBEGIN/RHALT addresses with the exception of specific track/block addresses.

The RBEGIN operand is always required.

Page 322 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Control Statement Operands

RESTORE=PHYSICAL Operand Summary

Operand Required? Global?

RESTORE=PHYSICAL

AREA=SELECT|REJECT

Yes

BLOCKSIZE=n

GR=nnn

Yes

HV=NO|YES|HOLD

LABEL=NO

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RBEGIN=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

RHALT=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

RMODE=I|S|U|A

Yes

NOTE 2

Yes

RP=YES|NO

RSYSNO=SYSnnn

RVOLID=xxxxxx

SEQNO=nn

SKIP=nnn

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1

TI=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

VM=NO|YES

WAIT=n

NOTE 1

Yes

NOTE 1: Either RSYSNO (or defaulted to) or RVOLID is required. Use the

RVOLID operand at all times in place of RSYSNO.

NOTE 2: If RHALT is omitted, it defaults to the RBEGIN value resulting in the restore of a single track/block.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RE store=PHysical

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: RE=PH

AR ea=SElect|REject

Indicates that one or more AREA= selector statements immediately follow this statement. This allows restore to be selective down to the track or FBA block level. If this operand is specified on a Dr. D request that is continued across multiple control statements, it must be on the last of the continued control statements.

One or more selector statements must follow to identify the tracks/blocks to be selected (AREA=SELECT) or rejected (AREA=REJECT).

An additional statement is required to terminate area selector statements. As with terminating control statements (see page 20), either a /@ or /* statement may be used. For clarity in reading the jobstreams you create, use the /@ as the terminating statement for selector statements and use the /* as the terminating statement for Dr. D control statements.

As an example on a 3390, the following area selector statements select from cylinder 1, head 0 up to cylinder 12, head 0; they reject cylinder 4, head 0 when used with AREA=SELECT. When used with AREA=REJECT, it rejects all data from cylinder 1, head 0 up to cylinder 12, head 0 but selects cylinder 4, head 0.

100-1200

400-400R

Abbreviation: AR=SE|RE

BL ocksize=n

Page 324 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D the Dr. D execution or until set again using this same operand. The default shipped with Dr. D is 65496; your installation administrator may change it.

Abbreviation: BL=n

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

HV =NO|YEs|HOld

HV=HOLD should be used to continue to hold the lock on following functions within that Dr. D execution.

Abbreviation: HV=NO|YE|HO

LA bel=NO

Use this operand to read unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

Use this operand to immediately write a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type

“cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RB egin=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

Use this operand to specify the starting track/block where a restore is to begin on the target device. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0 to 6-digit cylinder

(ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). Optionally, for CKD and

ECKD, the start track may be further qualified to the record number by appending Rnnn (where nnn is a 1 to 3-digit record) when used along with

RMODE=U|A. For FBA devices, specify a 1 to 8-digit block number.

Abbreviation: RB=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

RH alt=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

Use this operand to specify the stopping track/block where a restore is to stop on the target device. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0 to 6-digit cylinder (ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). Optionally, for CKD and ECKD, the start track may be further qualified to the record number by appending Rnnn

(where nnn is a 1 to 3-digit record) when used along with RMODE=U|A. For

FBA devices, specify a 1 to 8-digit block number.

Abbreviation: RH=ccchh[Rnnn]|block

RM ode=I|S|U|A

Use this operand to indicate how Dr. D is to arrange the data being written on the tracks of the output disk during the restore.

Value Action

Restore file in Image mode. The tracks/blocks being restored are a mirror image of the saved tracks/blocks. This is the default option.

This option is only valid with CKD and ECKD devices.

Restore file in Update mode. The contents of each input block is

'UPDATED' into the existing blocks of the output extent, allowing individual blocks on a track to be updated without erasing other blocks on that track. This option is only valid with CKD and ECKD devices.

Restore file in Add-on mode. In this mode, input blocks are added to

Page 326 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Value Action existing data by adding them at the CCHHR address specified by

RBEGIN. This option is only valid with CKD and ECKD devices.

Likewise, if the 3375 had a completely blank track, so does the 3380. In other words, RMODE=I restores on a track by track basis exactly mirroring the saved extent. On the other hand, specifying RMODE=S informs Dr. D to use the full track capacity of the restoring device.

Abbreviation: RM=I|S|U|A

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

RS ysno=SYSnnn

Use this operand to define the logical unit number for the output (target) disk during a restore operation. RSYSNO=SYS002 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. For greater control over the restore operation, use the RVOLID operand in place of RSYSNO.

Abbreviation: RS=SYSnnn

RV olid=xxxxxx

Use this operand to specify the volser of the output (target) volume during a restore operation.

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx

SE qno=nn

Specify a 2-digit value from 01 through 99 representing the sequence number of this restore among all (non-NOPERATION) saves, copies, or restores in this job step. Dr. D verifies that nn equals an internal counter that is incremented by one for each non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore attempted. The first non-

NOPERATION SAVE, COPY, or RESTORE is always one. You can use this operand to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

SK ip=nnn

Use this operand to skip over nnn number of files before starting the actual

RESTORE function. This is a three-digit decimal number (leading zeros required). Do not use the SKIP operand along with the BLOCKSIZE operand.

Instead, set the blocksize on a preceding RESTORE=NOPERATION.

Abbreviation: SK=nnn

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr

REw

Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Immediately rewind the tape.

RUn Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the input dataset. TAPEIN is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

Abbreviation: TD=filename

TI =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TI=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

VM =NO|YEs

Use this operand to when restoring non-VSE volumes (that is, VM minidisk) on

CKD and ECKD devices. Specifying YES bypasses disk count area errors caused by the count area not reflecting the true location of the physical blocks.

Abbreviation: VM=NO|YES

Page 328 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

Examples

Example: Restore multiple tracks in physical image mode

This example restores cylinder 196, head 00 through cylinder 198, head 00 on pack CKD231 from a save tape created by a SAVE=PHYSICAL operation. The saved disk and the output disk are the same device type.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=PH,RBEGIN=19600,RHALT=19800,RMODE=I,RVOLID=CKD231,RMODE=I

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Restore single track from a physical save file

This example restores only cylinder 196, head 00 from pack CKD231 to tape.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=PH,RB=19600,RVOLID=CKD231

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REWIND

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Physical restore to a different device type

This example uses a SAVE=PHYSICAL save tape created from a 3375 disk. It restores the area to the end of a 3380 on volume PCK1C1. The file is accessed in a sequential manner to fit the maximum number of records per track on the 3380.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111

RESTORE=PH,RBEGIN=39900,RHALT=40100,RMODE=S,RVOLID=PKD1C1

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Restore VM minidisk from a physical save file

This example restores selected minidisk on a 3390 (on cuu=352) from the tape saved by a SAVE=PHYSICAL operation. The minidisk at cylinder 271-273 is restored to its original location, while the one cylinder mini at cylinder 288 is moved to cylinder 101, keeping its original virtual disk count areas as backed up.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// ASSGN SYS002,352

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RE=NO,UPSI=011

RE=PH,RS=SYS002,VM=YES,RB=27100,RH=45714,AREA=SELECT

27100-27314

28800-28814 TO=K10100

RE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Page 330 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

RESTORE=PUTLABEL

RESTORE=PUTLABEL recreates an SD or DA format-1 label in a VTOC without writing any data to the extents.

Control Statement Operands

RESTORE=PUTLABEL

GR=nnn

RESTORE=PUTLABEL Operand Summary

Operand Required? Global?

Yes

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

Yes

RFILENAME=filename

RP=YES|NO

UPSI=012345678

VSAM=YES

Yes

RE store=PUtlabel

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: RE=PU

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RF ilename=filename

Specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement that is used to generate a new format-1 label in the VTOC.

Abbreviation: RF=filename

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

Page 332 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Rebuild format-1 label

This example rebuilds 2 Format-1 labels. The first rebuilds a corrupted label for a random master DA file. The second rebuilds a corrupted label for a file on an

FBA device.

// DLBL RANMAS,'MASTER.FILE',2099/360,DA

// EXTENT SYS001,777771,1,0,20,3980

// EXTENT SYS002,777772,1,1,20,3980

// ASSGN SYS001,131

// ASSGN SYS002,132

// DLBL FBAFILE,'MASTER.FBAFILE',2099/360,SD,CISIZE=4096

// EXTENT SYS010,PCK002,1,0,1000,5000

// ASSGN SYS010,151

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=PUTLABEL,RFILENAME=RANMAS

RESTORE=PUTLABEL,RFILENAME=FBAFILE

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RESTORE=SDISK

The RESTORE=SDISK command is used to restore individual sequential disk

(SD) files with data saved using any of the following techniques:

• The Volume Logical Save feature (SAVE=LOGICAL command)

• The Non-VSAM Data File Save feature (SAVE=DATA or SAVE=SDISK commands)

• User Data File

• Other backup software tape (see Conversion from Other Backup

Software Products on page 458 for additional information)

A Job Control DLBL statement is required to identify the file to be restored. Its filename is identified on the Dr. D control statement through the RFILENAME operand.

When using a Dr. D save tape, use the FIND or SKIP operand to position the input to the appropriate file. If the file is not repositioned using FIND or SKIP,

Dr. D uses the filename associated with the RFILENAME DLBL for file selection.

When using a User Data File as input, positioning is required only if there are multiple files on the tape. To position a User Data File, use the SKIP operand.

Using the RMODE Operand

The RMODE (Restore Mode) is an internal switch in Dr. D that is set and used when writing to the disk. Set RMODE to either an 'I' for image or 'S' for squeeze.

When set to 'I', Dr. D exactly mirrors the saved extent during the restore.

Partially used tracks, unused tracks, records out of sequence on a track, all appear restored in the same format.

When RMODE is set to 'S', the full track capacity of the restore disk is employed.

When restoring an SD file, RMODE is set to 'S' if it is restored to a new disk type.

Specifying RMODE=I or RMODE=S overrides the default as described above.

The only reason for specifying this override is in conversion of direct access from one disk type to another.

Page 334 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Using the SYNC Operand

However, sometimes you might want to switch output extents before each fills up. Using the SYNC=YES operand causes the save and restore files' extents to become 'SYNCHRONIZED'.

If there were 100 and 200 records respectively in the first and second extents of a save file, then there are exactly 100 and 200 records, respectively, in the first and second extents of the restore file (even though they might be able to hold more).

When SYNC=YES is specified, the restore file must have as many extents as the save file and each restore extent must be able to accommodate at least as many records as its corresponding save extent.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

RESTORE=SDISK

BLOCKSIZE=n

RESTORE=SDISK Operand Summary

Operand Required? Global?

Yes

DELETE=YES|ppppxx

DTAPE=YES

FIND=filename|’file-id’

GR=nnn

LABEL=NO

NOTE 3

Yes

LBLOCKSIZE=n

LRECSIZE=n

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

NRECDS=n

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RFILENAME=filename

RMODE=I|S

RP=YES|NO

R0=YES|NO

NOTE 1

NOTE 2

Yes

SEQNO=nn

SKIP=nnn

SYNC=YES

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1

TI=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

USEREXIT=NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

VARIABLE=YES

WAIT=n

NOTE 1

Yes

NOTE 1: For variable length User Data Files (DTAPE=YES), the LBLOCKSIZE= and VARIABLE=YES operands are required

NOTE 2: For fixed-length User Data Files (DTAPE=YES), the LRECSIZE= and

NRECDS= operands are required.

NOTE 3: FIND= is required if the input was created by the Volume Logical Save feature or if it is a backup tape created by another backup software product

Page 336 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

RE store=SDisk

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: RE=SD

BL ocksize=n

Abbreviation: BL=n

DE lete=YEs|NO|pppphh

YES, Dr. D modifies the expiration date to ‘00000’ of any existing file with the same dataset name before attempting to restore it.

Use format DELETE=pppphh to cause records containing a specific single character in a specific record position to be bypassed during the restore function.

Abbreviation: DE=YE|pppphh

DT ape=YEs

NOTE: You can specify only one DTAPE=YES restore per Dr. D execution. If multiple DTAPE=YES restores are required, perform each under a separate Dr. D execution.

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: DT=YE

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FI nd=filename|’file-id’

Use this operand to cause the Dr. D save tape to be positioned to the correct input dataset. You may specify either the 1-7 character filename matching the

Abbreviation: FI=filename|’file-id’

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LA bel=NO

Use this operand to read unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LB locksize=n

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: LB=n

LR ecsize=n

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: LR=n

Page 338 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

NR ecds=n

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: NR=n

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RF ilename=filename

Abbreviation: RF=filename

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RM ode=I|S

Use this operand to indicate how Dr. D is to arrange the data being written on the tracks of the output disk during the restore.

Value Action

Restore file in Image mode. The tracks/blocks being restored are a mirror image of the saved tracks/blocks. This is the default option.

This option is only valid with CKD and ECKD devices.

For SD files, RMODE defaults to ‘SQUEEZE’ (RMODE=S).

Abbreviation: RM=I|S

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

R0 =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: R0=YE|NO

SE qno=nn

Page 340 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D incremented by one for each non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore attempted. The first non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore is always one.

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SK ip=nnn

Use this operand to skip over nnn number of files before starting the actual

RESTORE function. This is a three-digit decimal number (leading zeros required). Do not use the SKIP operand along with the BLOCKSIZE operand.

Instead, set the blocksize on a preceding RESTORE=NOPERATION.

Abbreviation: SK=nnn

SY nc=YEs

Abbreviation: SY=YE

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr

REw

Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Immediately rewind the tape.

RUn Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the input dataset. TAPEIN is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

Abbreviation: TD=filename

TI =SYSnnn

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: TI=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

US erexit=NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

For Type 1 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=NF/phasename' where:

NF constant

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

For Type 2 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=phasename/mm/tzzzzzz' where:

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

zzzzzz is either the decimal length of the program for relocatable and self-relocating (‘L’) programs or the hexadecimal load address for absolute address (‘A’) programs.

For Type 2 user exits also require an EXIT parameter statement. Refer to the section User Exits for additional details.

Abbreviation: US= NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

VA riable=YEs

Specify this operand along with the DTAPE=YES and LB=n operands to indicate the input User Data File contains variable-length records.

Abbreviation: VA=YE

Page 342 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

Examples

Example: Restore same file using a SAVE=DATA save file

This example restores the same file, ‘DISK.FILE.01’, which was saved by a prior

SAVE=DATA operation. The dataset selected for restore off the save file is retrieved from the DLBL associated with the RFILENAME operand, FILEONE.

// DLBL FILEONE,'DISK.FILE.01',2099/360,SD

// EXTENT ,737723,1,0,20,3980

// EXTENT ,737724,1,1,20,2000,8

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SAVE TAPE'

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111

RESTORE=SD,RFILENAME=FILEONE

Example: Restore file to a new name using a SAVE=DATA save file

This example restores the file ‘OLD.DISK.FILE.01’ as ‘NEW.DISK.FILE.01’. Input to this restore was created by a prior SAVE=DATA operation.

// DLBL FILEONE,'NEW.DISK.FILE.01',2099/360,SD

// EXTENT ,737723,1,0,20,3980

// EXTENT ,737724,1,1,20,2000,8

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SAVE TAPE'

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111

RESTORE=SDISK,RFILENAME=FILEONE,FIND=’OLD.DISK.FILE.01’

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Restore individual file using a SAVE=LOGICAL save file

Individual files on a SAVE=LOGICAL save file may be restored using

RESTORE=DATA or RESTORE=SDISK. Because the input save file generally contains multiple files, the FIND operand is used to position the save file to the correct data.

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SAVE TAPE'

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL SDFILE2,'NEW.VERSION.OF.FILE2'

// EXTENT SYS003,,1,0,15,500

// ASSGN SYS003,224

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111

RESTORE=SD,RF=SDFILE2,FI='OLD.VERSION.OF.FILE2'

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Restore first and third files using the FIND operand

In this example, FIND is specified and is restoring the first and third files only.

Also note that SYS025 is being used for the input file in place of the default

TAPE=REW’ command between the RESTORE=SDISK control statements.

// ASSGN SYS025,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SOME SAVES'

// DLBL FILEX,'VERSION.OF.FILE1'

// EXTENT SYS003,,1,0,15,500

// ASSGN SYS003,224

// DLBL FILEZ,'NEW.VERSION.OF.FILE3'

// EXTENT SYS010,,1,0,215,90

// ASSGN SYS010,225

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW,TI=SYS025

RESTORE=SDISK,RFILENAME=FILEX,FIND=FILEX

RESTORE=SDISK,RFILENAME=FILEZ,FIND='FILE ID OF 3RD FILE'

Page 344 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Using SKIP before restoring

In this example, 'SKIP=NNN' skips over NNN saved items on the tape before restoring. Because the files are being restored in relative sequence (file=1 first then file=3), the SKIP=001 simply bypasses the second file on the tape.

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEIN,'SOME SAVES'

// DLBL FILEX,'VERSION.OF.FILE1'

// EXTENT SYS003,,1,0,15,500

// ASSGN SYS003,224

// DLBL FILEZ,'NEW.VERSION.OF.FILE3'

// EXTENT SYS010,,1,0,215,90

// ASSGN SYS010,225

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=REW

RESTORE=SDISK,RFILENAME=FILEX

RESTORE=SDISK,RFILENAME=FILEZ,SKIP=001

Example: Restore files saved with the User Data File feature

This example restores the two SD files saved by a SAVE=DATA operation which created a User Data File. The first file being restored is a fixed-length record file with a record size of 100. The output file created by this restore results in a blocksize of 1000 (LR=100 time NR=100). The second file being restored is a variable length file. The output file created by this restore results in a maximum blocksize of 16000 (LB=16000).

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL FIL1,'FIXED.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE',,SD

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,15,300

// DLBL FIL2,'VARIABLE.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE',,SD

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,4500,6000

// TLBL TAPEIN,'FIXED.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE'

// TLBL TDI0001,'VARIABLE.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

RE=SDISK,RFILENAME=FIL1,DTAPE=YES,LR=100,NRECDS=100

RE=SDISK,RFILENAME=FIL2,DTAPE=YES,VARIABLE=YES,LB=16000

RE=NO,TAPE=REW

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

RESTORE=VSAM

VSAM Data File Restore Feature

The VSAM Data File Restore feature is used to restore individual VSAM files with data saved using any of the following techniques:

• The VSAM Logical Save feature (SAVE=LOGICAL command)

• The VSAM Data File Save feature (SAVE=VSAM command)

• User Data File

• Other backup software tape (see Conversion from Other Backup

Software Products on page 458 for additional information)

A Job Control DLBL statement is required to identify the file to be restored and that filename is identified on the Dr. D control statement through the

RFILENAME operand.

When restoring to a VSAM unique file using the Dr. D VSAM Data File Restore feature where Dr. D is required to invoke VSAM for file definition, two additional label sets are required for a unique KSDS file and one additional label set is required for a unique ESDS or RRDS file:

// DLBL UNIQUE,’UNIQUE.FILE’,,VSAM

Í DLBL for RFILENAME operand

// DLBL DNIQUE,,,VSAM

Í DLBL/EXTENT required for KSDS ESDS RRDS

// EXTENT ,volser,,,start,number

// DLBL XNIQUE,,,VSAM

Í DLBL/EXTENT required for KSDS only

// EXTENT ,volser,,,start,number

VSAM internally created index component of RRDS files containing variablelength records since that component requires suballocation data space.

For suballocated files, an alternative to the specification of a Job Control DLBL for the output file is to use the RCAT and RIDENT operands in place of the

RFILENAME operand. Use of this format is restricted to tapes created by the

VSAM Logical Save feature or when using a backup tape created by another backup software product where the VSAM autodefine is supported (refer to

Conversion from Other Backup Software Products on page 458).

When restoring using the Dr. D VSAM Data File Restore feature and using a save file produced by other than the Dr. D VSAM Logical Save feature or the Dr. D

Page 346 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

VSAM Data File Save feature, the target VSAM file must already be defined to the target VSAM catalog with either the REUSE attribute or never have had any data stored. In addition, when the target VSAM file is a KSDS file, the saved records must already be in key sequence.

VSAM Automatic Definition Feature

The Dr. D VSAM Automatic Definition Feature simplifies restoring of VSAM files by eliminating the need for a separate IDCAMS job step.

With the AUTO=YES operand in effect during the restore process, Dr. D examines the target VSAM catalog (after adjusting for any requested name changes) and selects one of the following actions:

• If the file does not exist in the target catalog, Dr. D defines a new file using the saved definition.

• If the file does exist in the target catalog but contains no records, Dr. D restores into the empty file ignoring the saved definition.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

VSAM Automatic Definition Override Feature

Users of the VSAM Automatic Definition Feature can override several attributes when the file is defined using the additional operands for modifying definitions.

The available operands are:

Operand Function

BUFFERSPACE=n|1|N Override the BUFFERSPACE specification.

Override the data allocation classes. CDATA=dataprimaryusecls/

datasecondaryusecls|N

CFACTOR=n|0 Change the space occupied.

CNSIZE=datacisize/idxcisize|N Change the data and index CI sizes.

CX=idxprimaryusecls/

idxsecondaryusecls|N

Override the index allocation classes.

DATE=yyddd|+n|0

FD=C|D|M

FREESPACE=cifreespace/

cafreespace|N

RVOLID=xxxxxx|

(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Override VSAM TO/FOR specification.

Primary allocation recalculation.

Override the FREESPACE specification.

Override the VOLUME specification.

SOPTION=datashroptions/

idxshroptions|N

VCOMPRESS=YES|NO

XL=YES|NO

Override the SHAREOPTION specification.

Set the “COMPRESSED” attribute.

Set the “EXTRALARGEDATASET” attribute.

In addition, nearly any definition attribute may be overridden by supplying

IDCAMS style parameters. This option of override is invoked by specifying the

AUTO=OVERRIDE (rather than AUTO=YES).

When using IDCAMS style overrides, each override statement must begin with

‘CLUSTER’, ‘DATA’, or ‘INDEX’ to denote which component the override is to be applied and the operands and their values must be wholly contained within positions 1 through 72 of the statement. More than one operand and its value can be contained on one statement but an operand and its value can not be split across statements.

Page 348 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Multivolume VSAM Catalogs

• The RVOLID= operand, which directs the definition to one or more particular volume serial numbers

• The VSAM Automatic Definition Override Feature

• The AUTO=ROTATE operand, which spreads allocations across candidate volumes.

VSAM Device Independence

The VSAM Automatic Definition Feature fully supports device independence between the DASD device type used when the file was saved and the DASD device type used when the file is restored.

If the DASD device type is different when the restore begins, the space allocations for the file are adjusted in proportion to the relative track capacities

(or FBA blocksize) of the two DASD device types. Full independence between

CKD, ECKD and FBA architecture is supported.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

RESTORE=VSAM Operand Summary

RESTORE=VSAM

AUTO=YES|NO|ROTATE|OVERRIDE

BLOCKSIZE=n

BUFFERSPACE=n|1|N

CDATA=primaryclass/secondaryclass|N

CFACTOR=n|0

CNSIZE=datacisize/idxcisize|N

CX=idxprimaryusecls/idxsecondaryusecls|N

DATE=yyddd|+n|0

DELETE=pppphh

DTAPE=YES|aabbbcccdddddeeeee

FD=C|D|M|N|R

FIND=filename|’file-id’

FREESPACE=cifreespace/cafreespace|N

GR=nnn

HIKEY=highkey|’highkey’|X’highkeyinhex’

IDCAMS=PRINT

LABEL=NO

LBLOCKSIZE=n

LOWKEY=lowkey|’lowestkey’|X’lowkeyinhex’

LRECSIZE=n

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

MRECORDS=n

NRECDS=n

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RCAT=filename

RFILENAME=filename

RIDENT=’file-id’

RP=YES|NO

RVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

RWORD=filepassword

SEQNO=nn

NOTE 4

NOTE 2

Note 3

Yes

NOTE 3

NOTE 1

Yes

Page 350 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

RESTORE=VSAM Operand Summary

SKIP=nnn

SOPTION=datashroptions/idxshroptions|N

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1/filename2/filename3

TI=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

USEREXIT=NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

VARIABLE=YES

VBUFF=n

VCOMPRESS=YES|NO

VRTYPE=E|K|R|N|S|P

WAIT=n

WR=catalogpassword

XL=YES|NO

NOTE 2

NOTE 1: RFILENAME= is required or, if not used, both RCAT= and RIDENT= would be required.

NOTE 2: For variable length User Data Files (DTAPE=YES), the LBLOCKSIZE= and VARIABLE=YES operands are required

NOTE 3: For fixed-length User Data Files (DTAPE=YES), the LRECSIZE= and

NRECDS= operands are required

NOTE 4: FIND= is required if the input was created by the VSAM Logical Save feature or if it is a tape created by another backup software product.

Yes

RE store=VSam

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: RE=VS

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

AU to=YEs|NO|ROtate|OVerride

Use this operand to control the VSAM Automatic Definition Feature.

Value Action

YES Invoke automatic file definition as necessary (default).

ROTATE

OVERRIDE predefined and ready to accept data).

Modify the file definition using the IDCAMS style operands supplied on subsequent statements. Be sure to also specify the

FD=D operand to assure that the file is redefined using these modifications.

Each override statement must begin with ‘CLUSTER’,

‘DATA’, or ‘INDEX’ and the operands and their values must be wholly contained within positions 1 through 72 of the statement. More than one operand and its value can be contained on one statement but an operand and its value can not be split across statements. IDCAMS continuation characters are allowed but have no effect. If the ‘VOLUME’ operand cannot be contained within one statement, use multiple statements each beginning with ‘DATA(VOLUMES(‘ or ‘INDEX(VOLUMES(‘.

The override statements are terminated by an end-of-data (/* or /@) statement before the next Dr. D control statement.

FREESPACE operand on a CLUSTER override statement is ignored since the FREESPACE operand applies individually to the DATA and INDEX components.

Abbreviation: AU=YE|NO|RO|OV

Page 352 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

BL ocksize=n

Abbreviation: BL=n

BU fferspace=n|1|N

If a value greater than 256 is specified, that value is used as the bufferspace for each file.

If a value of 2-256, is specified, the existing bufferspace is multiplied by that value.

If a value of 1 is specified, no bufferspace is specified when a define is accomplished for this file.

This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued.

Abbreviation: BU=n|1|N

CD ata=primaryclass/secondaryclass|N

Abbreviation: CD=primaryclass/secondaryclass|N

CF actor=n|0

Abbreviation: CF=n|0

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

CN size=datacisize/idxcisize|N

Abbreviation: CN=datacisize/idxcisize|N

CX =idxprimaryusecls/idxsecondaryusecls|N

Abbreviation: CX=indexprimaryusecls/indexsecondaryusecls

DA te=yyddd|+n|0

Use this operand to set the expiration date for each file being defined by the

Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature. Use yyddd to specify an absolute Julian date

(yy is windowed: 00-74 = 20yy 75-99=19yy). Use +n to specify a date relative to the current IPL date. Specify 0 to cause no ‘TO’ date to be generated for the

VSAM file definition. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: DA=yyddd|+n|0

DE lete=pppphh

Use this operand to cause records containing a specific single character in a specific record position to be bypassed during the restore function. pppp is a 4digit decimal number (relative to 1 with leading zeros specified and less than

4097) denoting the position in a record where the single character is located (if used with variable-length records, this position must be in the leading fixed portion of the record). hh is the hexadecimal value of the single character code. If omitted, all records are restored.

Abbreviation: DE=pppphh

DT ape=YEs|aabbbcccdddddeeeee

Use this operand to indicate the input is a User Data File and not a Dr. D save file. When the input data file contains fixed-length records, also specify the

LRECSIZE= and NRECDS= operands. When the input data file contains variable-length records, also specify the LBLOCKSIZE= operand.

NOTE: Only one DTAPE=YES restore can be specified per Dr. D execution. If multiple DTAPE=YES restores are required, accomplish each under a separate

Dr. D execution.

The format DTAPE=aabbbcccdddddeeeee is used when restoring VSAM keyed files from a data tape. Parameter values are:

Page 354 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

bbb

= Number of cylinder overflow tracks ('00' VSAM)

= Number of logical records/physical block ('000' VSAM)

ccc =

ddddd = Logical record length

eeeee = Starting position of key (counting from 1)

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: DT=YE|aabbbcccdddddeeeee

FD =C|D|M|N|R

Value Action

C The file is deleted and redefined with the primary allocation increased so the restored file is contained within the primary extent retaining the original secondary size allocation.

The file is deleted and redefined.

The file is deleted and redefined unless it is empty or defined as reusable.

The existing definition is to be reset if the file exists (even if not defined as reusable). Otherwise, the file is defined.

This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: FD=C|D|M|N|R

FI nd=filename|’file-id’

Use this operand to cause the Dr. D save tape to be positioned to the correct input dataset. You may specify either the 1-7 character filename matching the

Abbreviation: FI=filename|’file-id’

FR eespace=cifreespace/cafreespace|N

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: FR=cifreespace/cafreespace|N

GR =nnn

Use this operand to reserve GETVIS memory so that GETVIS failures does not occur when non-Dr. D software needs partition GETVIS to perform functions such as tape end of volume or closing of files. The size of the area is specified in thousands of bytes (K) (for example, GR=100 reserves 104,000 bytes of storage).

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

HI ghkey=highkey|’highkey’|X’highkeyinhex’

Abbreviation: HI=highkey|’highkey’|X’highkeyinhex’

ID cams=PRint

Use this operand along with the PRINT operand to cause printing of Dr. D

Automatic Definition Feature IDCAMS DELETE and DEFINE commands and their corresponding results.

Abbreviation: ID=PR

LA bel=NO

Use this operand to specify the use of an unlabeled tape as input.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LB locksize=n

Specify this operand along with the DTAPE=YES operand to identify the maximum blocksize found in the input User Data File. This operand is required along with the VARIABLE=YES operand when restoring variable length records from a data tape.

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: LB=n

Page 356 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

LO wkey=lowkey|’lowkey’|X’lowkeyinhex’

Abbreviation: LO=lowkey|’lowkey’|X’lowkeyinhex’

LR ecsize=n

Specify this operand along with the DTAPE=YES and NRECDS=n operands to identify the length of each logical record found in the input User Data File containing fixed-length records. For example, if the input user data file contains

80-byte logical records blocked up to 10 to form a maximum 800-byte physical record, this operand would be specified as LR=80.

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: LR=n

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

MR ecords=n

Abbreviation: MR=n

NR ecds=n

Specify this operand along with the DTAPE=YES and LRECSIZE=n operands to identify the maximum number of logical records blocked into a physical record found in the input User Data File containing fixed-length records. For example, if the input user data file contains 80-byte logical records blocked up to 10 to form a maximum 800-byte physical record, this operand would be specified as NR=10.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: NR=n

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RC at=filename

Use this operand to identify the Job Control DLBL statement of the VSAM catalog to receive the files to be restored. If this operand is specified on a Dr. D request that is continued across multiple control statements, it must be on the initial control statement.

This operand is required when also specifying RIDENT in place of specifying a

Job Control DLBL statement and the RFILENAME operand for the output file.

Abbreviation: RC=filename

RF ilename=filename

Specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement of the VSAM file to be restored. If using RCAT and RIDENT operands, do not specify this operand.

Abbreviation: RF=filename

RI dent=’file-id’

Specify the full file-ID enclosed in single quotes to indicate the name of the new file being restored.

This operand is required when also specifying RCAT in place of specifying a Job

Control DLBL statement and RFILENAME for the output file.

Page 358 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: RI=’file-id’

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

RV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)|NO

Use this operand to override the VOLUME specification for each VSAM file that the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature is defining. Specify up to 600 volsers (of those assigned to the RCAT catalog) enclosed in parentheses. If you specify NO, the file definitions exclude any data or index volume specification.

Abbreviation: RV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)|NO

RW ord=filepassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character password of the VSAM file being restored to.

Abbreviation: RW=filepassword

SE qno=nn

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SK ip=nnn

Use this operand to skip over nnn number of files before starting the actual

RESTORE function. This is a three-digit decimal number (leading zeros required). Do not use the SKIP operand along with the 'BLOCKSIZE' operand.

Instead, set the blocksize on a preceding RESTORE=NOPERATION.

Abbreviation: SK=nnn

SO ption=datashroptions/idxshroptions|N

Dr. D

USER GUIDE value remains in effect until you give it a different value. If a value of N is specified, the effects of this operand are discontinued.

Abbreviation: SO=datashroptions/idxshroptions|N

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

REw

RUn

Immediately rewind the tape.

Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the input dataset. TAPEIN is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

This operand is only valid for tape devices. It is ignored for DASD devices. If

DASD is used as input or output, then TAPEIN must be specified.

Abbreviation: TD=filename

TI =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TI=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

US erexit=NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

For Type 1 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=NF/phasename' where:

Page 360 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

NF constant

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

For Type 2 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=phasename/mm/tzzzzzz' where:

phasename

mm is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above. processing mode flag. ‘IO’ to Send/Receive logical records; ‘EX’ to inspect logical records.

zzzzzz is the type of core image phase. ‘L’ for relocatable and self-relocating programs; ‘A’ for absolute address programs. is either the decimal length of the program for relocatable and self-relocating (‘L’) programs or the hexadecimal load address for absolute address (‘A’) programs.

For Type 2 user exits also require an EXIT parameter statement. Refer to the section User Exits for additional details.

Abbreviation: US= NF/phasename|phasename/mm/tzzzzzz

VA riable=YEs

Specify this operand along with the DTAPE=YES and LBLOCKSIZE=n operands to indicate the input User Data File contains variable-length records.

Abbreviation: VA=YE

VB uff=n

VB=100 sets the buffer space used by Dr. D to 100,000. This operand defaults to 3 times the default or specified tape blocksize value (see BLOCKSIZE operand).

NOTE: This operand defines the space to allocated for use as Dr. D internal buffers and not the buffer space to be used in defining clusters to be restored (to override the buffer space to be used in defining clusters to restored, see the

BUFFERSPACE operand).

Abbreviation: VB=n

VC ompress=Yes|NO

This operand lets you have the compressed attribute specified for the output qualifying VSAM file being defined by the Dr. D Automatic Definition Feature.

Dr. D accomplishes qualification for the output using the rules as delineated by

VSAM. Specification of YES allows files to be copied into compressed format with no need to pre-qualify those files. Specification of NO resets the compressed

Dr. D

USER GUIDE flag when the cluster is redefined. The FD= operand should be used to assure that file redefinition is performed.

NOTE: The files to be restored with the compressed attribute must have been saved with FAST=NO.

Abbreviation: VC=YE

VR type=K|E|R|N|S|P

Value Action

K Indicates KSDS file.

Indicates ESDS file.

Indicates RRDS file.

Indicates non-CI format file.

Indicates VSAM SAM managed file.

Indicates PATH.

Abbreviation: VR=K|E|R|N|S|P

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

WR =catalogwritepassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character VSAM catalog write or higher password.

Abbreviation: WR=catalogwritepassword

XL =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: XL=YE|NO

Page 362 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Restore a VSAM file saved with SAVE=VSAM

This example restores the file ‘OUR.VSAM.FILE’ either back to its original catalog or to a different catalog.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL OURCAT,’OUR.VSAM.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// DLBL OURFILE,’OUR.VSAM.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=OURCAT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=VSAM,RFILENAME=OURFILE

Example: Restore a VSAM file saved with SAVE=VSAM (alternative control card)

This example is the same as the previous example with the exception it uses the

RCAT and RIDENT operands to define the output file instead of the

RFILENAME operand.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL OURCAT,’OUR.VSAM.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=VSAM,RCAT=OURCAT,RIDENT=’OUR.VSAM.FILE’

Example: Restore a VSAM file saved with SAVE=LOGICAL

This example restores the file ‘OUR.VSAM.FILE’ either back to its original catalog or to a different catalog.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL OURCAT,’OUR.VSAM.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// DLBL OURFILE,’OUR.VSAM.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=OURCAT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=VSAM,RFILENAME=OURFILE,FIND=OURFILE

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Restore a VSAM file using AUTO=OVERRIDE

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL OURCAT,’OUR.VSAM.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// DLBL OURFILE,’OUR.VSAM.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=OURCAT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=VSAM,RFILENAME=OURFILE,AUTO=OVERRIDE,FD=D

INDEX(NAME(OUT.VSAM.FILE.INDEX))

INDEX (CISZ(512))

DATA(NAME(OUT.VSAM.FILE.DATA))

DATA(CISZ(4096) RECORDS(250 0))

DATA(VOLUMES(FBA240 FBA241 FBA242 FBA243 FBA244 FBA245))

DATA(VOLUMES(FBA251 FBA252 FBA253 FBA254 FBA255))

Example: Restore a unique KSDS saved with SAVE=VSAM without Automatic File

Definition

Restore a unique VSAM KSDS file. The file currently exists and, therefore, need not be defined by the Dr. D automatic file definition facility. The file was saved with a filename of DFILE.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL UNIQUE,’UNIQUE.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=UCAT1

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=VSAM,RFILENAME=UNIQUE

Example: Restore a unique KSDS saved with SAVE=LOGICAL with Automatic File

Definition

Restore a unique VSAM KSDS file. The file does not currently exist as desired and, therefore, needs to be defined by the Dr. D automatic file definition facility.

The file was saved with a filename of DFILE.

// TLBL TAPEIN,...

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL UNIQUE,’UNIQUE.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=UCAT1

// DLBL DNIQUE,,,VSAM,CAT=UCAT1

// EXTENT ,volser,,,start,number

// DLBL XNIQUE,,,VSAM,CAT=UCAT1

// EXTENT ,volser,,,start,number

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=VSAM,RFILENAME=UNIQUE,FIND=DFILE,AUTO=YES,FD=D

Page 364 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Restore a VSAM file using User Data File

This example restores a VSAM cluster from a User Data File. The data has variable length records and has a maximum blocksize of 3204.

// TLBL TAPEIN,’user.data.file’

// ASSGN SYS008,TAPE

// DLBL OURCAT,’OUR.VSAM.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// DLBL OURFILE,’OUR.VSAM.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=OURCAT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=VSAM,RFILENAME=OURFILE,DTAPE=YES,VA=YES,LB=3204

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

SAVE=ALL

The SAVE=ALL command saves every track/block on the disk to tape. The disk to be saved is determined by the volume assignment associated with the

SSYSNO operand or the volume associated with the volser as defined by the

SVOLID operand. If neither SVOLID nor SSYSNO is specified, then the disk having the default SSYSNO assigned to it is used as input to the save. The default SSYSNO as supplied is SYS001 but may be changed by the installation administrator (refer to Configure System Options on page 12 for additional information). Use of SVOLID is recommended. When using SVOLID, Dr. D automatically makes the assignment

The SHALT operand can be used to set the upper/ending disk address to be saved. Without SHALT, the entire volume is saved.

Save files created by this operation may be used as input to RESTORE=ALL operations only.

Page 366 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Control Statement Operands

SAVE=ALL Operand Summary

Operand

SAVE=ALL

BLOCKSIZE=n

CK=YES|NO

CP=NO|YES

GR=nnn

HV=NO|YES|HOLD

LABEL=NO

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

SEQNO=nn

SHALT=ccchh|block

SSYSNO=SYSnnn

SVOLID=xxxxxx

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1/filename2/filename3

TO=SYSnnn

TT=SYSnnn

T3=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

VM=NO|YES

WAIT=n

NOTE 1

Required? Global?

Yes No

No Yes

Yes

NOTE 1: Either SSYSNO (or defaulted to) or SVOLID is required. Use the

SVOLID operand at all times in place of SSYSNO.

SA ve=ALL

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: SA=AL

BL ocksize=n

SAVE=ALL Page 367

Dr. D

USER GUIDE data block saved plus 16. Once a blocksize has been set, it remains in effect for the remainder of the Dr. D execution or until set again using this same operand.

The default shipped with Dr. D is 65496; your installation administrator may change it.

Abbreviation: BL=n

CK =YEs|NO

CK=NO prevents the issuance of the error message.

Abbreviation: CK=YE|NO

CP =NO|YEs

Specify YES to cause Dr. D data compression to be in effect, which typically reduces tape usage and channel access time. Once a value has been set by this operand, it remains in effect for the remainder of the Dr. D execution or until set again using this same operand. CP=NO is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. When saving to a tape device that has hardware compression invoked (such as 3480/3490 IDRC devices),

CP=NO should be specified to avoid double compression and potential loss of through-put.

Abbreviation: CP=NO|YE

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

HV =NO|YEs|HOld

Use this operand during volume save to lock the VTOC of the disk thereby preventing the addition/deletion of files on the disk. HV=NO is default.

HV=YES should be used on the first disk save within an execution of Dr. D and then HV=HOLD should be used to continue to hold the lock on following functions within that Dr. D execution.

Page 368 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: HV=NO|YE|HO

LA bel=NO

Used to created unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

SE qno=nn

SAVE=ALL Page 369

Dr. D

USER GUIDE incremented by one for each non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore attempted. The first non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore is always one.

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SH alt=ccchh|block

Use this operand to specify the stopping track/block on the source device during a save operation. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0- to 6-digit cylinder

(ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). For FBA devices, specify a 1 to 8-digit block number.

Abbreviation: SH=ccchh|block

SS ysno=SYSnnn

Use this operand to define the logical unit number for the input (source) disk during a save operation. SSYSNO=SYS001 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. For greater control over the save operation, use the SVOLID operand in place of SSYSNO.

Abbreviation: SS=SYSnnn

SV olid=xxxxxx

Use this operand to specify the input (source) volser during a save operation.

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr

REw

Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Immediately rewind the tape.

RUn Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1/filename2/filename3

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the output dataset(s).

TAPEOUT is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

This operand is only valid for tape devices. It is ignored for DASD devices. If

DASD is used as output, then TAPEOUT must be specified.

Multiple filenames may be entered by separating them with the '/' character. The first filename specified applies to the primary file (default=TAPEOUT). The

Page 370 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D second filename applies to the second output file (default=TAPETWO) and the third filename applies to the third output file (default=TAPE003). All three names can be specified, for instance, TD=TAPEOUT/TAPETWO/TAPE003, or any combination as long as the '/' is present. TD=//TAPEXXX for instance would specify the name for the third tape while TD=/TAPEYYY would specify the name for the second tape. If the TD= operand is used to specify the name for either TAPETWO or TAPE003, then the UPSI setting is not needed to invoke the creation of the additional tape(s). Invoking the creation of the third tape always implies creation of the second tape, that is, specifying UPSI=XXXXXXXX1 is equivalent UPSI=XXX1XXXX1 and specifying TD=//TAPE003 is the same as

TD=/TAPETWO/TAPE003.

Abbreviation: TD=filename/filename2/filename3

TO =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TO=SYSnnn

TT =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TT=SYSnnn

T3 =SYSnnn

Use this operand to specify an alternative programmer logical unit number for the TAPE003 tape dataset. T3=SYS005 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Abbreviation: T3=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

VM =NO|YEs

Use this operand when saving non-VSE volumes (that is, VM minidisk) on CKD and ECKD devices. Specifying YES bypasses disk count area errors caused by the count area not reflecting the true location of the physical blocks. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

SAVE=ALL Page 371

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: VM=NO|YES

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

Examples

Example: Save all tracks/blocks of disk to tape

This job stream saves all tracks/blocks on the volume DOSRES.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'DOSRES.SAVE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111,PRINT=LIST,CP=YES

SAVE=ALL,SV=DOSRES

SA=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Selective save of all tracks/blocks of disk to tape

This job stream saves a VM sysres that occupies the first 100 cylinders of a 3380.

The disk is defined as a full/native 3380 to VSE.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'MY PACK SAVE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111,PRINT=LIST,CP=YES

SAVE=ALL,SV=VMSRES,VM=YES,SHALT=9914

SA=NO,TAPE=RUN

Page 372 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Save minidisk

This example creates a save tape from the disk on 620 which is assigned using the default SSYSNO of SYS001.

// ASSGN SYS001,620

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111,PRINT=LIST

SAVE=ALL,VM=YES

SA=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Save and unload tape

These examples demonstrate a correct and incorrect approach to saving a disk on

131 to a tape on 280 and then unloading the tape.

Correct: // JOB RUN USED RIGHT

// TLBL TAPEOUT,’SAVE.TAPE’

// ASSGN SYS001,131

// ASSGN SYS007,280

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=ALL

SAVE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Incorrect: // JOB RUN USED WRONG

// TLBL TAPEOUT,’SAVE.TAPE’

// ASSGN SYS001,131

// ASSGN SYS007,280

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=ALL,TAPE=RUN

SAVE=ALL Page 373

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Save multiple packs to different tapes

This job stream saves two disks to tape. The first disk on unit 131 is saved then the tape is closed and unloaded and the operator is then issued a message to

‘MOUNT NEXT TAPE’. The second disk on unit 132 is then saved to a new tape.

The output tapes are assigned using SYS010 (operand TO=SYS010) in place of the installed default SYS007.

// ASSGN SYS003,131

// ASSGN SYS004,132

// ASSGN SYS010,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'SAVE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=ALL,SSYSNO=SYS003,TO=SYS010

SAVE=NO,TAPE=RUN,OPERATOR='MOUNT NEXT TAPE'

SAVE=ALL,SSYSNO=SYS004

SAVE=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Save multiple packs to same tape

This example demonstrates the use of multiple volume backups on the same tape.

// TLBL TAPEOUT,’SAVE.TAPE’

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=ALL,SVOLSER=111111

SAVE=ALL,SVOLSER=222222

SAVE=ALL,SVOLSER=333333

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

Page 374 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

SAVE=CURRENT

The SAVE=CURRENT command saves only active areas (volume id, IPL track,

VTOC and data files identified via VTOC entries) to tape or disk. The disk to be saved is determined by the volume assignment associated with the SSYSNO operand or the volume associated with the volser as defined by the SVOLID operand. If neither SVOLID nor SSYSNO is specified, then the disk having the default SSYSNO assigned to it is used as input to the save. The default SSYSNO as supplied is SYS001 but may be changed by the installation administrator (refer to Configure System Options on page 12 for additional information). Use of

SVOLID is recommended. When using SVOLID, Dr. D automatically makes the assignment

The entire volume may be saved or only selected areas. When saving CKD and

ECKD devices, the PARTIAL=REJECT operand may be used with a range of track addresses (CCCHH-CCCHH) to determine tracks be are looked at for selecting data files to save.

The PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT operand may be used with any device type to determine which data files are selected. The save operation may also select or reject data files based upon their expiration date (EXPIRED operand) or based upon if they are VSAM or non-VSAM (VSAM operand).

WARNING: SAVE|RESTORE=CURRENT will process VSAM objects and VSE libraries listed in the VTOC correctly only when saving|restoring the entire volume. To process individual VSAM files, you should use

SAVE|RESTORE=LOGICAL|VSAM. To process individual VSE libraries, you should use SAVE|RESTORE=LIBRARY.

Save files created by this operation may be used as input to

RESTORE=CURRENT operations only.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

SAVE=CURRENT

BLOCKSIZE=n

CK=YES|NO

CP=NO|YES

EOF=YES

EXPIRED=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

FAST=YES|NO

GR=nnn

HV=NO|YES|HOLD

LABEL=NO

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

SAVE=CURRENT Operand Summary

Operand Required? Global?

Yes

FSECURED=NO|YES

Yes

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

R0=YES|NO

SEQNO=nn

SSYSNO=SYSnnn

SVOLID=xxxxxx

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1/filename2/filename3

TO=SYSnnn

TT=SYSnnn

T3=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

VSAM=NO|YES

WAIT=n

NOTE 1

Yes

NOTE: Either SSYSNO (or defaulted to) or SVOLID is required. Use the SVOLID operand at all times in place of SSYSNO.

Page 376 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

SA ve=CUrrent

This operand defines the Dr. D function to be performed. It must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: SA=CU

BL ocksize=n

Abbreviation: BL=n

CK =YEs|NO

CK=NO prevents the issuance of the error message.

Abbreviation: CK=YE|NO

CP =NO|YEs

CP=NO should be specified to avoid double compression and potential loss of through-put.

Abbreviation: CP=NO|YE

EO f=YEs|S

Specify YES to cause Dr. D to continue saving an extent on CKD and ECKD devices until a hardware EOF is detected.

Abbreviation: EO=YE|S

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

EX pired=Y|N| O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

This operand causes Dr. D to select files according to their expiration dates. A file is considered unexpired when its expiration date is greater than the current system date.

Value Action

Y Select all files regardless of expiration date.

N Select only unexpired files (default).

O+n

O-n

yyddd

Select only expired files.

Select only expired files after adjusting the current system date by n days (n days may be 1-3 digits).

yyyyddd

Select only unexpired files using 19yyddd as the current system date.

Select only unexpired files using yyyyddd instead of the current system date.

Abbreviation: EX=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

FA st=YEs|NO

Specify YES to cause Dr. D to invoke physical IOCS rather than the slower logical

IOCS when saving files on FBA devices. The save file is identical regardless of this operand when YES or NO is specified. FAST=YES is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Abbreviation: FA=YE|NO

FS ecured=NO|YEs

This operand determines if data secured files should be saved. If NO, the default, is specified, an operating system message may be issued as each secured file is opened, respond with 'YES' to proceed. If YES is specified, the data secured files are automatically saved without operator intervention.

Abbreviation: FS=NO|YE

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

Page 378 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

HV =NO|YEs|HOld

The HV operand is used during volume save to lock the VTOC of the disk thereby preventing the addition/deletion of files on the disk. This is especially important during compacting of disk manager pool space. HV=NO is default.

HV=YES should be used on the first disk save within an execution of Dr. D and then HV=HOLD should be used to continue to hold the lock on following functions within that Dr. D execution.

Abbreviation: HV=NO|YE|HO

LA bel=NO

Used to created unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PA rtial=SElect|REject

Use this operand to indicate that one or more selector statements immediately follow this statement. The selector statements used may be to specify the file(s) to be saved and/or areas of disk to bypass. See Logical

Selection/Rejection/Rename Process on page 23 for additional detail.

Abbreviation: PA=SE|RE

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

R0 =YEs|NO

'R0=YES' specifies that the data portion of R0 is to be saved. Certain file types

(COBOL direct access and DBOMP) do use the data portion of R0, so care should be used in using this operand, even though those file types are rarely used, having been replaced by VSAM in most cases.

Abbreviation: R0=YE|NO

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

SE qno=nn

Specify a 2-digit value from 01 through 99 representing the sequence number of this save among all (non-NOPERATION) saves, copies, or restores in this job step. If specified, Dr. D checks to see that nn equals an internal counter which is incremented by one for each non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore attempted. The first non-NOPERATION save, copy, or restore is always one.

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SS ysno=SYSnnn

Use this operand to define the logical unit number for the input (source) disk during a save operation. SSYSNO=SYS001 is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. For greater control over the save or copy operation, use the SVOLID operand in place of SSYSNO.

Abbreviation: SS=SYSnnn

SV olid=xxxxxx

Use this operand to specify the input (source) volser(s) during a save operation.

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx

Page 380 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr

REw

Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Immediately rewind the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1/filename2/filename3

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the output dataset(s).

TAPEOUT is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

This operand is only valid for tape devices. It is ignored for DASD devices. If

DASD is used as output, then TAPEOUT must be specified.

Multiple filenames may be entered by separating them with the '/' character. The first filename specified applies to the primary file (default=TAPEOUT). The second filename applies to the second output file (default=TAPETWO) and the third filename applies to the third output file (default=TAPE003). All three names can be specified, for instance, TD=TAPEOUT/TAPETWO/TAPE003, or any combination as long as the '/' is present. TD=//TAPEXXX for instance would specify the name for the third tape while TD=/TAPEYYY would specify the name for the second tape. If the TD= operand is used to specify the name for either TAPETWO or TAPE003, then the UPSI setting is not needed to invoke the creation of the additional tape(s). Invoking the creation of the third tape always implies creation of the second tape, that is, specifying UPSI=XXXXXXXX1 is equivalent UPSI=XXX1XXXX1 and specifying TD=//TAPE003 is the same as

TD=/TAPETWO/TAPE003.

Abbreviation: TD=filename/filename2/filename3

TO =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TO=SYSnnn

TT =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TT=SYSnnn

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

T3 =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: T3=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

VS am=YEs|NO

Specify VSAM=NO to bypass VSAM objects. With VSAM=YES, the default,

VSAM objects are saved as a DA files.

WARNING: SAVE|RESTORE=CURRENT will process VSAM objects listed in the VTOC correctly only when saving|restoring the entire volume. To process individual VSAM files, you should use SAVE|RESTORE=LOGICAL|VSAM.

Abbreviation: VS=YE|NO

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

Page 382 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Save entire pack with SAVE=CURRENT

This job stream saves the SYSWK1 disk volume by the SAVE=CURRENT method. All VSAM data spaces are saved in addition to all non-VSAM files.

Before the save operation begins, tape positioning is assured with the

TAPE=REW operand and the tape is unloaded after the save operation is complete.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'SYSWK1.SAVE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,UPSI=111,PRINT=LIST,TAPE=REW

SAVE=CURRENT,SV=SYSWK1,VSAM=YES

SA=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Save only used extents with SAVE=CURRENT

This job stream saves the SYSWK1 disk volume by the SAVE=CURRENT method. The save tape is compressed and the saving of each sequential (SD) file ceases after reading the end-of-file (EOF). This example saves only non-VSAM extents which have a valid expiration date (expired files are rejected). Before the save operation begins, tape positioning is assured with the TAPE=REW operand and the tape is unloaded after the save operation is complete.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'SYSWK1.SAVE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,UPSI=111,PRINT=LIST,TAPE=REW,CP=YES

SAVE=CURRENT,SV=SYSWK1,EOF=YES,EX=NO,VS=NO

SA=NO,TAPE=RUN

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Save specific data files with SAVE=CURRENT

Save only files whose IDs are prefixed with 'SORT' or contain the word 'TEMP' on volume PCK801

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'SAVE.TAPE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,UPSI=111,PRINT=LIST,TAPE=REW,CP=YES

SAVE=CU,SV=PCK801,PART=SELECT

SORT*

=S=TEMP

SA=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Restrict to specific track/block addresses on CKD Devices.

Save a 3380 disk, volser CKD801, excluding VSAM data spaces and any files in cylinders 0-10.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'SAVE.TAPE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,UPSI=111,PRINT=LIST,TAPE=REW,CP=YES

SAVE=CU,SV=CKD801,EX=YES,VSAM=NO,PART=REJECT

1100-999999

SA=NO,TAPE=RUN

Page 384 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

SAVE=DATA

SAVE=DATA saves a single non-VSAM files to tape or disk. It supports direct access (DA) files, sequential disk (SD) files and ISAM files. It used PIOCS to access the data from disk. A Job Control DLBL statement is required to identify the file to be saved and that filename is identified on the Dr. D control statement through the SFILENAME operand. Each file to be saved must have its own Job

Control DLBL/EXTENT statement and Dr. D control statement.

Files saved by this feature can also be saved as a User Data File (rather than a

Dr. D save file) using the User Data File feature. To create a User Data File in place of a Dr. D save file, add the DTAPE=YES operand.

Usually all sequential files and some direct access files have an EOF record after the last data record of the last prime data extent. If this is so, specifying EOF=YES causes Dr. D to stop saving after reading an EOF record. This results in a faster save since that entire extent does not need to be saved.

For SD files, a logical record count may be obtained through use of the LR=

(Logical Record Length) operand and specification of UPSI bit 2 (UPSI XX1) specified via Job Control, UPSI operand or default UPSI value. For variable blocked files, only the UPSI is required.

Output files created by this operation may be used as input to RESTORE=DATA operations. Sequential disk files on a SAVE=DATA save file may also be used as input to a RESTORE=SDISK operation.

SAVE=DATA Page 385

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

SAVE=DATA Operand Summary

Operand

SAVE=DATA

BLOCKSIZE=n

CK=YES|NO

CP=NO|YES

DTAPE=YES

EOF=YES

GR=nnn

LABEL=NO

LRECSIZE=n

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

NRECDS=nnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

R0=YES|NO

SEQNO=nn

SFILENAME=filename

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1/filename2/filename3

TO=SYSnnn

TT=SYSnnn

T3=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

USEREXIT=NF/phasename

WAIT=n

Yes

Required? Global?

Yes No

No Yes

Yes

SA ve=DAta

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: SA=DA

BL ocksize=n

Page 386 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D plus 16. Once a blocksize has been set, it remains in effect for the remainder of the Dr. D execution or until set again using this same operand. The default shipped with Dr. D is 65496; your installation administrator may change it.

Abbreviation: BL=n

CK =YEs|NO

CK=NO prevents the issuance of the error message.

Abbreviation: CK=YE|NO

CP =NO|YEs

CP=NO should be specified to avoid double compression and potential loss of through-put.

Abbreviation: CP=NO|YE

DT ape=YEs

Use this operand to indicate the output is a User Data File and not a Dr. D save file.

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: DT=YE

EO f=YEs

Specify YES to cause Dr. D to continue saving until an EOF is detected. If this operand is omitted, the entire extent is saved.

Abbreviation: EO=YE

GR =nnn

SAVE=DATA Page 387

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LA bel=NO

Used to created unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LR ecsize=n

Use this operand to specify the logical record length when saving SD files with fixed-length records. When used, it produces a logical record count in addition to a block count. Without this operand, fixed-length records are saved as undefined. This operand is not required for variable or spanned records.

Also used for defining the logical record length of files with fixed-length records when DTAPE=YES is specified. See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: LR=n

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

NR ecds=n

Specify this operand along with the DTAPE=YES and LR=n operands to identify the maximum number of logical records blocked into a physical record found in the output User Data File containing fixed-length records. For example, if the output user data file contains 80-byte logical records blocked up to 10 to form a maximum 800-byte physical record, this operand would be specified as NR=10.

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: NR=n

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

Page 388 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

R0 =YEs|NO

'R0=YES specifies that the data portion of R0 is to be saved. Certain file types

(COBOL direct access and DBOMP) do use the data portion of R0, so care should be used in using this operand, even though those file types are rarely used, having been replaced by VSAM in most cases.

Abbreviation: R0=YE|NO

SE qno=nn

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SF ilename=filename

Specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement of the file to be saved. The Job Control DLBL label statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas.

Abbreviation: SF=filename

SAVE=DATA Page 389

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

REw

RUn

Immediately rewind the tape.

Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1/filename2/filename3

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the output dataset(s).

TAPEOUT is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

This operand is only valid for tape devices. It is ignored for DASD devices. If

DASD is used as output, then TAPEOUT must be specified.

TD=/TAPETWO/TAPE003.

Abbreviation: TD=filename/filename2/filename3

TO =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TO=SYSnnn

TT =SYSnnn

Page 390 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: TT=SYSnnn

T3 =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: T3=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

US erexit=NF/phasename

Save processing supports Type 1 user exits only. User Exit Type 1 may be used to

Inspect, Modify, or Delete logical records.

For Type 1 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=NF/phasename' where:

NF constant

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

See User Exits on page 468 for additional details.

Abbreviation: US= NF/phasename

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

SAVE=DATA Page 391

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Examples

Example: Save SD and DA files

This example saves a sequential disk (SD) and a direct access (DA) file to tape. It also generates a logical record count for the SD file. An SD file save ends when an EOF or end-of-extent is encountered, whichever is first.

// DLBL SEQFILE,'DISK FILE 01',,SD

// EXTENT ,737723,1,0,20,3980

// EXTENT ,737724,1,1,20,2000

// DLBL RANFILE,'DISK FILE 02',,DA

// EXTENT ,434729,1,0,20,2320

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'SAVE TAPE'

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=DATA,SFILENAME=SEQFILE,EOF=YES,LRECSIZE=100

SAVE=DATA,SFILENAME=RANFILE

Example: Save file with User Data File feature

This example saves two SD files using the Data File feature.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// DLBL FIL1,'FIXED.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE',,SD

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,15,300

// DLBL FIL2,'VARIABLE.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE',,SD

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,4500,6000

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'FIXED.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE'

// TLBL TDO0001,'VARIABLE.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

SAVE=DATA,SFILENAME=FIL1,DTAPE=YES

SAVE=DATA,SFILENAME=FIL2,DTAPE=YES

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

Page 392 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

SAVE=IPL

The SAVE=IPL command is used to put the standalone restore program to a save tape. It is usually followed by 1 or more SAVE=ALL|CURRENT|PHYSICAL commands to create the save data for the standalone restore. For additional detail on standalone processing, see Stand-alone Processing on page 65.

If the LABEL=NO operand is used, the save tape is created unlabeled and you do not need to bypass the standard labels in order to load the standalone program.

Save tapes created with the standalone program may be used in non-standalone

RESTORE operations by either forward spacing 3 tape marks (2 if LABEL=NO is used when creating the save tape) or by using a TLBL specifying file=2 for the save tape.

Control Statement Operands

SAVE=IPL Operand Summary

Operand

SAVE=IPL

GR=nnn

LABEL=NO

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

SEQNO=nn

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1/filename2/filename3

TO=SYSnnn

TT=SYSnnn

T3=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

WAIT=n

Required? Global?

Yes No

No Yes

Yes

SA ve=IPl

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: SA=IP

GR =nnn

Use this operand to reserve GETVIS memory so that GETVIS failures do not occur when non-Dr. D software needs partition GETVIS to perform functions

SAVE=IPL Page 393

Dr. D

USER GUIDE such as tape end of volume or closing of files. The size of the area is specified in thousands of bytes (K) (for example, GR=100 reserves 104,000 bytes of storage).

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LA bel=NO

Used to created unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RP =YEs|NO

Page 394 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

SE qno=nn

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

REw

RUn

Immediately rewind the tape.

Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1/filename2/filename3

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the output dataset(s).

TAPEOUT is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

This operand is only valid for tape devices. It is ignored for DASD devices. If

DASD is used as output, then TAPEOUT must be specified.

TD=/TAPETWO/TAPE003.

SAVE=IPL Page 395

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: TD=filename/filename2/filename3

TO =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TO=SYSnnn

TT =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TT=SYSnnn

T3 =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: T3=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

Page 396 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Save DOSRES for standalone restore

This job stream saves the DOSRES for use in a possible standalone restore situation. The standalone restore program is saved followed by the

SAVE=CURRENT data from DOSRES.

// ASSGN SYS007,280

// MTC REW,SYS007

// TLBL TAPEOUT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=IPL

SAVE=CU,SV=DOSRES,EX=YES,CP=YES

SA=NO,TAPE=RUN

Example: Save DOSRES for standalone restore using tape manager

This job stream saves the DOSRES for use in a possible standalone restore situation. The standalone restore program is first saved to tape associated with the TAPEOUT TLBL. Following the standalone program, the SAVE=CURRENT data from DOSRES is saved as file 2.

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'DRD.STANDALONE',,,,1

// TLBL BACKUP,'DOSRES.BACKUP',,,,2

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=IPL

SAVE=CU,SV=DOSRES,EX=YES,TD=BACKUP,CP=YES

SAVE=IPL Page 397

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

SAVE=LIBRARY

The SAVE=LIBRARY command saves a VSE library (pre-SP2 format libraries are not supported). All sublibraries and members or only selective sublibraries and members may be saved.

A Job Control DLBL statement is required to identify the file to be saved and that filename is identified on the Dr. D control statement through the SFILENAME operand. If SFILENAME is omitted, it looks for a DLBL statement with the filename of SYSLIB.

The MEMBER=SELECT|REJECT and TSTAMP operands may be used to selectively save sublibraries and/or members. The MEMBER operand uses library selector statements to select or reject by sublib, member type and/or member name.

The TSTAMP operand may be used to select members based upon the “last update” date and time. This allows incremental backup of libraries which greatly reduce backup time for daily backup. Incremental backups are accomplished by doing full backups periodically (weekly, monthly etc.) and then doing incremental backups more frequently (daily, twice daily, etc.). The incremental backup would use a time stamp selector that would cause all members changed since the last full backup to be saved each time the backup is run. Recovery of the library then becomes a matter of restoring the last full backup and then restoring the last incremental backup.

Listing of sublibrary and member names can be controlled by use of the

FORMAT and PRINT operands.

Page 398 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Control Statement Operands

SAVE=LIBRARY

BLOCKSIZE=n

CP=NO|YES

SAVE=LIBRARY Operand Summary

Operand Required? Global?

Yes No

No Yes

FORMAT=A|B|C|D|E

Yes

GR=nnn

LABEL=NO

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

MEMBER=SELECT|REJECT

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH|YES

RP=YES|NO

SEQNO=nn

Yes

SFILENAME=SYSLIB|filename

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1/filename2/filename3

TO=SYSnnn

TSTAMP=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

TT=SYSnnn

T3=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

WAIT=n

Yes

SA ve=LIbrary

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: SA=LI

BL ocksize=n

Abbreviation: BL=n

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

CP =NO|YEs

CP=NO should be specified to avoid double compression and potential loss of through-put.

Abbreviation: CP=NO|YE

FO rmat=A|B|C|D|E

Use this operand to control the listing of sublibrary and members names as they are being processed and where the information is issued (SYSLOG or SYSLST).

Value Action

A Enable display of member names and sublib names on both SYSLOG and SYSLST.

B Enable display of member names on SYSLST only. Sublib names are displayed on both SYSLOG and SYSLST.

C Enable display of member names and sublib names on SYSLST only.

D Enable display of member names and sublib names on SYSLOG only.

E Do not display member names or sublib names on either SYSLOG or

SYSLST. This is the default.

This operand works along with the PRINT operand. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: FO=A|B|C|D|E

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LA bel=NO

Used to created unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

Page 400 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

ME mber=SElect|REject

This operator indicates that one or more library selector statements immediately follow this statement. The library selector statements may be used to specify the sublibrary(s), member type(s) and/or member name(s) to be selected

(MEMBER=SELECT) or rejected (MEMBER=REJECT).

There are several types of library selector statements. Sublibrary selectors are prefixed by a ‘+’ sign. Member type selectors are prefixed by a ‘!’ sign. All other selector statements, without an above mentioned prefix, are considered member name selectors.

All selector statements may be either the full or generic name. When specifying a generic name, any position containing a ‘/’ is always considered a match. An asterisk (*) may be used at the end of the name to cause the matching selection to be based upon only those characters preceding the ‘*’. A single ‘*’, without any preceding characters, results in selecting all.

An additional statement is required to terminate library selector statements. As with terminating control statements (see page 20), either a /@ or /* statement may be used. For clarity in reading the jobstreams you create, use the /@ as the terminating statement for selector statements and use the /* as the terminating statement for Dr. D control statements.

Abbreviation: ME=SE|RE

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|Both|YEs

LIST enables the report selected by the FORMAT operand to be printed on

SYSLST only. YES enables the report selected by the FORMAT operand to be displayed on SYSLOG. BOTH cause the report selected by the FORMAT operand

Dr. D

USER GUIDE to be printed on SYSLST and the same report to be displayed on SYSLOG. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

SE qno=nn

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SF ilename=SYSLIB|filename

Specify the filename identifying the VSE library’s Job Control DLBL statement.

The Job Control DLBL label statement must be supplied in one of the standard, partition, class, or user label areas. If omitted, filename defaults to SYSLIB.

Abbreviation: SF=SYSLIB|filename

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

REw

RUn

Immediately rewind the tape.

Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1/filename2/filename3

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the output dataset(s).

TAPEOUT is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

Page 402 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

This operand is only valid for tape devices. It is ignored for DASD devices. If

DASD is used as output, then TAPEOUT must be specified.

TD=/TAPETWO/TAPE003.

Abbreviation: TD=filename/filename2/filename3

TO =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TO=SYSnnn

TS tamp=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

Use this operand to cause selection of files based on their “changed” time stamp.

The time stamp date is required and may be entered either as yyddd (yy is windowed: 00-74 = 20yy 75-99 = 19yy) or as a number of days value to be subtracted from the current system date.

TS=-0 select if stamped today

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

TS=>-1.1200

TS=>-6 select if stamped after yesterday at 12 noon select if stamped in the last seven days

TS=01100 select if stamped on the 100th day of 2001

TS=>01100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 2001/100

TS=<01100 select if stamped before 2001/100

TS=99100 select if stamped on the 100th day of 1999

TS=>99100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 1999/100

TS=<99100 select if stamped before 1999/100

Abbreviation: TS=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

TT =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TT=SYSnnn

T3 =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: T3=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

Page 404 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Save a library

This example saves the entire PROD library. No report is generated.

// ASSGN SYS007,180

// TLBL TAPEOUT,’PROD.LIBRARY.SAVE’

// DLBL PROD,'VSE-ESA.PROD.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA250

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=LIBRARY,SFILENAME=PROD

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: Save a library with report generation

This example saves the entire PROD library. The sublibraries that are saved are displayed on the console and both the sublib names and member names saved are reported on SYSLST.

// ASSGN SYS007,180

// TLBL TAPEOUT,’PROD.LIBRARY.SAVE’

// DLBL PROD,'VSE-ESA.PROD.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA250

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=LIBRARY,SFILENAME=PROD,FORMAT=B,PRINT=YES

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: Save selected members

This example saves selected members of the PROD library, but only members changed in the preceding 7 days. Both the sublibrary and member names that are saved are reported only on SYSLST.

// ASSGN SYS007,180

// TLBL TAPEOUT,’PROD.LIBRARY.SAVE’

// DLBL PROD,'VSE-ESA.PROD.LIBRARY'

// EXTENT ,FBA250

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=LIBRARY,SF=PROD,FORMAT=C,PRINT=LIST,MEMBER=SELECT,TSTAMP=>-6

+PR$260 SUBLIBRARY SELECTOR

!PHASE MEMBER TYPE SELECTOR

//////// SELECT ALL MEMBERS OF PR$260.PHASE

!E SELECT ANOTHER TYPE

DTF///// SELECT DTF'S IN PR$260.E

/@ END OF SELECTORS

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume)

Logical Volume Save Feature

The Logical Volume Save feature allows non-VSAM files to be saved on a logical file basis without having to specify either the disk or disk track/block address, allowing users to selectively save files on one or more disks in a manner that allows individual files to be selectively restored. Users may also reorganize the files and/or the entire disk or pool of disks.

You must enter the SVOLID. Specify up to 600 volsers to designate the pool of disks from which to save individual files. You can also use a Dr. D, BIM-EPIC or

CA-EPIC disk pool name. Specify the VOLSELECT operand to select the volume(s) that determine whether a file is to be saved. Any file that fully or partially resides on a selected volume is saved in its entirety.

The first backup file contains file information extracted from the VTOC(s), and is used to generate label information for the restore.

Data secured files and VSAM data spaces are automatically excluded from the save unless included by the specification of FSECURED=YES or VSAM=YES.

VSAM files should normally be saved as VSAM files using SAVE=LOGICAL

(VSAM) command (see page 417) or SAVE=VSAM command (see page 445), to have any real usefulness.

The EXPIRED operand limits files based upon their expiration date.

The PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT operand allows files to be selected on either an individual or generic (group) basis or by the size of their files. Refer to Logical

Selection/Rejection/Rename Process on page 23 for detailed information about the selector control statements.

The AREA operand allows you to limit the area of the disk(s) being saved. Only files whose first/only extent is within the specified disk limits are included in the file selection process.

Save files created by this operation may be used as input to Volume

RESTORE=LOGICAL and RESTORE=DATA operations. Sequential disk (SD) files may also be restored by RESTORE=SDISK operations.

Page 406 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Control Statement Operands

SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume) Operand Summary

Operand Required? Global?

SAVE=LOGICAL

AREA=(s1-e1,s2-e2,…)

Yes

BLOCKSIZE=n

CK=YES|NO

Yes

CP=NO|YES

DM=E

EOF=YES|NO

ERROR=IGNORE

EXPIRED=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

FAST=YES|NO

FSECURED=NO|YES

GENERATION=L|F|nnn

Yes

GR=nnn

HV=NO|YES|HOLD

LABEL=NO

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

R0=YES|NO

SEQNO=nn

Yes

SVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1/filename2/filename3

TO=SYSnnn

TT=SYSnnn

T3=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

USEREXIT=NF/phasename

VOLSELECT=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

VSAM=NO|YES

WAIT=n

Yes

SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume) Page 407

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

SA ve=LOgical

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: SA=LO

AR ea=(s1-e1,s2-e2,…)

Use this operand to define the area(s) of disk from on which files are saved. Each set of AREA values is a starting and ending track or FBA block number separated by a dash '-'. If the specification is a repeat of the last entered, a single

'R' may be entered. The entries are assumed to be in one to one correspondence with the SVOLID.

NOTE: You must also use the PARTIAL= operand when using AREA=.

Abbreviation: AR= (s1-e1,s2-e2,…)

BL ocksize=n

Abbreviation: BL=n

CK =YEs|NO

CK=NO prevents the issuance of the error message.

Abbreviation: CK=YE|NO

CP =NO|YEs

CP=NO should be specified to avoid double compression and potential loss of through-put.

Page 408 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: CP=NO|YE

DM =E

Use this operand to indicate the SVOLID specifies a BIM-EPIC or CA-EPIC pool name.

Abbreviation: DM=E

EO f=YEs|NO

Specify YES to cause Dr. D to continue saving an extent device until a hardware

EOF is detected.

Abbreviation: EO=YE|NO

ER ror=IGnore

Specify ERROR=IGNORE along with the PARTIAL operand to prevent cancellation after message DOCTOR316 (indicating no files are selected) is issued.

Abbreviation: ER=IG

EX pired=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

This operand causes Dr. D to select files according to their expiration dates. A file is considered unexpired when its expiration date is greater than the current system date.

Value Action

Y Select all files regardless of expiration date (default).

O+n

O-n

yyddd

Select only unexpired files.

Select only expired files.

Select only expired files after adjusting the current system date by n days (n days may be 1-3 digits).

yyyyddd

Select only unexpired files using 19yyddd as the current system date.

Select only unexpired files using yyyyddd instead of the current system date.

Abbreviation: EX=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

FA st=YEs|NO

Specify YES to cause Dr. D to invoke physical IOCS rather than the slower logical

Abbreviation: FA=YE|NO

SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume) Page 409

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FS ecured=NO|YEs

Abbreviation: FS=NO|YE

GE neration=L|F|nnn

Use this operand to select BIM-EPIC or CA-EPIC disk manager files for saving by the generation number of each file. This operand requires DM=E to also be specified.

Value Action

L Save most current generation.

Nnn

Save oldest generation.

Save specific generation number.

Abbreviation: GE=L|F|nnn

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

HV =NO|YEs|HOld

Use this operand during volume save to lock the VTOC of the disk thereby preventing the addition/deletion of files on the disk. HV=NO is default.

HV=YES should be used on the first disk save within an execution of Dr. D and then HV=HOLD should be used to continue to hold the lock on following functions within that Dr. D execution.

Abbreviation: HV=NO|YE|HO

LA bel=NO

Used to created unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Use this operand to specify a programmer logical unit number (SYS number) for printer output. This operand should be specified on an initial NOPERATION

Page 410 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D control statement. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PA rtial=SElect|REject

Use this operand to indicate that one or more selector statements immediately follow this statement. The selector statements used may be to specify the file(s) to be saved. See Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process on page 23 for additional details about selector statements.

Abbreviation: PA=SE|RE

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

R0 =YEs|NO

'R0=YES' specifies that the data portion of R0 is to be saved. Certain file types

(COBOL direct access and DBOMP) do use the data portion of R0, so care should be used in using this operand, even though those file types are rarely used, having been replaced by VSAM in most cases.

Abbreviation: R0=YE|NO

SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume) Page 411

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

SE qno=nn

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Use this operand to specify the input (source) volser(s) during a save. Specify up to 600 volsers to designate the pool of disks from which to save individual files.

You can specify Dr. D, BIM-EPIC, and CA-EPIC disk pool names in place of actual disk volser(s). When using BIM-EPIC or CA-EPIC disk pool names, you must also specify the DM=E operand.

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

REw

RUn

Immediately rewind the tape.

Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1/filename2/filename3

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the output dataset(s).

TAPEOUT is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

This operand is only valid for tape devices. It is ignored for DASD devices. If

DASD is used as output, then TAPEOUT must be specified.

Page 412 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D creation of the additional tape(s). Invoking the creation of the third tape always implies creation of the second tape, that is, specifying UPSI=XXXXXXXX1 is equivalent UPSI=XXX1XXXX1 and specifying TD=//TAPE003 is the same as

TD=/TAPETWO/TAPE003.

Abbreviation: TD=filename/filename2/filename3

TO =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TO=SYSnnn

TT =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TT=SYSnnn

T3 =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: T3=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

US erexit=NF/phasename

Save processing supports Type 1 user exits only. User Exit Type 1 may be used to

Inspect, Modify, or Delete logical records.

For Type 1 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=NF/phasename' where:

NF constant

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

See User Exits on page 468 for additional details.

Abbreviation: US= NF/phasename

SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume) Page 413

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

VO lselect=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Use this operand to select files that fully or partially reside on the specified disk(s) during the save. This operand is useful in further qualifying the volumes specified by SVOLID, especially when SVOLID references a disk pool.

Abbreviation: VO=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

VS am=YEs

When VSAM=YES, is specified, VSAM data areas are saved as DA files. When

VSAM=NO, is specified, VSAM data areas are bypassed. VSAM=NO is the default. This method of saving VSAM files is not recommended as the VSAM area is saved as a DA file and must be restored as DA. Use SAVE=LOGICAL

VSAM (see page 417) instead.

Abbreviation: VS=YE|NO

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

Page 414 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Save all files

This example saves all the files (expired and unexpired) on volume PCK200.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT,. . .

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=LOGICAL,SVOLSER=PCK200

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: Save files selected by name

This example saves all the files (expired and unexpired) on volume PCK200 whose dataset names begin with PROD.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT,. . .

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=LOGICAL,SVOLSER=PCK200,PARTIAL=SELECT

PROD*

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: Save all unexpired files

This example saves all the files, except those files that are expired, on the PCK200 and PCK201 disks.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT,. . .

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=LOGICAL,SVOLSER=(PCK200,PCK201),EXPIRED=NO

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

SAVE=LOGICAL (Volume) Page 415

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Save all from EPIC disk pool

Save all files residing in the EPIC disk pool POOL01. Both EPIC controlled and uncontrolled files are saved.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT,. . .

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=LOGICAL,SV=POOL01,DM=E

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: Save selectively from pool of disks

Save the files residing in a pool of disk space on three 3380 disks having volume serial numbers VOLSR1,VOLSR2, and VOLSR3. Save only the files that fully or partially reside on VOLSR2, and VOLSR3.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT,. . .

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=LOGICAL,SV=(VOLSR1,VOLSR2,VOLSR3),VO=(VOLSR2,VOLSR3)

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

Example: Save files from selected areas on disk

Save the files residing in a pool of disk space on three 3380 disks having volume serial numbers VOLSR1,VOLSR2, and VOLSR3. The space on the first disk is in cylinder 1 through 100, the second and third, 100 through 600.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// TLBL TAPEOUT,. . .

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

SAVE=LOG,SV=(VOLSR1,VOLSR2,VOLSR3),AREA=(15-1500,1500-9000,R)

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

NOTE: The AREA ranges are stated in tracks or FBA blocks, and the cylinder addresses have been converted accordingly.

Page 416 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM)

VSAM Logical Save Feature

The VSAM Logical Save feature enables all or some of the files identified in a

VSAM catalog (both SUBALLOCATED and unique) to be saved with a single

Dr. D request. Only the VSAM catalog need be identified to Dr. D which is used to select the files (both suballocated and unique) to be saved - either all files or those identified through user selection criteria (refer to Logical

Selection/Rejection/Rename Process). No additional Job Control statements are required identifying the files to be saved. When requested, in addition to automatically saving the VSAM file definition, all associated files and their definitions (PATH’s and AIX’s) can be automatically saved.

To invoke this feature, specify SAVE=LOGICAL as the first entry on the control statement. The label identifying the VSAM catalog is required and is identified to

Dr. D through the SCAT operand. No file labels are required.

Save files created by this operation may be used as input to VSAM

RESTORE=LOGICAL and RESTORE=VSAM operations.

SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 417

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

SAVE=LOGICAL – VSAM Operand Summary

SAVE=LOGICAL

ASSOCIATIONS=YES|NO

BLOCKSIZE=n

CP=NO|YES

EOF=S

ERROR=IGNORE

EXPIRED=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

FAST=YES|NO|CI

GR=nnn

LABEL=NO

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

MRECORDS=n

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

SCAT=filename

SEQNO=nn

SVOLID=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

SWORD=filepassword

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1/filename2/filename3

TO=SYSnnn

TSTAMP=(<|>)(yyddd|-n)(.hhmm)

TT=SYSnnn

T3=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

USEREXIT=NF/phasename

VBUFF=n

VNULL=YES|NO|ALL

VSTYPE=E|K|R|N|S|P

VUSE=CANCEL|IGNORE|NULL|OPERATOR|SAVE

WAIT=n

Yes

Page 418 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

SAVE=LOGICAL – VSAM Operand Summary

WS=catalogreadpassword No Yes

SA ve=LOgical

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: SA=LO

AS sociations=YEs|NO

Specify YES to cause Dr. D to save all associated files (PATH’s and AIX’s). AIX clusters are saved following their associated base cluster and PATHS are saved following the clusters to which they relate. When ASSOCIATIONS=YES is used with the PARTIAL= operand, selection or rejection criteria are applied to the base clusters only. If a base cluster is selected or rejected, all associations are also selected or rejected. Specifying , NO results in the associated files being bypassed. ASSOCIATIONS=NO is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Abbreviation: AS=YE|NO

BL ocksize=n

The default shipped with Dr. D is 65496; your installation administrator may change it.

Abbreviation: BL=n

CP =NO|YEs

CP=NO should be specified to avoid double compression and potential loss of through-put.

Abbreviation: CP=NO|YE

EO f=S

Specify S to cause Dr. D to continue copying only until a software EOF is found, without regard to the input file’s high used RBA (relative byte address).

SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 419

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: EO=S

ER ror=IGnore

Specify ERROR=IGNORE along with the PARTIAL operand to operator intervention after message DOCTOR171 (indicating the file is not in the VSAM catalog) and to prevent cancellation after message DOCTOR316 (indicating no files are selected) is issued.

Abbreviation: ER=IG

EX pired=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

This operand causes Dr. D to select files according to their expiration dates. A file is considered unexpired when its expiration date is greater than the current system date.

Value Action

O+n

O-n

Yyddd

Select all files regardless of expiration date.

Select only unexpired files (default).

Select only expired files.

Select only expired files after adjusting the current system date by n days (n days may be 1-3 digits).

Yyyyddd

Select only unexpired files using 19yyddd as the current system date.

Select only unexpired files using yyyyddd instead of the current system date.

Abbreviation: EX=Y|N|O|O+n|O-n|yyddd|yyyyddd

FA st=YEs|NO|CI

For most SAVE functions, specify YES to cause Dr. D to invoke physical IOCS rather than the slower logical IOCS when saving the VSAM files. If the VSAM cluster is compressed, encrypted, or otherwise modified during normal processing, use FAST=NO. Files saved with either FAST=YES or FAST=NO are reorganized during a RESTORE function. To prevent reorganization during a

RESTORE, specify FAST=CI. Use FAST=CI for any cluster that is not a true

VSAM ESDS, KSDS, RRDS, VRDS, or VSAM/SAM. FAST=YES is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator may change it.

Abbreviation: FA=YE|NO|CI

GR =nnn

This memory is released before any Dr. D initiated OPEN, CLOSE, Tape EOV, or end of job. This operand should be specified on an initial NOPERATION control

Page 420 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D statement. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LA bel=NO

Used to created unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

MR ecords=n

Specify this operand with a value in the range of 0-99999999 to limit the number of logical records to be saved for each file. Specify MRECORDS=0 to save only the file definition (with no data records saved). This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: MR=n

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PA rtial=SElect|REject

Use this operand to indicate that one or more selector statements immediately follow this statement. The selector statements used may be to specify the file(s) to be saved. For additional information, see “Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename

Process” on page 23.

Abbreviation: PA=SE|RE

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

BOTH forces UPSI=X11XXXXX to be set which causes control statements and processing statistics to be displayed on SYSLOG. PRINT=NO is the default

SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 421

Dr. D

USER GUIDE shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

SC at=filename

Use this operand to identify the Job Control DLBL statement for the VSAM catalog being saved.

Abbreviation: SC=filename

SE qno=nn

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Use this operand to specify the source volser(s) during a save operation. Specify up to 30 volsers to designate the pool of disks from which to save individual files. This operand requires a PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT.

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

SW ord=filepassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character file read password of the file being saved only if it has a read password defined.

Abbreviation: SW=filepassword

Page 422 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

REw

RUn

Immediately rewind the tape.

Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1/filename2/filename3

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the output dataset(s).

TAPEOUT is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

This operand is only valid for tape devices. It is ignored for DASD devices. If

DASD is used as output, then TAPEOUT must be specified.

TD=/TAPETWO/TAPE003.

Abbreviation: TD=filename/filename2/filename3

TO =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TO=SYSnnn

TS tamp=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 423

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

‘>’ indicates that the time stamp date must exactly match the file’s time stamp date and any time of day value is ignored.

The time stamp date is required and may be entered either as yyddd (yy is windowed: 00-74 = 20yy 75-99 = 19yy) or as a number of days value to be subtracted from the current system date.

TS=-0

TS=>-1.1200

TS=>-6

TS=01100 select if stamped today select if stamped after yesterday at 12 noon select if stamped in the last seven days select if stamped on the 100th day of 2001

TS=>01100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 2001/100

TS=<01100 select if stamped before 2001/100

TS=99100 select if stamped on the 100th day of 1999

TS=>99100.1450 select if stamped after 2:50 p.m. on 1999/100

TS=<99100 select if stamped before 1999/100

Abbreviation: TS=[<|>] yyddd|-n [.hhmm]

TT =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TT=SYSnnn

T3 =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: T3=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Page 424 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

US erexit=NF/phasename

Save processing supports Type 1 user exits only. User Exit Type 1 may be used to

Inspect, Modify, or Delete logical records.

For Type 1 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=NF/phasename' where:

NF constant

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

See User Exits on page 468 for additional details.

Abbreviation: US= NF/phasename

VB uff=n

For potential enhanced performance, use this operand to increase the amount of internal buffer space used by Dr. D when saving a VSAM file. The value specified indicates the number of thousands of bytes desired. For example,

VB=100 sets the buffer space used by Dr. D to 100,000. This operand defaults to the size needed to process a FAST=YES|CI operation.

Abbreviation: VB=n

VN ull=YEs|NO|ALl

Use this operand to specify the action to be taken when a null VSAM file is encountered. Specify YES (the default) to cause Dr. D to consider null files for selection. Specify NO to cause Dr. D not to consider null files for selection (which causes message DOCTOR176 Empty Dataset... to be issued for each null dataset encountered). Specify ALL to cause Dr. D to only consider null (or unallocated) files for selection.

Abbreviation: VN=YE|NO|AL

VS type=K|E|R|N|S|P

Under some systems, an open error message with error X’A0’ (160) may occur when saving a VSAM file. Although this error can be ignored without penalty, specify this operand to identify the type of target VSAM file to avoid the error message.

Value Action

K Indicates KSDS file.

Indicates ESDS file.

Indicates RRDS file.

Indicates non-CI format file.

Indicates VSAM SAM managed file.

Indicates PATH.

SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 425

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: VR=K|E|R|N|S|P

VU se=CAncel|IGnore|NUll|OPerator|SAve

Use this operand to specify the action to be taken when a VSAM file about to be saved is currently in use (that is, open for update) by another task.

VUSE=CANCEL is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Value Action

CANCEL Cancel the job.

IGNORE

NULL

OPERATOR

Do not save the file.

Save the file as a null file.

Issue message DOCTOR175 and wait for operator response

(allowed only with FAST=YES).

Abbreviation: VU=CA|IG|NU|OP|SA

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

WS =catalogreadpassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character VSAM catalog read password.

Abbreviation: WS=catalogreadpassword

Page 426 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Save contents of two VSAM catalogs

Save all the files found in two VSAM catalogs including all associated PATH’s and AIX’s.

// TLBL TAPEOUT,...

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG.ONE’,,VSAM

// DLBL UCAT2,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG.TWO’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=LOGICAL,SC=UCAT1,ASSOCIATIONS=YES

SAVE=LOGICAL,SC=UCAT2,ASSOCIATIONS=YES

Example: Simultaneous creation of 2 save tapes

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'FIRST TAPE OUT'

// TLBL TAPETWO,'SECOND TAPE OUT'

// ASSGN SYS007,180 TAPEOUT

// ASSGN SYS006,181 TAPETWO

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG.ONE’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,UP=111100000,...

SAVE=LOGICAL,SC=UCAT1,AS=YES

Example: Simultaneous creation of 3 save tapes

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'FIRST TAPE OUT'

// TLBL TAPETWO,'SECOND TAPE OUT'

// TLBL TAPE003,'THIRD TAPEOUT'

// ASSGN SYS007,180 TAPEOUT

// ASSGN SYS006,181 TAPETWO

// ASSGN SYS005,182 TAPE003

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG.ONE’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,UP=111100001,...

SAVE=LOGICAL,SC=UCAT1,ASSOCIATIONS=YES

SAVE=LOGICAL (VSAM) Page 427

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Selectively save by VSAM file ids

Save the file ‘A.VSAM.FILE’ and all files that start with the character string

‘PAY’. Following the save, the output tape is unloaded. See the Logical

Selection/Rejection/Rename Process Section for additional details and examples on file selection.

// TLBL TAPEOUT,...

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=LOGICAL,SC=UCAT1,PA=SE

A.VSAM.FILE

PAY*

SA=NO,TA=RUN

Example: Selectively save contents of VSAM catalog

Save all unexpired files found in a VSAM catalog including all associated

PATH’s and AIX’s that have had update activity in the last 30 days but excluding any null files.

// TLBL TAPEOUT,...

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=LOGICAL,SC=UCAT1,AS=YES,EXPIRED=NO,TSTAMP=>-30,VNULL=NO

Example: Selectively save contents of VSAM catalog

Save only expired files found in a VSAM catalog excluding all associated PATH’s and AIX’s.

// TLBL TAPEOUT,...

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// DLBL UCAT1,’VSAM.USER.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=LOGICAL,SC=UCAT1,AS=NO,EXPIRED=ONLY

Page 428 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

SAVE=PHYSICAL

Dr. D enables users to SAVE portions of a disk on a physical track/block basis, independent of Volumes, Data Files, or Libraries.

This function is valuable for its ability to manipulate data at the physical level.

This poses some risk in terms of security and possible inadvertent damage to critical data. For that reason, it may be wise to limit its use to qualified authorized personnel. This can be achieved by limiting access to one DRD module - DOCTOR02. If a security package is available, the use of DOCTOR02 can be easily controlled; otherwise DOCTOR02 can be placed in a restricted library, or kept on tape and only restored by authorized persons.

The disk to be saved is determined by the volume assignment associated with the SSYSNO operand or the volume associated with the volser as defined by the

Dr. D uses the SBEGIN operand to determine the track/block address where the save operation begins. The SHALT operand is used to dictate the track/block address where the save stops. The disk addresses entered are one to eight numeric digits in length.

Save files created by this operation may be used as input to

RESTORE=PHYSICAL operations only.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

SAVE=PHYSICAL

BLOCKSIZE=n

SAVE=PHYSICAL Operand Summary

Operand Required? Global?

Yes

CK=YES|NO

CP=NO|YES

GR=nnn

HV=NO|YES|HOLD

LABEL=NO

Yes

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

SBEGIN=ccchh|block

SEQNO=nn

SHALT=ccchh|block

SSYSNO=SYSnnn

SVOLID=xxxxxx

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1/filename2/filename3

TO=SYSnnn

TT=SYSnnn

T3=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

VM=NO|YES

WAIT=n

Yes

NOTE 2

NOTE 1

Yes

NOTE 1: Either SSYSNO (or defaulted to) or SVOLID is required. Use the

SVOLID operand at all times in place of SSYSNO.

NOTE 2: If SHALT is omitted, it defaults to the SBEGIN value resulting in the saving of a single track/block.

SA ve=PHysical

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: SA=PH

Page 430 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

BL ocksize=n

Abbreviation: BL=n

CK =YEs|NO

CK=NO prevents the issuance of the error message.

Abbreviation: CK=YE|NO

CP =NO|YEs

CP=NO should be specified to avoid double compression and potential loss of through-put.

Abbreviation: CP=NO|YE

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

HV =NO|YEs|HOld

Use this operand during volume save to lock the VTOC of the disk thereby preventing the addition/deletion of files on the disk. HV=NO is default.

HV=YES should be used on the first disk save within an execution of Dr. D and then HV=HOLD should be used to continue to hold the lock on following functions within that Dr. D execution.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: HV=NO|YE|HO

LA bel=NO

Used to created unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

SB egin=ccchh|block

Use this operand to specify the starting track/block where the save is to begin on the source device. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0- to 6-digit cylinder

Page 432 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

(ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). For FBA devices, specify a 1 to 8-digit block number.

Abbreviation: SB=ccchh|block

SE qno=nn

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SH alt=ccchh|block

Use this operand to specify the stopping track/block on the source device during a save operation. For CKD and ECKD devices, specify a 0- to 6-digit cylinder

(ccc) and a 2-digit (leading zero required) head (hh). For FBA devices, specify a 1 to 8-digit block number.

Abbreviation: SH=ccchh|block

SS ysno=SYSnnn

Abbreviation: SS=SYSnnn

SV olid=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...)

Use this operand to specify the source volser(s) during a save operation. Specify up to 600 volsers to designate the pool of disks from which to save individual files. When used, it also required a PARTIAL=SELECT|REJECT.

Abbreviation: SV=xxxxxx|(xxxxxx,xxxxxx, ...)

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

REw

RUn

Immediately rewind the tape.

Immediately unload the tape.

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1/filename2/filename3

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the output dataset(s).

TAPEOUT is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

This operand is only valid for tape devices. It is ignored for DASD devices. If

DASD is used as output, then TAPEOUT must be specified.

TD=/TAPETWO/TAPE003.

Abbreviation: TD=filename/filename2/filename3

TO =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TO=SYSnnn

TT =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TT=SYSnnn

T3 =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: T3=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

Page 434 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

VM =NO|YEs

Abbreviation: VM=NO|YES

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Examples

Example: Save multiple tracks/blocks via physical save

This example saves cylinder 196, head 00 through cylinder 198, head 10 from pack CKD231 to tape

// TLBL TAPEOUT,...

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=PH,SB=19600,SH=19800,SVOLID=CKD231

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REWIND

Example: Save single track via physical save

This example saves only cylinder 196, head 00 from pack CKD231 to tape

// TLBL TAPEOUT,...

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=PH,SB=19600,SVOLID=CKD231

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REWIND

Example: Save VM minidisk via physically save

This example saves areas of a disk (cuu=352) containing VM minidisks. The disk is a 3390 VM disk with a number of minidisks after the sysres area.

// TLBL TAPEOUT,...

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// ASSGN SYS001,352

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SA=NO,UPSI=111,CP=YES

SA=PH,SS=SYS001,VM=YES,SB=27100,SH=45714

SA=NO,TAPE=REW

Page 436 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

SAVE=SDISK

SAVE=SDISK saves a single sequential disk (SD) file to tape or disk. It uses

LIOCS to access the data from disk. A Job Control DLBL statement is required to identify the file to be saved and that filename is identified on the Dr. D control statement through the SFILENAME operand. Each file to be saved must have its own Job Control DLBL/EXTENT statement and Dr. D control statement.

Files saved by this feature can also be saved as a User Data File (rather than a

Dr. D save file) using the User Data File feature. To create a User Data File in place of a Dr. D save file, add the DTAPE=YES operand.

Usually all sequential files and some direct access files have an EOF record after the last data record of the last prime data extent. If this is so, specifying EOF=YES causes Dr. D to stop saving after reading an EOF record. This results in a faster save since that entire extent does not need to be saved.

For SD files, a logical record count may be obtained through use of the LR=

(Logical Record Length) operand and specification of UPSI bit 2 (UPSI XX1) specified via Job Control, UPSI operand or default UPSI value. For variable blocked files, only the UPSI is required.

Save files created by this operation may be used as input to RESTORE=DATA and RESTORE=SDISK operations.

SAVE=SDISK Page 437

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

SAVE=SDISK Operand Summary

Operand

SAVE=SDISK

BLOCKSIZE=n

CK=YES|NO

CP=NO|YES

DTAPE=YES

EOF=YES|NO

GR=nnn

LABEL=NO

LRECSIZE=n

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

NRECDS=n

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

R0=YES|NO

SEQNO=nn

SFILENAME=filename

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1/filename2/filename3

TO=SYSnnn

TT=SYSnnn

T3=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

USEREXIT=NF/phasename

WAIT=n

Yes

Required? Global?

Yes No

No Yes

Yes

SA ve=SDisk

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: SA=SD

BL ocksize=n

Page 438 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D data block saved plus 16. Once a blocksize has been set, it remains in effect for the remainder of the Dr. D execution or until set again using this same operand.

The default shipped with Dr. D is 65496; your installation administrator may change it.

Abbreviation: BL=n

CK =YEs|NO

CK=NO prevents the issuance of the error message.

Abbreviation: CK=YE|NO

CP =NO|YEs

CP=NO should be specified to avoid double compression and potential loss of through-put.

Abbreviation: CP=NO|YE

DT ape=YEs

Use this operand to indicate the output is a User Data File and not a Dr. D save file.

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: DT=YE

EO f=YEs

Specify YES to cause Dr. D to continue saving until an EOF is detected. If this operand is omitted, the entire extent is saved.

Abbreviation: EO=YE

GR =nnn

This memory is released before any Dr. D initiated OPEN, CLOSE, Tape EOV, or end of job. This operand should be specified on an initial NOPERATION control

SAVE=SDISK Page 439

Dr. D

USER GUIDE statement. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

LA bel=NO

Used to created unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LR ecsize=n

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: LR=n

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

NR ecds=n

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: NR=n

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

Page 440 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

R0 =YEs|NO

'R0=YES specifies that the data portion of R0 is to be saved. Certain file types

(COBOL direct access and DBOMP) do use the data portion of R0, so care should be used in using this operand, even though those file types are rarely used, having been replaced by VSAM in most cases.

Abbreviation: R0=YE|NO

SE qno=nn

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SF ilename=filename

Abbreviation: SF=filename

SAVE=SDISK Page 441

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

REw

RUn

Immediately rewind the tape.

Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1/filename2/filename3

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the output dataset(s).

TAPEOUT is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

This operand is only valid for tape devices. It is ignored for DASD devices. If

DASD is used as output, then TAPEOUT must be specified.

TD=/TAPETWO/TAPE003.

Abbreviation: TD=filename/filename2/filename3

TO =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TO=SYSnnn

TT =SYSnnn

Page 442 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Abbreviation: TT=SYSnnn

T3 =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: T3=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

US erexit=NF/phasename

Save processing supports Type 1 user exits only. User Exit Type 1 may be used to

Inspect, Modify, or Delete logical records.

For Type 1 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=NF/phasename' where:

NF constant

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

See User Exits on page 468 for additional details.

Abbreviation: US= NF/phasename

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

SAVE=SDISK Page 443

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Examples

Example: Save SD files

This example saves a sequential disk (SD) file to tape. It also generates a logical record count for the SD file. Saving of the SD file ends upon encountering an

EOF or end-of-extent (whichever is first).

// DLBL SEQFILE,'DISK FILE 01',,SD

// EXTENT ,737723,1,0,20,3980

// EXTENT ,737724,1,1,20,2000

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'SAVE TAPE'

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=SDISK,SFILENAME=SEQFILE,EOF=YES,LRECSIZE=100

Example: Save file with User Data File feature

This example saves two SD files using the Data Tape feature.

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// DLBL FIL1,'FIXED.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE',,SD

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,15,300

// DLBL FIL2,'VARIABLE.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE',,SD

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,4500,6000

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'FIXED.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE'

// TLBL TDO0001,'VARIABLE.BLOCKED.SAM.FILE'

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW,UPSI=111

SAVE=SDISK,SFILENAME=FIL1,DTAPE=YES

SAVE=SDISK,SFILENAME=FIL2,DTAPE=YES

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REW

Page 444 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

SAVE=VSAM

The VSAM Data File Save feature saves a single VSAM file (either suballocated or unique) per Dr. D control statement. A Job Control DLBL statement is required to identify the file to be saved and that filename is identified on the

Dr. D control statement through the SFILENAME operand. The VSAM Catalog cluster definition is also automatically saved. Associated files (PATH’s and

AIX’s) are not saved when using this feature.

An individual VSAM file (either suballocated or unique) can also be saved as a

User Data File (rather than a Dr. D save file) using the User Data File feature. To create a User Data File in place of a Dr. D save file, add the DTAPE=YES operand. Use of this feature prevents Dr. D from saving the VSAM Catalog cluster definition.

Save files created by this operation may be used as input to RESTORE=VSAM operations only.

SAVE=VSAM Page 445

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Control Statement Operands

SAVE=VSAM Operand Summary

SAVE=VSAM

BLOCKSIZE=n

CP=NO|YES

DTAPE=YES

EOF=S

ERROR=IGNORE

FAST=YES|NO|CI

GR=nnn

INSEQUENCE=NO

LABEL=NO

LST=nnn|SYSnnn

MRECORDS=n

OPERATOR=’operatormessage’

PRINT=NO|LIST|BOTH

RP=YES|NO

SEQNO=nn

SFILENAME=filename

SWORD=filepassword

TAPE=NOR|REW|RUN

TDDNAME=filename1/filename2/filename3

TO=SYSnnn

TT=SYSnnn

T3=SYSnnn

UPSI=012345678

USEREXIT=NF/phasename

VARIABLE=YES

VBUFF=n

VSTYPE=E|K|R|N|S|P

VUSE=CA|IG|NU|SA|OP

WAIT=n

WS=catalogpassword

Yes

NOTE 1

NOTE: VARIABLE= is required when input file is variable length.

Yes

Page 446 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

SA ve=VSam

Use this operand to define the Dr. D function to be performed. This operand must be the first operand specified on the control statement.

Abbreviation: SA=VS

BL ocksize=n

Abbreviation: BL=n

CP =NO|YEs

CP=NO should be specified to avoid double compression and potential loss of through-put.

Abbreviation: CP=NO|YE

DT ape=YEs

Use this operand to create a User Data File and not a Dr. D save file.

See User Data File Feature on page 46 for additional information.

Abbreviation: DT=YE

EO f=S

Specify S to cause Dr. D to continue copying only until a software EOF is found, without regard to the input file’s high used RBA (relative byte address).

Abbreviation: EO=S

ER ror=IGnore

Abbreviation: ER=IG

SAVE=VSAM Page 447

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

FA st=YEs|NO|CI

For most SAVE functions, specify YES to cause Dr. D to invoke physical IOCS rather than the slower logical IOCS when saving VSAM files. Specify NO if the

VSAM cluster is compressed, encrypted, or otherwise modified during normal processing. Files saved with either FAST=YES or FAST=NO are reorganized during a RESTORE function. To prevent reorganization during a RESTORE, specify FAST=CI. Use FAST=CI for any cluster that is not a true VSAM ESDS,

KSDS, RRDS, VRDS, or VSAM/SAM. FAST=YES is the default shipped with

Dr. D; your installation administrator can change the default.

Abbreviation: FA=YE|NO|CI

GR =nnn

Abbreviation: GR=nnn

IN sequence=NO

Specify NO to cause a KSDS file to be saved without using the file’s sequence set.

Specification of this operand is only effective when FAST=YES is also specified or

default. This technique is useful for recovering a file whose sequence set has been corrupted. Be aware that this operand may cause the file to be saved out of sequence and, if so, it is the user’s responsibility to rebuild the file purging duplicate records and placing the records back into ascending sequence. This task can be accomplished by either:

• Copying the file to an ESDS, sorting it and then copying it back to the

KSDS

• Saving the file to a data tape (DTAPE=YES), sorting it, and then restoring it back to the KSDS

Abbreviation: IN=NO

LA bel=NO

Used to created unlabeled tapes.

Abbreviation: LA=NO

LS t=nnn|SYSnnn

Use this operand to specify a programmer logical unit number (SYS number) for printer output. This operand should be specified on an initial NOPERATION

Page 448 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D control statement. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: LS=nnn|SYSnnn

MR ecords=n

Specify this operand with a value in the range of 0-99999999 to limit the number of logical records to be saved for each file. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: MR=n

OP erator=’operatormessage’

This operand immediately writes a 1- to 80-character message to the operator console. You can then press Enter to continue processing or type “cancel” to cancel the job.

This operand may be specified along with a SAVE, COPY, RESTORE, or

Abbreviation: OP=’operatormessage’

PR int=NO|LIst|BOth

Specify LIST or BOTH to cause Dr. D to produce a formatted report on SYSLST.

Abbreviation: PR=NO|LI|BO

RP =YEs|NO

Abbreviation: RP=YE|NO

SE qno=nn

This operand can be used to assure all control statements are in the proper order.

SAVE=VSAM Page 449

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: SE=nn

SF ilename=filename

Specify the filename identifying the Job Control DLBL statement of the file to be saved.

Abbreviation: SF=filename

SW ord=filepassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character file read password of the file being saved only if it has a read password defined.

Abbreviation: SW=filepassword

TA pe=NOr|REw|RUn

Value Action

NOr Do not rewind tape. This is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

REw

RUn

Immediately rewind the tape.

Immediately unload the tape.

Abbreviation: TA=NO|RE|RU

TD dname=filename1/filename2/filename3

Use this operand to specify an alternative filename for the output dataset(s).

TAPEOUT is default shipped with Dr. D but may be changed by your system administrator.

This operand is only valid for tape devices. It is ignored for DASD devices. If

DASD is used as output, then TAPEOUT must be specified.

TD=/TAPETWO/TAPE003.

Abbreviation: TD=filename/filename2/filename3

Page 450 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

TO =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TO=SYSnnn

TT =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: TT=SYSnnn

T3 =SYSnnn

Abbreviation: T3=SYSnnn

UP si=012345678

Dr. D tests all UPSI bits to determine if any special action is required. These UPSI bits may be set using the Job Control UPSI statement or by specifying the Dr. D

UPSI operand on the control statement. See Setting UPSI Bits on page 34 for details about the UPSI settings and use.

Abbreviation: UP=012345678

US erexit=NF/phasename

Save processing supports Type 1 user exits only. User Exit Type 1 may be used to

Inspect, Modify, or Delete logical records.

For Type 1 user exits, the format is ‘USEREXIT=NF/phasename' where:

NF constant

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

See User Exits on page 468 for additional details.

Abbreviation: US= NF/phasename

VA riable=YEs|NO

SAVE=VSAM Page 451

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Abbreviation: VA=YE |NO

VB uff=n

VB=100 sets the buffer space used by Dr. D to 100,000. This operand defaults to 3 times the default or specified tape blocksize value (see BLOCKSIZE operand).

NOTE: Use this operand to define the space to allocated for use as Dr. D internal buffers and not the buffer space to be used in defining clusters to be restored (to override the buffer space to be used in defining clusters to restored, see the

BUFFERSPACE operand).

Abbreviation: VB=n

VS type=K|E|R|N|S|P

Value Action

K Indicates KSDS file.

Indicates ESDS file.

Indicates RRDS file.

Indicates non-CI format file.

Indicates VSAM SAM managed file.

Indicates PATH.

Abbreviation: VR=K|E|R|N|S|P

Page 452 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

VU se=CAncel|IGnore|NUll|OPerator|SAve

Use this operand to specify the action to be taken when a VSAM file about to be saved is currently in use (that is, open for update) by another task.

VUSE=CANCEL is the default shipped with Dr. D; your installation administrator can change this default.

Value Action

CANCEL

IGNORE

NULL

OPERATOR

Cancel the job.

Do not save the file.

Save the file as a null file.

SAVE

Issue message DOCTOR175 and wait for operator response

(allowed only with FAST=YES).

Save the file anyway knowing that the results are unpredictable and may cause the save or subsequent restore to fail (allowed only with FAST=YES - with FAST=NO, this value functions the same as VUSE=NULL).

Abbreviation: VU=CA|IG|NU|OP|SA

WA it=n

Specify this operand typically on a heavily I/O bound system to cause Dr. D to pause between each tape I/O. The value specified represents 300ths of a second.

Therefore, ‘WAIT=300’ would cause a one second delay after each tape I/O. This is a global operand; its value remains in effect until you give it a different value.

Abbreviation: WA=n

WS=catalogreadpassword

Specify the 1- to 8-character VSAM catalog read password.

Abbreviation: WS=catalogreadpassword

SAVE=VSAM Page 453

Dr. D

Examples

Example: Save a VSAM file

// TLBL TAPEOUT,...

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// DLBL OURCAT,’OUR.VSAM.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// DLBL OURFILE,’OUR.VSAM.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=OURCAT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=VSAM,SFILENAME=OURFILE

Example: Simultaneous creation of 2 save tapes

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'FIRST TAPE OUT'

// TLBL TAPETWO,'SECOND TAPE OUT'

// ASSGN SYS007,180 TAPEOUT

// ASSGN SYS006,181 TAPETWO

// DLBL OURCAT,’OUR.VSAM.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// DLBL OURFILE,’OUR.VSAM.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=OURCAT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,UP=111100000,...

SAVE=VSAM,SFILENAME=OURFILE

Example: Simultaneous creation of 3 save tapes

// TLBL TAPEOUT,'FIRST TAPE OUT'

// TLBL TAPETWO,'SECOND TAPE OUT'

// TLBL TAPE003,'THIRD TAPEOUT'

// ASSGN SYS007,180 TAPEOUT

// ASSGN SYS006,181 TAPETWO

// ASSGN SYS005,182 TAPE003

// DLBL OURCAT,’OUR.VSAM.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// DLBL OURFILE,’OUR.VSAM.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=OURCAT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,UP=111100001,...

SAVE=VSAM,SFILENAME=OURFILE

USER GUIDE

Page 454 Command Reference

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Save a VSAM file to a User Data File

This example saves a cluster with variable length records to a User Data File. The

User Data File has a maximum blocksize of 3204.

// TLBL TAPEOUT,’user.data.file’

// ASSGN SYS007,TAPE

// DLBL OURCAT,’OUR.VSAM.CATALOG’,,VSAM

// DLBL OURFILE,’OUR.VSAM.FILE’,,VSAM,CAT=OURCAT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=VSAM,SFILENAME=OURFILE,DTAPE=YES,VA=YES,BL=3204

SAVE=VSAM Page 455

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Dr. D CICS Interface (Dr. D/ON-LINE)

Dr. D provides an interactive interface (Dr. D/ON-LINE) through CICS/VSE.

Dr. D/ON-LINE allows the user to generate job streams that execute Dr. D in a batch environment. The user can control the type of job stream to be built and tailor the job control for their specific environment. Most Dr. D batch facilities are available through the Dr. D/ON-LINE system. Dr. D/ON-LINE also provides centralized processing for other interactive online Dr. D facilities. A main menu panel allows the user to not only select Dr. D/ON-LINE processing, but also the online DRZAP, the new improved DRDITTO, and various other online services.

How Dr. D/ON-LINE Works

Dr. D/ON-LINE is a set of programs written in CICS command level code that interactively builds job streams to perform batch Dr. D services. The Dr. D/ON-

LINE programs use the CICS basic mapping facility to perform terminal displays and interact with the user.

Dr. D/ON-LINE provides panels that you can fill out to provide information for the Dr. D job stream to be built. You can specify I/O device information, VSE and POWER job information, as well as the Dr. D function to be provided through these panels.

The Dr. D/ON-LINE interface does not actually perform the Dr. D function; it builds a job stream that can be submitted to a batch partition for execution. The job stream created can also be pulled into an online editor and used as a skeleton for future Dr. D processing.

Running Dr. D/ON-LINE as a Transaction

Once you have updated CICS for the Dr. D/ON-LINE transaction, programs, and maps, you can activate the Dr. D/ON-LINE interface.

A single transaction called 'DRD' activates the CICS interface for Dr. D/ON-

LINE. Enter the 'DRD' transaction ID to bring up the main menu panel and choose the Dr. D service to be performed. Program Function key 3 gets you out of the current panel and terminates the transaction from the main menu panel.

Diagnostics and errors that occur during the Dr. D/ON-LINE interactive processing displays on the terminal, usually at line 24. The Dr. D/ON-LINE messages are documented in the Dr. D user manual and are assigned the range of 401 through 449. Transaction abends and dumps may accompany the diagnostic messages to provide useful information for system debugging. The

Dr. D/ON-LINE transaction dumps can be identified via 'DRDn'. These dumps only occur when a message does not suffice and should be sent to your Dr. D technical support department for further action.

Page 456 Dr. D CICS Interface (Dr. D/ON-LINE)

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Running Dr. D/ON-LINE under VSE Interactive Interface

Once you have setup Dr. D/ON-LINE to run under the VSE Interactive Interface

(see page 9), you may activate it via an Interactive Interface panel. When the

Dr. D/ON-LINE interface has completed, control is returned to the interactive interface panel.

SAVE=VSAM Page 457

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Conversion from Other Backup Software Products

Dr. D has the ability to restore backup tapes created by the following disk utility systems. Backup tapes created by other software products may be used as input to RESTORE=DATA, RESTORE=SDISK, RESTORE=VSAM, and

FUNCTION=LTAPE operations. To indicate to Dr. D what format the tape is, use a TAPE= operand indicating the corresponding Product Identifier (F1 through

F6) on a RESTORE=NOPERATION command preceding the first

RESTORE=DATA|SDISK|VSAM or FUNCTION=LTAPE command. The supported backup product formats and their corresponding Product Identifiers are:

Disk Utility System

Westinghouse Disk Utility System Product (DUSP)

Westinghouse Disk Utility (DUS)

Product Identifier

Computer Associates DYNUTIL

Disk Utility System Product (DUSP 2.0.1) /MAXBACK

Computer Associates FAVER VSAM Utility

Computer Associates FAVER2 Disk Utility

File types supported are VSAM, SAM, and Direct Access. Volume backups are supported for 'F1' only, and volume backups can be restored standalone without

Dr. D involvement. VSAM files can be 'auto-defined' if produced by 'F1', 'F4', ‘F5 or 'F6', but must be user defined if produced by 'F2'. The restore of individual non-VSAM files is supported for ‘F1’, ‘F2’, ‘F3’, F4’ and ‘F6’.

Once the Product Identifier is established, all other applicable Dr. D commands and operands are effective just as though the tape was produced by Dr. D. The intent of this feature is to support all tape formats created by F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 or

F6, but due to development of those products, variations in tape format might require additional development within Dr. D.

Page 458 Conversion from Other Backup Software Products

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example 1. Restore from a Westinghouse DUSP Format tape

The following two examples illustrate using a DUSP formatted tape as input to

Dr. D. The first example restores individual VSAM and non-VSAM files. The second example restores an entire disk volume.

// ASSGN SYS008,181

// MTC REW,SYS008

// TLBL TAPEIN

// DLBL X,'IM.IM.P03.IMBCRM.V12.BCR',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSCT

// DLBL A,'F1.SD',0,SD CISIZE=30720

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,.,9435,1590

// DLBL B,'F1.SD2',0,SD

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,7012,500

// DLBL C,'F1.SD3',0,SD

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,7512,500

// ASSGN SYS001,472

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111,TAPE=F1

RESTORE=VSAM,RFILENAME=X,AUTO=YES,FD=D

RESTORE=SD,RFILENAME=A,LR=905,NREC=8

RESTORE=DATA,RFILENAME=B

RESTORE=DATA,RFILEMAME=C

// ASSGN SYS008,181

// MTC REW,SYS008

// TLBL TAPEIN

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111,TAPE=F1

RESTORE=CURRENT,RV=DISK6T

RESTORE=NO,TA=RU

Example 2. Restore from Westinghouse DUS Format tape

The following example uses a DUS formatted tape to restore individual VSAM and non-VSAM files.

// MTC REW,181

// ASSGN SYS008,181

// TLBL TAPEIN

// DLBL X,'F2.VSAM',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUJ

// DLBL A,'F2.SD',1,SD,CISIZE=30720

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,12,16000

// ASSGN SYS001,26B

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111,BLOCKSIZE=65496,TAPE=F2

RESTORE=VSAM,RFILENAME=X,FIND=SFFLE1,VRTYPE=ESDS

RESTORE=DATA,RFILENAME=A,FIND=WISCRN,LB=2420

Example 1. Restore from a Westinghouse DUSP Format tape Page 459

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example 3. Restore from Dynam DYNUTIL Format tape

The following example uses a DYNUTIL formatted tape to restore an individual non-VSAM file.

// MTC REW,181

// ASSGN SYS008,181

// TLBL TAPEIN

// DLBL A,'F3.SD',1,SD,CISIZE=30720

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,0,12,16000

// ASSGN SYS001,26B

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111,BLOCKSIZE=65496,TAPE=F3

RESTORE=DATA,RFILENAME=A,FIND='F3.SD'

Example 4. Restore from Maxback 2.01+ DUSP Format tape

The following example uses a Maxback 2.01+ DUSP formatted tape to restore individual VSAM and non-VSAM files.

// ASSGN SYS008,181

// MTC REW,SYS008

// TLBL TAPEIN

// DLBL X,'IM.IM.P03.IMBCRM.V12.BCR',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSCT

// DLBL A,'F4.SD',0,SD CISIZE=30720

// EXTENT SYS001,,1,.,9435,1590

// ASSGN SYS001,472

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111,TAPE=F4

RESTORE=VSAM,RFILENAME=X,AUTO=YES,FD=D

RESTORE=SD,RFILENAME=A,LR=905,NREC=8

Example 5. Restore from FAVER Format tape

The following example uses a FAVER formatted tape to restore an individual

VSAM file.

// ASSGN SYS008,181

// MTC REW,SYS008

// TLBL TAPEIN

// DLBL X,'IM.IM.P03.IMBCRM.V12.BCR',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSCT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111,TAPE=F5

RESTORE=VSAM,RFILENAME=X,FIND='AAA.DRD.TEST.FILE'

RESTORE=NO,TA=RU

Page 460 Conversion from Other Backup Software Products

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example 6. Restore from FAVER2 Format tape

The following example uses a FAVER2 formatted tape to restore an individual

VSAM file.

// ASSGN SYS008,181

// MTC REW,SYS008

// TLBL TAPEIN

// DLBL X,'IM.IM.P03.IMBCRM.V12.BCR',,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSCT

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111,TAPE=F6

RESTORE=VSAM,RFILENAME=X,FIND='AAA.DRD.TEST.FILE'

RESTORE=NO,TA=RU

DRDCNVCU - Conversion Utility

This section describes how to use the Dr. D conversion utility that converts OEM

Dump/Restore job control to Dr. D format. Westinghouse Disk Utility System is a registered trademark of Westinghouse, Inc. MAXBACK and DUSP are registered trademarks of Software Diversified Software. FAVER and FAVER2 are registered trademarks of Computer Associates Inc.

The Dr. D Conversion Utility has been developed that allows users of these OEM

Backup/Restore utility packages to implement Dr. D without manually converting their existing Backup/Restore job streams to the Dr. D format.

How the Conversion Utility Works

To convert existing jobs to Dr. D format, the user simply executes the Dr. D conversion utility DRDCNVCU with the existing jobs as input. Each job supplied in the input must have an end-of-data (/*) delimiter. An end-of-procedure (/+) statement is used to indicate end of the input file to DRDCNVCU. The Dr. D conversion utility reads the input, convert it to Dr. D format, and punch a new set of JCL. The Dr. D conversion utility does not read the existing JCL from any source other than SYSIPT. Several examples of how to create a conversion job stream follow. A report listing the input statements processed and the diagnostic errors generated is produced during the conversion run.

Using the Dr. D Conversion Utility

The batch program 'DRDCNVCU' is executed to perform the actual conversion.

The jobs to be converted are placed after the // EXEC statement along with a conversion control statement. DRDCNVCU reads all of the input statements, converts the utility control statements to Dr. D format, modifies the // EXEC statements for Dr. D execution, and outputs the new job streams to SYSPCH.

Power JECL statements must be changed from '* $$' to '* **' if they are to be included in the conversion job stream. SYS004 must be assigned to the reader and SYSPCH must be assigned to the punch.

Example 6. Restore from FAVER2 Format tape Page 461

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Conversion Control Statement

This must be the first control statement in the conversion job stream unless specified via a // EXEC Job Control statement parm operand.

CONVERT=aaaaaa,EOD=bbb,EOJ=NO/YES,PWREOJ=NO/YES,CMS=ccc,SAVE=,TFNI=,TFNO=

CONVERT=aaaaaa

EOD=bbb

EOJ=YES

PWREOJ=YES

CMS=ccc

CMS=YES

CMS=POWER specifies the name of the OEM product to be converted:

WEST specifies Westinghouse Disk Utility

System

DUSP specifies Software Diversified Disk

Utility System

MAXBACK specifies Software Diversified

Maxback System

FAVER specifies Faver System

FAVER2 specifies Faver2 System

Specifies the end of input delimiter statement.

The default delimiter is a /+ statement. You may specify any character string for the delimiter as long as:

• no imbedded blanks are included

• bbb doesn't start with '* $$'

• bbb doesn't exceed column 72

Specifies that a /& job control statement is to be added after the end of job (/*) is encountered for each job to be converted. 'NO' is the default.

Specifies that a '* $$ EOJ' Power JECL statement is to be added after the end of job (/*) is encountered for each job to be converted. 'NO' is the default.

Provides a conversion interface for VM/CMS users. CMS='FN FT' specifies that the conversion output on SYSPCH be preceded with a CMS

:READ statement with a specific filename and file type. The CMS filename and file type specification must be enclosed within quotes.

Causes a CMS :READ statement to be generated for each job in the input stream. The filename generated is extracted from each // JOB statement encountered. The CMS file type of

'JCL' is used for each CMS file.

Performs the same function as CMS=YES except the filename is extracted from each POWER * $$

JOB statement encountered.

Page 462 Conversion from Other Backup Software Products

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

SAVE=LOGICAL

TFNI=xxxxxxx

TFNO=xxxxxxx

Indicates that you want to have

SAVE=LOGICAL Dr. D statements generated for the backup/restore of VSAM files.

Specifies the TLBL filename for the input tape to be used.

Specifies the TLBL filename for the output tape to be used.

The following CMS commands retrieve the SYSPCH output from the RDR and place it on CMS files:

Order RDR nnn

(place rdr file on tape of queue)

Readcard *

(build CMS files from rdr file)

DRDCNVCU - Conversion Utility Page 463

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example 1. Maxback conversion

This example illustrates the jobstream required to convert a Maxback jobstream to Dr. D:

// JOB CONVERT --- CONVERT MAXBACK TO DR. D ---

// ASSGN SYSPCH,PUNCH

// ASSGN SYS004,SYSIPT

// EXEC DRDCNVCU

CONVERT=MAXBACK,EOJ=YES,PWREOJ=YES

* ** JOB JNM=BUSYSRES,CLASS=A,DISP=L

* ** LST CLASS=A, DISP=L

// JOB MAXBAK --- BACKUP SYSRES TO TAPE ---

// ASSGN SYS000,TAPE

// ASSGN TLBL SYS000, 'SYSRES.BACKUP'

// EXEC MAXBACK

SET LOG=ON,MTC=RUN,LIST=ON,CONFIRM=ON ;

DUMP IJSYSRES(LIB) ;

Example 2. Maxback conversion with unique EOD specification

This example illustrates the use of the EOD= specification

// JOB CONVERT --- CONVERT MAXBACK TO DR. D ---

// ASSGN SYSPCH,PUNCH

// ASSGN SYS004,SYSIPT

// EXEC DRDCNVCU

CONVERT=MAXBACK,EOJ=YES,PWREOJ=YES,EOD=%%

* ** JOB JNM=BUSYSRES,CLASS=A,DISP=L

* ** LST CLASS=A,DISP=L

// JOB MAXBAK --- BACKUP SYSRES TO TAPE ---

// ASSGN SYS000,TAPE

// TLBL SYS000,'SYSRES.BACKUP'

// EXEC MAXBACK

SET LOG=ON,MTC=RUN,LIST=ON,CONFIRM=ON ;

DUMP IJSYSRS(LIB) ;

Page 464 Conversion from Other Backup Software Products

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example 3. Convert multiple Maxback jobs for a VM/CMS user

This example illustrates how to convert several jobs via a single execution of

DRDCNVCU, returning the punched output to the CMS user’s reader queue. A

CMS :READ statement is generated for each job, using the * $$ JOB name as the filename:

* $$ JOB JNM=CONVERT,CLASS=A,DISP=D

* $$ PUN CLASS=V,DEST=(*,USER),JSEP=O

// JOB CONVERT --- CONVERT MULTIPLE MAXBACK JOBS ---

// ASSGN SYSPCH,PUNCH

// ASSGN SYS004,SYSIPT

// EXEC DRDCNVCU

CONVERT=MAXBACK,CMS=POWER

* ** JOB JNM=BUSYRES,CLASS=A,DISP=L

* ** LST CLASS=A,DISP=LUSYSRES,CLASS=A,DISP=L

* ** LST CLASS=A,DISP=L

// JOB MAXBAK --- BACKUP SYSRES TO TAPE ---

// ASSGN SYS001,TAPE

// TLBL SYS001,'SYSRES.BACKUP'

// EXEC MAXBACK

SET LOG=ON,MTC=RUN,LIST=ON,CONFIRM=ON ;

DUMP IJSYSRS(LIB) ;

* ** EOJ

* ** JOB JNM=RSSYSRES,CLASS=A,DISP=L

* ** LST CLASS=A,DISP=L

// JOB MAXBAK --- RESTORE SYSRES FROM TAPE ---

// ASSGN SYS000,TAPE

// TLBL SYS000,'SYSRES.BACKUP'

// EXEC MAXBACK

SET LOG=ON,MTC=RUN,LIST=ON,CONFIRM=ON ;

RESTORE IJSYSRS(LIB) ;

* ** EOJ

* $$ EOJ

DRDCNVCU - Conversion Utility Page 465

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example 4. Convert Westinghouse Dump/Restore job

This example illustrates the conversion of a Westinghouse job specifying the

Convert control statement via the // exec statement Parm :

// JOB CONVERT --- CONVERT WESTINGHOUSE TO DR. D ---

// ASSGN SYSPCH,PUNCH

// ASSGN SYS004,SYSIPT

// EXEC DRDCNVCU,PARM='CONVERT=WEST,EOJ=YES,PWREOJ=YES'

* ** JOB JNM=BUSYSRES,CLASS=A,DISP=L

* ** LST CLASS=A,DISP=L

// JOB WESTI --- BACKUP SYSRES TO TAPE ---

// ASSGN SYS000,TAPE

// ASSGN SYS003,DISK,VOL=DOSRES,SHR

// TLBL SYS000,'SYSRES.BACKUP'

// EXEC COPYDT

IJSYSRES.SD

Example 5. Convert FAVER JCL

This example illustrates the conversion of a Faver Restore job specifying the

Convert control statement via the // EXEC statement Parm:

// JOB CONVERT --- CONVERT FAVER TO DR. D ---

// ASSGN SYSPCH,PUNCH

// ASSGN SYS004,SYSIPT

// EXEC DRDCNVCU,PARM='CONVERT=FAVER,EOJ=YES,PWREOJ=YES'

* ** JOB JNM=FAVER,CLASS=0,DISP=L

* ** LST CLASS=A,DISP=D

// JOB FAVER

// ASSGN SYS000,180

// DLBL TESTFLE,'VSAM.TEST.FILE',,VSAM

// TLBL FVRIN,'VSAM.BACKUP'

// EXEC GVRESTOR,SIZE=AUTO

RESTORE

CATDEF=USER.CATALOG.ONE

CLUSTER

CL=CICS.TEMP.STOR

CLDD=TESTFLE

Page 466 Conversion from Other Backup Software Products

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example 6. Convert FAVER2 JCL

This example illustrates the conversion of a Faver2 Backup job specifying the

Convert control statement via the // EXEC statement Parm:

// JOB CONVERT --- CONVERT FAVER2 TO DR. D ---

// ASSGN SYSPCH,PUNCH

// ASSGN SYS004,SYSIPT

// EXEC DRDCNVCU,PARM='CONVERT=FAVER2,EOJ=YES,PWREOJ=YES'

* ** JOB JNM=FAVER2,CLASS=0,DISP=L

* ** LST CLASS=A,DISP=D

// JOB FAVER2

// ASSGN SYS000,180

// TLBL FVROUT,'VSAM.BACKUP'

// EXEC FAVER2,SIZE=AUTO

OPTION NOCOMPRESS EXO

OPEN DDN=FVROUT FOR STORE BLKSIZ=32K

STORE CATDD (IJSYSUC) DSN(P6750501.NEWBUS.OMNLOG)

CLOSE DDN=FVROUT

DRDCNVCU - Conversion Utility Page 467

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

User Exits

User Exit Functions Overview

Dr. D provides two types of user exits. User Exit Type 1 may be used during either SAVE or RESTORE operations. It allows user programs to Inspect, Modify, or Delete logical records during save or restore of files in logical record format.

This method should be used in most situations.

User Exit Type 2 may be used during RESTORE operations only. If allows user programs to Inspect or Generate logical records.

For both Type 1 and Type 2 exit programs, the following rules apply:

1. If user programs use UPSI switches, the UPSI operand must be used on the Dr. D control card to override that in the JCL.

2. Multiple Dr. D functions may be performed in one execution of Dr. D, including more than one user-exit program (or the same user-exit program more than once), with or without card data to one or more of the user-exit programs.

3. User-exit programs must not use 'STOP RUN' or ‘EOJ’ statements, use

'GOBACK' or ‘RETURN’ statements instead.

User Exit Type 1 – Inspect/Modify/Delete User Exit

Dr. D loads the user exit program into the partition. (Use an EXEC size large enough for both Dr. D and the user program). Before Dr. D processes each logical record, it passes the record to the user exit along with three one-byte flags. The three one-byte flags include:

• End-of-Exit flag. This flag allows for any end-of-job cleanup before

Dr. D continues. Specify ‘E’ to indicate end of job or to indicate the exit is going to be replaced by a different exit.

• Function flag. Specify ‘B’ to indicate save or ‘R’ to indicate restore.

• Delete flag. Specify ‘D’ to delete the current record. (If you have opted to save, the record is not written to the tape. If you have opted to restore, the record is not restored.)

Dr. D passes five address constants to the user exit as pointers to the logical record, the 'EOF' flag, the function indicator, the delete flag, and the logical record length. This means that the user exit must have a 'USING' or 'ENTRY' type statement that establishes the addressability of these five items.

If the user exit is written in ANS COBOL, the GSIDMNS0 module supplied on the Dr. D install tape must at link edit time be substituted for the IBM supplied

ILBDMNS0 module. This is most easily achieved by adding an INCLUDE to the link edit.

Page 468 User Exits

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

WARNING

: Do not replace the IBM Module.

Type 1 user exits require the USEREXIT operand on the SAVE|RESTORE control statements. Its format is: USEREXIT=NF/phasename where:

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

Examples of User Exit Type 1

Example: ANS COBOL

The following is an example of a Type 1 User Exit.

// JOB MYJOB

// OPTION CATAL

PHASE USERPROG,*

// EXEC FCOBOL

IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

PROGRAM-ID USERPROG.

AUTHOR.

DATE WRITTEN.

REMARKS.

ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

INPUT-OUTPUT SECTION.

FILE-CONTROL.

DATA DIVISION.

LINKAGE SECTION.

01 LOG-REC.

10 USER-DATA.

15 USER-FILED1 PIC ......

01 EOF-FLAG PIC X.

01 FUNC-IND PIC X.

01 DELETE-FLAG PIC X.

01 REC-LENGTH PIC S9(8) COMP.

PROCEDURE DIVISION USING LOG-REC END-OF-EXIT FUNC-IND

DELETE-FLAG REC-LENGTH.

IF END-OF-EXIT = 'E' THEN GOTO END-OF-JOB.

IF ......... THEN GO TO DELETE-RTN.

DELETE-RTN.

MOVE 'D' TO DELETE-FLAG. GOBACK.

END-OF-JOB. GOBACK.

INCLUDE GSIDMNS0

// EXEC LNKEDT

User Exit Type 1 – Inspect/Modify/Delete User Exit Page 469

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Example: Save with User Exit

This example performs a save operation using the user exit example from above to flag records for deletion.

// JOB U16 BACKUP WITH DELETE

// DLBL A.'VSAM.FILE'..VSAM,CAT=IJSYSCT

// TLBL TAPEOUT

// ASSGN SYS007,...

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

SAVE=NO,UPSI=111,BLOCKSIZE=65496

SAVE=VSAM,SFILENAME=A,VARIABLE=YES,FAST=YES,USEREXIT=NF/USERPROG,*

DTAPE=YES

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REWIND

Example: Save multiple files with different User Exits

This example saves three VSAM files, with user exit processing on the second and third file. The user exits are named 'USER1' and 'USER2'.

// JOB SAVE WITH USER EXIT

// TLBL TAPEOUT

// ASSGN SYS007,... ASSGN SYS007 TO TAPE IF NECESSARY

// DLBL A,'ORDER.DATA.BASE',,VSAM

// DLBL B,'MASTER.CARTON.DATA.BASE',,VSAM

// DLBL C,'FILLED.ORDER.DATA',,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=300K

SAVE=NO,UPSI=111,BLOCKSIZE=65496

SAVE=VSAM,SFILENAME=A,VARIABLE=YES,FAST=YES,AUTO=YES

SAVE=VSAM,SFILENAME=B,VA=YES,FAST=YES,AUTO=YES,USEREXIT=NF/USER1

SAVE=VSAM,SFILENAME=C,VA=YES,FAST=YES,AUTO=YES,USEREXIT=NF/USER2

SAVE=NO,TAPE=REWIND

Page 470 User Exits

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Restore with User Exit

This example restores the files saved in the previous example with identical user exit processing.

// JOB RESTORE WITH USER EXIT

// TLBL TAPEIN

// ASSGN SYS008,... ASSGN SYS008 TO TAPE IF NECESSARY

// DLBL A,'ORDER.DATA.BASE',,VSAM

// DLBL B,'MASTER.CARTON.DATA.BASE',,VSAM

// DLBL C,'FILLED.ORDER.DATA',,VSAM

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=300K

RESTORE=NO,UPSI=111,BLOCKSIZE=65496

RESTORE=VSAM,RFILENAME=A,AUTO=YES

RESTORE=VSAM,RFILENAME=B,AUTO=YES,USEREXIT=NF/USER1

RESTORE=VSAM,RFILENAME=C,AUTO=YES,USEREXIT=NF/USER2

RESTORE=NO,TAPE=RUN

User Exit Type 1 – Inspect/Modify/Delete User Exit Page 471

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

User Exit Type 2 – Generate Records User Exit

If the user exit is to generate some or all of the records to be restored by Dr. D, the following format should be used. Two basic types of user exits are provided.

In 'I/O' mode, there is no Dr. D tape involved. The user program receives from or presents to the Dr. D operation the logical record and accomplishes any other desired processing.

In 'EX' mode, a Dr. D format tape is involved and the user program is presented with the logical record as it is in transit to or from the disk file.

User programs can be any mix of 'IO' or 'EX' modes in any single execution of

Dr. D.

NOTE: The user-exits to examine a data tape being saved or restored are not provided. Further, there is no provision for deleting or adding a logical record in

'EX' mode, and no data alteration is possible. These provisions must be made in a program to invoke user-exits:

1. An entry point named 'USEREXIT' must be provided and linkage established to a common area for Dr. D control data. This area consists of 256 bytes in the following format:

The Dr. D parameter card for this operation - 80 bytes

Disk file identification field

Date (current if 'IO', as saved if 'EX')

Julian Day (current if 'IO', as saved if 'Ex')

Time (current if 'IO', as saved if 'EX')

DLBL type (S=SEQ, D=DAM, C=ISC, E=ISE)

- 44 bytes

- 8 bytes

- 3 bytes

- 8 bytes

- 1 byte

Reserved

2. A command to Dr. D in the form of a call to send, receive, or look at a record and establish linkage to the data area. 'PUTREC' sends a logical record to

Dr. D ('IO' only). 'GETREC' receives a logical record from Dr. D ('IO') or inspects a logical record being processed by Dr. D ('EX').

3. When using 'PUTREC', a signal is required to Dr. D that all is complete. This is accomplished by using 'PUTREC' to send Dr. D the data string 'END OF

DATA FILE'.

4. An exit from the user program to Dr. D.

'GETREC' and 'PUTREC' are mutually exclusive. In order for user-exit programs to execute properly, 'GETREC' or 'PUTREC' must be the first entry points in the link-edited program. This is most easily accomplished by placing 'INCLUDE

PUTREC' or 'INCLUDE GETREC' immediately after the 'PHASE...' card.

The only current use for DOCTOR-ERROR-FLAG is when an ISAM create encounters a key not greater than the previous key written. High-value is returned in the DOCTOR-ERROR-FLAG.

Page 472 User Exits

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Type 2 user exits require the USEREXIT operand on the Restore control statements. Its format is: USEREXIT=phasename/mm/tzzzzzz where:

phasename is the cataloged name of the user program with provisions as stated above.

zzzzzz processing mode flag. ‘IO’ to Send/Receive logical records; ‘EX’ to inspect logical records. is the type of core image phase. ‘L’ for relocatable and self-relocating programs; ‘A’ for absolute address programs. is either the decimal length of the program for relocatable and self-relocating (‘L’) programs or the hexadecimal load address for absolute address (‘A’) programs.

For Type 2 user exits also require an EXIT parameter statement.

EXIT Parameter Statement

Following the control statement which specifies the USEREXIT operand, an

'EXIT' parameter statement is also required:

For VSAM files, the format is 'EXITVSaabbbcccdddddeeeee' where:

EXITVS constant.

bbb

ccc

ddddd

eeeee

2-digit (leading zero required) number of tracks cylinder overflow ('00' VSAM)

3digit (leading zero required) number records/physical block ('000' VSAM)

3-digit (leading zero required) key length.

5-digit (leading zero required) logical record length

5-digit (leading zero required) starting position of key

(counting from 1)

For SAM or DAM files fixed blocked, the format is 'EXITFBfffffhhh' where:

EXITFB constant. fffff 5-digit (leading zero required) physical blocksize hhh 3-digit (leading zero required) number of logical records per block

For SAM or DAM files fixed unblocked, the format is 'EXITFUfffffccc' where:

EXITFU constant.

fffff 5-digit (leading zero required) physical blocksize

ccc 3-digit (leading zero required) key length. If a key is present, it must start in the first position of the logical record.

The 'EXIT' cards for FB/FU are for proper de-blocking and disk writing.

User Exit Type 2 – Generate Records User Exit Page 473

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Card input for user programs must follow immediately after the appropriate

'EXIT' parameter card and must be terminated by a '/*' card in addition to the

'/*' required for Dr. D.

Examples of User-Exit Type 2

Example: ANS COBOL

The following is an example of a Type 2 User Exit.

// JOB MYJOB

// OPTION CATAL

PHASE MYPROG,*

INCLUDE GETREC

// EXEC FCOBOL

IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

PROGRAM-ID. MYPROG.

WORKING-STORAGE SECTION.

77 DATA-END PIC X(16) VALUE 'END OF DATA FILE'.

01 MY-RECORD.

LINKAGE-SECTION.

01 DOCTOR-AREA.

05 DOCTOR-CARD PIC X(80).

05 DOCTOR-DTF-NAME PIC X(7).

05 DOCTOR-DISK-ID PIC X(44).

05 DOCTOR-DATE PIC X(8).

05 DOCTOR-JULIAN-DAY PIC 999.

05 DOCTOR-TIME PIC X(8).

05 DOCTOR-DLBL-TYPE PIC X.

05 DOCTOR-ERROR-FLAG PIC X.

05 FILLER PIC X(104).

PROCEDURE DIVISION.

ENTRY 'USEREXIT' USING DOCTOR-AREA.

READ-DOCTOR.

CALL 'GETREC' USING MY-RECORD.

IF MY-RECORD = DATA-END

GO TO END-OF-INPUT.

(or)

WRITE-DOCTOR.

CALL 'PUTREC' USING MY-RECORD.

IF DOCTOR-ERROR-FLAG = HIGH-VALUE

GO TO KEY-SEQUENCE-ERROR.

END-OF-JOB.

CALL 'PUTREC' USING DATA-END.

GOBACK.

Page 474 User Exits

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Example: Restore with User Exit

This example restores a VSAM file while invoking the type 2 user exit in the above example.

// JOB U15

// UPSI 00100000 LOG FILE COUNTS

// DLBL A,'ORDER.DATA.BASE',,VSAM,CAT=UCAT1

// TLBL TAPEIN

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// EXEC DRD,SIZE=200K

RESTORE=VSAM,RF=A,AUTO=YES,USER=MYPROG/IO/L104000

EXITVS000000090010100001 (USER-EXIT FILE DEFINITION)

** 06/29/01 498 1 1 (USER-EXIT PROGRAM DATA CARD)

/* (FOR USER-EXIT PROGRAM)

/* (FOR Dr. D )

User Exit Type 2 – Generate Records User Exit Page 475

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

GETTAPE Sub-Program

The GETTAPE subroutine can be called from a user program to access a data file found on a Dr. D save file. The save file must be on tape – this subroutine fails trying to open a save file stored on disk. This user program into which this subroutine is included can be relocatable, self-relocating, or linked at a fixed address as long as standard calling protocol is observed, such as produced by

COBOL and ASSEMBLER. Use of this subroutine eliminates any need to understand the complexities of the Dr. D save tape, including identification of embedded control information and compression techniques.

There are 4 functions included in the GETTAPE subroutine:

• SETTAPE

• PASSCARD

• GETTAPE

• CLOSTAPE

SETTAPE Function

The SETTAPE function provides for specifying the programmer logical unit number to be used to read the Dr. D save tape, for specifying the filename to be used to identify the save tape, and to identify the data file residing on the save tape. If used, the SETTAPE function must be called prior to the first call to the

GETTAPE function and all fields must be supplied. If no call is made to the

SETTAPE function, this subroutine defaults to programmer logical unit SYS008 for filename TAPEIN and reads the first data file found on the save tape. The data area passed when calling the SETTAPE function is as follows:

Start Position Length Field Description

1 6

7 7

Programmer logical unit number in the form

SYSnnn where nnn is a numeric value from 000 through 255.

Filename of the TLBL used to identify the save tape, left justified and padded with blanks if less than 7 characters.

14 46 Filename or file-ID of data file residing on the save tape. If specifying a filename, use only the first 7 positions of this field and pad with blanks if less than 7 characters. If specifying a file-ID, place a single quote in the first position, the 44-character file-ID in the next 44 positions (left justified and padded with blanks if less than 44 characters), and a single quote in the last position.

Page 476 GETTAPE Sub-Program

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Assembler Example of call to SETTAPE with FIND for File-ID:

CALL SETTAPE,(NEWOPTS)

NEWOPTS DS 0CL59

DC CL6’SYS010’

DC CL7’SVTAPE ’

DC C’’’’

DC CL44’MY DATASET FILE-ID’

DC C’’’’

Assembler Example of call to SETTAPE with FIND for Filename:

CALL SETTAPE,(NEWOPTS)

NEWOPTS DS 0CL20

DC CL6’SYS010’

DC CL7’SVTAPE ’

DC CL7’DISKFLE’

COBOL Example of call to SETTAPE with FIND for File-ID:

01 NEW-OPTIONS.

03 FILLER PIC X(6) VALUE ’SYS010’.

03 FILLER PIC X(7) VALUE ’SVTAPE’.

03 FILLER PIC X VALUE QUOTE.

03 FILLER PIC X(44) VALUE ’MY.DATASET.FILE-ID’.

03 FILLER PIC X VALUE QUOTE.

CALL ’SETTAPE’ USING NEW-OPTIONS.

COBOL Example of call to SETTAPE with FIND for Filename:

01 NEW-OPTIONS.

03 FILLER PIC X(6) VALUE ’SYS010’.

03 FILLER PIC X(7) VALUE ’SVTAPE’.

03 FILLER PIC X(7) VALUE ’DISKFLE’.

CALL ’SETTAPE’ USING NEW-OPTIONS.

Page 477

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

PASSCARD Function

The PASSCARD function provides for identifying the format of the data file to be read from the save tape. If used, the PASSCARD function must be called prior to the first call to the GETTAPE function. If no call is made to the PASSCARD function prior to the first call to the GETTAPE function, a control card is read from SYSIPT (using a standard DTFDI) to obtain this information, using the exact same format as described below. The data area passed when calling the

PASSCARD function is as follows:

Start Position Length Field Description

VS VSAM

IS ISAM

FB Fixed Length Blocked

FU Fixed Length Unblocked

UN Undefined

Page 478

VU bbbbb 5-digit unsigned zoned decimal blocksize lll 3-digit unsigned zoned decimal blocking factor (that is, number of logical records per block) bbbbb 5-digit unsigned zoned decimal blocksize kkk 3-digit unsigned zoned decimal key length (Use 000 if no key) bbbbb 5-digit unsigned zoned decimal blocksize xxx Not used bbbbb 5-digit unsigned zoned decimal blocksize kkk 3-digit unsigned zoned decimal key length (Use 000 if no key)

GETTAPE Sub-Program

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Assembler Example of call to PASSCARD for Fixed Blocked Records:

CALL PASSCARD,(FILEINFO)

FILEINFO DS 0CL14

DC CL4’TAPE’

DC CL2’FB ’

DC CL5’00800’

DC CL3’010’

Assembler Example of call to PASSCARD for VSAM records:

CALL PASSCARD,(FILEINFO)

FILEINFO DS 0CL6

DC CL4’TAPE’

DC CL2’VS ’

COBOL Example of call to PASSCARD for Fixed Blocked Records:

01 FILE-INFO.

03 FILLER PIC X(4) VALUE ’TAPE’.

03 FILLER PIC X(2) VALUE ’FB’.

03 FILLER PIC X(5) VALUE ’00800’.

03 FILLER PIC X(3) VALUE ’010’.

CALL ’PASSCARD’ USING FILE-INFO.

COBOL Example of call to PASSCARD for VSAM Records:

01 FILE-INFO.

03 FILLER PIC X(4) VALUE ’TAPE’.

03 FILLER PIC X(2) VALUE ’VS’.

CALL ’PASSCARD’ USING FILE-INFO.

Page 479

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

GETTAPE Function

The GETTAPE function yields the next logical record from the data file identified

(or defaulted to) in a preceding call to the SETTAPE function and described either by a preceding call to the PASSCARD function or by a control card provided as SYSIPT input. The first call to the GETTAPE function opens the save tape without any repositioning. Therefore, the save tape must have already been properly positioned. Data from each call to the GETTAPE function is stored in your program’s receiving area in the following formats:

VSAM KSDS and ESDS with Fixed Length Records saved with SAVE=VSAM and

VARIABLE=NO

1 x Actual Record

VSAM KSDS and ESDS saved with SAVE=LOGICAL or VSAM KSDS and ESDS saved with SAVE=VSAM and VARIABLE=YES

1 2 Actual Record Length + 4 (Binary)

5 x Actual Record

VSAM RRDS with Fixed Length Records saved with SAVE=VSAM and

VARIABLE=NO

Relative Record Number (Binary)

Actual Record

VSAM RRDS saved with SAVE=LOGICAL or VSAM RRDS saved with

SAVE=VSAM and VARIABLE=YES

1 2 Actual Record Length + 8 (Binary)

x x

Relative Record Number (Binary)

Actual Record

Blocked Fixed Length Records

Actual Record

Page 480 GETTAPE Sub-Program

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

1+k

Unblocked Fixed Length Records k x

Key (If any)

Actual Record

Blocked and Unblocked Variable Length Records

2 Key Length (Zero if no key) 1

9+k

2 k x

Actual Record Length + 4 (Binary)

Key (If any)

Actual Record

Undefined Length Records

Key Length (Zero if no key) 1 2

5 2 Actual Record Length (Binary)

9+k k x

Key (If any)

Actual Record

Regardless of file organization or record format, end of data file is always indicated by the 16-character literal ‘END OF DATA FILE’ placed in positions 1 through 16 of your program’s receiving area. Once end of data file has been indicated, only a single call to the CLOSTAPE function is allowed.

Assembler Example of call to GETTAPE:

CALL GETTAPE,(DATAREA)

CLC =CL16’END OF DATA FILE’,DATAREA

BE DFILEOF

DATAREA DS CL..

Page 481

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

COBOL Example of call to GETTAPE:

01 DATA-AREA.

01 FILLER REDEFINES DATA-AREA.

03 FILLER PIC X(16).

88 DA-END-OF-DATA-FILE VALUE ’END OF DATA FILE’.

03 FILLER PIC X(…).

CALL ’GETTAPE’ USING DATA-AREA.

IF DA-END-OF-DATA-FILE

GO TO END-OF-DATA-FILE.

CLOSTAPE Function

The CLOSTAPE function closes the save tape and should be the final call made to this sub-program. The tape is not repositioned when the close is accomplished. No data area is passed when call the CLOSTAPE function.

Assembler Example of call to CLOSTAPE:

CALL CLOSTAPE

COBOL Example of call to CLOSTAPE:

CALL ’CLOSTAPE’.

Page 482 GETTAPE Sub-Program

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

GETTAPE Example 1

Using COBOL, read a file to display the total of the values found in a certain field. The file has been saved by Dr. D and contains fixed 100-byte logical length records blocked 4 giving 400-byte physical records.

COBOL Source:

ID DIVISION.

PROGRAM-ID. 'SUMTAPE'.

ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

DATA DIVISION.

WORKING-STORAGE SECTION.

01 CHANGE-THE-SYSNUM-AND-FILENAME.

02 SYSNUM PIC X(6) VALUE 'SYS003'.

02 FILENAME PIC X(7) VALUE 'MASTER'.

02 FINDNAME PIC X(7) VALUE 'DDNAME '.

01 THE-SUM PIC 9(7) COMP-3 VALUE ZERO.

01 THE-RECORD-FROM-GETTAPE.

02 A-CERTAIN-FIELD PIC 9(5).

02 OTHER-STUFF PIC X(95).

01 FILLER REDEFINES THE-RECORD-FROM-GETTAPE.

02 FILLER PIC X(16).

88 EOD VALUE 'END OF DATA FILE'.

PROCEDURE DIVISION.

CALL 'SETTAPE' USING

CHANGE-THE-SYSNUM-AND-FILENAME.

GETTAPE-LOOP.

CALL 'GETTAPE' USING

THE-RECORD-FROM-GETTAPE.

IF NOT EOD

ADD A-CERTAIN-FIELD TO THE-SUM

GO TO GETTAPE-LOOP.

DISPLAY THE-SUM UPON CONSOLE.

CALL 'CLOSTAPE'.

STOP RUN.

Execution JCL:

// JOB SUMTAPE

// TLBL MASTER

// ASSGN SYS003,280

// EXEC SUMTAPE

TAPEFB00400004

Page 483

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

GETTAPE Example 2

Using COBOL, read a file to display the total number of salesmen that have sold more widgets than a figure supplied on a SYSIPT input transaction. This KSDS file contains fixed 90-byte length records and has been saved by Dr. D using

SAVE=VSAM and VARIABLE=NO.

COBOL Source:

IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

PROGRAM-ID. 'CNTIT'.

ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

DATA DIVISION.

WORKING-STORAGE SECTION.

77 NUMBER-OF-SALESMEN PIC X(6) COMP-3 VALUE 0.

01 THE-CARD.

02 WIDGETS PIC X(5)

02 FILLER PIC X(75).

01 THE-MASTER-RECORD.

02 KEY-IS-SALESMAN PIC X(5).

02 SALESMAN-NAME PIC X(30).

02 SALESMAN-ADR PIC X(50).

02 WIDGETS-SOLD PIC X(5).

02 A-BUNCH-OF-OTHER-FIELDS PIC X(100).

01 FILLER REDEFINES THE-MASTER-RECORD.

02 FILLER PIC X(16).

88 EOD VALUE 'THE END OF DATA FILE'.

PROCEDURE DIVISION.

ACCEPT THE-CARD.

CALL-GETTAPE-LOOP.

CALL 'GETTAPE' USING THE-MASTER-RECORD.

IF EOD GO TO THE-END-OF-FILE.

IF WIDGETS-SOLD GREATER THAN WIDGETS

ADD 1 TO NUMBER-OF-SALESMEN.

GO TO CALL-GETTAPE-LOOP.

THE-END-OF-FILE.

DISPLAY 'SALESMEN WHO SOLD MORE THAN'

WIDGETS 'WIDGETS IS' NUMBER-OF-SALESMEN

UPON CONSOLE.

STOP RUN.

Execution JCL:

// JOB CNTIT

// TLBL TAPEIN

// ASSGN SYS008,280

// EXEC CNTIT

07500

TAPEVS

Page 484 GETTAPE Sub-Program

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Messages

Dr. D issues printer and console messages that specify the probable reason for the message, any recommended action, and the disposition. Each message has a three-digit DOCTOR number. If return code processing is in effect, (see the RP control statement operand), then any message that would cause cancellation causes termination with return code 128. Any other message causes termination with a return code of 1 through 7 depending on the severity of the condition causing the message.

DOCTOR000 ID='file-id' NOT ON SYSxxx=cuu

Explanation: The requested file identifier is not in the DASD volume VTOC. The file identifier is obtained from the CIDENT=, RIDENT=, or SIDENT= operands or from the label referred to by the RFILENAME= or SFILENAME= operands. The job is canceled (RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• SYSxxx is the logical unit used for this assignment

Action:

• file-id is the requested file identifier

• cuu is the physical device address

Correct the control statement or DLBL statement. If the desired file exists but is expired, try adding the EX=YES operand.

DOCTOR001 INVALID OPERAND ON CTLCRD operand

Explanation: An operand has been specified that is either not a Dr. D control statement operand or is not an appropriate operand for the function being attempted. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value operand identifies the invalid Dr. D operand.

Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR002 INVALID OPERAND SAVE/RESTORE=xxx

Explanation: An unrecognized value was specified for the SAVE, COPY, or RESTORE operand. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value xxx identifies the unrecognized value.

Referring to the section for the table of SAVE, COPY, or RESTORE commands, correct the control statement.

DOCTOR003 INVALID OPERAND SYSNO=xxxxxx

Explanation: A programmer logical unit was specified that was not numeric or a system logical unit was specified that was not one of the following:

• SYSCAT

• SYSCLB

• SYSIPT

• SYSLNK

• SYSLST

• SYSRDR

• SYSREC

• SYSRES

• SYSRLB

• SYSLOG

Page 485

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

• SYSSLB

• SYSPCH

• SYSUSE

• SYSVIS

The job is canceled (RC16).

The value xxxxxx is the logical unit specified in error.

Correct the control statement. Action:

DOCTOR004 SYSxxx IS ASSIGNED IGN, UA, OR NON-DASD

Explanation: The logical unit number specified for a SAVE, COPY, or RESTORE operation is either assigned UA, IGN, or is not assigned to a DASD device. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value SYSxxx is the logical unit assigned in error

Correct the assignment.

DOCTOR005 REST=PUTLABEL BUT filxxxx NOT SD OR DA

Explanation: The label supplied for filxxxx referred to by the RFILENAME= operand showed a file type other than DA or SD. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value filxxxx is the filename of the label.

The RESTORE=PUTLABEL can only create format-1 labels for sequential (SD) or direct access (DA) files. Correct the label.

DOCTOR006 NO DLBL/EXTENTS FOR filxxxx

Explanation: The label referred to by either the RFILENAME= or SFILENAME= operand was not found.

The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value filxxxx is the filename of the label.

Supply the missing label.

DOCTOR007 FILE NAME UNSPECIFIED FOR SAVE/RESTORE=xxx

Explanation: The Dr. D operand identifying the required label was not specified:

• COPY=DATA. SF= and RF= both must be specified

• COPY=PC. RF= must be specified

• COPY=PR. RF= must be specified

Action:

• COPY=PS. RF= must be specified

• COPY=REORG. RF= must be specified

• RESTORE=DATA. RF= must be specified

• RESTORE=LIB. RF= must be specified with LIB=NEW

• RESTORE=PC. RF= must be specified

• RESTORE=PR. RF= must be specified

• RESTORE=PS. RF= must be specified

• RESTORE=REORG. RF= must be specified

• SAVE=DATA. SF= must be specified

The job is canceled (RC16).

The value xxx is DATA, LIBRARY, REORG, PC, PP, PR, or PS.

Supply the missing operand.

Page 486 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

DOCTOR008 RESTORING VOLUME FROM A xxxx TO A yyyy

Explanation: A volume restore is being attempted using a saved volume of a different device type. For example, the saved 3375 volume is trying to be restored to a 3380. The job is canceled

(RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• xxxx is the saved device type

Action:

• yyyy is the restore device type

Correctly specify the target (restore) device type.

DOCTOR009 INVALID OPERAND SAVE=xxx, BUT RESTORE=yyy

Explanation: A restore is being attempted using a saved file of a different type. For example, a SAVE=PR is being used for a RESTORE=PS or a SAVE=ALL is being used for a RESTORE=DATA.

The job is canceled (RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

Action:

• xx is the save type

• yyy is the restore type

Correctly specify the restore type.

DOCTOR010 RESTORING filxxxx OVERFLOWS ALLOCATED DISK AREA

Explanation: For COPY or RESTORE=PH, Dr. D has exceeded the RH= disk address. For COPY=DA or

RESTORE=DA, Dr. D has exceeded the allocated extent (SD or DA). For COPY=VSAM,

RESTORE=VSAM, COPY=LOGICAL (VSAM), or RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM), rerun the job adding the FD=C operand. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value filxxxx is the filename of the failing file.

Correctly specify the target (restore) device type.

DOCTOR011 INVALID OPERAND RMODE=x

Explanation: A value other than A (add-on), I (image), S (squeeze), or U (update) was specified for the

RMODE operand. The job is canceled (RC16).

The value x is the value specified for the RMODE= operand.

Action: Correctly specify the value for the RMODE= operand.

DOCTOR012 INVALID PHYSICAL ADDRESSES lower,upper FOR SYSxxx=cuu A yyyy

Explanation: A physical address specified on the Dr. D control statement either exceeded the cylinder/head or block capacity of the referenced DASD unit or the upper address physically comes before the lower address. The job is canceled (RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• lower is the beginning CKD cylinder/head (in the form CCCHH) or FBA block (in the form BBBBB)

• upper is ending CKD cylinder/head (in the form CCCHH) or FBA block (in the form

BBBBB)

• SYSxxx is the logical unit used for this assignment

• cuu is the physical device address

• yyyy is the DASD device type as follows:

⎯ 2311

⎯ 2314

⎯ 3330

⎯ 334A (M35)

⎯ 334B (M70)

Page 487

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

⎯ 3350

⎯ 3375

⎯ 3380

⎯ 3390

⎯ FBA

Correct the control statement values in error. Action:

DOCTOR013 PUTLABEL SPECIFIED IN COPY/SAVE MODE

Explanation: COPY=PUTLABEL or SAVE=PUTLABEL has been specified on a control statement. Only

RESTORE=PUTLABEL is allowed. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement to show RESTORE=PUTLABEL.

DOCTOR014 CONTINUATION NOT RECEIVED

Explanation: A control statement was read that indicated a continuation statement followed but the next statement was another operation (SAVE/RESTORE/COPY/FUNCTION) statement. The control statement with the continuation displays immediately after this message. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statements.

DOCTOR015 ERASE DISK SPECIFIED IN COPY/SAVE MODE

Explanation: COPY=ERASE or SAVE=ERASE has been specified on a control statement. Only

RESTORE=ERASE is allowed. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement to show RESTORE=PUTLABEL.

DOCTOR016 SAVING FROM/RESTORING TO PACK VOL SER NO volser SYSxxx=cuu

Explanation: Unless suppressed by specifying UPSI 1, this message is issued to confirm the requested action.

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• volser is the volume serial number

• SYSxxx is the logical unit used for this assignment

• cuu is the physical device address

Action: Do either of the following:

• Press Enter to continue the requested action

• Type “C” to cancel the job (RC16)

DOCTOR017 LINKED PHASE EXCEEDS LIMIT* TAPE NOT IPLABLE!!!

Explanation: During SAVE=IPL, the standalone supervisor exceeds the size limit. The job is canceled

(RC16).

Action: Assure the tape blocksize is within limits. If not, contact Dr. D product support.

DOCTOR018 ERROR ON IPL CREATION * TAPE NOT IPLABLE!!!

Explanation: During SAVE=IPL, an error occurred when writing to the tape. The beginning portion of the tape is the location where the IPL records are written, and no recovery is possible during IPL. Therefore, the beginning portion of the tape must be error-free because even the most insignificant error prompts this message. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Try a different tape output volume.

DOCTOR019 CORE DUMP DESIRED

Explanation: A questionable condition has occurred while running in diagnostic mode.

Action: Type either of the following:

Page 488 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

• “N” to cancel the job

• “Y” to cause a dump to be produced

DOCTOR020 EXECUTION TO RESUME

Explanation: A questionable condition (identified by an earlier message) has occurred requiring an operator decision.

Action: Type any of the following:

• “Y” to ignore the error

• “I” to ignore this and any other out-of-sequence errors that may occur for that file

• “N” to cancel the job (RC1)

DOCTOR021 RECORD DUMP DESIRED

Explanation: An ISAM sequence check or duplicate record condition has occurred. (RC1).

Action: Type either of the following:

• “Y” to display the current record

• “N” to bypass displaying the current record

DOCTOR022 PAGE FIX STAT IN BYTES xxxxx FIXED yyyyy NOT FIXED

Explanation: When executing in virtual mode with PFIX support generated in the supervisor, Dr. D attempts to PFIX some storage areas. This message displays when there is insufficient real storage.

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• xxxxx is the number of bytes PFIXed

• yyyyy is the number of bytes unable to be PFIXed

Action: None.

DOCTOR023 SYSxxx IS ASSIGNED IGN OR UA

Explanation: An attempt to set DASD file protect limits has failed because the SYSxxx used is assigned

UA or IGN. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value SYSxxx is the logical unit used for this assignment.

Correct the assignment.

DOCTOR024 SYSxxx IS ASSIGNED TO NON-DASD

Explanation: An attempt to set DASD file protect limits has failed because the SYSxxx used is not assigned to DASD. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value SYSxxx is the logical unit used for this assignment.

Correct the assignment.

DOCTOR026 NO MATCH ON SYSRES END CYL, ALLOC=xxx BUT LABEL=yyy

Explanation: The allocated number of cylinders exceeds the number of cylinders extracted from the label information. The job is canceled (RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• xxx is the sum of the specified or default library allocations plus begin cylinder (subdirectories, etc.) plus end cylinder (label area)

Action:

• yyy is the number of cylinders as computed from the extent card for the filename supplied in RFILENAME= operand

Correct the label information.

Page 489

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DOCTOR027 INVALID ALLOCATIONS CL=calloc RL=ralloc SL=salloc PL=palloc

Explanation: The allocation was not 'S' or numeric or the core image allocation was zero. The job is canceled (RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• calloc is the core image allocation (CKD=ccctt or FBA=bbbbbddd)

Action:

• ralloc is the relo allocation (CKD=ccctt or FBA=bbbbbddd)

• salloc is the source allocation (CKD=ccctt or FBA=bbbbbddd)

• palloc is the procedure allocation (CKD=ccctt or FBA=bbbbbddd)

Correct the allocation value(s).

DOCTOR028 PHYSICAL DISK ADDRESS MISSING/INVALID

Explanation: A function requiring the entry of disk start and end addresses is being performed and a required disk address is invalid or not entered. A disk address may be invalid for the following reasons:

• the start address exceeds the end address

• the end address exceeds the device limit

Action:

• for CKD disks, the head number is not within default/specified limits

The job is canceled (RC16).

Supply or correct the disk start and end addresses.

DOCTOR029 ERROR IGNORED, FILE NOT FOUND ON volser IS file-id

Explanation: This message is issued when ERROR=IGNORE has been specified rather than canceling when the requested file identifier is not found on the Dr. D save file.

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• volser is the volume serial number of the save file

Action:

• file-id is the requested file identifier

Processing continues with the next control statement.

DOCTOR030 REST=xxx BUT filnnnn NOT ON CYL BOUNDARY FILE START=ccchh,STOP=ccchh

Explanation: When copying or restoring either a private library (PS, PR, PC, or PP) or a SYSTEM residence file (reorg), the file must begin on a cylinder boundary. The job is canceled

(RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• xxx is the subject of the COPY|RESTORE= operand

Action:

• filnnnn is the default or explicit filename of a private library or SYSTEM residence file

• ccchh represents the cylinder/head numbers

Supply or correct the disk start and end addresses.

DOCTOR031 DIRTRKS=nn NOT NUMERIC

Explanation: The specified 2-digit directory tracks is non-numeric or zero or the specified 3-digit directory blocks is non-numeric or zero. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value nnn is the subject of the DIRTRKS= operand.

Specify a valid DIRTRKS= value.

Page 490 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

DOCTOR032 SAVE/REST=xxx ON SYSnnn=cuu BUT LIBRARY NON-EXISTENT

Explanation: RESTORE|COPY= with LIB=O, LIB=A operand or SAVE= was specified for a library, but the target library is either non-existent or not of the type specified. The job is canceled

(RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• xxx is the subject of the SAVE|REST|COPY operand

Action:

• nnn is the system or programmer logical unit number being used

• cuu is the volser being used

Correctly identify the target library.

DOCTOR033 LIBRARY=x INVALID OPERAND

Explanation: The value specified for the LIB= operand is not valid. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Specify a valid value for the LIB= operand.

DOCTOR034 RESTORE=xx BUT LIBRARY=NEW INVALID FOR A SYSTEM LIBRARY

Explanation: LIB=N is invalid when restoring a SYSTEM library. The job is canceled.

Action: Either pre-define the target SYSTEM library or use the 'REORG' function.

DOCTOR035 ENTER RESTORE DISK TYPE

Explanation: During a standalone restore, Dr. D needs to know the model of the target DASD.

Action: Respond with any of the following:

• 2311 for 2311

• 2314 for 2314 or 2319

• 3330 for 3330

• 334A for 3340 M35

• 334B for 3340 M70

• 3350 for 3350

• 3375 for 3375

• 3380 for 3380

• 3390 for 3390

• FBA for FBA

DOCTOR036 ENTER RESTORE DISK cuu

Explanation: During a standalone restore, Dr. D needs to know the device address of the restore disk.

Action:

The value cuu is the 3-digit channel and unit number device address of the restore disk.

Respond with the device address of the restore disk. If CUU, volser is entered, the restored disk will have its VOL1 serial changed to the 'volser' value.

DOCTOR037 PROGRAM CHECK

Explanation: A software error has occurred during a standalone restore. The job enters a permanent wait state.

Action: Rerun. If the problem reoccurs, take a standalone dump and contact Dr. D product support.

Page 491

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DOCTOR038 MACHINE CHECK

Explanation: An unexpected machine check has occurred during a standalone restore. The job enters a permanent wait state.

Action: Rerun the job.

DOCTOR039 UNRECOVERABLE ERROR ON TAPE

Explanation: A tape read error occurred during a standalone restore. The job enters permanent wait state.

Action: Clean the tape drive or use another drive and rerun.

DOCTOR040 VOLUME RESTORE COMPLETED-TYPE "END' IF THROUGH RESTORING OR PRESS ENTER OR TYPE "U" (UNLOAD

TAPE) TO RESTORE MORE VOLUMES

Explanation: The standalone restore of a disk is completed.

Action: If more disks are to be restored, press Enter (to leave current tape mounted) or type U (to unload the current tape). If finished, type END.

DOCTOR041 UNRECOVERABLE ERROR ON DISK

Explanation: A non-correctable disk I/O error has occurred during a restore. The job is canceled.

Action: None.

DOCTOR042 IPL SPECIFICATION IN SAVE/COPY MODE

Explanation: RESTORE=IPL or COPY=IPL was specified on the control statement. The job is canceled.

Action: Correct control statement to SAVE=IPL.

DOCTOR043 UNABLE TO FIND SPECIFIED FILE

Explanation: During a RESTORE, the specified file name could not be found on the save tape. Either the file name is incorrect, the file precedes the point at which searching began, or the wrong tape is mounted.

Action: If doing a RESTORE=LOGICAL (VSAM), check whether the SC= operand needs to be added when restoring to a catalog other than the catalog saved. If doing a

RESTORE=LOGICAL for non-VSAM operation, check whether the SV= operand needs to be added when restoring to a volser other than the volser saved.

DOCTOR044 CYLOFLOW=xx INVALID OPERAND

Explanation: The specified 2-digit cylinder overflow value is either non-numeric or exceeds the capacity for the particular restoring disk. The job is canceled (RC16).

The value xx is the value specified for the CY= operand.

Action:

2311 08

2314 18

3330 17

3340 10

Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR045 NRECDS=xx INVALID OPERAND

Explanation: The specified NRECDS= blocking factor is either zero or non- numeric. The job is canceled

(RC16).

Action:

The value xx is the value specified for the NR= operand.

Correct the control statement.

Page 492 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

DOCTOR046 DELETE CODE=pppphh INVALID OPERAND

Explanation: The specified position was non-numeric, zero, or greater than 4096 the specified hexadecimal delete code contained a non-hexadecimal value. The job is canceled (RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• pppp is the position number

Action:

• hh is the hexadecimal delete code

Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR047 CARDCOUNT=xx INVALID OPERAND

Explanation: The specified CARDCOUNT= value was either zero or non-numeric. The job is canceled

(RC16).

Action:

The value xx is the value specified for the CA= operand.

Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR048 CARDCOUNT=xx EXCEEDED

Explanation: One more than the expected number of control statements was read by Dr. D. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value xx is the value specified for the CA= operand.

Correct the number of control statements or the value specified for the 'CA=' operand.

DOCTOR049 WARNING!!! CARDS MISSING FROM JCL CARDCOUNT SHOULD BE xx BUT WAS yy

Explanation: The actual number of control statements that Doctor D was less than the value specified for the CARDCOUNT= operand. The job is canceled (RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• xx is the value specified for the CA= operand

Action:

• yy is the actual number of control statements read since and including the control statement where the CARDCOUNT= operand was specified but not included the endof-file ('/*') indicator

Replace yy with xx.

DOCTOR050 SEQNO=xx INVALID OPERAND

Explanation: The specified SEQNO= value was either zero or non-numeric. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value xx is the value specified for the SE= operand.

Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR051 SEQNO=xx BUT FILE IS ACTUALLY yy ON INPUT|OUTPUT

Explanation: The specified and actual sequence numbers do not match. For restores, this indicates a tape positioning problem. For saves or copies this indicates one or more control cards out of sequence. The job is canceled (RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

Action:

• xx is the value specified for the SE= operand.

• yy is the sequence number internally generated by Dr. D

As determined through problem resolution.

DOCTOR053 TAPE=xxx INVALID OPERAND

Explanation: The value specified for the TAPE= operand is invalid. The valid values for tape positioning are REW, RUN, or NOR. The valid values for other backup software product tape identifiers are F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, and F6. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement.

Page 493

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DOCTOR055 SKIP=xxx INVALID OPERAND

Explanation: The value specified for the SKIP= operand is not numeric. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR056 ISAM RESTORE filxxxx DASD ERROR at MBBCCHHR=mmbbbbcccchhhhrr

Explanation: ISAM LIOCS detected a disk error at the specified location. The job is canceled (RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• filxxxx is the filename of the restored/copied ISAM file.

• mm is the extent sequence number

Action:

• bbbb is the bin number

• cccc is the cylinder number

• hhhh is the head number

• rr is the record number

Rerun the job possibly relocating to a different DASD address.

DOCTOR057 ISAM RESTORE filxxxx WRONG LENGTH RECORD at MBBCCHHR=mmbbbbcccchhhhrr

Explanation: ISAM LIOCS detected a wrong length record at the specified location. The job is canceled

(RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• filxxxx is the filename of the restored/copied ISAM file.

• mm is the extent sequence number

• bbbb is the bin number

• cccc is the cylinder number

Action:

• hhhh is the head number

• rr is the record number

Rerun the job possibly relocating to a different DASD address.

DOCTOR058 ISAM RESTORE filxxxx PRIME DATA AREA FULL

Explanation: The prime data area is too small to contain the entire file. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value filxxxx is the filename of the restored/copied ISAM file.

Enlarge the prime data area and rerun the job.

DOCTOR059 ISAM RESTORE filxxxx CYLINDER INDEX AREA FULL

Explanation: The cylinder index area is too small to contain all of the cylinder index entries. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value filxxxx is the filename of the restored/copied ISAM file.

Enlarge the cylinder index area and rerun the job.

DOCTOR060 ISAM RESTORE filxxxx MASTER INDEX AREA FULL

Explanation: The master index area is too small to contain all of the master index entries. The job is canceled (RC16).

The value filxxxx is the filename of the restored/copied ISAM file.

Action: Enlarge the master index area and rerun the job.

DOCTOR061 ISAM RESTORE filxxxx PRIME DATA AREA OVERFLOW

Explanation: The prime data area is just one track too small (it cannot contain the EOF record.) The job is canceled (RC16).

Page 494 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Action:

The value filxxxx is the filename of the restored/copied ISAM file.

Enlarge the prime data area and rerun the job.

DOCTOR062 ISAM RESTORE filxxxx DUPLICATE RECORD

Explanation: A duplicate key was encountered when restoring or copying an ISAM file.

Action:

The value filxxxx is the filename of the restored/copied ISAM file.

Message DOCTOR021 and DOCTOR022 follow.

DOCTOR063 ISAM RESTORE filxxxx SEQUENCE CHECK

Explanation: An out-of-sequence key was encountered while restoring or copying an ISAM file.

Action:

The value filxxxx is the filename of the restored/copied ISAM file.

Message DOCTOR021 and DOCTOR022 follow.

DOCTOR064 BLOCK SIZE=xxxxx INVALID OPERAND

Explanation: The value specified for the BLOCKSIZE= operand was not numeric or the LBLOCKSIZE= has been specified in an attempt to reblock a spanned file. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value xxxxx is the value specified for the BL= or LB= operand.

Correct the control statement. Note that reblocking of spanned files is not supported.

DOCTOR065 UNPAIRED QUOTE ON CONTROL CARD

Explanation: A '/*' was encountered while scanning for the ending single quote. The job is canceled

(RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement(s).

DOCTOR066 SAVE TAPE CREATED ON mm/dd/yy AT hh-mm-ss

Explanation: When restoring, the date and time that the save tape was created is logged.

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• mm/dd/yy is the date the save tape was created

Action:

• hh-mm-ss is the time-of-day the save tape was created

Do either of the following:

• Press Enter to continue

• Type “C” to cancel Dr. D (RC16)

DOCTOR067 MEMBERLIST=x INVALID OPERAND

Explanation: The value specified for MEMBER= operand is invalid. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value x is the value specified for the ME= operand.

Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR068 PARTITION TOO SMALL FOR MEMBERLIST PARTITION TOO SMALL FOR PARTIAL SELECTION/REJECTION LIST

PARTITION TOO SMALL FOR VSAM CATALOG OBJECT LIST

Explanation: Insufficient partition storage is available to table the selectors supplied for the PARTIAL= or MEMBER= operands or to table the all the objects found in the VSAM catalog. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Run in a larger partition or reduce the number of selectors submitted.

DOCTOR069 SAVING FROM PACK VOL SER NO volser SYSxxx=cuu MOUNT svolid

Explanation: The SAVE control statement has both SVOLID and SSYSNO specified but the volume pointed to by SSYSNO does not match the SVOLID specification. The volume to be mounted on cuu is denoted by the MOUNT svolid.

Page 495

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Action: Do either of the following:

• Press Enter after mounting the right volume on the SSYSNO cuu

• Type “C” to cancel the job (RC16)

DOCTOR070 ISAM DLBL FOR xxxxxxx NOT ISC

Explanation: RESTORE=DATA is specified but the DLBL type for the ISAM file is not 'ISC'. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value xxxxxxx is the DLBL filename.

Correct the DLBL type to read ISC.

DOCTOR071 RTRACK nn NON-NUMERIC STRACK nn NON-NUMERIC

Explanation: The specified two decimal digit lower head limit is non-numeric. The job is canceled

(RC16).

Action:

The value nn is the specified lower head limit.

Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR072 RUPPER nn NON-NUMERIC SUPPER nn NON-NUMERIC

Explanation: The specified two decimal digit upper head limit is non-numeric. The job is canceled

(RC16).

Action:

The value nn is the specified upper head limit.

Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR073 INVALID OPERAND RTRACK=nn RUPPER=mm FOR SYSxxx=cuu dddd INVALID OPERAND STRACK=nn

SUPPER=mm FOR SYSxxx=cuu dddd

Explanation: A lower or upper head value has been specified that exceeds the capacity of the disk or the lower head value exceeds the upper head limit. The job is canceled (RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• nn is the specified lower head limit.

• mm is the specified upper head limit.

Action:

• xxx is the programmer logical unit number

• cuu is the DASD address dddd is the type of disk:

⎯ 2311 for 2311

⎯ 2314 for 2314 or 2319

⎯ 3330 for 3330

⎯ 334A for 3340 M35

⎯ 334B for 3340 M70

⎯ 3350 for 3350

⎯ 3375 for 3375

⎯ 3380 for 3380

⎯ 3390 for 3390

⎯ FBA for FBA

Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR074 LIBRARY FILLED UP WITH MEMBER=mmmmmmmm FOR RESTORE=xxx

Explanation: While restoring/copying the indicated library, Dr. D ran out of room in the library area.

The indicated member was the first one that could not fit. The job continues but the indicated member and all following members for that library are not restored/copied

(RC2).

Page 496 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Action:

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• mmmmmmmm is the first member that would could not fit

• xxx is the filled library

Enlarge the library and rerun the restore/copy process.

DOCTOR075 DIRECTORY FILLED UP WITH MEMBER=mmmmmmmm FOR RESTORE=xxx

Explanation: While restoring/copying the indicated library, Dr. D ran out of room in the directory area.

The indicated member was the first one that could not fit. The job continues but the indicated member and all following members for that library are not restored/copied

(RC2).

Action:

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• mmmmmmmm is the first member that would could not fit

• xxx is the filled library

Enlarge the library and rerun the restore/copy process.

DOCTOR076 RECORD rrr ON TRACK CYL-ccc HEAD-hh THINKS IT IS ON CYL-xxx HEAD yy

Explanation: While saving/copying a disk, Dr. D has encountered a record whose count area does not reflect the actual cylinder/track on which it resides. While the incorrect count area remains on the save disk, the correct count area is reflected on the save tape or copied disk. Note that DITTO may not always report the bad record(s). The job continues (RC2).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• rrr is the record number containing the error

• ccc is the cylinder number containing the error record

• hh is the track number containing the error record

• xxx is the cylinder number reflected in the error record

• yy is the track number reflected in the error record

Action: None.

DOCTOR077 RESTORE TAPE NOT A Dr.D TAPE

Explanation: The tape input to Dr. D is not recognizable as a Dr. D tape. You either mounted an incorrect tape or you positioned the correct tape incorrectly. If you are processing a save tape produced by certain other disk utility systems (identified by the presence of the TAPE=Fn operand), then this message indicates that the tape input to Dr. D was not recognizable as a tape produced by the other disk utility.

Action: Mount the correct tape and press Enter or type “cancel” (RC16).

DOCTOR078 INPUT BLOCKSIZE=xxxxx EXCEEDS Dr.D BLOCKSIZE=yyyyy

Explanation: An input file's blocksize is larger than Dr. D's buffer. The job is canceled (RC16)

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• xxxxx is the blocksize of the input tape.

Action:

• yyyyy is the current blocksize of the Dr. D program.

Correct the control statement to reflect a sufficient BL= value.

DOCTOR079 UNKNOWN OR UNSUPPORTED FILETYPE=x

Explanation: During a SAVE or RESTORE function, Dr. D has encountered a file whose filetype (dataset organization) is not supported. The filetype encountered displays in the message. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement to include only RESTORE commands or set UPSI bit 6 to 0.

Page 497

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DOCTOR083 RESTORE=REORG filxxxx DOES NOT BEGIN ON FIRST TRACK OF DISK

Explanation: The file specified in the RF= operand does not begin on relative track one of the CKD disk or relative block 2 of the FBA disk. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the extent card and rerun.

DOCTOR084 RESTORING ISAM/VSAM DATA TAPE PARAMETERS NON-NUMERIC DT=aabbbcccdddddeeeee

Explanation: The specified data tape parameter is non-numeric. The job is canceled (RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

Action:

• aa = NO. Tracks cylinder overflow ('00' VSAM)

• bbb = NO. Logical records/physical block ('000' VSAM)

• ccc = Key length

• ddddd = Logical record length

• eeeee = Starting position of key (relative to 1)

Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR085 DATE=nnnnn INVALID, NON-NUMERIC OR OMITTED

Explanation: During a RE=EXPIRDATE function, the required DATE= operand was either omitted or invalid. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR086 DISK READ ERROR DOCTOR086 DISK READ ERROR IGNORED

Explanation: A disk read error has occurred (the job is canceled RC16), or has occurred and been ignored

(the job continues RC2).

Action: None.

DOCTOR087 CONTROL CARD TABLE OVERFLOW

Explanation: UPSI bit 6 (// UPSI XXXXXX1) is on and more control cards have been submitted than can fit in memory. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Either remove UPSI bit 6 setting or reduce the number of control cards by splitting the population among several Dr. D job steps.

DOCTOR088 CONTROL CARD HAS NEITHER FIND= NOR RF=

Explanation: UPSI bit 6 (// UPSI XXXXXX1) is on and a control card was entered that specified neither the FIND= nor RF= operand. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR089 Dr.D SOFTWARE ERROR

Explanation: Dr. D has detected an illogical condition during processing. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: If option dump was not in effect, re-submit the job with the PARTDUMP option. After the dump has been produced, contact your Dr. D representative.

DOCTOR090 INSUFFICIENT LIBRARY WORK SPACE

Explanation: There is not enough space in the library to store a member. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Take the necessary steps to ensure sufficient library space is available. Or, restore to a different library that already has sufficient library space available.

Page 498 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

DOCTOR091 ASSUMED/SPECIFIED BLOCK SIZE (aaaaa) LESS THAN BLOCK SIZE(bbbbb) found at cylinder cccc, head hh, record r

Explanation: Dr. D has encountered a physical block greater than the default or specified blocksize. The job is canceled (RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• ccc is the cylinder

Action:

• hh is the track

• r is the record

Increase the blocksize to at least track capacity (using BL=) and rerun. In case of some disk errors, a count area may be read that indicates a physical block exceeding track capacity, usually in an unused area of the disk. The erase function can, in some cases, be used to clear the bad count area.

DOCTOR092 LOGICAL RECORD TOO LARGE FOR SPECIFIED BLOCK SIZE

Explanation: Dr. D has encountered a physical block greater than the default or specified blocksize. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Increase the blocksize to at least track capacity (using BL=) and

DOCTOR093 BLOCK SIZE NOT EVENLY DIVISIBLE BY SPECIFIED LOGICAL RECORD LENGTH

Explanation: The block size is not an even multiple of the specified logical record size. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR094 UPSI XXXXXX1X IS SPECIFIED, BUT SAVE AND RESTORE BOTH SPECIFIED

Explanation: The UPSI setting indicates that a MATCHING RESTORE is to be performed, but a mixture of restore, save, copy, function, selector and/or automatic definition override control statements have been entered. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement population to include only RESTORE commands. Or, set

UPSI bit 6 to 0.

DOCTOR095 LIBR UNABLE TO DEFINE SPECIFIED LIBRARY

Explanation: The LIBR program has failed trying to define a library (LIB=NEW). The job is canceled

(RC16).

Action: Review LIBR output on SYSLST.

DOCTOR096 LIBRARY DISK ERROR/INVALID LIBRARY FORMAT

Explanation: An unformatted track has been detected or an unrecoverable disk error has occurred within an area of the library being read or written. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Run the IBM LIBR test function.

DOCTOR097 DIRECTORY ERROR PROCESSING SUBLIBRARY ssssssss

Explanation: An error has been detected in a sublibrary directory. Processing of that sublibrary is terminated and processing continues with the next sublibrary, if possible (RC2).

Action:

The value ssssssss is the sublibrary with the failing directory.

Run the LIBR test function.

DOCTOR098 BACKUP NOT SAVE ALL/CUR OR WRONG DEVICE TYPE

Explanation: During standalone RESTORE, Dr. D found tape data that was inconsistent with the required backup type or device type.

Action: Make sure that the correct tapes are mounted in the right order. If the problem persists, try using different tape drives. If the VSE system is operational, try the restore under VSE. If a

VM operating system is available, try the standalone under VM.

Page 499

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DOCTOR099 INADEQUATE MEMORY ALLOCATED TO PARTITION

Explanation: Insufficient partition memory is available to allow allocation of required buffers and tables for the specified function. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Run in a larger partition or adjust or specify the SIZE= operand on the EXEC Job Control statement.

Page 500 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

DOCTOR100 SAVE/RESTORE ...

Explanation: This is a SYSLOG informational message, produced if UPSI bit 2 or PRINT=YES|BOTH has been specified, for reporting statistics. It may include one or more of the following entries:

Function DATA=DA

DATA=ISAM

DATA=LOGICAL

DATA=SD

DATA=VSAM

LIB=LI

LIB=PC

LIB=PP

LIB=PR

LIB=PS

LIB=SC

LIB=SP

LIB=SR

LIB=SS

PHYSICAL

VOL=ALL

VOL

VOL=CUR

Statistic ACTIVE BLKS

BLKS

CYLOFLOW

DATALEN

DELETED BLKS

DIRTRKS

EOF

KEYLEN

KEYLOC

LABCYL

LIBCYL

LOG RECDS

MEMBERS

MEMBER BLKS

Blocks occupied by members

Physical blocks read/written (w/ EOF)

CORE library allocation (cyl + dir)

Cylinder overflow

Data length

Blocks that can be recovered by condense

Tracks in directory

EOF address (cuu and cccchhr) read/written

File‐ID

Key length

Key location

Label cylinder address

Logical records deleted/read/written

Members read/written

Member blocks read/written

MEMBER BLKS

MAX RECSIZE

NRECDS

NUMBER SYNONYM BLKS

NUMBER SYNONYMS

RFILE

SEQUENCE ERRORS

SFILE

Action: None.

Member blocks read/written

Maximum AIX record size

Blocking factor

Blocks occupied by synonyms

Members replaced by LIB=A

PROC library allocation (cyl + dir)

Dtfname of restored file

RELO library allocation (cyl + dir)

Number of key sequence

Dtname of saved file

SOURCE library allocation (cyl + dir)

Page 501

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DOCTOR101 ...

Explanation: Continuation of message DOCTOR100. See DOCTOR100 explanation.

Action: None.

DOCTOR102 ...

Explanation: Continuation of message DOCTOR100. See DOCTOR100 explanation.

Action: None.

DOCTOR105 SD-TO-ISAM PARAMETERS MISSING / INVALID

Explanation: The parameter record passed to the DOCTOR98 load module was missing one or more entries or reflected invalid value(s).

Action: Correct the entries in the parameter record.

DOCTOR106 UNABLE TO ACCESS LIBRARY/SUBLIBRARY

Explanation: The library or sublibrary is not accessible for restore by LIBR. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Assure the correct library or sublibrary is being accessed and/or no other task has exclusive control of the target library or sublibrary.

DOCTOR107 UNABLE TO CREATE SUB-LIB

Explanation: LIBR has failed to successfully define a sublibrary. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Assure no other task has exclusive control of the target library or sublibrary and that adequate space exists to accommodate a new sublibrary.

DOCTOR109 SPECIFIED BLOCK SIZE EXCEEDS TRACK CAPACITY

Explanation: While restoring a data tape, the specified physical block size exceeds the track capacity of the target disk. This blocksize is either the result of multiplying the logical record size by the number of records per block (LR times NR) or the maximum blocksize specified for variable blocked format (LB). The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR110 BLOCK COUNT ERROR-BLOCKS READ=mmmmmmm, BLOCK CONTROL=nnnnnnn, FILE=fffffff,'file-id'

Explanation: While reading a backup tape, a block count error was detected in the file and file-ID indicated. This is usually the result of a hardware or tape media failure. Processing continues with message DOCTOR20 (RC2).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• mmmmmmm number of blocks actually read

• nnnnnnn number of blocks expected

• fffffff filename of the file where the error occurred

• file-id is the file-ID of the file where the error occurred

Action: None.

DOCTOR111 VSAM RECORD COUNT DISCREPANCY DATASET='file-d' SAVED=mmmmmm CATALOG=nnnnnn

Explanation: Fast VSAM backup saved record count disagrees with the catalog. The job continues but the discrepancy should be investigated (RC1).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• file-id is the file-ID of the file where the error occurred

• mmmmmmm number of records actually saved

• nnnnnnn number of records expected as stated in the catalog

Action: None.

Page 502 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

DOCTOR112 VSAM SEQUENCE ERROR

Explanation: A VSAM SAVE function with FAST=YES specified has detected a key out of sequence in a

KSDS file. This condition can occur when the VUSE=SAVE has also been specified and the file is open for update to another task. The SAVE continues (RC2).

Action: Retry the SAVE function changing to FAST=NO and VUSE=CANCEL.

DOCTOR113 INCONSISTENT OPERANDS SPECIFIED

Explanation: Operands have been specified that do not logically go with the function being performed.

An example would be specifying file type operands with non-file type operations. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR114 LIBRARY HAS OVER 16 EXTENTS

Explanation: Proceeding with the library create/extend feature would cause the target library to exceed the limit of 16 extents.

Action: None.

DOCTOR115 LIBRARY HAS NO ADDITIONAL EXTENTS

Explanation: The library extend feature has determined that the target library cannot be extended. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Do either of the following:

• If the library is in VSAM space, perform a listcat to show how many extents exist.

• If the Library is in non-VSAM space, list the VTOC and compare with the JCL

EXTENT cards.

DOCTOR116 CONTROL INTERVAL FORMAT ERROR IN FILE (file id)

Explanation: While saving a VSAM file, one or more control intervals have been found to be in an incorrect format, possibly due to VSAM CI split processing. The job continues (RC2).

Action: Check to see that the file is valid. If the file is usable, you can use the backup to restore the file, reorganizing and correcting any format errors that previously existed.

DOCTOR119 RMODE=UPDATE SPECIFIED BUT NO RECORD FOUND

Explanation: COPY/RESTORE=PHYSICAL WITH RM=U has been specified but no disk block has been found on the CKD disk at the specified cylinder-head-record. The job is canceled (RC255).

Action: Check the disk address to see that it is correct. If it is, then print the disk track to insure that a block exists at that location.

DOCTOR120 NO AIX DD-NAME/NUMBER ENTERED FOR AIX BUILD FUNCTION (AF=)

Explanation: FUNCTION=BUILD has been invoked but no AF= operand has been specified.

Action: Add the AF= operand and rerun the job.

DOCTOR121 NEITHER SFILENAME NOR RFILENAME ENTERED FOR AIX BUILD FUNCTION

Explanation: FUNCTION=BUILD has been invoked, but the base cluster has not been specified by either

SF= or RF=. The job is canceled.

Action: Add the SF/RF= operand(s) and rerun the job.

Page 503

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DOCTOR122 BUILD INDEX FUNCTION ABNORMAL TERMINATION ERROR CODE=xxx

Explanation: Abnormal termination of build AIX function has occurred. The job is canceled. The error code (xxx) specifies the cause as follows:

Code Cause

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

AIX is not defined in VSAM catalog

JCL or CATALOG error ; Check to see that AF= operand matches the DLBL for the AIX

Build file specified not defined as AIX

AIX open error

The AF= operand specifies more than 99 files

Sort initialization error

Invalid AIX key length

011

012

013

014

VSAM AIX write (put) error

AIX maximum record length exceeded

VSAM AIX MODCB failure

VSAM AIX OPEN/CLOSE failure

016

017

018

019

020

VSAM Catalog read error

VSAM Catalog write error

AIX key defined to small

Invalid KEY= control statement

Invalid unique= control statement

021

022

023

Invalid SELECT statement record field

Invalid SELECT statement expression

Invalid SELECT statement compare field

024

025

Invalid SELECT statement equation symbol

Select statement group compare not ended

Correct as indicated. Action:

DOCTOR123 NONUNIQUE KEY FOUND FOR AIX=aaaaaaa

Explanation: The VSAM AIX build function has found non-unique keys while building an AIX defined for unique keys. This AIX is not created and processing continues.

The value aaaaaaa is the filename of the failing AIX.

Action: Ensure that the AIX is defined correctly.

DOCTOR124 MISSING AIX KEY FIELD, AIX=aaaaaaa

Explanation: The VSAM AIX build function has read a logical record that is too short to contain the specified keys. Processing continues, but records may be dropped from the AIX.

Action:

The value aaaaaaa is the filename of the failing AIX.

Assure the AIX is defined correctly and that the correct base cluster is used. If a compression package is in use, see that decompressed records are passed to DR. D.

Page 504 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

DOCTOR125 ENTERED WORK= PARAMETER INVALID

Explanation: The parameter entered by the WORK operand is not valid.

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR126 FILE SELECTION COMPLETE, OK TO INTERRUPT

Explanation: A RESTORE=LOGICAL function with PARTIAL=SE/RE is being performed and the file selection process is complete. Processing continues. You can suppress this message by setting the DOCTOR126 PRINT OPTION to NO in the Dr. D default options.

Action: If you want to skip to a new tape volume, you can now request end-of-volume processing

(see DOCTOR616 message).

DOCTOR130 DEVICE nnnn SUBCHANNEL NUMBER NOT KNOWN

Explanation: During standalone restore a subchannel is specified that is invalid or not available.

Action:

The value nnnn is the subchannel number.

Restart the standalone process entering a usable number.

DOCTOR131 SUBCHANNEL nnnn DEVICE NUMBER NOT KNOWN

Explanation: During standalone restore a subchannel is specified that is invalid or not available.

Action:

The value nnnn is the subchannel number.

Restart the standalone process entering a usable number.

DOCTOR132 SUBCHANNEL IS DISABLED FOR DEVICE

Explanation: During standalone restore a subchannel is specified that is not enabled.

Action: Restart the standalone process entering a usable number.

DOCTOR133 DISK COMMAND REJECT I/O FAILURE

Explanation: During standalone RESTORE, a disk I/O has failed. The most likely cause is that the receiving disk is too small to contain the disk being restored.

Action: Check to see that the receiving disk is at least as large as the saved disk and that the device type and model number are the same. If restoring under VM, see that the virtual disk is defined at least as large as the saved disk.

DOCTOR146 BIM-EPIC CATALOG NOT UPDATED FOR volser - RC=nnn

Explanation: While restoring data specifying AREA=COMPACT,DM=E, the BIM-EPIC catalog was not updated. The return code (nnn) specifies the reason as follows:

Code Cause

001: Invalid TSIDSRV function code

002: Insufficient GETVIS for TSIDSRV

003: BIM-EPIC not active (per TSIDSRV)

004: TSIDSRV not authorized

005: TSIDSRV no function data area address

Action:

101: Unable to CDLOAD the BIM-EPIC TSIDSYS2 phase

102: Not running BIM-EPIC or running BIM-EPIC prior to release 6.1B

103: Unable to CDLOAD the BIM-EPIC TSIDSRV phase

The volume is correctly restored but the extent information for the restored BIM-EPIC catalog versions is not correctly reflected in the BIM-EPIC catalog. The files are still accurately accessible through BIM-EPIC even with this inconsistency.

Page 505

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DOCTOR147 TRACK CAPACITY EXCEEDED AT CYLINDER ccc, HEAD hh, RECORD r

Explanation: While restoring data to a CKD type disk, a block being restored does not fit in the remaining space on the track. The job is canceled (RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• ccc is the cylinder

Action:

• hh is the track

• r is the record

If the backup is from a disk of the same type and track capacity, make sure the tape has no errors and that the correct backup is on the tape by running FUNCTION=LTAPE.

DOCTOR148 FILE SAVED FROM FBA DISK IN NON-CI FORMAT CANNOT BE RESTORED TO CKD DISK- NO DATA RESTORED

Explanation: A file saved from a FBA disk was in non-CI format so the logical blocksize cannot be determined for restore to a CKD disk. The file is opened, creating a format 1 label in the

VTOC, but no data is restored and processing continues (RC2). As an alternative, it may be possible to restore this file to a CKD disk using the DATA TAPE feature.

Action: None.

DOCTOR149 LAST EXTENT FOR DISK FILE 'TAPEOUT', AT DISK ADDRESS low-disk-address high-disk-address, LAST

ADDRESS WRITTEN IS last-disk-address

Explanation: The tape file TAPEOUT has been directed to disk and, at end of job, this message allows the user to see how much of the last (or only) extent has been used (before truncation by a disk management system, if any). Normal end of job follows. You can suppress this message by setting the DOCTOR149 PRINT OPTION to NO in the Dr. D default options.

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• low-disk-address is the beginning of the last (or only) extent

• high-disk-address is the end of the last (or only) extent

• last-disk-address is the address of the EOF record

Action: None.

DOCTOR150 UNABLE TO OPEN VSAM FILE. VSAM ERR CODE=xxx

Explanation: The VSAM file could not be opened. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value xxx is the VSE/VSAM error code (in decimal)

See VSE/VSAM Return and Error Codes in the VSE Messages and Codes manual or use the VSE/ESA Explain facility for message VSAMOPEN.

DOCTOR151 UNRECOVERABLE ERROR ON VSAM FILE. (VSAM CODE=xxx RETURN CODE FROM GET|PUT yyy) FILE file-id

Explanation: An unrecoverable error was returned from a VSE/VSAM request function. The VSAM

CODE and RETURN CODE FROM GET|PUT are included in the message text only when available. The job is canceled (RC16).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• xxx is the VSAM error code (in decimal)

• yyy is the VSAM return code (in decimal)

Action:

• file-id is the file-ID of the file where the error occurred

See VSE/VSAM Return and Error Codes in the VSE Messages and Codes manual or use the VSE/ESA Explain facility for message VSAMREQU.

DOCTOR152 VSAM FILE IS VARIABLE, BUT VA=YES NOT SPECIFIED

Explanation: While saving a VSAM file, a logical record is encountered whose length varies from the defined size, but the backup is defined for logical records whose length is always equal to the defined size. The job is canceled (RC16).

Page 506 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Action: Add the VS=YES operand on the Dr. D control statement or change the default VARIABLE

OPTION default to YES.

DOCTOR153 GETVIS UNABLE TO ALLOCATE

Explanation: Insufficient memory is available to satisfy a GETVIS request. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Resubmit the job in a partition allocated with more memory or specify/reduce the SIZE= operand.

DOCTOR154 SA/RE=LO SPECIFIED WITHOUT SVOL/RVOL OR SCAT/RCAT

Explanation: The SV/RV and SC/RC operands are used to determine whether SA/RE= LOGICAL is to be driven by a VTOC or VSAM catalog. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Add the appropriate SV/RV or SC/RC operand.

DOCTOR159 NUMBER OF TRACKS TO BE SAVED- NNNNNNN NOT EQUAL TO NUMBER SAVED- NNNNNNN

Explanation: The number of tracks to be saved in an extent is not equal to the number of tracks actually saved. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: This is probably due to a disk I/O failure. Rerun to see if the failure is consistent. Run the

ICKDSF ANALYZE function if the problem reoccurs.

DOCTOR160 INVALID TIME STAMP ENTERED

Explanation: The time stamp entered (TSTAMP=) for file or member selection is either invalid or inconsistent with the IPL date. If a relative Time Stamp value is entered (TS=> or TS=<), the value entered must not reference a date prior to January 1 of the prior year. If an absolute

Time Stamp value is entered (TS=yyddd), the value entered must not reference a future date or a date prior to January 1 of the 5th year prior to the machine IPL date. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the TS= operand value.

DOCTOR161 INVALID EXPIRATION OPERAND ENTERED

Explanation: The value entered for the Expiration (EX=) operand is not valid. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the EX= operand value.

DOCTOR170 CATALOG ERROR WHILE DEFINING DATASET 'xxxx'

Explanation: VSAM returned an error to Dr. D while defining a VSAM cluster. The job is canceled

(RC16).

Action:

The value xxxx is the cluster name of the failing file.

Consult the VSE Messages and Codes manual for an explanation of the IDC message(s) that follow or use the VSE/ESA Explain facility for message VSAMRESN.

DOCTOR171 NO CATALOG INFORMATION FOR VSAM FILE xxxx CAT=yyyy

Explanation: Dr. D could find no entry in the VSAM catalog for the VSAM file. If a SAVE=VSAM function is used, a JCL error is the likely cause. If a SAVE=LOGICAL function is used, the file has probably been deleted by another job or task.

Action:

The value xxxx is the cluster name of the failing file yyyy is the catalog filename containing the failing file.

Unless ERROR=IGNORE has also been specified, Dr. D waits for a response of either

IGNORE (to treat the file as null and which also causes the file to be skipped during restore) or CANCEL (to cancel the job RC16). If ERROR=IGNORE has been specified for

SA=LO, the job proceeds as though IGNORE was the response.

DOCTOR172 NO LABEL INFORMATION FOR VSAM FILE xxxx

Explanation: Dr. D was unable to locate any label information for the referenced VSAM file. The job is canceled (RC16).

Page 507

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Action:

The value xxxx is the filename of the failing file.

Supply a label for the referenced VSAM file.

DOCTOR173 UNSUPPORTED VSAM OBJECT TYPE x

Explanation: Dr. D encountered a VSAM object that it did not recognize. The job is canceled (RC16).

The value x is the single character identifying the VSAM object, such as:

• A = Non-VSAM

• C = Cluster

• D = Data

• E = Extension

• F = Free

Action:

• G = Alternate Index

• I = Index

• L = Control Record

• R = Path

• U = User Catalog

• V = Volume Extension

• Y = Upgrade Set

Generate an IDCAMS LISTCAT for the failing cluster and call Dr. D product support.

DOCTOR174 VSAM CATALOG OPEN ERROR

Explanation: VSAM returned an error when Dr. D tried to open the catalog for read only. The job is canceled (RC16)

Action: See VSE/VSAM Return and Error Codes in the VSE Messages and Codes manual or use the VSE/ESA Explain facility for message VSAMOPEN for the VSAM message that precedes this message.

DOCTOR175 DATASET 'xxxx' IN USE

Explanation: During a VSAM logical save Dr. D encountered a file open in another partition.

Action:

The value xxxx is the file-ID of the failing file.

Depending upon the specified or default setting for the VUSE operand. Refer to the following table.

Action Result

CANCEL The job is canceled (RC16).

IGNORE

NULL

The file is ignored and not saved.

The file is saved as a null file.

SAVE The file is saved anyway, even though errors may be encountered.

OPERATOR The operator is given the opportunity to respond with CANCEL,

IGNORE, NULL, or SAVE.

DOCTOR176 DATASET 'xxxx' EMPTY - IGNORED

Explanation: The VNULL operand in a VSAM logical SAVE was set to IGNORE and Dr. D encountered an empty file. The file is ignored and processing continues.

The value xxxx is the file-ID of the null file.

Action: None.

Page 508 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

DOCTOR179 DEFINING VSAM DATASET 'xxxx' DOCTOR179 DELETING VSAM DATASET 'xxxx'

Explanation: This is an information message issued when invoking VSAM for a DELETE or a DEFINE function. Processing continues.

The value xxxx is the file-ID of the VSAM Dataset.

Action: None.

DOCTOR181 NO AVAILABLE PROGRAMMER LOGICAL UNITS

Explanation: A temporary assignment cannot be made due to lack of any unassigned programmer logical units. If 'SAVE/RESTORE= LOGICAL' (VTOC) is in operation, a contiguous set of permanently unassigned programmer logical unit numbers (SYS numbers) are required, one for each disk volume (either specified directly as a real volser or indirectly by specifying a disk pool, at the SV/RV operand. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Use the VSE LISTIO command to display the partition assignments. Assure enough programmer logical units are available.

DOCTOR182 VSAM VOLUME 'XXXXXX' REQUIRED

Explanation: SAVE has determined that this volume contains data for the cluster being saved, but the volume is not currently mounted. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Mount the correct volume and press Enter or type “cancel” to cancel (RC16) the job.

DOCTOR183 NON-EXISTENT VOLSER ENTERED

Explanation: A disk VOLSER entered via SVOL= or RVOL= cannot be located. The job is canceled

(RC16).

Action: Check to see that the VOLSER(s) entered by SV, RV are valid, online and ready.

DOCTOR184 CATALOG ERROR nn DETECTED, TYPE C TO CANCEL I TO SKIP FILE-mmmm

Explanation: THE VSAM catalog being accessed appears to be corrupted and required information cannot be found. The job is canceled.

The value nn identifies the catalog error encountered. Refer to the following table.

Value Meaning

Catalog record access error

Index extent error

Data extent error

No data catalog record

No data AMDSB

No index catalog record

No index AMDSB

Volume not found

12 Spanned buffer full

Action: Type either of the following:

• “C” to cancel the job (RC16)

• “I” to ignore the file and continue with the backup

Page 509

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DOCTOR186 xxxxxx CANDIDATE OR SPECIFIED VOLUME DOES NOT EXIST OR IS NOT ONLINE. ENTER "R" TO RETRY AFTER

READYING, "D" TO DROP VOLSER FROM FILE CANDIDATES, OR "C" TO CANCEL

Explanation: A disk VOLSER, referenced in the file candidates, cannot be located.

The value xxxxxx is the volser of the candidate volume.

Action: Type any of the following:

• “R” to RETRY after readying

• “D” to DROP volser from file candidates

• “C” to cancel (RC16)

DOCTOR187 WARNING - VTOC ON DISK VOLSER xxxxxx IS ABOUT TO BE MOVED TO (OR RESIZED AT) DISK ADDRESS nnnnnnnn. IS THIS CORRECT?

Explanation: This message is a warning to assure that the disk listed is not being used in any way that would cause the VTOC to be updated while it is being moved or resized (this could happen anytime a file is opened or closed).

The values listed in this message are as follows:

Action:

• xxxxxx volser where VTOC resides

• nnnnnn target disk address

Type either of the following:

• “YES” if the move or resizing can be safely accomplished,

• “NO” to abort (RC16)

DOCTOR188 NEW LOCATION SPECIFIED FOR VTOC IS INVALID OR ALREADY ALLOCATED OR NEW SIZE IS IMPROPER

Explanation: The VTOC move Function has discovered that the new VTOC location is occupied by a file, the current VTOC, the VOL1 of the disk, or is outside the range of the disk. If the size of the

VTOC is being reduced, there could be labels in the VTOC that would be lost. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Check a VTOC list to see if a file occupies the new location and either move the file or delete it (see DELETE FUNCTION). Otherwise, choose a new location for the VTOC. If the size of the VTOC is being reduced, dump the VTOC to see if labels exist in the part of the

VTOC being dropped.

DOCTOR189 EARLY EOF OCCURED WHILE PROCESSING FILE file-id

Explanation: A control interval has been read that is not in proper CI format, possibly due to file corruption or the file was not successfully closed (RC2).

Action:

The value file-id is the file-ID being processed.

The SAVE/COPY continues but the file should be checked for validity.

DOCTOR190 WARNING - MINI-DISK nnnnnn, ON DISK VOLSER mmmmmm IS ABOUT TO BE CREATED AT DISK ADDRESS yyyyyy, IS THIS CORRECT?

Explanation: This message is a warning to verify that minidisk nnnnnn should be created on real disk

mmmmmm at the specified disk address.

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• nnnnnn is the minidisk volser

• mmmmmm is the real disk volser

Action:

• yyyyyy is the real disk address

Assure the correct real volser and disk address are displayed. If so, type “YES” to proceed.

Otherwise, type “NO” to abort (RC16).

DOCTOR199 INVALID AREA=COMPACT VALUES ENTERED

Explanation: The Area Compact function has found that a file extent will overlap the limits of the area being compacted. The job is canceled (RC16).

Page 510 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Action: Check to see that the area(s) specified are correct, that is, no file within the area extends beyond that area.

DOCTOR200 WORD 'EXIT' NOT IN COLUMNS 1-4

Explanation: The user's first call to either GETREC or PUTREC caused a control statement to be read from SYSIPT that did not contain the word “EXIT” in positions 1 through 4. The job is canceled.

Action: Correct the SYSIPT control statement.

DOCTOR201 RECFORM UNRECOGNIZED IN COLUMNS 5-6

Explanation: A control card for GETREC, GETTAPE, or PUTREC has an illegal record format code. The job is canceled. The only valid record format codes are as follows

Code Meaning

VS VSAM

IS VSAM

Action:

UN Undefined

Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR202 FIX/UNB-DATA SIZE WRONG

Explanation: GETTAPE/GETREC has encountered a record that is not the length specified on the control statement. The job is canceled.

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR203 FIX/UNB-KEY SIZE WRONG

Explanation: GETTAPE/GETREC has encountered a record whose key is not equal to the length on the control statement. The job is canceled.

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR204 INVALID PHASE NAME USEREXIT=xxxxx

Explanation: The specified phase name is missing or does not conform to VSE rules. The job is canceled.

Action:

The value xxxxx is the phase name found.

Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR205 INVALID TYPE EXIT USEREXIT=xx

Explanation: The specified type of exit is neither IO nor EX. The job is canceled.

Action:

The value xx is the exit type found.

Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR206 INVALID LOAD ADDRESS USEREXIT=xnnnnnn

Explanation: The specified load information is invalid. The first character must be an “A” (for absolute address programs) or “L” (for relocatable or self-relocating programs). The remaining six digits must be the decimal size of “L” programs or the hexadecimal load address for “A” programs. The job is canceled.

Action: Correct the control statement.

Page 511

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DOCTOR207 INVALID FORMAT/SOFTWARE ERROR

Explanation: This error is typically the result of an error in user exit code possibly due to processing of an unexpected input file. The job is canceled.

Action: Take corrective measures as applicable.

DOCTOR208 USER NOT FINISHED READING FILE

Explanation: The EXIT code is failing to read to end of the input file before returning to the Dr. D interface. The job is canceled.

DOCTOR209 USER CALLING FOR MORE RECORDS AFTER FILE END

Explanation: The EXIT coded requested another input record after end of the input file was indicated.

The job is canceled.

Action: Processing should continue only until end-of-data is indicated.

DOCTOR210 FIX/BLK BLOCK SIZE NOT EVENLY DIVISIBLE BY BLOCKING FACTOR

Explanation: The fixed-blocked block size, when divided by the blocking factor, yields a fractional number. The job is canceled.

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR211 FIX/BLK RECORD WITH KEY ENCOUNTERED

Explanation: Fixed-blocked format was indicated but a record key was found. The job is canceled.

Action: Correct the control statement or save file.

DOCTOR212 NO RECORD FOUND AT DASD ADDRESS

Explanation: An expected record was not found in the ISAM overflow area. The job is canceled.

Action: Rebuild the file.

DOCTOR213 NON-NUMERIC FIELD ON CONTROL CARD

Explanation: A non-numeric value was encountered where a numeric value was expected. The job is canceled.

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR214 VAR/UNB TOO LARGE A RECORD READ

Explanation: A variable unblocked record was read that exceeds the maximum record length specified.

The job is canceled.

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR215 VAR/UNB WRONG LENGTH KEY

Explanation: A variable unblocked record key disagrees with the value specified on the control statement. The job is canceled.

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR216 VAR/UNB BLOCK PREFIX NOT EQUAL ACTUAL BLOCK SIZE

Explanation: A variable unblocked record prefix value does not reflect the true record length. The job is canceled.

Action: None.

DOCTOR217 VAR/UNB RECORD PREFIX INCORRECT

Explanation: A variable unblocked logical record prefix value does not reflect the value of the block length less 4. The job is canceled.

Page 512 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Action: None.

DOCTOR221 USER PARAMETER PASSED TO SETTAPE INVALID

Explanation: An invalid parameter was passed to the SETTAPE routine. The job is canceled.

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR222 PARTIAL SELECT/REJECT SPECIFIED, BUT NO SELECTION DATA ENTERED

Explanation: PA=SE or PA=RE was specified but no selection data was submitted. The job is canceled

(RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR223 LOAD FAILED FOR USER EXIT PHASE xxxxx

Explanation: The phase specified at the USEREXIT= operand was not found. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value xxxxx is the phase name.

Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR224 CDLOAD FAILED FOR xxxxxxxx RC=x

Explanation: An attempt to CDLOAD the module named in the message has failed. The cause of the failure is denoted by the CDLOAD return code which displays in the message. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Look up the return codes for the CDLOAD macro and take the appropriate action to correct the cause of the failure.

DOCTOR250 BACKUP FILE DISK TO TAPE- BACKUP FILE WAS CREATED ON mm/dd/yy AT hh:mm:ss

Explanation: This informational message indicates that a save file previously written to disk is now being copied from that disk to tape. The job continues.

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• mm/dd/yy is the date the save disk was created

• hh-mm-ss is the time-of-day the save disk was created

Action: None.

DOCTOR251 SAVE=aa bbbb SF=cccc|VOL=dddd XXXX ID=eeee START=cc:hh STOP=cc:hh

Explanation: This informational message is printed when a save file previously written to disk is being copied from that disk to tape to identify each saved object. The job continues.

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• aa is the type of save (PH, CU, AL, DA, VS, LI, etc.)

• bbbb is the type of file (SAM, DAM, ISAM, VSAM, LIB, etc.)

• cccc is the filename

• dddd is the volser

• eee is the file-ID

• cc:hh is the cylinder and track

Action: None.

DOCTOR252 TOTAL NUMBER OF FILES SAVED-nnn

Explanation: This informational message is printed when a save file previously written to disk is being copied from that disk to tape to indicate completion. The job terminates normally.

Action: None.

Page 513

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DOCTOR300 SYS001 IS NOT VALID DEVICE

Explanation: SYS001 is not assigned to a disk device. The job is canceled.

Action: Correct the assignment for SYS001.

DOCTOR304 SA/RE LOGICAL xx OPERAND INVALID/OMITTED

Explanation: A Dr. D control statement for SA/RE=LO is either missing a required operand or reflects an invalid operand and/or value; xx is the invalid or omitted operand. The job is canceled.

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR307 VOLUME SEQUENCE ERROR PROCESSING FILE xxxx

Explanation: During SAVE=LOGICAL (VTOC) a file has been selected for backup. However, since not all the extents can be found, the file cannot be saved.

Action: Do either of the following:

• Press Enter to continue the job (RC1)

• Type “Cancel” to cancel the job

DOCTOR308 RESTORE OVERFLOWS DISK OR DISK POOL

Explanation: During a reorganizing RESTORE=LOGICAL (VTOC), the current file being restored cannot fit into the available space. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Increase the disk space or reduce the space required.

DOCTOR310 INVALID OPERAND/OPERAND VALUE

Explanation: SAVE|RESTORE LOGICAL (VTOC) has detected an invalid operand-operand combination. Usually this is the result of an invalid value for one of the operands. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR311 DUPLICATE VOLSER ENTERED

Explanation: A duplicate volser was entered for the SV or RV operand. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR312 NO OUTPUT VOLSER ENTERED

Explanation: The RV operand was not specified with an output volser. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action: Correct the control statement.

DOCTOR313 ERROR IN FILE SEQUENCE SET-file-id

Explanation: The VSAM SAVE has failed due to an error in the file's sequence set.

Action:

The value file-ID is the file that has the problem. The job is canceled (RC16).

Rebuild the file.

DOCTOR316 NO FILES SELECTED FOR BACKUP/RESTORE

Explanation: SAVE|RESTORE=Logical (VSAM or VTOC) has selected no files. The job is canceled

(RC16).

Action: Correct the selection criteria.

DOCTOR317 WARNING- UNMATCHED SELECTOR(S) ENTERED

Explanation: A function using selector cards has one or more unmatched selectors. The unmatched selectors print on the report for analysis. This message appears on the log along with the report if a SAVE|RESTORE|COPY function is in use. Specifying ERROR=IGNORE suppresses the log output. Processing continues (RC1).

Page 514 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Action: If necessary, correct the selector cards.

DOCTOR401 DR.D/ON-LINE INTERFACE TERMINATED

Explanation: The current function completed or was terminated.

Action: The Dr. D On-Line transaction terminates.

DOCTOR402 BMS MAP FAIL OCCURED

Explanation: An I/O error occurred during the sending/receiving of a Dr. D On-Line BMS map.

Action: Retry the Dr. D On-Line transaction on another terminal. If the problem continues, contact

Dr. D Technical Support.

DOCTOR403 BMS MAP WAS NOT FOUND

Explanation: A Dr. D On-Line BMS map is unknown to this CICS system.

Action: Make sure the CICS installation procedures have been followed and the library containing the Dr. D On-Line feature is available.

DOCTOR404 BMS LOGIC ERROR OCCURED

Explanation: A CICS error occurred during a Dr. D On-Line mapping function.

Action: This is probably a CICS failure. Make sure the appropriate CICS BMS support has been generated.

DOCTOR405 PROGRAM CONTROL LINK FAILED FOR xxxxxxxx

Explanation: The program named in the message cannot be located.

Action:

The value xxxxxxxx is the program name not located.

Make sure the program is in the PPT and that the library containing the program is available to CICS.

DOCTOR406 TERMINAL RESET NOT ALLOWED HERE

Explanation: A request to reset the terminal has been made.

Action: None.

DOCTOR407 TERMINAL RESET FAILURE nnn

Explanation: An error occurred during the terminal reset processing; nnn is the terminal reset reason code.

Action: Contact Dr. D Technical Support.

DOCTOR408 SELECTION NOT VALID-PLEASE RETRY

Explanation: An incorrect function selection was entered.

Action: The system waits for you to make another selection.

DOCTOR409 HIGHLIGHTED FIELDS ARE INVALID

Explanation: Invalid field(s) have been entered in the selection map.

Action: Correct the field(s).

DOCTOR410 NO DATA ENTERED IN PANEL-PLEASE RETRY

Explanation: There was no data entered in the selection panel.

Action: Enter selection data.

DOCTOR411 DUPLICATE FILENAMES HAVE BEEN SPECIFIED

Explanation: Two or more file selection entries have the same file name. Each file name must be unique.

Page 515

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Action: Correct the duplicate file name.

DOCTOR412 NO DYNAMIC USER STORAGE AVAILABLE

Explanation: A request for dynamic CICS storage failed.

Action: Wait for dynamic CICS storage to become available or increase the dynamic CICS storage size.

DOCTOR413 FUNCTION IS NOT AVAILABLE

Explanation: The code for the function is not available with this release.

Action: Select another function.

DOCTOR414 ERROR DURING Dr.D CTL STMT BUILD

Explanation: An internal logic error occurred during the building of the Dr. D control statements in module DRD$BDRD. A CICS transaction dump occurs with a dump code of DRD2.

Action: Contact Dr. D Technical Support. Please have a dump available for problem analysis.

DOCTOR415 ERROR DURING JOB STREAM BUILD

Explanation: A logic error occurred during the building of the VSE job stream in module DRD$BJOB.

Action: Contact the Dr. D technical support. Please have a dump available for problem analysis.

DOCTOR416 JOB SUBMIT FAILURE, FUNCTION nnn RC=xxx/yyy

Explanation: A CICS/POWER error occurred during submission of the Dr. D VSE job stream in module

DRD$BJOB:

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• nnn is the requested function

Action:

• xxx is the VSE/POWER return code

• yyy is the VSE/POWER feedback code

Contact the Dr. D technical support.

DOCTOR417 JOB HAS BEEN SUBMITTED

Explanation: The Dr. D Batch job stream has been submitted to power. Processing continues.

Action: None.

DOCTOR418 DUPLICATED VOLIDS HAVE BEEN SPECIFIED

Explanation: A volser was specified more than once in the DASD volume copy information panel.

Volsers must be unique.

Action: Correct the duplicate volser.

DOCTOR419 NO COPY INFORMATION TO PROCESS

Explanation: The PF5 key was pressed, but no copy information was supplied.

Action: Either enter copy information on the current panel or press PF5 to exit the function.

DOCTOR420 SOURCE/TARGET LIBRARIES ARE THE SAME

Explanation: The filename of the target library is identical to the filename of the source filename. Dr. D does not support copying to the same library.

Action: Correct the panel or press PF3 to cancel the function.

DOCTOR421 NO SELECT STATEMENTS SPECIFIED

Explanation: No selection criteria were specified on a command requiring selection criteria.

Page 516 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Action: Correct the panel or press PF3 to cancel the function.

DOCTOR422 CICS POWER SPOOL SUPPORT MISSING

Explanation: The CICS system spool interface to VSE/POWER is not active.

Action: Add SPOOL=YES to the CICS initialization (SIT).

DOCTOR423 INSUFFICIENT PARTITION GETVIS STORAGE

Explanation: Dr. D attempted to CDLOAD a module and was unable to as a result of insufficient partition GETVIS.

Action: Increase partition storage by increasing the virtual size of the partition and/or decreasing the SIZE= specification on the EXEC statement when CICS is started.

DOCTOR426 PHASE phasename NOT FOUND

Explanation: The phase identified in the message could not be found.

Action: Check LIBDEF PHASE, SEARCH= specification (both permanent in the partition and the statement in the CICS startup) to ensure all the appropriate libraries are defined. Once corrected, restart CICS.

DOCTOR427 TRANSACTION CANNOT RUN FROM CONSOLE

Explanation: An attempt has been made to execute a Dr. D program or CICS transaction from either the operator console or ICCF pseudo partition, but that program/transaction cannot be executed from there.

Action: Execute the correct program from the console or CICS transaction.

DOCTOR609 ASSIGNMENTS INCORRECT FOR TAPE TEST FUNCTION

Explanation: The tape assignments for tape testing are incorrect.

Action: Assure that SYS007 is assigned to the proper tape and, if UPSI XXX1 is set, SYS006 is assigned to a different tape.

DOCTOR 610 *WARNING* TAPE COPYING ABOUT TO BEGIN- TAPES WILL NOT BE OPENED, AND OUTPUT TAPES ARE

OVERWRITTEN DESTROYING ALL DATA ON THEM. YOU ARE SET TO USE INPUT TAPE DRIVE cuu1 AND

OUTPUT TAPE cuu2 AND cuu3 IS THIS CORRECT?

Explanation: The TAPECOPY FUNCTION is about to start.

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• cuu1 is the tape address of the input tape

• cuu2 is the tape address of the first output tape

Action:

• cuu3 is the tape address of the alternate output tape

Type YES to begin copying or NO to cancel.

DOCTOR611 ASSIGNMENTS INCORRECT FOR TAPE COPY FUNCTION

Explanation: The tape assignments for tape copying are incorrect.

Action: Make sure that SYS008 is assigned to the input tape, SYS007 is assigned to the output tape, and, if UPSI XXX1 is set, SYS006 is assigned to the second copy output tape.

DOCTOR612 IMAGE TAPE COPY TERMINATED DUE TO TAPE ERROR ON INPUT TAPE

Explanation: An error occurred while reading the input tape. The tape copy is terminated and processing continues with the next control statement.

Page 517

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DOCTOR613 END OF OUTPUT TAPE REACHED BEFORE END OF INPUT TAPE- HIT ENTER TO CONTINUE ON ANOTHER TAPE

OR TYPE END TO TREAT AS END OF INPUT.

Explanation: While copying a tape in image mode, an end of tape was reached on the output tape before it was reached on the input tape.

Action: If you determine that all needed data was copied, type “END”; otherwise press Enter to continue on another tape.

DOCTOR614 TAPE COPY FUNCTION nnn BLOCKS AND TAPEMARK COPIED

Explanation: This is an informational message indicating that the tape copy function has completed.

The value nnn is the number of data blocks copied

Action: None.

DOCTOR615 *WARNING* TAPE TESTING ABOUT TO BEGIN- TAPES WILL NOT BE OPENED, AND ARE OVERWRITTEN

DESTROYING ALL DATA ON THEM. YOU ARE SET TO USE TAPE DRIVE cuu1 AND cuu2 IS THIS CORRECT?

Explanation: The TAPETEST FUNCTION is about to start.

The values listed in this message are as follows:

Action:

• cuu1 is the tape address of the first tape

• cuu2 is the tape address of the second tape

Type either of the following:

• “YES” to begin copying

• “NO” to cancel

DOCTOR616 ENTER YOUR REQUEST

Explanation: The operator has entered the VSE MSG command to partition.

Action: You can take any of the following actions:

• Request early end of volume (EOV) for any input or output tape by typing:

⎯ EOV TAPIN

⎯ EOV TAPEOUT, or

⎯ EOV TAPETWO

For SAVE operations, this invokes an EOV condition on the current output volume.

Processing continues on the next output volume. For RESTORE=LOGICAL operations, once the VTOC or VSAM catalog contents have been read, (each of which is the first file on the first volume), an EOV condition is invoked. Processing can continue with the volume that contains the first of the requested saved file(s).

• Press Enter to cause processing to continue without interruption.

DOCTOR 617 UNRECOVERABLE ERROR HAS OCCURRED ON OUTPUT TAPE WHILE SAVING .......(OBJECT BEING SAVED).....

CAT=CCCCCC (CUU=VVVVVV)

Explanation: An unrecoverable error has occurred while trying to write to the output tape.

Action: Any reply causes the job to cancel. A reply is required is to allow automatic job schedulers the opportunity to take any desired action.

DOCTOR666 WARNING - PRODUCT AUTHORIZATION EXPIRES IN 30 DAYS OR LESS

Explanation: This message displays if the copy of Dr. D you are using is about to expire.

Action: Contact your CSI product sales representative for a new Expiration Password.

DOCTOR667 PRODUCT AUTHORIZATION HAS EXPIRED

Explanation: Dr. D is protected with an Expiration Password. This message displays the password expires.

Action: Contact your CSI product sales representative for a new Expiration Password.

Page 518 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

DOCTOR900 INSUFFICIENT GETVIS RC=xx

Explanation: Insufficient getvis memory below the line is available to satisfy a GETVIS request. The job is canceled (RC16).

Action:

The value xx is the return code from the GETVIS macro.

Resubmit in a larger partition.

DOCTOR901 INTERNAL ERROR RC=xx

Explanation: An internal error has been detected. The job is canceled (RC16).

The xx is the reason code indicating the detected failure. It can be any of the following:

• 03 Invalid parameter list

• 04 Encryption type unsupported

Action:

• 05 Input buffer too large to encrypt

Contact CSI technical support after gathering the JCL, syslst, DRZAP SUM report, and a display of the save file dataset name from the BIM-EPIC catalog.

DOCTOR902 DECRYPTION FAILURE RC=-xx

Explanation: An error was detected during the decryption process.

Action: Contact CSI technical support after gathering the JCL, syslst, DRZAP SUM report, and a display of the input save file dataset name from the BIM-EPIC catalog..

DOCTOR903 ENCRYPTION FAILURE RC=-xx

Explanation: An error was detected during the encryption process.

Action: Contact CSI technical support after gathering the JCL, syslst, DRZAP SUM report, and a display of the save file dataset name from the BIM-EPIC catalog.

DOCTOR907 Dr. Crypto v.r ACTIVATED

Explanation: Informational message when Dr. Crypto has been activated.

• The value v is the version number.

• The value r is the release level.

Action: None.

DOCTOR908 DECRYPTUION INFORMATION NOT SUPPLIED

Explanation: The input save file is encrypted but it cannot be read because the cipher key information was not supplied. .

Action: Rerun with the appropriate ENCRYPTKEYS value

DOCTOR991 ENTER INPUT TAPE DRIVE CUU, OR CUU,CUU IF USING ALTERNATE

Explanation: Inquiry by the standalone RESTORE function.

Action: Enter the primary tape address and an optional alternate tape address to be used during this standalone RESTORE.

DOCTOR992 INTERVENTION REQUIRED ON cuu, READY DEVICE AND PRESS ENTER

Explanation: A required device must be readied so that the standalone RESTORE can continue.

Action:

The value cuu is the device that must be readied.

Ready the device and then press Enter.

Page 519

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DOCTOR993 STANDALONE RESTORE PROCESSING COMPLETED

Explanation: All standalone RESTORE processing is complete.

Action: No more restores can be invoked without a re-IPL of the Dr. D standalone supervisor.

DOCTOR994 NEED TAPE VOLUME SEQUENCE xx, TAPE MOUNTED WAS yy

Explanation: During standalone RESTORE, a tape was mounted that was not the next tape in volume sequence order. The rejected tape is unloaded.

Action:

The values listed in this message are as follows:

• xx is the expected volume sequence

• yy is the mounted volume sequence

Mount the correct tape volume.

DOCTOR996 ENTER VOLSER OF DISK TO RESTORE

Explanation: Inquiry by the standalone RESTORE function.

Action: Do either of the following:

• Enter the volser of the saved disk to be restored

• Press Enter if the disk is the next on the tape

DOCTOR997 ENTER ALTERNATE TAPE CUU IF DESIRED

Explanation: Inquiry by the standalone RESTORE function.

Action: Do either of the following:

• Press Enter if no alternate tape is to be used

• Type cuu (the alternate), cuu,cuu (primary, alternate), or cuu, (primary, no alternate) if a drive other than the IPLed drive is to be used for restoring. See standalone

RESTORE section for more explanation.

DOCTOR998 STANDALONE RESTORE- MOUNT nn

Explanation: During a standalone RESTORE, the end of the current volume has been reached and the next volume is needed.

Action:

The value nn identifies the next volume sequence.

Mount the next tape volume. If an alternate tape drive is in use, be sure to use the correct drive. Press Enter when the next tape is mounted. If the tape label volume sequence number does not match the expected volume sequence, the message repeats.

DOCTOR999 xxxxxxxx PROGRAM LOGIC ERROR

Explanation: Dr. D has diagnosed an internal error.

Action:

The value xxxxxxxx is the phase were the logic error was discovered.

Call Dr. D software support.

Page 520 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Conversion Utility Messages

The Dr. D Conversion Utility can generate the following messages:

DRDCNVCU01 CONVERT CONTROL STATEMENT MISSING

Explanation: The mandatory Convert control statement is not the first input statement or was not passed via the EXEC PARM= parameter facility.

Action: Supply the mandatory Convert control statement.

DRDCNVCU02 INPUT I/O ERROR OCCURRED

Explanation: A physical I/O error occurred during the reading of the input statements.

Action: Assure that the job stream is properly configured.

DRDCNVCU03 INVALID CONVERSION TYPE

Explanation: The specification for the CONVERT= parameter is unknown.

DRDCNVCU04 LOAD FAILURE FOR xxxxxxxx

Explanation: The indicated phase name is not resident in any of the current libraries referenced.

Action:

The value xxxxxxxx is the phase name that could not be located.

Correct the LIBDEF's.

DRDCNVCU05 INVALID COMMAND OPERAND POS nnn

Explanation: An invalid value was specified for one of the CONVERT operands.

Action:

The value nnn is the position in the control statement where the invalid value was detected.

Correct the control statement.

DRDCNVCU06 OPEN FAILED FOR xxxxxx

Explanation: An OPEN request failed for the file xxxxxx.

Action:

The value xxxxxx is the failing file.

Correct the job stream for SYSPCH or SYSIPT.

DRDCNVCU07 NO INPUT RECORDS PROCESSED

Explanation: No control statements were found in the input file.

Action: Correct the job stream.

DRDCNVCU08 CONVERSION FAILED RC=nnn

Explanation: A failure occurred based on the indicated RC=nnn code. For possible values of nnn, refer to the following table: nnn Meaning

001 Invalid function

002 Insufficient storage

003

004

005

006

007

Conversion module failed

No control statements to convert

//EXEC statement conversion failure

Unknown conversion error code

Print I/O error occurred

Conversion Utility Messages Page 521

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

DRDCNVCU10 INVALID CONVERT STATEMENT KEYWORD

Explanation: An invalid keyword was specified in the Convert control statement.

Action: Correct the control statement.

DRDCNVCU11 INPUT RECORDS READ: nnn

Explanation: This is an informational message indicating that all of the input records have been read.

The value nnn number of input records read.

Action: None.

DRDCNVCU12 OUTPUT RECORDS WRITTEN: nnn

Explanation: This is an informational message indicating that the conversion has successfully completed.

The value nnn is the number of output records written.

Action: None.

DRDCNVRS01 END-OF-DATA FILE (/*) MISSING FROM LAST JOB STEP

Explanation: The end-of-data statement (/*) is missing from the last job step submitted for conversion.

Action: Correct the last job step of submitted jobs.

DRDCNVRS02 INVALID STATEMENT FORMAT

Explanation: The format of this statement is not valid.

Action: Correct the statement format.

DRDCNVRS03 INVALID COMMAND NAME - ccc

Explanation: The command is not valid for this type of conversion.

Action:

The value ccc is the invalid command.

Correct the control statement.

DRDCNVRS04 INVALID SPEC, FIELD=xxxx

Explanation: An invalid specification was encountered in this control statement.

Action:

The value xxxx is the invalid field.

Correct the control statement.

DRDCNVRS05 CONVERT LOGIC ERROR nnn

Explanation: A logic error occurred during the conversion.

The value nnn identifies the type of logic error encountered.

Action: Contact Dr. D technical support.

DRDCNVRS06 UNSUPPORTED CONVERSION OPTION=xxx

Explanation: The conversion system cannot determine how to convert the specified statement or statement option.

Page 522 Messages

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

Sample Reports

1V67B DR.D LVTOC DOSRES SYSWK1 11/29/2001 PAGE 001

09:50 AM

TIME STAMP SELECTOR:NONE --FILE-- LAST BLK OR ------------EXTENT INFORMATION------------

------------FILE IDENTIFICATION----------- TYPE SEC CREATED EXPIRES ACCESSED CISIZE VOLSER START END START SIZE SEQ

DOS.LABEL.FILE.FF250FFF7490.AREA1 DA N 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 421376 DOSRES 59136 59455 59136 320 0

DOS.PAGING.FILE.FF250FFF7490 DA N 12/28/2000 12/32/2099 421376 DOSRES 315072 365247 315072 50176 0

DOSRES 365248 856767 365248 491520 1

FILE TOTAL 541696

ICCF.LIBRARY DA N 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 2048 SYSWK1 306688 376703 306688 70016 0

INFO.ANALYSIS.DUMP.MGNT.FILE SD N 11/17/2000 11/18/2000 512 SYSWK1 478912 479103 478912 192 0

INFO.ANALYSIS.EXT.RTNS.FILE SD N 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 512 SYSWK1 479104 479167 479104 64 0

SYS.NEW.RES DA N 3/05/2001 3/13/2001 512 SYSWK1 2 59135 2 59134 0

VSE.DUMP.LIBRARY DA N 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 512 SYSWK1 754048 846687 754048 92640 0

VSE.HARDCOPY.FILE DA N 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 512 SYSWK1 467776 472831 467776 5056 0

VSE.HARDCOPY.FILE.DEVTEPIC.VSE25.222222 DA N 11/28/2000 12/32/2099 512 SYSWK1 479168 482667 479168 3500 0

VSE.HARDCOPY.FILE.DEVTEPI2.VSE25.333333 DA N 11/28/2000 12/32/2099 512 SYSWK1 482668 485667 482668 3000 0

VSE.HARDCOPY.FILE.DEVTEPI3.VSE25.444444 DA N 11/23/2000 12/32/2099 512 SYSWK1 485668 488667 485668 3000 0

VSE.HARDCOPY.FILE.VSE25.111111 DA N 11/29/2000 12/32/2099 512 SYSWK1 846688 851743 846688 5056 0

VSE.POWER.ACCOUNT.FILE DA N 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 0 SYSWK1 465600 467647 465600 2048 0

VSE.POWER.DATA.FILE DA N 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 0 SYSWK1 376704 465599 376704 88896 0

VSE.POWER.QUEUE.FILE DA N 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 0 DOSRES 59456 60031 59456 576 0

VSE.RECORDER.FILE DA N 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 512 SYSWK1 472832 473855 472832 1024 0

VSE.SYSRES.LIBRARY DA N 3/07/2001 12/32/2099 512 DOSRES 2 59135 2 59134 0

VSE.SYSTEM.HISTORY.FILE DA N 7/06/2001 12/32/2099 2048 DOSRES 310016 315071 310016 5056 0

VSESP.JOB.MANAGER.FILE SD N 3/06/2001 12/32/2099 1024 SYSWK1 467648 467775 467648 128 0

WORK.HIST.FILE DA N 3/06/2001 3/14/2001 2048 SYSWK1 59136 64191 59136 5056 0

Z9999992.VSAMDSPC.TB4F5D05.TB1D4676 VSAM 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 0 DOSRES 63104 125503 63104 62400 0

Z9999992.VSAMDSPC.TB4F5D05.TC406E9C VSAM 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 0 SYSWK1 236608 306623 236608 70016 0

Z9999992.VSAMDSPC.TB4F5D05.T6D7ED17 VSAM 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 0 SYSWK1 64192 233727 64192 169536 0

Z9999992.VSAMDSPC.TB4F5D05.T64DCC97 VSAM 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 0 DOSRES 125568 297983 125568 172416 0

Z9999992.VSAMDSPC.TB4F5D05.T7C34B0C VSAM 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 0 SYSWK1 489088 754047 489088 264960 0

Z9999992.VSAMDSPC.TB4F5D05.T81A32CB VSAM 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 0 SYSWK1 854528 919935 854528 65408 0

Z9999994.VSAMDSPC.TB4F5D05.T9831408 VSAM 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 0 SYSWK1 233728 236607 233728 2880 0

Z9999996.VSAMDSPC.TB4F5D05.T4A0234A VSAM 11/18/2000 12/32/2099 0 DOSRES 60224 63103 60224 2880 0

FILES LISTED= 28 1756088

1V67B DR.D LVTOC DOSRES SYSWK1 11/29/2001 PAGE 002

09:50 AM

SPACE MAPS ---DISK--- ------VTOC------ DISK GAP ---GAP START--- ----GAP END----

VOLSER CUU START END SIZE SIZE TRK/BLK CYL-HD TRK/BLK CYL-HD

DOSRES 140 125504 125567 921600 192 60032 60223

12032 297984 310015

64832 856768 921599

TOTAL FREE SPACE ON DOSRES 77056 8%

SYSWK1 141 306624 306687 921600 5056 473856 478911

420 488668 489087

2784 851744 854527

1664 919936 921599

TOTAL FREE SPACE ON SYSWK1 9924 1%

TOTAL FREE SPACE ON FBA DISK 86980 4%

Page 523

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

1V67B DR.D LCAT LISTING OF VSAM CATALOG-VSESP.USER.CATALOG 11/29/2001 PAGE 001

TIME STAMP SELECTOR:NONE 09:50 AM

SHR --KEY--- ---LRECL--- ---ALLOCATIONS--- -FREE-SPACE- SPLITS --------LOGICAL RECORDS--------- ----EXTENT INFORMATION----

OPT LEN RKP AVERAGE MAX CISIZE PRIMARY SECONDRY CI CA KBYT CI CA TOTAL DELETD INSRTD UPDTED READ VOLSER START SIZE %USD #

CICS.CSD (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 TIME STAMP-2001/100 05:31PM)

2,3 22 0 120 500 4096 1024B0 256B0 50 10 0 71 4 2286 2577 4612 16 73493 DOSRES 112896 1024 99 1

4096I 64B0 64B0 % EXCPS=27176 BUFFSPACE= 12288 DOSRES 113984 256 2

INDEX LEVELS= 2 DOSRES 114240 256 3

SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

DOSRES 113920 64 88 1

SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

CICS.DBDCCICS.DFHDMFA (ESDS,CREATED-2000/322 EXPIRES-2099/366 TIME STAMP-2000/322 10:02PM)

2,3 0 0 125 32767 4096 5760B0 1920B0 0 0 2949 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DOSRES 83264 5760 1

REUSE SPAND 99% EXCPS=0 BUFFSPACE= 8192

SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

CICS.DBDCCICS.DFHDMFB (ESDS,CREATED-2000/322 EXPIRES-2099/366 TIME STAMP-2000/322 10:02PM)

2,3 0 0 125 32767 4096 5760B0 1920B0 0 0 2949 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DOSRES 89024 5760 1

REUSE SPAND 99% EXCPS=0 BUFFSPACE= 8192

SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

CICS.DUMPA (MSAM,CREATED-2000/322 EXPIRES-2000/322 TIME STAMP-2001/316 10:53PM)

1,3 0 0 7200 32760 32768 4800B0 B0 0 0 2424 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 DOSRES 114496 4800 1 1

REUSE SPEED 99% EXCPS=1 BUFFSPACE= 65536

SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

CICS.DUMPB (MSAM,CREATED-2000/327 EXPIRES-2000/327 TIME STAMP-2001/040 06:17PM)

1,3 0 0 7200 32760 32768 1920B0 B0 0 0 950 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 SYSWK1 277248 1920 3 1

REUSE SPEED 97% EXCPS=30 BUFFSPACE= 65536

DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

CICS.GCD (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 TIME STAMP-2001/316 10:53PM)

2,3 28 0 4089 4089 8192 16320B0 1920B0 10 10 7372 1 1 76 69549 69624 3856 96621 DOSRES 94784 16320 12 1

1024I 64B0 64B0 88% EXCPS=17582 BUFFSPACE= 17408 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

REUSE DOSRES 111104 64 9 1

INDEX LEVELS= 002 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

CICS.LCD (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 TIME STAMP-2001/316 10:53PM)

2,3 28 0 45 124 8192 256B0 64B0 10 10 98 0 0 30 26 2 639 11066 DOSRES 111168 256 25 1

512I 64B0 64B0 75% EXCPS=9431 BUFFSPACE= 16896 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

REUSE DOSRES 111424 64 2 1

INDEX LEVELS= 001 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

CICS.RSD (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 TIME STAMP-2000/322 10:02PM)

2,3 22 0 2000 2000 2048 1344B0 448B0 20 20 458 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 DOSRES 111488 1344 33 1

1536I 64B0 64B0 67% EXCPS=5 BUFFSPACE= 5632 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

DOSRES 112832 64 5 1

INDEX LEVELS= 001 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

CICS.TD.INTRA (ESDS,CREATED-2000/322 TIME STAMP-2001/316 10:53PM)

2,3 0 0 4089 4089 4096 832B0 832B0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3340 DOSRES 81600 832 99 1

% EXCPS=1665 BUFFSPACE= 8192

DEFAULT.MODEL.ESDS.SAM (MSAM,CREATED-2000/322 TIME STAMP-2000/322 00:00AM)

1,3 0 0 2000 2000 2048 111B0 111B0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

REUSE FIXBLKSPEED NOALOC % EXCPS=0 BUFFSPACE= 4096 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

DFHTEMP (ESDS,CREATED-2000/322 TIME STAMP-2001/316 10:53PM)

2,3 0 0 4089 4089 4096 832B0 832B0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DOSRES 82432 832 99 1

% EXCPS=1304 BUFFSPACE= 8192

DOS.WORKFILE.SYS001.RECOVER.F2 (MSAM,CREATED-2000/327 EXPIRES-2000/327 TIME STAMP-2000/327 11:25PM)

1,3 0 0 4096 4100 4608 320B0 640B0 0 0 101 0 0 0 0 0 0 351 DOSRES 119360 320 37 1

REUSE SPEED 63% EXCPS=54 BUFFSPACE= 9216

SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

DOS.WORKFILE.SYS002.RECOVER.F2 (MSAM,CREATED-2000/327 EXPIRES-2000/327 TIME STAMP-2000/327 11:25PM)

1,3 0 0 4096 4100 4608 320B0 640B0 0 0 101 0 0 0 0 0 0 351 SYSWK1 276928 320 37 1

REUSE SPEED 63% EXCPS=54 BUFFSPACE= 9216

DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

PTF.FILE (MSAM,CREATED-2000/322 TIME STAMP-2000/322 00:00AM)

1,3 0 0 80 10320 12288 3840B0 1920B0 0 0 1966 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DOSRES 76544 3840 1

REUSE SPEED 99% EXCPS=0 BUFFSPACE= 24576

SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

VSAM.COMPRESS.CONTROL (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 EXPIRES-2099/366 TIME STAMP-2000/332 10:18PM)

4,4 44 0 128 500 2048 64B0 64B0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 SYSWK1 236608 64 99 1

512I 64B0 64B0 % EXCPS=11 BUFFSPACE= 4608 SYSWK1 236672 64 2 1

INDEX LEVELS= 001

VSE.CICREX.FP01.DIR (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 EXPIRES-2099/366 TIME STAMP-2000/322 00:00AM)

2,3 251 0 314 314 2048 3840B0 1920B0 10 5 1966 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SYSWK1 236736 3840 1

7168I 128B0 64B0 99% EXCPS=0 BUFFSPACE= 11264 DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

SYSWK1 240576 128 1

DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

VSE.CICREX.FP01.FILE01 (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 EXPIRES-2099/366 TIME STAMP-2000/322 00:00AM)

2,3 252 0 265 8185 8192 13440B0 5760B0 10 5 6881 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SYSWK1 244672 13440 1

2048I 64B0 64B0 99% EXCPS=0 BUFFSPACE= 18432 DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

SYSWK1 258112 64 1

Page 524 Sample Reports

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

1V67B DR.D LCAT LISTING OF VSAM CATALOG-VSESP.USER.CATALOG 11/29/2001 PAGE 002

TIME STAMP SELECTOR:NONE 09:50 AM

SHR --KEY--- ---LRECL--- ---ALLOCATIONS--- -FREE-SPACE- SPLITS --------LOGICAL RECORDS--------- ----EXTENT INFORMATION----

OPT LEN RKP AVERAGE MAX CISIZE PRIMARY SECONDRY CI CA KBYT CI CA TOTAL DELETD INSRTD UPDTED READ VOLSER START SIZE %USD #

DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

VSE.CICREX.FP02.DIR (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 EXPIRES-2099/366 TIME STAMP-2000/322 00:00AM)

2,3 251 0 314 314 2048 3840B0 1920B0 10 5 1966 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SYSWK1 240704 3840 1

7168I 128B0 64B0 99% EXCPS=0 BUFFSPACE= 11264 DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

SYSWK1 244544 128 1

DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

VSE.CICREX.FP02.FILE01 (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 EXPIRES-2099/366 TIME STAMP-2000/322 00:00AM)

2,3 252 0 265 8185 8192 13440B0 5760B0 10 5 6881 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SYSWK1 258176 13440 1

2048I 64B0 64B0 99% EXCPS=0 BUFFSPACE= 18432 DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

SYSWK1 271616 64 1

DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

VSE.CONTROL.FILE (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 EXPIRES-2099/366 TIME STAMP-2001/331 10:21PM)

4,4 12 0 100 1000 4096 64B0 64B0 0 0 32 0 0 13 0 0 2 636 DOSRES 71424 64 99 1

512I 64B0 64B0 50% EXCPS=320 BUFFSPACE= 8704 DOSRES 119296 64 2

INDEX LEVELS= 002 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

DOSRES 71488 64 5 1

SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

VSE.EZACICS.CACHE (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 EXPIRES-2099/366 TIME STAMP-2000/322 00:00AM)

2,3 255 0 500 1000 4096 3840B0 2880B0 0 15 1966 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SYSWK1 273024 3840 1

3584I 64B0 64B0 99% EXCPS=0 BUFFSPACE= 11776 DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

SYSWK1 276864 64 1

DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

VSE.EZACICS.CONFIG (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 EXPIRES-2099/366 TIME STAMP-2000/322 00:00AM)

2,3 16 0 150 150 4096 1280B0 640B0 15 7 655 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SYSWK1 271680 1280 1

1536I 64B0 64B0 99% EXCPS=0 BUFFSPACE= 9728 DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

SYSWK1 272960 64 1

DOSRES NO ALLOCATION

VSE.MESSAGE.ROUTING.FILE (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 EXPIRES-2099/366 TIME STAMP-2001/316 10:53PM)

2,3 16 0 500 4080 4096 256B0 256B0 15 7 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 6 DOSRES 76224 256 99 1

512I 64B0 64B0 0% EXCPS=21 BUFFSPACE= 8704 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

DOSRES 76480 64 2 1

INDEX LEVELS= 001 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

VSE.ONLINE.PROB.DET.FILE (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 TIME STAMP-2001/316 10:53PM)

2,3 2 0 4000 4089 4096 2496B0 832B0 0 0 425 0 0 202 0 0 64 6996 DOSRES 68864 2496 67 1

1024I 64B0 64B0 33% EXCPS=6815 BUFFSPACE= 9216 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

DOSRES 71360 64 9 1

INDEX LEVELS= 002 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

VSE.PRIMARY.LIBRARY (MSAM,CREATED-2000/322 TIME STAMP-2000/322 09:35PM)

3,3 0 0 4089 4089 4096 5760B0 17280B0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DOSRES 63104 5760 99 1

SPEED % EXCPS=0 BUFFSPACE= 8192

SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

VSE.TEXT.REPSTORY.FILE (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 EXPIRES-2099/366 TIME STAMP-2001/316 10:53PM)

2,3 12 0 500 4080 4096 4608B0 256B0 0 0 1179 0 0 2689 0 0 0 5408 DOSRES 71552 4608 50 1

512I 64B0 64B0 50% EXCPS=124 BUFFSPACE= 8704 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

DOSRES 76160 64 16 1

INDEX LEVELS= 002 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

VSE.VSAM.RECORD.MAPPING.DEFS (KSDS,CREATED-2000/322 EXPIRES-2099/366 TIME STAMP-2000/322 00:00AM)

2,3 222 0 284 284 2048 1152B0 576B0 0 0 589 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DOSRES 80384 1152 1

4096I 64B0 64B0 99% EXCPS=0 BUFFSPACE= 8192 SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

DOSRES 81536 64 1

SYSWK1 NO ALLOCATION

FILES/OBJECTS LISTED- 27 99136

1V67B DR.D LCAT ***SPACE MAP*** LISTING OF VSAM CATALOG-VSESP.USER.CATALOG 11/29/2001 PAGE 003

TIME STAMP SELECTOR:NONE 09:50 AM

DISK EXTENT ---TRACKS OR BLOCKS--- -------------------------------------G A P M A P--------------------------------------

VOLSER BEGIN TOTAL AVAILABLE (LISTING OF GAP SIZE X NUMBER OF OCCURENCES OF THAT SIZE)

DOSRES 63104 62400 5824 9% 5824X1

DISK TOTAL 62400 5824 9%

SYSWK1 233728 2880 0 0% 27456X1

236608 70016 27456 39%

DISK TOTAL 72896 27456 37%

CATALOG TOTAL 135296 33280 24%

Page 525

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

1V67B DR.D LDIR LIBRARY DIRECTORY LISTING FOR 11/29/2001 PAGE 001

TIME STAMP SELECTOR:NONE BIM.DRD.LIBRARY 10:02 AM

LIBRARY SIZE (BLOCKS) 12500 10761(86.0%) FREE

-----MEMBER----- ---------DATE-TIME----------- --BLOCKS-- -----MEMBER----- ---------DATE-TIME----------- --BLOCKS--

NAME TYPE ...CREATED.... ...CHANGED.... TOTAL CNTG SIZE NAME TYPE ...CREATED.... ...CHANGED.... TOTAL CNTG SIZE

*********************BIM.DRD.LIBRARY.67************************** DOCTOR71 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 13 13 12310

DRD$PCT A 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 3 DOCTOR72 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 8 8 7042

DRD$PPT A 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 3 3 49 DOCTOR73 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 5 5 4896

TYPE TOTAL MEMBERS= 2 4 DOCTOR74 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 10 10 9864

DRDITTPR OBJ 01/11/28 11:06 01/11/28 11:06 3 3 29 DOCTOR75 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 5 5 4064

DRDPROD OBJ 01/11/28 11:06 01/11/28 11:06 3 3 29 DOCTOR76 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 6 6 4984

GETREC OBJ 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 5 5 57 DOCTOR78 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 8 8 7884

GETTAPE OBJ 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 7 7 82 DOCTOR80 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 13 13 12368

GSIDMNS0 OBJ 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 3 DOCTOR81 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 3 3 2856

PUTREC OBJ 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 5 5 50 DOCTOR82 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 7 7 6264

TYPE TOTAL MEMBERS= 6 24 DOCTOR85 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 8 8 7640

$$BGSI07 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 2 2 1124 DOCTOR86 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 10 10 9794

$$BGSI08 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 696 DOCTOR87 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 4 4 3200

$$BGSI09 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 730 DOCTOR88 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 3 3 2595

$$BGSI10 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 2 2 1353 DOCTOR89 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 11 11 10313

$$BGSI11 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 627 DOCTOR93 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 4 4 3464

$$BGSI14 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 729 DOCTOR97 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 5 5 4806

$$BGSI15 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 2 2 1162 DOCTOR98 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 5 5 4526

$$BGSI16 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 736 DRD PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 72 72 70224

$$BGSI17 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 446 DRD$BDRD PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 6 6 5432

$$BGSI18 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 687 DRD$BJOB PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 6 6 5496

$$BGSI19 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 591 DRD$DMSG PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 3 3 2184

DOCTOR PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 72 72 70224 DRD$DRD1 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 9 9 8552

DOCTORMS PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 10 10 9564 DRD$DRD2 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 3 3 2104

DOCTOR00 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 72 72 70224 DRD$DRD3 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 3 3 2496

DOCTOR01 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 3 3 2488 DRD$DRD4 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 4 4 3416

DOCTOR02 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 20 20 19548 DRD$DRD5 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 4 4 3680

DOCTOR03 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 4 4 3232 DRD$DRD6 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 4 4 3576

DOCTOR04 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 788 DRD$PGMI PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 3 3 1984

DOCTOR05 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 2 2 1496 DRD$PTFM PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 408

DOCTOR06 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 9 9 8800 DRDCNVCU PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 77 77 75616

DOCTOR07 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 3 3 2208 DRDCNVFA PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 13 13 12424

DOCTOR08 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 20 20 19548 DRDCNVF2 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 14 14 13648

DOCTOR09 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 5 5 4104 DRDCNVMB PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 4 4 3752

DOCTOR11 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 936 DRDCNVRS PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 5 5 4512

DOCTOR12 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 3 3 2825 DRDCNVWU PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 8 8 7232

DOCTOR13 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 8 8 7572 DRDISK PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 5 5 4024

DOCTOR14 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 27 27 26576 DRDITTM PHASE S 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 6 6 5213

DOCTOR15 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 17 17 16384 DRDITTO PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 9 9 8358

DOCTOR16 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 19 19 18165 DRDITTX PHASE S 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 37 37 36258

DOCTOR17 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 10 10 9762 DRDITT1 PHASE S 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 24 24 23208

DOCTOR18 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 7 7 6530 DRDMAPI PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 589

DOCTOR19 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 7 7 6832 DRDMCLP PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 2 2 1314

DOCTOR20 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 72 DRDMDFC PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 2 2 1088

DOCTOR21 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 3 3 2304 DRDMDRA PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 664

DOCTOR22 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 5 5 4160 DRDMDR1 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 651

DOCTOR23 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 3 3 2960 DRDMDR2 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 548

DOCTOR24 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 670 DRDMDR3 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 452

DOCTOR25 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 10 10 9248 DRDMDR4 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 2 2 1125

DOCTOR26 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 3 3 2620 DRDMDR5 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 2 2 1795

DOCTOR27 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 5 5 4366 DRDMDR6 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 3 3 2330

DOCTOR29 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 4 4 3855 DRDMDR7 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 3 3 2750

DOCTOR31 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 5 5 4132 DRDMDR8 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 3 3 2363

DOCTOR32 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 8 8 7803 DRDMDR9 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 625

DOCTOR33 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 6 6 5423 DRDMDVC PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 738

DOCTOR34 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 15 15 14572 DRDMJOB PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 2 2 1325

DOCTOR35 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 744 DRDMLSS PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 2 2 1856

DOCTOR36 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 920 DRDMLVL PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 805

DOCTOR37 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 2 2 1860 DRDMMF1 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 2 2 1428

DOCTOR38 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 6 6 5263 DRDMMF2 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 2 2 1249

DOCTOR39 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 3 3 2247 DRDMMF3 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 426

DOCTOR40 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 872 DRDMMF4 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 2 2 1244

DOCTOR41 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 3 3 2959 DRDMMF5 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 2 2 1327

DOCTOR42 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 5 5 4516 DRDMMF6 PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 2 2 1205

DOCTOR43 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 9 9 8064 DRDMMSM PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 662

DOCTOR44 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 5 5 4844 DRDMRLP PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 958

DOCTOR45 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 3 3 2104 DRDMTAP PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 2 2 1269

DOCTOR46 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 4 4 3164 DRDMVFC PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 985

DOCTOR47 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 13 13 12378 DRDMVLI PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 779

DOCTOR48 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 13 13 12592 DRDMVLO PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 584

DOCTOR49 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 5 5 4780 DRDMVLR PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 902

DOCTOR50 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 15 15 14695 DRDMVLS PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 676

DOCTOR51 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 8 8 7776 DRDMVPS PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 1 1 452

DOCTOR52 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 4 4 3075 DRDODATE PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 4 4 3656

DOCTOR53 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 9 9 8192 DRDPOOLS PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 11 11 10240

DOCTOR54 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 5 5 4707 DRDPUNVM PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 39 39 38048

DOCTOR55 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 3 3 2160 DRVIS PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 3 3 2600

DOCTOR56 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 2 2 1680 DRZAP PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 11 11 10360

DOCTOR58 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 3 3 2512 DRZAPC PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 3 3 2280

DOCTOR59 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 70 70 68196 DRZAPD PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 4 4 3640

DOCTOR60 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 896 DRZAPM PHASE S 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 4 4 3759

DOCTOR61 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 856 DRZAP1 PHASE S 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 11 11 10331

DOCTOR62 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 9 9 8392 SAVRES PHASE 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 72 72 70224

DOCTOR63 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 17 17 16420 TYPE TOTAL MEMBERS= 161 1313

DOCTOR64 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 9 9 8016 DRDCSD PROC 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 7 7 278

DOCTOR67 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 7 7 6472 DRDFAQMS PROC 01/11/28 11:06 01/11/28 11:06 119 119 3829

DOCTOR68 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 2 2 1156 DRDIESMS PROC 01/11/28 11:05 01/11/28 11:05 105 105 3034

DOCTOR69 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 9 9 8488 TYPE TOTAL MEMBERS= 3 231

DOCTOR70 PHASE 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 2 2 1725 DRDEXAMP Z 01/11/28 11:06 01/11/28 11:06 112 112 2153

Page 526 Sample Reports

USER GUIDE

Dr. D

1V67B DR.D LDIR LIBRARY DIRECTORY LISTING FOR 11/29/2001 PAGE 002

TIME STAMP SELECTOR:NONE BIM.DRD.LIBRARY 10:02 AM

LIBRARY SIZE (BLOCKS) 12500 10761(86.0%) FREE

-----MEMBER----- ---------DATE-TIME----------- --BLOCKS-- -----MEMBER----- ---------DATE-TIME----------- --BLOCKS--

NAME TYPE ...CREATED.... ...CHANGED.... TOTAL CNTG SIZE NAME TYPE ...CREATED.... ...CHANGED.... TOTAL CNTG SIZE

*********************BIM.DRD.LIBRARY.67**************************

HDDRD607 Z 01/11/28 11:04 01/11/28 11:04 1 1 14

TECHNOTE Z 01/11/28 11:06 01/11/28 11:06 16 16 362

TYPE TOTAL MEMBERS= 3 129

SUB-LIBRARY:67 MEMBERS= 175 1701

REPORT TOTAL MEMBERS= 175 1701

1V67B DR.D LDIR LIBRARY DIRECTORY LISTING FOR 11/29/2001 PAGE 003

TIME STAMP SELECTOR:NONE BIM.DRD.LIBRARY 10:02 AM

LIBRARY SIZE (BLOCKS) 12500 10761(86.0%) FREE

SUB MEMBER MEMBER BLOCK LIBRARY

**LIBRARY RECAP** LIBRARY TYPE COUNT COUNT SHARE

67 A 2 4 .0%

67 OBJ 6 24 .1%

67 PHASE 161 1313 10.5%

67 PROC 3 231 1.8%

67 Z 3 129 1.0%

67 *TOTAL* 175 1701 13.6%

LIBRARY TOTAL 175 1701 13.6%

LIBRARY OVERHEAD BLOCKS 38 .3%

1V67B DR.D LDIR LIBRARY DIRECTORY LISTING FOR 11/29/2001 PAGE 004

TIME STAMP SELECTOR:NONE BIM.DRD.LIBRARY 10:02 AM

LIBRARY SIZE (BLOCKS) 12500 10761(86.0%) FREE

MEMBER MEMBER BLOCK LIBRARY

**LIBRARY RECAP** TYPE COUNT COUNT SHARE

A 2 4 .0%

OBJ 6 24 .1%

PHASE 161 1313 10.5%

PROC 3 231 1.8%

Z 3 129 1.0%

LIBRARY TOTAL 175 1701 13.6%

LIBRARY OVERHEAD BLOCKS 38 .3%

LIBRARY EFFICIENCY RATING 100

Page 527

Dr. D

USER GUIDE

Page 528 Sample Reports

Index

! 106, 199, 280, 401

$$$$$$..................................................21, 49, 79

& 106, 199, 280

/ 24, 28, 29

/@ ... 20, 23, 49, 79, 84, 106, 135, 158, 200, 223,

239, 249, 252, 280, 281, 324, 352, 401

@filename@....................................................251

@RENAME@ ....................................29, 32, 318

@REVERSE@ ...................... 23, 30, 31, 185, 297

+ 106, 199, 280, 401

=P......................................... 30, 31, 32, 298, 318

=S 24, 28, 31, 32, 298, 318, 384

=T...............................................30, 32, 298, 318

Abbreviations.................................................21

ABUF.............................................................153

ABUFF...........................................................147

AFILE ............................................147, 148, 153

AIX.... 51, 52, 147, 217, 303, 307, 317, 347, 417,

419, 427, 428, 445

ALIGN ..........................................................249

ALL

Copy ......................................................58, 82

Restore.................................................57, 237

Save .....................................................56, 366

ALLOCS....................................................24, 31

AREA . 61, 82, 83, 112, 206, 207, 237, 238, 246,

247, 249, 250, 287, 288, 290, 291, 322, 324,

406, 408, 416

ASSOCIATIONS....................14, 217, 307, 419

AUTO... 130, 132, 135, 138, 147, 153, 156, 303,

305, 307, 309, 347, 348, 349, 352, 355

Automatic Definition Feature 46, 54, 55, 130–

32, 132, 135, 139, 147, 153, 159, 303, 302–4,

305, 307, 347–48, 349, 352

Automatic Definition Override Feature ..131,

132, 304, 305, 348, 349

BAM ......................................276, 277, 285, 286

BIM-Epic .... 59, 61, 62, 181, 189, 206, 207, 210,

219, 247, 250, 258, 291, 300, 406, 409, 410,

412

Compacting pool space...........................258

BLDINDEX.............................................53, 147

BLOCKSIZE... 12, 36, 46, 53, 97, 104, 124, 143,

153, 160, 163, 204, 239, 241, 250, 253, 262,

266, 278, 282, 290, 294, 308, 313, 315, 324,

328, 337, 341, 353, 359, 361, 367, 377, 386,

399, 408, 419, 431, 438, 447, 452

BUFFERSPACE

.... 131, 136, 143, 153, 163, 304,

308, 315, 348, 353, 361, 452

Build alternate index.............................53, 147

BUILDAIX ..............................................53, 147

CA-Dynam..........................59, 61, 62, 247, 291

CA-Epic 17, 59, 61, 62, 181, 189, 206, 207, 210,

219, 247, 250, 258, 291, 406, 409, 410, 412

Compacting pool space...........................258

CARDCOUNT ...................................49, 50, 79

CASPLIT ...................................................25, 31

CA-System Manager .........59, 61, 62, 247, 291

CBEGIN ................................113, 114, 116, 118

CDATA

............ 131, 136, 154, 304, 308, 348, 353

CFACTOR

...... 131, 136, 154, 290, 301, 304, 308,

348, 353

CHALT..................................113, 114, 116, 118

Change VTOC expiration date...................187

Checking control card count ........................49

Checking control card sequence..................50

CICS.....................................................9, 12, 456

CICS CSD......................................................5, 8

CICS initialization............................................9

CICS transaction ..........................................456 cisize ..............................136, 154, 308, 319, 354

CISIZE .......................................................25, 55

CISPLIT.......................................25, 31, 32, 196

CK84, 90, 97, 114, 124, 368, 377, 387, 408, 431,

439

CLOSTAPE...................................476, 481, 482

CNSIZE

.......... 131, 136, 154, 304, 308, 348, 354 compacting 1, 61, 115, 240, 247, 250, 251, 292,

325, 379

Compacting disk volume or pool..............247

Compacting EPIC pool space.....................258 compression..... 37, 53, 154, 368, 377, 387, 400,

408, 419, 431, 439, 447, 476

Configure System Options .....................12–14

Continuation statements...............................21

Control spacing on reports.................194, 209

Control statements ........................................21

Conversion

Other backup software product JCL utility

................................................................461

SAM to VSAM............................................53

VSAM to SAM............................................53

Copy

Command overview..................................77 disk volume..................................82, 89, 111

Disk volumes........................................58–59

Libraries ..............................................72, 103 non-VSAM data files ...................61, 95, 122

Tape to tape ........................................73, 171

VSAM data files .................................53, 130

Index

Copy data in Addon mode ....................................... 117 in Image mode......................................... 116 in Squeeze mode ..................................... 116 in Update mode ...................................... 116

Copy file in Image mode....................................99, 126 in Squeeze mode ................................99, 126

COPY=ALL...................................44, 58, 77, 82

COPY=CURRENT .............................58, 77, 89

COPY=DATA.....................................61, 77, 95

COPY=LIBRARY .............................72, 77, 103

COPY=NOPERATION ...............22, 37, 77, 79

COPY=PHYSICAL ....................59, 63, 77, 111

COPY=SDISK ...................................61, 77, 122

COPY=VSAM.....................53, 55, 77, 130, 147

CP 13, 37, 53, 154, 368, 377, 384, 387, 400, 408,

419, 431, 439, 447

Create DLBL/EXTENT from VTOC ...62, 216

Create VM minidisk ..............................73, 212

Create VSAM delete/define statements... 54,

216

Creating multiple save tapes....................... 35

CSYSNO................................113, 114, 117, 118

CTAPE.......................................................... 171

CURRENT

Copy ......................................................58, 89

Restore...........................................57, 60, 246

Save......................................................56, 375

CVOLID ................................113, 114, 117, 118

...................131, 137, 155, 304, 309, 348, 354 cylinder aligned .......................................... 249

DA... 2, 60, 61, 95, 101, 254, 259, 262, 294, 331,

333, 385, 386, 392

DATA

Copy ......................................................61, 95

Restore.................................................60, 259

Save............................................................. 59

Data File Restore Feature non-VSAM data files .................60, 259, 334

VSAM ..................................................52, 346

Data File Save Feature

Non-VSAM data files ................59, 385, 437

VSAM ..................................................52, 445 data secured files .........180, 188, 378, 406, 410

Dataset Functions

Build alternate index .........................53, 147

Change VTOC expiration date.........61, 187

Copy non-VSAM..........................61, 95, 122

Copy non-VSAM file................................ 95

Copy VSAM....................................... 53, 130

Delete........................................................ 178

Delete non-VSAM data file...................... 62

Delete VSAM ............................................. 54

Extract data file from save file......... 73, 223

Rebuild format-1 VTOC label ......... 63, 331

Restore non-VSAM ..................... 60–61, 287

Restore Non-VSAM ........................ 259, 334

Restore VSAM ......................52–53, 302, 346

Save non-VSAM...................59–60, 385, 437

Save non-VSAM data files ..................... 406

Save VSAM ...........................51–52, 417, 445

Sort data file from save file.............. 73, 223

Verify/Reset VSAM ......................... 55, 230

Dataset names ................................... 24, 28, 29

DATE

.......131, 137, 155, 290, 304, 309, 348, 354

DD=..................................................... 26, 28, 30

Default options.............................................. 12

DELETE.........137, 155, 262, 290, 297, 337, 354

Delete non-VSAM data files ................ 62, 178

Delete VSAM data files ........................ 54, 178

Delete VSAM data spaces .......................... 178

Device volume copy ..................58, 82, 89, 111

Device Volume Restores .............. 57, 237, 246

Device Volume Saves ................... 56, 366, 375

DFIX........................................................ 61, 187

Disk pools .................................14, 59, 247, 287

Backup and Restore ................................ 406

Disk Reorganization ................................... 288

DM .207, 250, 287, 291, 292, 293, 409, 410, 412

DOCTOR02.......................................... 321, 429

DOCTOR58.................................................... 45

DRD transaction.......................................... 456

DRD$PCT.A................................................. 5, 9

DRD$PPT.A................................................. 5, 9

DRDCNVCU ....................................... 461, 465

DRDEXAMP.Z .............................................. 19

DRDITTO..................................................... 456

DRDPOOLS ............................................. 14, 59

DRZAP ............................................. 12, 15, 456

Display System Options........................... 15

System Configuration......................... 12–14

DTAPE..46, 47, 48, 53, 139, 261, 262, 263, 264,

268, 336, 337, 338, 339, 342, 351, 354, 356,

357, 361, 385, 387, 388, 437, 439, 440, 445,

447, 448

DUS................................................. 80, 458, 459

DUSP .......................80, 458, 459, 460, 461, 462

DYNUTIL....................................... 80, 458, 460

EB .................................................. 287, 288, 291

Page 530 Dr.D

Index

EOF. 56, 58, 91, 95, 97, 101, 122, 124, 128, 137,

155, 377, 383, 385, 387, 409, 419, 437, 439,

444, 447, 468

Erasing a disk volume.................................272

Erasing disk files............................................62

ERROR .................. 208, 291, 309, 409, 420, 447

Examples

ANS Cobol user exit........................469, 474

Build alternate index during copy ..........................................167 during restore.......................................167 during save...................................166, 167 multiple aix during save.....................168 using record selection .........................169 via multiple builds ..............................168 with non-contiguous keys ..................170 call CLOSETAPE subprogram...............482 call GETTAPE subprogram....481, 483, 484 call PASSCARD subprogram.................479 call SETTAPE subprogram.....................477

Change expiration date of existing files190

Checking control card count....................50

Checking control card sequence..............50

Compacting EPIC pool space.................258

Control statement continuations .............21

Conversion from other backup software products458–61, 458–61, 458–61, 458–61,

458–61, 458–61

Convert

FAVER JCL...........................................466

FAVER2 JCL.........................................467

MAXBACK JCL ...........................464, 465

Westinghouse dump/restore JCL.....466

Copy all tracks..................................................88 an existing VSE library .......................109 current tracks/blocks............................94 cylinders physically.............................121

DA file ...................................................101 disk using save and restore..................44 entire VSE library ................................109

Image tape to tape ...............................176

Logical tape to tape .............................175

Logical tape to tape with reblock .....175,

176 multiple extents to single extent 102, 128

SD file ............................................101, 128 selective tracks .......................................88 selectively a VSE library .....................110 single extent to multiple extents........129 single extent to multiple tracks..........102

Specify disk volser.................................36

Tape to tape with data modification .177 tracks physically in addon mode.......120 tracks physically in update mode......121 tracks/blocks physically.....................120

VSAM file..............................................144

VSAM file with overrides...................145

VSAM unique file ................................146 with extent synchronization.......102, 129

Create a VSE library ........................285, 286

Create and copy to a new VSE library..109

Create CMS saved segment......................69

Create data files from save file...............226

Create mini disk.......................................215

Create multi-file save tape........................42

Create multiple save files simulateneously

..................................................................35

Define alternate index and path ............166

Delete all files ...................................................185 expired files ..........................................186 expired VSAM files..............................186 selective files.........................................185 selective VSAM files............................184

VSAM data space.................................185

VSAM files............................................184

DOCTOR58 utility.....................................45

Erasing a Disk ..........................................275

Extend a VSE library ...............................286

Extract data files from save file..............226

FAVER conversion ..................................466

FAVER2 conversion ................................467

Issue operator message.......................43, 81

List all changed members in VSE library.201 all members in VSE library.................201 all objects in a VSAM catalog.............196 all VTOC entries of a disk...................211 contents of save tape ...........................205 files for delete .......................................184 select VTOC entries by size ................211 selected members in VSE library......202,

203 selected objects in a VSAM catalog ...196 selective files for delete ...............184, 185 specific files on a VTOC......................211 system options .......................................15

VSAM catalog.........................................32

VSAM catalog space map...................196

Index

VTOC space map ................................ 211

MAXBACK conversion...................464, 465

Move and resize a mini-disk VTOC..... 215

Move and resize a VTOC....................... 236

Move VTOC on a CKD device .............. 236

Move VTOC on a FBA device ............... 236

Position tape .............................................. 81

Position using the FIND operand......40, 41

Position using the SKIP operand............ 40

Post message to operator ......................... 33

Print VSE library recap report............... 203

Punch DLBL/EXTENT from VTOC.....221,

222

Punch IDCAMS DELETE/DEFINE from catalog .................................................. 221

Rebuild Format-1 label........................... 333

Rename during restore........................31, 32

Rename non-VSAM file during restore 298

Rename SD file during restore.............. 343

Rename VSAM file during restore ....... 318

Reorganize disk....................................... 299

Reorganizing CKD disk ......................... 258 reset VSAM file ....................................... 184

Resize a VTOC ........................................ 236 restart restore after interruption ........... 299

Restore all files in VSAM catalog.................... 317 all non-VSAM files.............................. 297 all tracks ............................................... 244 all tracks and set new volser ............. 244 an existing VSE library....................... 284

CA-System Manager .......................... 301 create and restore a new VSE library 284

Entire Pack With SAVE=CURRENT save file............................................. 256

EPIC catalog controlled files ............. 300 files using SKIP operand.................... 345 files using the FIND operand............ 344 files using the FIND parameter......... 270 files using the SKIP parameter.......... 271 from DUS tape..................................... 459 from DUSP tape ...........................459, 460 from DYNUTIL tape........................... 460 from FAVER tape................................ 460 from FAVER2 tape.............................. 461 from IPLable save file......................... 256 from MAXBACK tape ........................ 460 from multi-file save tape...................... 42 from multipack save file .................... 245 individual file on CKD from

SAVE=CURRENT save file............ 257 individual file on FBA from

SAVE=CURRENT save file............ 257

Individual file using SAVE=LOGICAL save file............................................. 344 invoking user exit ....................... 471, 475 mini disks............................................. 245

Multiple tracks via physical image mode ................................................. 329 non-VSAM files to contiguous area.. 298 partial VSAM catalog ......................... 320 position using the FIND operand. 40, 41 position using the SKIP operand ........ 40 rename non-VSAM files during restore

........................................................... 298 rename VSAM files ............................. 318 reorganize disk.................................... 299

SD and DA files........................... 269, 270

SD files.................................................. 343

SD files with file rename .................... 343 selective tracks/blocks ....................... 244

Single track via physical mode.......... 329 specific file in VSAM catalog............. 318 specific non-VSAM files..................... 297 to different device type via physical image mode ..................................... 330 unique VSAM file ............................... 320

Unique VSAM KSDS .......................... 364

User data file to non-VSAM .............. 271

User Data File to non-VSAM....... 48, 345 user data file to VSAM ....................... 365

User Data File to VSAM....................... 47

VM minidisks using physical mode. 330

VSAM data file .................................... 363

VSAM data file using

AUTO=OVERRIDE ........................ 364

VSAM file eliminating secondary extents............................................... 319

VSAM file using automatic definition overrides........................................... 319

VSE library........................................... 284

VSE library selectively........................ 285

Restore using CMS saved segment... 70, 71

Rewind tape............................................... 43

Sample JCL books ..................................... 19

Save

All from EPIC disk pool..................... 416

All non-VSAM files............................. 415 all tracks/blocks.................................. 372

Page 532 Dr.D

Index

Create multiple save tapes .................454

Entire pack............................................383 entire VSE library ................................405 invoking user exit ................................470 multiple packs to different tapes.......374 multiple packs to same tape...............374

Multiple tracks/blocks via physical save....................................................436 non-VSAM files from selected areas on disk ....................................................416

Non-VSAM files selected by name....415 non-VSAM to User Data File48, 392, 444

Only used extents ................................383 partial a VSE library ............................405

Restrict to specific track addresses....384

SD and DA files....................................392

SD files ..................................................444 selective all tracks/blocks ..................372

Selective objects of VSAM catalog.....428

Selectively by VSAM fileids ...............428

Selectively from disk pool ..................416 setup for standalone restore...............397

Simultaneous creation of 2 tapes.......427

Simultaneous creation of 3 tapes.......427

Single track via physical save ............436

Specific non-VSAM files .....................384

Specify disk volser.................................36

Unexpired non-VSAM files................415 unloading tape .....................................373

VM minidisks...............................373, 436

Vsam catalogs ......................................427

VSAM data file.....................................454

VSAM to User Data File................47, 455

Selective save .............................................31

Selective save or restore......................30, 31

Sort data files from save file...................226

Stack multiple files ....................................42

Standalone restore under VM/CMS 68, 69,

70, 71

Tape compression......................................37

Test tape for errors ..................................229

Unload tape................................................43

User data file ........................................47, 48

User exit - type 1................................470–71

User exit - type 2................................474–75

User exits .................. 469, 470, 471, 474, 475

Using multiple commands.......................41

Verify VSAM files....................................233

VSAM delete data space..................................185 file delete...............................................184 file reset.................................................184 list catalog .............................................196 list catalog space map .........................196 list files for delete.................................184 list selective files for delete.................184 selective file delete...............................184

Westinghouse dump/restore conversion

................................................................466

Exit parameter..............................................473 expiration date ......56, 58, 61, 89, 91, 137, 155,

179, 187, 188, 190, 192, 206, 208, 217, 230,

262, 290, 299, 309, 337, 354, 375, 378, 383,

406, 409, 420

EXPIRED.. 89, 91, 178, 179, 187, 188, 191, 192,

206, 208, 216, 217, 230, 246, 375, 378, 406,

409, 420

Extract data file from save file ...................223

FAQSMSG ........................................................5

FAST13, 137, 139, 144, 155, 164, 315, 362, 378,

409, 420, 425, 426, 448, 453

FAVER.....................80, 458, 460, 461, 462, 466

FAVER2...........................80, 458, 461, 462, 467

FD.... 13, 131, 135, 138, 140, 143, 144, 156, 163,

165, 178, 180, 303, 304, 309, 311, 315, 316,

347, 348, 352, 355, 357, 362

FILESIZE.................................................26, 211

FILETYPE........................................................26

FIND34, 37, 39, 40, 41, 152, 156, 223, 224, 239,

250, 259, 261, 263, 269, 270, 279, 334, 336,

338, 344, 351, 355

FORMAT...... 103, 105, 171, 172, 191, 192, 198,

199, 206, 208, 276, 279, 398, 400

FREESPACE .. 26, 131, 135, 138, 156, 304, 310,

348, 352, 355

FSECURED .. 178, 180, 183, 188, 189, 378, 406,

410

Function Command overview .....................78

Function selector statements........................24

FUNCTION=BUILDAIX ........53, 78, 147, 148

FUNCTION=CTAPE.......................73, 78, 171

FUNCTION=DELETE....24, 25, 26, 54, 62, 78,

82, 89, 178, 237, 246

FUNCTION=DFIX...........................61, 78, 187

FUNCTION=LCAT .......24, 25, 26, 54, 78, 191

FUNCTION=LDIR ..........................72, 78, 198

FUNCTION=LTAPE .............................73, 204

FUNCTION=LVTOC ......................62, 78, 206

FUNCTION=MC .............................73, 78, 212

FUNCTION=PUNCH...............54, 62, 78, 216

Index

FUNCTION=SORT....................46, 73, 78, 223

FUNCTION=TAPETEST ................73, 78, 227

FUNCTION=VERIFY....24, 25, 26, 55, 78, 230

FUNCTION=VTOCMOVE.....63, 78, 212, 234

GENERATION.....................................292, 410

Generic dataset names ......................24, 28, 29

GETREC ....................................................... 472

GETTAPE......................................476, 478, 480

Global operands............................................ 22

GR . 14, 84, 91, 97, 105, 115, 124, 138, 156, 172,

180, 188, 193, 199, 204, 208, 213, 217, 224,

228, 231, 234, 240, 250, 263, 273, 279, 292,

310, 325, 331, 338, 356, 368, 378, 387, 393,

400, 410, 420, 431, 439, 448

GSIDMNS0 .................................................. 468

HIGHKEY .....138, 139, 157, 310, 311, 356, 357

Hold VTOC....85, 115, 240, 251, 292, 325, 368,

379, 410, 431

HV.......82, 85, 89, 115, 240, 247, 251, 258, 292,

325, 368, 379, 410, 431

ICCF.................................................................. 9

ICCF transaction ......................................... 457

IDCAMS.......130, 139, 157, 216, 221, 303, 310,

347, 356

Auto Definition overrides...............132, 135

BLDINDEX .........................................53, 147

Delete/Define.........................2, 54, 217, 319

Listcat ..................................................54, 191 override parameters ............................... 348

Punch delete/define from catalog........ 221

Verify...................................................55, 230

IDRC37, 154, 368, 377, 387, 400, 408, 419, 431,

439, 447

IESMSGS .......................................................... 5

ILBDMNS0................................................... 468

Image Tape Copy Feature.......................... 171

Initialize VM minidisk ............................... 212

INSEQUENCE......................................139, 448

Installation ....................................................... 4

MVT

................................................................ 7

Sample Jobstreams.................................... 19

System Configuration .........................12–14

VSE.............................................................5–6

ISAM......1, 2, 60, 61, 95, 96, 259, 260, 385, 472

JCL

Create DLBL/EXTENT from VTOC .... 216

Restore Requirements .............................. 20

Sample books............................................. 19

Save Requirements ................................... 19

UPSI ............................................................ 34

LABEL ....65, 157, 172, 237, 240, 246, 251, 263,

279, 292, 310, 325, 338, 356, 369, 379, 388,

393, 394, 400, 410, 421, 432, 440, 448

LBLOCKSIZE.46, 173, 259, 261, 263, 334, 336,

338, 351, 354, 356, 361

LCAT ...................................................... 54, 191

LDIR........................................................ 72, 198

LIBRARY.......105, 276, 277, 278, 280, 281, 284

Copy.................................................... 72, 103

Restore................................................ 72, 276

Save............................................................. 72

Library Functions

Copy.................................................... 72, 103

Create library........................................... 276

Extend library.......................................... 276

List directory...................................... 72, 198

Restore................................................ 72, 276

Save..................................................... 72, 398

Library space considerations..................... 277

List library directory............................. 72, 198

List save file ........................................... 73, 204

List VSAM catalog ................................ 54, 191

List VTOC .............................................. 62, 206

Listcat report................................................ 197

Lock VTOC ..240, 251, 292, 325, 368, 379, 410,

431

Logical File Restore Feature non-VSAM data files ........................ 60, 287

VSAM ................................................. 52, 302

Logical File Save Feature

Non-VSAM ........................................ 59, 406

VSAM ................................................. 51, 417

Logical Tape Copy Feature........................ 171

Logical Volume Restore Feature......... 58, 287

Logical Volume Save Feature.............. 56, 406

LOWKEY...............139, 157, 310, 311, 356, 357

LRECSIZE ..46, 48, 97, 122, 125, 173, 259, 261,

263, 334, 336, 338, 351, 354, 357, 388, 440

LST 14, 85, 91, 98, 106, 115, 125, 139, 158, 173,

181, 188, 193, 199, 205, 209, 213, 218, 224,

228, 231, 235, 240, 251, 264, 273, 280, 292,

311, 325, 331, 339, 357, 369, 379, 388, 394,

401, 410, 421, 432, 440, 448

LTAPE .........................................39, 73, 78, 204

LVTOC ................................................... 62, 206

MAXBACK .....................80, 458, 460, 461, 462

MAXBACK JCL conversion....................... 464

MC........................................................... 73, 212

MEMBER.......103, 106, 199, 276, 280, 398, 401

Message to Operator..................................... 33

Page 534 Dr.D

Index

Messages.......................................................485

Migrating to different device types.......54, 63

Minidisk create function:............................212

MODIFY................................................171, 173

Move VTOC: ..........................................63, 234

MRECORDS ......... 140, 158, 311, 357, 421, 449

MSHP ......................................................4, 5, 12

Multi-file tapes...............................................41

Multiple commands ......................................41

Multiple save tapes .......................................35

MVT

Installation

...........................................7

NAME .............................................29, 304, 311

NO REWIND .................................................43

Non-VSAM data files

Change VTOC expiration date ........61, 187

Copy ..............................................61, 95, 122

Delete ..................................................62, 178

Examples.............................................268–71

Copy ................................100–102, 127–29

Restore.............................296–301, 343–45

Save............................ 392, 414–16, 443–44 file selection/rejection ..............................23

Rebuild format-1 VTOC label ..........63, 331 rename.........................................................29

Restoring....................... 60–61, 259, 287, 334

Saving....................................59–60, 385, 437 selection/rejection by filesize ..................26 selection/rejection by name.........24, 26, 28

NRECDS .. 46, 48, 173, 259, 261, 264, 334, 336,

339, 351, 354, 357, 388, 440

OPERATOR..... 33, 43, 79, 85, 92, 98, 106, 115,

125, 140, 158, 174, 181, 189, 193, 200, 205,

209, 213, 218, 225, 228, 231, 235, 240, 251,

264, 273, 281, 293, 311, 325, 332, 339, 358,

369, 379, 388, 394, 401, 411, 421, 432, 440,

449

P.DRDCSD........................................................9

PARTIAL ..... 23, 24, 25, 28, 148, 150, 158, 178,

180, 181, 187, 189, 191, 193, 199, 206, 207,

208, 209, 216, 217, 218, 230, 231, 246, 248,

251, 252, 257, 287, 291, 293, 309, 312, 314,

375, 379, 406, 408, 409, 411, 419, 420, 421,

422, 433, 447

PASSCARD ..................................476, 478, 480

PATH 51, 52, 217, 307, 317, 417, 419, 427, 428,

445

PHYSICAL

Copy ....................................................59, 111

Restore.................................................58, 321

Save......................................................57, 429

PID.........................................287, 291, 293, 301

Pools

DrD ..............................................................59

Dynam.........................................................59

Epic ..............................................................59

System Manager ........................................59

Positioning save file ................................39, 43

PRINT..... 12, 34, 85, 92, 98, 103, 105, 107, 115,

125, 140, 158, 174, 205, 213, 225, 241, 252,

264, 273, 276, 279, 281, 293, 303, 312, 326,

332, 339, 358, 369, 379, 389, 394, 398, 400,

401, 411, 421, 432, 441, 449

PUNCH.........................................................216

Punch DLBL/EXTENT from VTOC ...........62

Punch VSAM delete/define statements ....54,

216

PUTLABEL .............................................64, 331

PUTREC........................................................472

R0 62, 99, 126, 253, 265, 272, 340, 380, 389,

411, 441

RBEGIN 111, 112, 113, 116, 117, 118, 212, 214,

235, 272, 273, 321, 322, 323, 326

RCAT.... 130, 133, 140, 141, 302, 312, 313, 346,

351, 358, 359, 363

Reject library members ...............................106 rename.... 23, 181, 189, 193, 218, 231, 293, 311,

312

Rename......................................................31, 32

Rename statements........................................29

Reorganize disk............................................288

Reorganize disk volume or pool................247

Reorganize EPIC pool space ......................258 reorganizing ...................................61, 250, 294

Reports

List contents of save file....................73, 204

List library directory .........................72, 198

List VSAM catalog.....................54, 191, 197

List VTOC ...........................................62, 206

Tape integrity .....................................73, 227

Resize VTOC ..........................................63, 234

Restore

Command overview..................................76 disk pools....................................................59

Disk pools .................................................287

Disk volumes........57–58, 237, 246, 287, 321

Format-1 label ....................................63, 331

JCL Requirements......................................20

Libraries ..............................................72, 276

Non-VSAM data files ..60–61, 259, 287, 334

Index selective.................................................30, 31 selector statements.................................... 28

VSAM catalogs...................................51, 302

VSAM data files ...................................... 346

VSAM data files ...........................52–53, 302

Restore mode..........................................95, 122

RESTORE=ALL..................56, 57, 76, 237, 366

RESTORE=CURRENT .56, 57, 60, 61, 76, 246,

375, 382

RESTORE=DATA .....46, 56, 59, 60, 61, 76, 80,

259, 270, 385, 406, 437, 458

RESTORE=ERASE ...........................62, 76, 272

RESTORE=LIBRARY.......................72, 76, 276

RESTORE=LOGICAL

Volume 29, 30, 56, 58, 59, 60, 61, 63, 76, 247

VSAM ............29, 30, 51, 52, 55, 76, 302, 417

RESTORE=NOPERATION...22, 37, 43, 76, 79

RESTORE=PHYSICAL57, 58, 63, 76, 321, 429

RESTORE=PUTLABEL .........................64, 331

RESTORE=SDISK .....46, 56, 59, 60, 61, 76, 80,

334, 385, 406, 437, 458

RESTORE=VSAM.46, 51, 52, 55, 77, 147, 346,

417, 458 return code.85, 92, 99, 107, 117, 126, 141, 159,

174, 181, 189, 193, 200, 209, 214, 218, 225,

228, 232, 235, 241, 252, 265, 274, 281, 293,

312, 327, 332, 340, 359, 369, 380, 389, 394,

402, 411, 422, 432, 441, 449, 485

Rewind ........................................................... 43

REWIND ...................................................41, 43

RFILENAME .....34, 95, 98, 103, 107, 122, 125,

130, 133, 140, 141, 147, 152, 159, 223, 225,

246, 248, 252, 253, 259, 264, 269, 276, 277,

278, 281, 332, 334, 339, 343, 346, 351, 358

RHALT

...111, 112, 113, 116, 118, 120, 121, 212,

214, 235, 272, 274, 321, 322, 323, 326

RIDENT.130, 133, 140, 141, 346, 351, 358, 363

RMODE......95, 96, 99, 101, 111, 112, 114, 116,

118, 122, 126, 128, 259, 260, 265, 321, 322,

326, 334, 340

RP.. 14, 85, 92, 99, 107, 117, 126, 141, 159, 174,

181, 189, 193, 200, 209, 214, 218, 225, 228,

232, 235, 241, 252, 265, 274, 281, 293, 312,

327, 332, 340, 359, 369, 380, 389, 394, 402,

411, 422, 432, 441, 449, 485

RSYSNO .....13, 82, 83, 86, 89, 90, 92, 111, 113,

117, 237, 238, 241, 245, 246, 248, 252, 272,

274, 321, 323, 327

RVOLID ...82, 83, 86, 89, 90, 92, 111, 113, 117,

131, 132, 141, 159, 178, 179, 181, 187, 189,

214, 236, 237, 238, 241, 246, 248, 252, 253,

272, 274, 290, 294, 304, 305, 312, 321, 323,

327, 348, 349, 359

RWORD.................................141, 159, 313, 359

Sample JCL..................................................... 19

Sample Reports ........................................... 523

Save

Command overview................................. 74 disk pools ................................................... 59

Disk volume..........56–57, 366, 375, 406, 429

JCL Requirements ..................................... 19

Libraries ..................................................... 72 library ....................................................... 398

Non-VSAM .......................................... 59–60 non-VSAM data files .............................. 406

Non-VSAM data files ..................... 385, 437 selective ................................................ 30, 31 selector statements.................................... 24 standalone program................................ 393 volume logical ......................................... 406

VSAM catalogs .......................................... 51

VSAM data files .......51–52, 51, 52, 417, 445

SAVE=ALL 36, 39, 56, 57, 65, 67, 74, 237, 244,

245, 366, 393

SAVE=CURRENT.....24, 39, 56, 57, 60, 65, 67,

74, 246, 256, 257, 258, 375, 393, 397

SAVE=DATA..39, 46, 59, 60, 74, 259, 334, 385

SAVE=IPL ...................65, 68, 74, 237, 246, 393

SAVE=LIBRARY............................. 72, 74, 398

SAVE=LOGICAL

Volume26, 39, 56, 58, 59, 60, 61, 63, 74, 259,

406

VSAM ........24, 25, 26, 39, 51, 52, 55, 74, 346

SAVE=NOPERATION ..........22, 37, 43, 74, 79

SAVE=PHYSICAL ....39, 57, 58, 63, 65, 67, 74,

393, 429

SAVE=SDISK..39, 46, 59, 60, 74, 259, 334, 437

SAVE=VSAM .......39, 46, 52, 74, 346, 406, 445

SBEGIN .................113, 116, 117, 429, 430, 432

SCAT.....178, 179, 182, 191, 194, 216, 217, 218,

232, 302, 312, 313, 417, 422

SD 2, 60, 61, 95, 97, 99, 101, 122, 124, 126, 128,

259, 265, 294, 331, 334, 340, 345, 383, 385,

388, 392, 406, 437, 438, 440, 444

SDISK

Copy.................................................... 61, 122

Restore................................................ 60, 334

Save............................................................. 59 security ....................................62, 111, 321, 429

Select library members............................... 106

Page 536 Dr.D

Index

Selector statements ........................................21

AREA operand..... 83, 84, 238, 239, 249, 324

Buildaix record selector ..........................147

BUILDAIX relcord selector ......................53

MEMBER operand.. 103, 106, 199, 276, 280,

398, 401

PARTIAL operand...... 23–32, 181, 189, 193,

209, 218, 231, 251, 293, 312, 379, 411, 421

SEQNO50, 86, 92, 100, 107, 118, 127, 141, 241,

253, 266, 274, 281, 294, 313, 327, 340, 359,

369, 380, 389, 395, 402, 412, 422, 433, 441,

449

SETTAPE ..............................................476, 480

Setting Default Options ................................12

Setting UPSI Bits............................................34

SFILENAME.. 95, 100, 103, 107, 122, 127, 130,

142, 147, 152, 159, 200, 385, 389, 398, 402,

437, 441, 445, 450

SHALT ..... 82, 86, 113, 116, 118, 120, 121, 237,

366, 370, 429, 430, 433

SIDENT.................................246, 248, 252, 253

SKIP...... 37, 39, 40, 41, 160, 241, 253, 259, 266,

269, 271, 282, 294, 313, 328, 334, 341, 345,

359

SOPTION

....... 131, 142, 160, 304, 313, 348, 359

SORT .......................................................73, 223

Sort Function for save files...................73, 223

SPACE...................................................194, 209

SPLIT.............................................................294

SSYSNO 13, 82, 83, 86, 87, 89, 90, 93, 113, 118,

366, 367, 370, 373, 375, 376, 380, 429, 430,

433

Stack multiple files ........................................41 standalone ... 1, 56, 57, 204, 237, 246, 393, 397,

458

Standalone restore.......................................393

Standalone Restore..................................65–71

Standalone restore under VM/CMS.....68–71

SUBALLOCATED .... 51, 52, 53, 130, 230, 417,

445

Subprograms

GETTAPE .................................................476

SVOLID...... 82, 83, 86, 87, 89, 90, 93, 113, 118,

178, 182, 191, 194, 206, 207, 210, 216, 217,

219, 230, 232, 287, 294, 298, 313, 366, 367,

370, 375, 376, 380, 406, 408, 409, 412, 414,

422, 429, 430, 433

SWORD.................................142, 160, 422, 450

SYNC....... 96, 100, 123, 127, 260, 266, 335, 341

System options...............................................12

System Options

Changing...............................................12–14

Display ........................................................15

T3 13, 19, 162, 371, 382, 391, 396, 404, 413,

424, 434, 443, 451

TAPE ...... 12, 41, 43, 44, 80, 161, 242, 253, 256,

266, 269, 270, 282, 295, 314, 328, 341, 344,

360, 370, 381, 390, 395, 402, 412, 423, 433,

442, 450, 458

Tape compression..........................................37

Tape Copy Feature ........................................73

Tape Functions

List contents of save file....................73, 204

Tape to tape copy...............................73, 171

Test tape for errors ..................................227

Test test feature..................................73, 227

Tape positioning ......................................39, 43

TAPES ...................................................227, 228

TAPETEST ..............................................73, 227

TDDNAME...... 12, 13, 19, 20, 35, 46, 161, 242,

254, 266, 282, 295, 314, 328, 341, 360, 370,

381, 390, 395, 402, 412, 423, 434, 442, 450

TI 12, 20, 161, 242, 254, 267, 282, 295, 314,

328, 341, 360

TO13, 19, 84, 161, 239, 245, 249, 324, 330, 371,

374, 381, 390, 396, 403, 413, 423, 434, 442,

451

TSTAMP....... 103, 108, 178, 182, 191, 194, 200,

216, 219, 230, 232, 276, 282, 398, 403, 423

TT...... 13, 19, 162, 371, 381, 390, 396, 404, 413,

424, 434, 442, 451

Tuning VSAM Files .......................................55

Unattended Backup.......................................45

UNIQUE .... 51, 52, 53, 130, 150, 162, 170, 230,

417, 445 unlabeled ..... 157, 172, 240, 251, 263, 279, 292,

310, 325, 338, 356, 369, 379, 388, 393, 394,

400, 410, 421, 432, 440, 448

Unlabeled tape .............................................237

Unload.............................................................43

UNLOAD........................................................43

UPSI 12, 14, 34, 35, 82, 87, 89, 93, 95, 100, 108,

119, 122, 127, 142, 161, 162, 174, 214, 223,

225, 229, 237, 242, 246, 254, 267, 274, 283,

295, 314, 322, 328, 332, 342, 360, 371, 381,

382, 385, 390, 391, 395, 396, 403, 404, 412,

413, 423, 424, 434, 437, 442, 443, 450, 451,

468

UPSI bit settings.............................................34

Index

User Data File 36, 46, 52, 59, 60, 259, 262, 263,

264, 268, 271, 334, 337, 338, 339, 342, 345,

346, 354, 356, 357, 365, 385, 387, 437, 439,

440, 445, 447, 455

Examples

Create from non-VSAM ..................... 444

Create from VSAM file....................... 455

Restore non-VSAM............................. 345

Restore to non-VSAM........................... 48

Restore to VSAM................................... 47

Save non-VSAM to User Data File........... 48

Save non-VSAM.................................. 392

Save VSAM ............................................ 47

User Data Files ............................................ 261

User exit

Type 1 Examples................................470–71

Type 2 Examples................................474–75

User exits...................................................... 468

USEREXIT....267, 295, 314, 342, 360, 391, 413,

425, 443, 451, 469, 471, 472, 473

Utilities

DOCTOR58................................................ 45

DRZAP ....................................................... 12

VARIABLE.......13, 46, 134, 142, 152, 162, 259,

261, 262, 268, 334, 336, 337, 342, 351, 356,

361, 446, 451

VBUFF ...........142, 147, 163, 315, 361, 425, 452

VCOMPRESS

...131, 143, 163, 304, 315, 348, 361

VERIFY....................................................55, 230

VM .... 1, 65, 66, 67, 87, 119, 242, 328, 371, 435,

436

Create minidisk..................................73, 212

Directory .................................................. 212

Examples

Create mini disk.................................. 215 restore minidisk .................................. 245 minidisk .2, 56, 57, 58, 59, 73, 82, 84, 87, 90,

97, 112, 114, 119, 124, 215, 237, 242, 245,

322, 328, 368, 371, 377, 387, 408, 431, 435,

439

Standalone restore ...............................68–71

VOLOUT......82, 87, 89, 93, 212, 214, 237, 242,

244, 246, 254, 256

VOLSELECT.206, 210, 220, 288, 296, 406, 414

VOLSER ....................................................... 229

Volume Functions

Compacting/Reorganizing ................... 247

Compacting/Reorganizing disk............. 61

Copy ......................................................58–59

Copy individual file.................... 61, 95, 122

Copying.................................................... 237

Copying disk volume ................. 82, 89, 111

Create CM minidisk ................................. 73

Create DLBL/EXTENT statements from

VTOC.............................................. 62, 216

Create VM minidisk ............................... 212

Delete individual files ............................ 178

Erasing a disk .......................................... 272

List VTOC .......................................... 62, 206

Move/Resize VTOC ......................... 63, 234

Restore...................57–58, 237, 246, 287, 321

Restore individual file .................... 259, 334

Restoring .................................................. 237

Save........................56–57, 366, 375, 406, 429

Save individual non-VSAM file 59–60, 385,

437

Save standalone program ...................... 393

Saving ....................................................... 237

VRTYPE................................................ 163, 362

VSAM ...1, 60, 80, 168, 178, 183, 189, 220, 233,

254, 351, 375, 382, 414, 458, 470, 473

Saving data files .................................. 417

AIX Record Selection.............................. 148

Automatic Definition Feature .... 46, 54, 55,

130–32, 132, 135, 139, 147, 153, 159, 303,

302–4, 305, 347–48, 349, 352

Automatic Definition Override Feature

........................131, 132, 304, 305, 348, 349

Automatice Definition Feature.............. 307

BUFFERSPACE ............................... 304, 348

Build AIX complex record selection..... 149

Build AIX logical operators ................... 149

Build alternate index ........................ 53, 147

Build Alternate Index Feature............... 147

Catalog space and gap map report....... 197

Cisize ........................................ 131, 304, 348

Compressed ............................. 131, 304, 348

Convert to SAM ........................................ 53

Copy data files................................... 53, 130

Create delete/define statements..... 54, 216

Create IDCAMS delete/define.............. 216 data allocation classes ....131, 136, 154, 304,

308, 348, 353 data files ....................................................... 2 data space......................................... 383, 406 data spaces ............................................... 185

Delete data files ....................................... 178 delete data spaces ................................... 178

Delete objects............................................. 54

Page 538 Dr.D

Index

Device independence......................305, 349

Examples

Build alternate index.. 166, 167, 168, 169,

170

Copy data files ...............................144–46 delete data space..................................185 delete expired files...............................186 file deletion...........................................184 file reset.................................................184 list catalog.............................................196 list catalog space map .........................196 list files for deletion.............................184 list selected files for deletion..............184

Rename files during restore ...............318

Restore all files .....................................317

Restore catalog ...............................316–20

Restore data file .....................362–65, 363

Restore data file using

AUTO=OVERRIDE .........................364

Restore data files............................316–20

Restore eliminating secondary extents

............................................................319

Restore file with user exit ...........471, 475

Restore partial catalog ........................320

Restore specific file..............................318

Restore unique file...............................320

Restore unique KSDS ..........................364

Restore unique VSAM KSDS .............364

Restore using automatic definition overrides ...........................................319

Restore VSAM from user data file ....365 save catalog ..........................................427

Save data files.................................453–55

Save file with user exit ........................470

Save selective objects...........................428 selective save by fileid ........................428

Verify.....................................................233

Extralargedataset.... 131, 144, 165, 304, 316,

348, 362 file selection/rejection ..............................23

FREESPACE .....................................304, 348 libraries .....................................................276

List catalog..........................................54, 191

Listcat ..........................................................32

Listcat report ............................................197

Migrating Files and Catalogs...................54

Punch IDCAMS delete/define ..............221 rename.........................................................29 reorganization............................................45

Restore from User Data File.....................47

Restoring catalogs..............................51, 302

Restoring data files ..............52–53, 302, 346

Save selectively ..........................................31

Save to User Data File ...............................47

Saving catalogs...........................................51

Saving data files...............51–52, 51, 52, 445 selection/rejection by CA splits ..............25 selection/rejection by CI splits ................25 selection/rejection by cisize .....................25 selection/rejection by filesize ..................24 selection/rejection by freespace ..............26 selection/rejection by name .........24, 26, 28 selection/rejection by type.......................26

Shareoption...............................131, 304, 348

Space allocation........................131, 304, 348

Tuning Features .........................................55

Verify...........................................................55

VSAM Functions

Build alternate index .........................53, 147

Copy data files ...................................53, 130

Create IDCAMS delete/define from catalog .............................................54, 216

Delete.........................................................178

Delete data file ...........................................54

List catalog..........................................54, 191

Reset data file .............................................54

Restore catalog ...................................51, 302

Restore data files..........................52–53, 302

Restore VSAM data files.........................346

Save catalog ................................................51

Save data file ........................51–52, 417, 445

Verify data file....................................55, 230

VSE Installation............................................5–6

VSTYPE.................................143, 164, 425, 452

VTOC expiration date modify ...................187

VTOC hold..............................................85, 115

VTOCMOVE ..........................................63, 234

VUSE ...............................13, 143, 164, 426, 453

WAIT.... 164, 243, 255, 268, 283, 296, 316, 329,

343, 362, 372, 382, 391, 396, 404, 414, 426,

435, 443, 453

Westinghouse Dump/Restore JCL conversion................................................466

WORK ...........................................................165

WR .........................................165, 183, 316, 362

WS..................................165, 195, 220, 426, 453

................... 131, 144, 165, 304, 316, 348, 362

XS 296

Reklama

User Guide

Version 6 Release 8C

Dr. D is a fast and flexible disk utility system. It provides the fastest backup and restore functions currently available. Dr. D is especially useful and fast for a wide range of SAVE, RESTORE, and COPY functions.

Copyright © 2006 by Connectivity Systems,

Inc.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Introduction

Overview

Installation and Configuration

Installing Under VSE Releases

Installing Under MVT Systems

Adding Dr. D On-Line to CICS

Adding Dr. D On-Line to the VSE Interactive Interface

DRZAP Configuration Utility

Dr. D Disk Pooling Feature

Using Dr. D

Operating Environment

Job Control Language (JCL) Requirements

Control Statement Format

Logical Selection/Rejection/Rename Process

Posting a Message to the Operator

Setting UPSI Bits

Creating Multiple Save Tapes Simultaneously

Specifying Disk Volume Serial Numbers

Tape and Processing Blocksize

Tape Compression

Tape Positioning

Unattended Backup

User Data File Feature

Verifying Accurate Control Card Submission

Working with VSAM Catalogs and Files

Saving VSAM Catalogs

Restoring VSAM Catalogs

Saving Individual VSAM Files

Restoring Individual VSAM Files

Copying VSAM Files

Building Alternate Indexes

Converting VSAM-TO-SAM or SAM-TO-VSAM

Creating IDCAMS Delete/Define Statements

Deleting/Resetting a VSAM Data File

Listing the Contents of a VSAM Catalog

Migrating Files and Catalogs to Different Device Types

Tuning VSAM Files

Verifying a VSAM Data File

Working with Disk Volumes, Disk Pools and Non-VSAM Files

Saving Disk Volumes

Restoring Disk Volumes

Copying Disk Volumes

Saving and Restoring Disk Pools

Saving Individual Non-VSAM Files

Restoring Individual Non-VSAM Files

Copying Non-VSAM Files

Changing VTOC Expiration Dates

Compacting/Reorganizing Disks

Creating DLBL/EXTENT Labels

Deleting Files from a Disk Pack

Erasing Portions of a Disk

Listing the Contents of a Volume Table of Contents (VTOC)

Migrating to Different Device Types

Moving/Resizing a Volume Table of Contents (VTOC)

Rebuilding a Format-1 VTOC Label

Stand-alone Processing

Preparing for Standalone Restore

Standalone RESTORE- Native or VM

Standalone Restore under VM/CMS

Standalone RESTORE under VM Using a CMS Saved Segment

Working with VSE Libraries

Saving VSE Libraries

Restoring VSE Libraries

Copying VSE Libraries

Listing the VSE Library

Miscellaneous Functions

Creating VM Minidisks from VSE

Extract Data Files From Save File

List Contents of a Save File